in tfje €itv of JSeio §orfe^c>k>v/?
^cijool of Bcntal anli 0tal ^urgerp
i^efetente l^itirarp
General Editor. — John D. Comkik
M.A.. H.SC. M.l).. K.R.C.P.K,
RADIOGRAPHY, X-RAY THERAPEUTICS
AND RADIUM THERAPY
Volumes already published in this Series
TEXT-BOOK OF MIDWIFERY. For Students and
Practitioners. By R. W. Johnstone, M.A., F.RC.S.,
M.R.C.P.E. Crown 8vo, cloth, with 246 Ilkistrations
(3 coloured). Price $3.25
DISEASES AND INJURIES OF THE EYE. A
T^xt-book for Students and Practitioners. By Wm.
George Sym, M.D., F.R.C.S.E. Containing 25 full-page
Illustrations, 16 of them in colour, and 88 figures in the
text; also a type test card at end of volume. Small crown
. 8vo, cloth. Price $2.50
PRACTICAL PATHOLOGY INCLUDING MOR-
BID ANATOMY & POST-MORTEM TECHNIQUE. By
James Miller, M.D., F.R.C P.E. Crown 8vo. cloth,
with 112 Illustrations, the Frontispiece being in colour.
Price $2.50
MEDICAL APPLIED ANATOMY. For Students
and Practitioners. By T. B. Johnston, M.B. Crown 8vo,
cloth, containing 146 Illustrations in the Text and 3 full-
page Illustrations in colour. Price $2.50
TUBERCULOSIS OF THE BONES AND JOINTS
IN CHILDREN. By John Eraser, M.D., F.R.C. S.
(Edin.), Ch.M. Royal 8vo, cloth, containing 51 full-page
Plates, 2 of them in colour, and 164 other Illustrations in
the Text. Price $4.50
The Macmillan Company New York
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2010 with funding from
Open Knowledge Commons
http://www.archive.org/details/radiographyxrayOOknox
1. Hahd Condition. . ,r r, r,
4. \ KHY Soft Condition.
Note absence of blue gas iu region of anode, ,^^^ j.^.,^^ ,^i,^^ ^j^,^^ ^^^ ^ ^^^^^^^ ^j^^^ .^
also sharply-cut upper limit of green hemisphere. ^^^ p,eceding figure, and the cathode stream is
The condition indicates absence oi reverse more evident
current.
5. Reverse Current in Circuit.
2. Normal Condition. The appearance of the tube is changed entirely.
The hemisphere has lost its sharply-cut appear-
Note faint bine cloud in region of anode. ance and is irregular. The faint blue cloud, due
Reverse current is practically absent. to gas in the region of the anode, has also
changed, and the upper hemisphere of the tube is
occupied by irregular rings.
o c. rt 6. Polarity Reversed.
3. Soft Condition.
T-,.',, ij, • J J- The cathode has become the anode and vice
saxnt blue cloud has increased and is novi^ xt t ti, j. c iii, i i r^-u
, . , , „, I • 1 • J.-1, versa. Note the stream of gas at the back of the
very noticeable. The green hemisphere is still , , i iu -u • -u* ,. ^ ^^ -j.
, •^ , . V . J- ,• i. JL 1 i tube and the bright spot on glass wall opposite
sharply cut, but a distinct cathode stream , i-. ,■ j.-u i i xt -u /
'^ •' , , ' ,, . , -, 1 4.- i.1 1 to the anti-cathode : also the absence of gi'een
appears between the catliode and anti-cathode. i, • -u
^^ hemisphere.
Appearances of X-Ray Tube in Action.
(Reproduced from coloured drawings kindly lent by Mr. C. Andrews.)
RADIOGRAPHY
X RAY THERAPEUTICS
AXD
RADIUM THERAPY
BY
ROBERT KNOX
M.D. (Edin.), M.R.C.S. (Eng.), L.R.C.P. (Lond.)
HON. RADIOGRAPHER, KINg's COLLEGE HOSPITAL, LONDON
DIRECTOR, ELECTRICAL AND RADIOTHERAPEUTIC DEPARTMENT, CANCER HOSPITAL, LONDON
HON. RADIOGRAPHER, GREAT NORTHERN CENTRAL HOSPITAL, LONDON
CAPTAIN R.A.M.C. (t.) 4
t
Fig. 15. — Dreadnought interrupter showing detail.
A, Container.
B, Jet.
C, Contact teeth.
E, Screw.
F, Shaft bearing.
H, Oil cups.
K, Motor brushes.
open for a few moments in order to expel the air. This tap is then
closed and the other connected to the gas supply left open, and advantage
taken of the pressure from the mains. If there is no handy gas supply a
gas bag may be used or ether vapour. The latter may be employed by
vaporising a small quantity of methylated ether placed on the top of the
mercury and starting the interrupter with a small current before closing
the taps.
20
EADIOGEAPHY
Fig. 16. — Instanta interrupter.
In the Instanta interrupter and others there is an arrangement of four
jets so that eight makes and breaks are obtained per revolution, and it is also
so arranged that the circuit is broken in
two different places at the same moment.
This has the ef!ect of greatly increasing
the suddenness of the interruption.
Sanax Interrupter. — The Sanax
interrupter consists of a small steel pear-
shaped bowl mounted direct to the axle
of an electric-motor and situated perpen-
dicularly above the motor. Thus, when
the axle of the motor rotates, the pear-
shaped bowl is rotated also. Inside the
bowl a very small quantity of mercury
(only 10 oz. weight) is placed, and, by
centrifugal force, travels up the side of
the bowl until it finds the extreme peri-
phery, where a distinct groove or bed is
made to receive it. Thus it will be seen
we have a revolving bowl and in it a
revolving ring of mercury. Inside the
interrupter bowl and carried on a vertical
spindle is a fibre disc with two copper
segments. This disc is mounted, free to revolve, on ball-bearings top and
bottom, and is horizontal in position. It is not placed in the centre of the
bowl, but over to one side, so that when the bowl rotates its edge engages
with the rotating ring of mercury and is, therefore, of
course, revolved by it. The current is led to the metal
bowl and to the mercury ring by means of an ordinary
terminal, and the current is led also to the segment in
the disc by means of the spindle carrying same. Thus,
each time one of the copper segments enters into the
mercury ring the current is allowed to pass, and each
time the segment leaves the mercury ring and the fibre
of the disc enters the ring, there is an interruption period.
By the unique construction of working two circles
together — the mercury ring and the fibre segmented
disc — a splitting up of the mercury, such as would occur
by plunging into the mercury any other form of con-
tact, is completely avoided.
As already mentioned, the free revolving fibre disc
with two copper segments is placed not in the centre of the bowl, but
eccentrically, and can be inserted more or less into the mercury ring from
the outside, even if the motor is running. This arrangement makes it
possible to put the disc so that it just touches the mercury ring, in which
case the duration of contact is very short. The further the disc is put into
F:g. 17.
Sanax interrupter.
INTERRUPTERS—CAUSES OF DEFECTIVE WORKING 21
the mercury ring the further the segment travels in the mercury, and
therefore the duration of contact can be extended as desired. Moreover,
the number of interruptions is regulated by the speed of the motor by
a special volt regulator mounted on the switchboard, so that not only is
the duration of contact independent of the number of interruptions, but both
are also independent of the primary current.
The Di-electric used in the Sanax interrupter is paraffin. Alcohol,
gas, and other di-electrics have been tried, but paraffin has given the best
results.
Before the introduction of the Sanax interrupter the mercury inter-
rupters using paraffin as a di-electric, in spite of their numerous advantages,
had the great disadvantage of emulsifying the mercury. The cause of this
is not the burning of the same by the opening spark but the mechanical
breaking up and churning of it with the di-electric. After working the
mercury interrupter for a short time it was imperative to remove the dirty
mercury and to clean it — a very disagreeable and troublesome proceeding.
The ingenious principle of the Sanax interrupter — the working together
of the two circles in unison and the continuous centrifugal rotation — delays
the emulsification of mercury. In consequence of its greater specific weight
the mercury is always driven to the farthest outside point and disintegrates
by itself all the fighter substances, therefore remaining for a longer or shorter
time, according to the amount of usage, clean at the point of interruption.
The Number of Interncptions can be increased up to about 12,000
per minute. By means of a turning switch on the switchboard the motor
can be run fast or slow, and further, by means of a resistance, it is possible
to run the motor at any desired speed, thus obtaining any number of
interruptions.
Causes of Defective Working. — A few short hints on the causes of defective
working may be of assistance to workers. If when switching on the motor it
does not start up, the speed regulator should be at once cut out, and then the
motor having started, it can be brought back to the position of usual working.
There also may be an interruption or short circuit in the main cable leading
to the switchboard or table, or the cables leading to the motor of the inter-
rupter may have become loosened, or the brushes and their screws may have
become loose, all of which faults would be indicated by the motor refusing
to start. If the commutator starts to spark after running some fcime it will
be found that this is generally due to oil and carbon dust, and this must be
removed by cleaning the commutator with fine emery cloth, and also cleaning
the carbon brushes. If when the coil is now switched on we observe no
fight in the X-ray tube, this may be due to the fuse having been burnt
through or become loosened. Great care must be taken to see that all
bearing contacts are clean, that all cables are perfect, and that all terminals
are absolutely secure.
Should the tube give an unsteady fluorescence this may be due to some
extent to the vacuum of the tube, and can be controlled somewhat by adjust-
ing the interrupter. If the tube flickers with a contact of a certain size.
22
RADIOGEAPHY
the tube may be steadied by increasing this contact. This flickering may
be also due to the motor of the interrupter running slowly. Another reason
for this efiect in the tube may be the piercing of the condenser, and this
can be detected by testing the spark length of the coil. If one cannot
obtain the full spark length and the primary current is above the normal,
then the condenser should be carefully examined. Finally the copper
contacts of all interrupters need replacing from time to time, as they become
burnt through from long usage, this leading to bad and intermittent working.
Improved Mackenzie Davidson Interrupter. — This is a useful
form of mercury interrupter when an outfit of moderate capacity is all that
is required, and when accumulators are used as the source of supply.
It consists of a metal pot containing a supply of mercury into which
a contact set at an angle dips. This contact is mounted on the end of the
Fig. 18. — Improved Mackenzie Davidson interrupter. (Scliall
shaft of a motor whose speed can be varied in order to vary the number
of interruptions. This interrupter requires rather more mercury than most
of the other types.
Electrolytic Interrupter. — This type was introduced by Professor
Wehnelt. The principle of construction is simple. A platinum wire and a
large lead electrode are immersed in diluted sulphuric acid in the proportion
of acid 1 oz. to 5 oz. of water.
This interrupter is without doubt a good one, far exceeding the best
mercury interrupters, not only in regard to output and capacity for regula-
tion, but also in simplicity of construction and use, as well as in safety of
working. Wehnelt interrupters can be used wherever continuous current
is supplied direct, i.e. from supply mains, accumulators (at least about
65 volts), or a motor generator, or where single-phase or three-phase current
is converted into continuous current by means of rotary converters or
ELECTROLYTIC INTERRUPTERS
23
electrolytic valves. As all metals, with the exception of platinum, when
used for the active electrode, even if the polarity is correct, are rapidly con-
^.^S^S
Fig. 19. — Single-poiut electrolytic
interrupter. (Siemens.)
a, Glass vessel.
b, Porcelain diaphragm.
c, Adjustable ebonite collar.
d, Terminal. e. Lead electrode.
Fig. 20. — Three-point electrolytic interrupter.
(Siemens. )
Fig. 21. — Single-point electro-
lytic interrupter. (Watson.)
The upper part of the inter-
rupter has attached to it a
solenoid which is couuected
electrically to the switch-table,
allowing of the control of the
depth of point in the fluid.
Fig. 22. — Trolley control table, with resistances
arranged to facilitate time and rapid exposures.
(Siemens.)
sumed, platinum is always used with these interrupters as the active electrode,
because it disintegrates very slowly and therefore gives the best results.
24
RADIOGEAPHY
These interrupters are manufactured with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 6 separate electrodes,
i.e. they are used as single, double, triple, quadruple, or sextuple interrupters.
When employing a multiple interrupter one is not obliged to regulate at the
interrupter itself, and can therefore set it up outside the X-ray room, so
that its noise causes no disturbance.
Fig. 23. — Larger view of top of trolley control table to show the regulating parts. (Siemens.)
The advantages of the Wehnelt interrupter are summarised briefly as
follows :
(1) SimpUcity of construction.
(2) Convenient handling of the X-ray outfit. The Wehnelt interrupter
requires no attention.
(3) Largestlcapacity, as it interrupts very rapidly the largest amount
of energy and therefore the most intense X-rays are obtained.
(4) Long life to the tubes even when used with heavy currents.
(5) In comparison with all mechanical interrupters, great reliability.
METHOD OF ACTION OF AN ELECTROLYTIC INTERRUPTER 25
This is due to its simplicity of "construction and method of working, the
absence of moving parts, and the consequent simplicity of connections
of the whole outfit.
In the case of X-ray outfits for rapid exposures three or more electrodes
are arranged in parallel by means of a switch, and the electrodes are so
adjusted that equal parts of them interrupt the total current.
In conjunction with a time-relay switch these interrupters can be used
to obtain exposures of from -j\y to 6 seconds in connection with an automatic
cut-out switch. Such a device is illustrated opposite. With the most power-
ful induction coil outfit, such as the single-impulse apparatus constructed
for use with the electrolytic interrupter, a time-relay should always be
included, along with a triple electrolytic break, for then we have a large
range of exposures at our command.
Method of Action of an Electrolytic Interpupter. — AVhen a
current of at least 50 volts and 5 amperes is passing through the interrupter
in such a manner that the platinum is the anode, the density of the current
is so great near the small anode that it becomes very hot and steam is
formed. In addition, electrolysis causes hydrogen and oxygen to appear,
and these gases form an insulating mantle round the anode which inter-
rupts the current. If there is a sufficient amount of self-induction m
the circuit, a spark appears at the breaking point, namely the anode,
ignites the gases, and the explosion gives the acid access to the platinum,
thus closing the current again. This process takes place with extraordinary
rapidity and regularity.
The intensity of the discharges and the frequency of the interruptions
can be varied in the widest limits by varying the electro-motive force used
in the primary circuit, the surface of the platinum anode, and the amount
of self-induction.
The disadvantage of the electrolytic interrupter is the great care that
has to be exercised in its use. Unless a considerable latitude is allowed for,
the X-ray tube is more likely to be damaged, the anti-cathode being quickly
pierced if too powerful currents are used for long periods. When, however,
the electrolytic interrupter is provided with three or more points and a suit-
able switch on the general or main switchboard, all degrees of exposure can
be successfully used. Even for therapeutic work this interrupter when
properly used is undoubtedly one of the best forms of interrupter.
With a time-relay switch most powerful currents may be used if only
for a fraction of a second.
Carelessness in leaving the thicker points in the circuit and then using
it for prolonged screening will almost invariably ruin a tube.
A single-point electrolytic interrupter can be controlled from a distant
point by means of a solenoid. In this way it is possible to vary the depth
of the platinum point in the acid solution and so vary the intensity of the
current passing through the interrupter. This is a most useful addition
to the electrolytic interrupter.
Interrupters for Alternating" Currents. — These are numerous.
26
RADIOGRAPHY
meclianical and chemical, and enable us to use the alternating current
without rectification.
Good though some of these are, none is so efl&cient as an interrupter
on a continuous current circuit, and the maximum intensity which can be
reached even with the best alternating current interrupter is much less
than that obtainable with a continuous current.
When the alternating supply has a higher periodicity than sixty it is
better to rectify the current by installing a motor transformer.
With a periodicity of less than sixty the best interrupter to use is that
made by Gaifie of Paris. This interrupter and a Gaiffe Rochefort transformer
or coil may be used for therapeutic work by utilising less of the break, but
Fig. 24. — Gaiflfe interrupter.
V, Vessel.
e, e, Screws.
I^, I^ N, Terminals.
M, Vulcanite cap.
B, Impulse.
P, Handle.
R, Inlet tap.
R\ Outlet tap.
C, Cone.
b, b, Orifices.
d, d, Di, D2, Teeth,
when required for radiography the intense current is used. This is done
by a mechanical contrivance which throws all the teeth in the interrupter
into action. Quite rapid exposures may be obtained with this apparatus
especially if intensifying screens are used.
The mercury jet is caused, as in some of the previous interrupters, by the
rotation of a cone with its lower end in mercury, and by centrifugal force
the mercury is jetted out against the stationary contacts. The motor part
difiers from the continuous current interrupter. The break is started
with a smart twist of the milled head on top and the needle of the milli-
ammeter watched until this is steady, this indicating that the interrupter
is in synchronism with the supply. Some operators can judge of this by
sound. At first there is a grating sound, and this becomes smooth when
synchronism is attained.
ESSENTIALS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF X-RAYS 27
The essentials for the production of X-rays are : (a) A supply of electric
energy ; (6) a means of transforming a current of low tension into one of
high tension ; (c) an interrupter ; (d) an X-ray bulb.
The apparatus employed may vary from the simplest to the most
highly complicated. Its selection and arrangement will depend upon the
operator and the resources at his command. Complicated and expensive
apparatus is not absolutely essential to ensure the production of good nega-
tives. The most important point of all is for the operator to make the most
of the apparatus at his disposal. When he grasps the underlying principles
of the necessary apparatus, and particularly of the technique of radiography,
he may venture to add to his outfit those items which are extremely useful
but not absolutely necessary. A thorough understanding of the mechanical
parts of the installation is of great value to the radiographer, but is not
absolutely necessary, because it is generally possible to obtain help in the
manipulation of the apparatus. But a thorough knowledge of the X-ray
tube is of the utmost importance, because it is always the ruling factor in
radiography and therapeutics. In order to produce the best quaUty of X-
rays for a specific purpose in either radiography or therapeutics it is necessary
to have accessory apparatus which enables the operator not only to control
the X-ray tube but to reproduce at will conditions which are known to lead
to the production of good results.
The accessory apparatus is therefore a most important part of the
equipment, and must be considered in detail. In the whole organisation of
an X-ray outfit the most important point is to have a good X-ray tube under
perfect control, then work becomes easy and good results follow.
In view of the importance of this subject the following pages are devoted
to a fairly full account of the manufacture of an X-ray tube and the apparatus
necessary to enable the operator to exercise an efhcient control over it.
X-RAY TUBES AND THEIR ACCESSORIES
The Focus Tube
This being always the ruling factor in radiographic work, a complete
knowledge of its construction and method of working is a sine qua non in
the routine work. Should it not be in proper order the best type of apparatus
is quite useless as a producer of good radiographs.
1'he quality of the focus tube is all important for success in X-ray work,
Anticathode Terminal.
Anticathode supporting tube.
Junction of anticathode
support and bulb.
Anode Terminal.
Anode
Exhaust Point.
Glass Mantle.
Dark Hemisphere.
Anticathode.
Target
Regulator Tube.
Active Hemisphere-
Cathode Stream.
Cathode.
Cathode stem.
Regulating Arm.
Cathode Terminal.
Fig. 25. — Diagram of an X-ray tube with parts named, showing the paths of the cathode stream
from the cathode impinging on the anti-cathode ; the active hemisphere shows the paths of
most of the X-rays generated. (Watson).
as if the tube is unsuitable in that it is too hard or too soft, it is impossible
to get good results.
If, on the other hand, the tube is in good order good results may be
obtained with quite ordinary apparatus.
Tubes deteriorate with use, but, carefully handled, they will outlast
hundreds of exposures, and show very little sign of damage.
The all-essential point is to know how to use the focus tube, and it is
28
DESCRIPTION OF MANUFACTURE OF THE X-RAY TUBE 29
also a great advantage to familiarise one's self with the names of the various
parts.
Description of the Manufacture of an X-Ray Tube. — The first
process consists of the blowing of a glass sphere of the desired capacity
with a " neck," which varies from one to two inches diameter, according to
the size and type of the tube. The thickness of the walls of the bulb is
from '2 to "6 mm.
The various metal parts, or electrodes, having been carefully cleaned,
are introduced through this neck, and are in turn sealed into position by the
glass-blower. Connections are made to the outside by fusing into the glass
pieces of platinum wire, and as each portion of the tube is finished, it is
annealed with extraordinary care. This annealing is one of the most im-
portant processes, as an X-ray tube has to withstand the most intense heat.
Fig. 26. — Radiator tube constructed for heavy discharges. (Cossar. )
to say nothing of the rough usage which it may encounter if it is destined
for a hospital career.
The electrodes having been placed in position, and the regulators, etc.,
attached, a length of glass tubing is fused on, and the tube is placed on the
vacuum pump. The final stages of exhaustion are sometimes very pro-
longed, varying according to the size of the tube and the nature of the
electrodes employed.
A large tube may occupy a considerable time in actual exhaustion.
During the process various conditions have to be observed, and it is during
pumping that the rmavoidable risks of tube-making are greatest, as with
the increase of pressure from without, any stress, flaw, or other fault may
result in the sudden collapse of the tube.
When exhaustion is complete, the tube is taken from the pump, sealed,
tested, and, if found to be in order, is finished oi! with the necessary
terminals.
The Anti-cathode. — The most important part of an X-ray tube is
the anti-cathode, since it is here that the heat is generated, and most dis-
30 KADIOGEAPHY
turbances take place. It is this part of the tube which is exposed to the
intense force of the cathode stream.
The power of resistance to this stream, and the physical effect thereof,
possessed by the anti-cathode of the tube is the determining factor in the
life of the X-ray tube, and the degree of current it will stand determines
largely the amount of work it is capable of performing.
Naturally the anti- cathode
varies with each tube, and these
are now made for special pur-
poses.
A careful study of the
various types of anti -cathode
in use will be necessary before
the operator can thoroughly
understand the best conditions
under which the tube will work.
The anti-cathodes of some tubes
may become incandescent when
the tube is running at full cur-
rent, and a careful watch is
necessary when using tubes in
/ this way.
/ The cheaper tubes are made
/ with light anti -cathodes. The
/ next class of anti-cathode is that
/ known as the " heavy anode,"
consisting usually of a copper
tube or sleeve of varying thick-
FiG. 27.— Cyclops radiator tube. (C.Andrews.) ness and leng-fch, and carrying
The heat generated at the anti-cathode is absorbed and q^j^ j-^g extremity a platinum-
radiated along a solid copper rod which is arranged ,11, • -i . -i . i
to lacilitatereadyremoval from the tube. When the COated plate Similar tO that USed
copper is heated it may be removed and a second [^ ^Jj^g light auodc tubc. In this
one introduced. By changing these during an ex- '
posure, the tube can be kept comparatively cool for Case, hOWever, these VariOUS
long periods, the vacimm of the t^ibe being thereby jj^etals are Welded together iuto
maintained at a constant degree of hardness. . ^ .
one contmuous whole, wnicn is
supported on a glass sleeve projecting from the wall of the tube. Natur-
ally this mass of metal has much greater absorption and conductive
capacity than the Hght anode, and will in consequence stand a much greater
degree of heating, i.e. a higher current. There is also a proportionately
large reserve of gas in these armatures, and, unless grossly over-run, such
tubes do not become red-hot, and are therefore much more constant in
vacuum.
As the weight of metal in the anti-cathode is increased, so (other condi-
tions being equal) the capacity of the tube to withstand a high current is
increased also. Occasionally, the metal sleeve of the anti-cathode is greatly
extended, and is carried directly to the exterior of the tube, terminating
/
WATER-COOLED TUBE
sometimes in a radiating device in order to discharge the heat as expeditiously
as possible.
As the difficulties which arise in heavy currents for X-ray work are
almost wholly concerned with such heating, several other methods have been
adopted in order to deal with it in an efficient manner. One is the system
on which the Cyclops tube is worked. The other is that employed in water-
cooled models. These are described at some length in the following pages.
Water-cooled Tubes.— The general use of X-ray tubes cooled by
means of water was, for all prac-
tical purposes, commenced by the
continental radiographers.
The original Miiller water-
cooled tube is designed mainly
on the lines suggested by Professor
Walter. It is arranged in the
following manner : In place of
the usual heavy metal anti -
cathode, a solid platinum vessel
is provided, and on to the bottom
surface of this is fixed a metal
plate which is in turn faced with
platinum. The upper or open
end of the vessel is sealed on to
a glass sieve, which is in turn
attached to the wall of the tube,
and which is expanded, outside
the tube, into a reservoir or water
chamber approximately 3 inches
diameter. When water is filled
in, it passes down the glass sleeve
to the platinum vessel, and is thus
brought into actual contact with
the back of the target. This
latter feature is an essential in the
construction of a water-cooled tube. Workers are strongly advised not to
purchase so-called water-cooled tubes when the water does not reach right
down to the back of the target, as such instruments simply omit the vital
principle which renders the water-cooled tube so highly efficient.
When the heat is generated by the impact on the target it is immediately
imparted to the water, and the temperature of the target can therefore only
momentarily exceed that of boiling water — 100° C.
Apart from the efficiency of the cooling system, the construction of
water-cooled tubes renders them more satisfactory in other respects. In
the first place it is possible to make the anti-cathode almost entirely of
platinum, which means that there is practically no metal in the tube likely
to give rise to violent changes of vacuum. The water-cooled tubes remain
Fig. 28.
-Water-cooled tube arranged for overhead
work. (C.Andrews.)
32 EADIOGEAPHY
therefore at approximately the same degree of hardness for very long periods.
The great advantage in this respect cannot be over-estimated, and will
appeal both to those who are doing continuous radiographic work, and to
those running tubes for long periods for therapeutic purposes. The latter
point is of extreme importance for deep therapeutics.
The employment of water as a cooling medium is free from all objection,
even from that of extra trouble in manipulation ; for if tubes, when not
actually running, are stored in one of the excellent vertical holders now on
the market, it is not necessary even to empty the water bulb after use, and
the only extra attention entailed is the occasional replacing of the water
which may be lost by evaporation.
The principal feature of water-cooled tubes is that they may be kept
in continual use for hours, without any danger of over-heating and consequent
X./
Fig. 29. — Water-cooled tube for overhead or under the couch work, showing mica
and carbon regulator. (C. Andrews.)
softening. Further, they will withstand a much larger current than the
ordinary tube will take, and in fact the heavier models will for a short time
stand up against the maximum amount of current which can be forced
through them.
Selection. — In selecting a water-cooled tube, regard must be paid to the
class of work which is intended to be done. It must be considered whether
the tube is to be used with light or heavy currents, and whether it is to be
used only above the couch (either horizontally or vertically), or whether it
is desired that it may be used in the horizontal position from below the
couch.
The tubes for use below the couch are made with the anti-cathode set
in the long axis, and are furnished with a curved revolving tube, by means
of which the water is prevented from flowing out. The tubes for use in
positions other than below the couch have the anti-cathode set at an angle
of 45° to the long axis.
Tubes for use with heavier currents are made on an exactly similar
THE USE OF WATER-COOLED TUBES 33
system to the lighter models, but differ in that the armatures are strengthened
in order to permit of the heavier loads being carried. The most important
modification is in the anti-cathode, which is made in the following way :
The platinum-faced target is set on a massive block of specially alloyed
copper, which is in turn attached to a solid platinum vessel similar to that
used for the lighter models. By the interposition of this buffer of alloy
the capacity of the tube is enormously increased, and at the same time the
amount of extra metal thus introduced is not sufficient to rob the tube of
its excellent qualities of constancy and steady working. In fact the whole
proportioning and " balance " of these tubes has been worked out with a nice
exactness which has been amply justified by the result.
The Use of Water-cooled Tubes. — It must be remembered that this type
of tube is designed and constructed to work with a water-jacket, and it
must on no account be used without the receptacle having been filled to
within about half an inch of the top. In the case of the pattern for use above
and below the patient, the opening of the curved tube should be just above
the surface of the water, when the instrument is placed horizontally, thus
allowing an outlet for steam. If the tube should be inadvertently worked
without water, it must be allowed to cool completely down (say, for at
least an hour) before water is filled in. If this precaution is not observed,
a breakage will in all probability occur.
As stated above, it is not necessary to remove the water after using,
and, therefore, there should be little danger of the tube being worked without
the cooling medium.
Ordinary tap water should be employed, not distilled nor filtered.
Should the tube have been running continuously so that the water is boiling,
it is permissible to renew the supply, and this may be done without disturbing
the tube, by means of a syphon. By placing a vessel containing water
at a lower level than the tube and starting the flow by suction, the water
may be run out until only about 3 inches of the water-tube remain filled.
The container is then raised to a level above the tube, and water allowed
to flow in. If no syphon is obtainable, an alternative method is the following :
Pour the boiling water out of the tube into a jug, and add cold water in
sufficient quantity to render the whole just distinctly warm to the touch.
Then refill the water-chamber with the slightly-warmed water. Obviously,
if the boiling water were removed, and cold water filled in, the glass might
possibly fracture ; but by adopting the above method the supply may be
safely renewed. The tube may then be run as before.
In cases where the tubes are used in a horizontal position, care should
be taken to raise the water-chamber slightly above the level of the anti-
cathode itself, so as to keep the water against the target. This prevents
the water flowing away from the anti-cathode, as it might do if the tube
were absolutely horizontal, and also allows of the escape of bubbles, etc.
The curved tube in the cap may be revolved according to the position of the
X-ray tube, so as to permit of the aperture being always uppermost.
If desired, the water can be circulated through the tube by means of the
3
34 EADIOGEAPHY
syphon mentioned above. This is very efficacious, but necessary only when
very lengthy runs are being undertaken.
There is another type of tube made by several makers which is very
efficient and convenient for treatment. This tube has a diameter of about
5 inches (125 mm.). As will be seen from Fig. 215, p. 295, an auxiliary bulb
(having a diameter of about 6| inches) is connected to the tube, thus
forming a reserve air-chamber. This construction results in the tube
possessing all the advantages inseparable from one having a large cubic
capacity ; while the fact of the anti-cathode being only 2| inches from
the wall of the tube enables the original Sabouraud distance to be adopted.
Air-cooled Tube. — -The tube employed is specially constructed,
an air pump being employed to supply a forced draught which is sent
Fig. 30. — Dessneur tabe with atomiser for cooling the anti-cathode. (Siemens.)
This tube is specially exhausted for deep therapeutic work.
into the cathode and anti-cathode of the tube. By means of the small
electric motor operating the force-pump, air at the temperature of the room
is used at considerable pressure. The special modifications of the tube
required are as follows : In place of the ordinary cathode there is employed
a very massive hollow armature, with the same diameter as the anti-cathode ;
into both cathode and anti-cathode are fitted inlet tubes, which bring the
cold air into direct contact with the whole inner surface of the armature,
and the heated air is expelled through a number of peripheral apertures.
The connection between the X-ray tube and the air pump is made by means
of strong uidia-rubber tubes. The cathode is cooled as efficiently as the
anti-cathode, this being a very important point. In a tube of this type,
currents of at least 5 to 7 milliamperes may be passed continuously without
any ill ejSects.
There has been introduced a further elaboration of this type of tube,
i.e. a tube working as described above but fitted in addition with an atomiser
connected to a vessel containing water. Instead, therefore, of air being
THE GUNDELACH TUBE 35
pumped on the back of the anti-cathode the water is continuously sprayed
on the latter and thus cools the electrodes.
Fig. 31. — Heavy anode tube (Gundelach). Osmosis regulator. (Siemens.)
Gundelach Tube. — The tube figured above is the ordinary Gundelach
tube with Osmosis regulator. There has just been introduced a new tube
by Gundelach which appears to possess some special advantages for deep
therapeutic work. It is not of the usual outward form but cone-shaped,
with the anti-cathode near the point of the cone and the terminals and
regulator at the base, so that the tube can be brought very near to the part
to be irradiated, and at the same time the high-tension terminals are some
distance away. Further, the tube is made to be used in a specially thick
lead-glass shield with a celluloid window, and on the outside of the window
is an arrangement for attaching aluminium filters of various thicknesses.
The tube is arranged for air-cooling by means of a forced air-pump, and
two feeding tubes from the pump are arranged so that one is connected to
the pipe leading to the back of the anti-cathode, and the other to the inside
of the protective lead-glass shield in order to keep the outside of the tube
cool. The pump connections are worthy of notice, the particular feature
being that the air is fed from the pump to a water-cooling chamber,
which is essential for successful cooling, otherwise it will be found that the
air, after the pump has been running for some time, becomes warm, but after
passing through the cooler it is reduced to the temperature of the room, and
will remain at this temperature for hours without changing the water.
With such a tube and air-pump combination it is possible to work for con-
siderable periods with large milliamperages.
Coolidg'e Tube. — At the time of writing this book an announcement
comes from America of a tube which has been invented by D. D. Coolidge,
which appears to be of such novel construction as to make it the greatest
advance that has taken place since the discovery of X-rays.
The tube is devised to be entirely free of gas and has a vacuum 1000
times greater than the ordinary tube, so that it is impossible to pass a current
through it in the ordinary way even with the most powerful apparatus.
The anti-cathode is constructed of tungsten, and the cathode, instead of
36
RADIOGKAPHY
being an aluminium cup-shaped electrode, consists of a spiral of tungsten
wire surrounded by a sleeve of molybdenum to focus the cathode stream.
Connected to the cathode spiral is an auxiliary source of current consisting
of a small accumulator battery with an ammeter in circuit (it is important
that the battery is well insulated from earth), which heats the metal, causing
it to give of? a stream of negatively- charged electrons which are projected
on to the anti-cathode.
The number of freed electrons from the anti-cathode is regulated by
the degree of heating of the tungsten spiral, and the speed of the cathode
Fig. 32. — Coolidge X-ray tube. (British Thomson Houston. )
stream, upon which depends the penetrating power of the X-rays, is regulated
by increasing or diminishing the potential at the terminals of the tube.
It is claimed, therefore, that this tube will give us accuracy of adjust-
ment, stability of hardness, possibility of exact duplication of results, un-
limited life, great range of flexibility, absence of inverse radiation, and
extremely large output. The chief feature seems to be that one can at will
Fig. 33. — Diagram of Coolidge tube.
have any degree of hardness, and any quantity of rays, and these two factors
constant for indefinite periods, and can also repeat the same conditions at
any time. The most remarkable and valuable advantage is that indicated
by its immense output for deep therapeutic work, and also for instantaneous
radiography. There is one note of warning, and that is that this tube
gives Httle or no visible sign of fluorescence, so that extra precautions must
be taken ; otherwise, owing to its much greater output, a serious burn
can be produced, the margin of safety being practically nil, whereas one
cannot run the ordinary form of tube continuously with a heavy current.
Connections. — The accompanying illustration shows the tube properly
connected to the storage battery and the terminals from the coils. It must
always be home in mind that the entire battery circuit is brought to the full
THE COOLIDGE TUBE
37
potential of the tube, and that it', therefore, has to he as thoroughly insulated both
from the patient and the ground as has the tube itself.
The full circuit is shown in Fig. 35, in which S is the parallel spark
gap, M the milhammeter, B the
storage battery, E the rheostat
for controlling the current in
the filament circuit, and A an
ammeter for measuring this
current. (A is not shown in
the illustration. It is a con-
venience and not a necessity.)
As the diagram shows, the
resistance is all in, and hence
the filament temperature is
lowest when the rheostat handle
is pushed as far as possible away
from the operator.
If the polarity of the
machine is wrong, it will be
shown by the fact that the
milliammeter will register no
current, regardless of how high
the filament temperature
may be.
Fig. 34.— Complete Coolidge X-ii,
(B.T.H.)
;piin-ia ill |jo.^ition.
The Battery.~A convenient size is a 5 or 6 cell (10 or 12 volt) 40 am-
pere-hour battery, and it will be found much more satisfactory if arrange-
ments are made so that the battery can be connected either every night
or else whenever not in
use during the day, to
the charging circuit. In
some cases it will be
found convenient to
have the battery stand
on the floor, while in
others it may advan-
tageously be placed
higher up on a shelf.
In the latter case it will
be necessary to re-locate
the rheostat on the back
of the stand, so that the
. handle will point in the
right direction. Both the rheostat handle and the cord attached to the
pull switch (m the battery circuit) should be brought through the lead
screen which protects the operator, and to a point within easy and con-
vement reach.
Fig. 35.— Diagram of connections for Coolidge tube.
38 EADIOGRAPHY
Method of Operating. — The technique of various operators and the
sources of excitation vary so much that it is difficult to make very detailed
suggestions. The following general considerations, however, may be of
value.
The higher the filament temperature, the greater the discharge current.
The higher the voltage backed up by the tube, the higher the
penetration.
A simple method for starting radiographic work with the tube is as
follows :
Take a case, for example, where the operator has been setting his
rheostat on the 10th button, and adjusting his tube to where it then draws
30 milhamperes. In this case, all that is necessary, with the Coohdge tube,
is to set the rheostat on the 10th button, light up the filament in the tube,
having the handle pushed as far away as possible, close the main switch, and
pull on the rheostat handle until the tube is drawing 30 milliamperes. The
main switch is then opened, and the operator is ready to make liis exposure.
In other cases, the radiographer will be accustomed to adjust the tube
by means of the milliammeter and the parallel spark-gap. This procedure
can be applied equally well to the Coolidge tube, and will naturally be the
one first used in all cases where the operator is not familiar with his machine.
KnoAving that he wants, for example, 20 milliamperes and a 5-inch parallel-
gap, he will start with the battery rheostat handle pushed well away from
him, and with his main rheostat set on a low button. He will then pull
on the battery rheostat handle, and run up to higher buttons on the main
rheostat, until the tube is drawing 20 milliamperes and backing up the
5-inch gap.
The tube may be safely run with the target at white heat. If excessively
high energy inputs are employed, the tungsten at the focal spot melts and
volatihses. This results in a sudden lowering of the tube resistance and in
blackening of the bulb. The instabihty in resistance disappears instantly
upon lowering the energy input, and no harm has been done to the tube,
that is, unless it is to be used for the production of the most penetrating rays
which it is capable of emitting. In this case, a heavy metal deposit on the
bulb is undesirable, as it interferes with smooth running at such high voltages.
The tube should not be run with voltages higher than that corresponding
to a 10-inch spark-gap between points (that is, it should not be made to
back up more than a 10-inch parallel-gap).
For long-continued running in an enclosed space and with heavy energy
inputs, it will be necessary to provide some means of coohng the glass, as by
a small fan or blower. The glass can, however, safely be allowed to get very
hot. It is all right so long as it does not soften and draw in.
In running the tube on a coil, a valve tube should be used when heavy
energy inputs are to be employed. So long, however, as the temperature of
the focal spot is not made to approximate that of the cathode, the tube will
satisfactorily rectify its own current.
There are tubes made in America which differ from the types usually
THE PRODUCTION OF X-RAYS 39
made on the Continent and in England, in that they are exhausted by a
special process, and as no mercury is employed in the pumping it is impossible
for mercury vapours to find their way into the tube ; this enables the tube
to be exhausted " hard " in the first instance. The tube is hard from the
beginning, and does not therefore require to be carefully worked up for
radiographic or therapeutic work. It may be used at once for deep work.
The tube may require to be regulated if it is too hard. These new tubes
are fitted with a special form of cathode, which prevents the concentration
of heat at the neck of the cathode. They are consequently not so Kable to
break down when overloaded.
The evolution of this type of tube in America is no doubt due to the
fact that workers there are using more powerful apparatus for X-ray work,
and have had to produce a tube which will stand up to the heavy currents
generated by such apparatus.
The Production of X-Rays. — When a current of electricity from an
induction coil is passed through an X-ray tube, a beam of cathode rays
from the concave cathode is focussed on the target or anti-cathode, the
surface of which is inclined at an angle of 45° to the rays. The anti-cathode
islusually made of a metal of high atomic weight, such as platinum, tungsten,
etc. The anode and cathode are usually of aluminium ; from the point of
contact of the cathode stream on the anti -cathode, X-rays are given out in
all directions. X-rays are invisible, and do not make glass fluorescent. The
pale-green hemisphere of fluorescence on the bulb is due to reflected cathode
rays from the anti-cathode striking the glass of the tube. This may be
clearly shown by the action of a magnet on the boundary of the fluorescence.
X-rays are not deflected by the proximity of a magnetic field. The pressure
of the gas in an X-ray tube becomes lower with use, and a device for softening
the tube {i.e. raising the pressure of the gas in the bulb) is therefore usually
provided. The higher the pressure the less is the potential required to
work the tube, and the less the penetration of the rays. The X-rays produced
and the condition of the tube are termed " soft " if the pressure of gas in the
bulb is high. The lower the pressure the harder are the rays. The cathode
of the tube is made of aluminium, and is fixed just within the neck of a side
tube to the bulb ; it is concave. As the exhaustion of the tube proceeds, the
focus of the rays recedes farther and farther from the cathode, and may
reach a distance of something like four or five times the radius of curvature
of the cathode.
The relative positions of cathode and anti-cathode is a matter of experi-
ence with the maker. The anti-cathode is usually mounted a Uttle out of
focus to avoid its early destruction by fusion, the result of the extreme heat
generated at the focus point. When sharp radiographic work has to be done
the focus must be exceedingly sharp. Some makers turn out tubes with a
very sharp focus, and excellent radiographs are obtained with such tubes.
The drawback to the tubes is the comparatively short time they last.
The Anti-cathode of the X-ray Tube. — The requirements of an anti-
cathode intended for modern radiographic work are :
40
KADIOGEAPHY
(1) A high atomic weight to secure a large quantity of rays.
(2) A high melting point to permit sharp focussing.
(3) A high thermal conductivity.
Appearance of the X-Ray Tube in Action. — ^^^^hen the X-ray tube
is connected properly one-half of the tube between the cathode and anti-
FiG. 36. — Connections of the X-ray tnbe to the FiG. 37. — Connections of the X-ray tube to the
coil, showing the route travelled by the coil, showing the apj^earance when the poles
spark when the point is the positive pole are reversed.
and the negative the plate.
cathode looks as if it were evenly filled with green light, the other half
of the tube behind the anti-cathode remaining dark, because the anti-cathode
acts as a screen.
If wrongly connected there is an irregularly patchy fluorescence of the
^^ walls of the tube, and rays appear
at intervals which change con-
siderably according to the amount
of current passing through the
tubes.
For the appearance of the
X-ray tube when correctly and
incorrectly in operation, see the
coloured frontispiece.
The important thing to re-
member is first of all to ascertain
the polarity of the coil. This is
done by testing with the spark-
gap.
Selection and Regulation
of X-Ray Tubes. — Little need be
said on this point. As nearly all
the tubes on the market are now
good, the particular type selected
depends to a large extent upon the operator. When possible a number
of good tubes should be kept in constant use. A tube which is in
good condition and has a sharp focus should be reserved for radio-
graphic work ; for therapeutics a tube with a diffused focus is better than
a sharp one because it will last longer. This requires to be taken with
reserve. Some workers prefer to use a sharp focus for therapeutic work.
It may be that the sharp focus of the cathode stream upon the anti-cathode
may generate a beam of X-rays of particularly good therapeutic value.
Unless for special purposes it is always better to purchase tubes of a
medium vacuum, inclining towards the soft side. A tube of large diameter.
Fig. 38. — Connection of X-ray tube to the coil,
showing coil and connections to tube. A
valve tube is inserted on the negative j)ole.
SELECTION AND KEGULATION OF X-RAY TUBES 41
7 or 8 inches, will continue to keep good vacuum longer than a smaller tube.
For heavy currents, either in radiographic or therapeutic work, the larger
tube will in the end be found most economical.
The chief advantage of having several tubes in use is that the very soft
tube may be used for short exposures and gradually worked up for thicker
parts. Then with about half a dozen tubes all parts oi the body may be radio-
graphed with a tube in proper condition for the part. New tubes are gener-
ally soft and require to be gradually worked up in hardness before they can
be used for the deeper parts of the body. It is a good plan to reserve new
tubes for short exposures of the thinner parts such as the hands, ankles,
etc. After a few weeks of such work a new tube may then be used for the
knees, shoulders, and elbows.
Later, when the tube has become seasoned, it can be used for the longer
exposures required for radiography of the kidney areas, spine, and skull.
A new tube should never be overrun, that is, long exposure with large
currents should not be used, because if they are, the vacuum may be hope-
lessly reduced, and the tube will then require to be re-exhausted. Once
a tube is seasoned it will maintain its vacuum and degree of hardness for
long periods, and may be used for hours daily. The amount of usage to
be got from a tube which has been thoroughly seasoned is surprismg.
Sometimes a tube after repeated short exposure may not harden.
A good plan is to run such a tube for half an hour to one hour on the
minimum current available. A | milliampere through a tube for several
runs of that duration may succeed in bringing it into a working condition.
It should be treated carefully for several weeks.
The majority of tubes after prolonged use tend to harden. This natural
hardening from use may be combated in several ways. The best of all is
to regulate the tube by varying the intensity of the current passing through
the bulb. A tube too hard for the object we desire to examine can be brought
back to the proper degree by allowing a fairly strong current to pass for
several minutes. If the current used is not sufficient for this purpose, pass
a very heavy current for a moment.
A time comes with all tubes when we must use the mechanical regulator,
the same remark appl3ring to valve tubes. The form of regulator varies
with the make of the tube, and all require some understanding before we
can properly use them. In all cases it is better to begin reducing the tube
with a minimum quantity of current and a fairly large interval of space
between the cathode terminal and the regulating rod. The distance can
easily be diminished, the important point being not to overdo the reduction.
When radiographing some parts of the body we estimate the degree of
hardness of the tube by one of the methods enumerated, i.e. alternative
spark-gap, Wehnelt radiometer, Benoist scale, and then place the regulating
rod of the tube at the half distance of the spark-gap required, and allow
current to pass through the tube. Sparking at once goes on between the
two points, and some gas is liberated in the glass cylinder at the end of the
regulator. The gas passes into the interior of the bulb, the shadow on the
42 EADIOGEAPHY
screen is altered, and the sparking ceases. Make sure that the regulat-
ing rod is taken well away from the cathode before actually making the
exposure, as a good tube may be hopelessly ruined if this simple pre-
caution is not taken.
The various devices for regulation of the vacuum of a tube are illustrated
on the tubes. The best of all, and one which gives the operator a perfect
control over the tube when working, is the air valve of Bauer. This valve
can be attached to any tube or valve, and is undoubtedly a great help to
the operator. Dr. Loose of Bremen, who has used this regulator extensively,
speaks very favourably of it, and indeed has abandoned all other forms
in its favour. In using it, care should be taken not to introduce air too
rapidly, and to introduce just sufficient to maintain the balance of the
vacuum. One can readily judge of the action if the tube is observed care-
fully while reduction is going on.
The tube may, however, get too hard for regulation. It is then a good
plan to transfer that tube to another apparatus of greater strength. A tube
which has hardened on a mercury break may act perfectly if placed on
an installation with an electrolytic break. The primary current is much
greater in the latter case, the secondary is greater, and there is more heat
generated in the tube, with the result that the vacuum tends to fall and the
tube to soften. A hopelessly hard tube should be put away for several
weeks in a warm corner of the X-ray room or placed in an oven for several
hours. This may help to reduce it sufficiently to allow it to be used, and
then by regulating the current carefully it may be possible to use it for
some time.
When a tube has been used for a long time and gets too hard for work
it is better to sacrffice it altogether. Re-exhaustion and remaking of the
tube costs in many instances nearly as much as a new one, and these re-
exhausted tubes are never so reUable as a new one. Consequently it is
better to break up the tube, and have the valuable parts used for the
construction of a new tube than to have it re-exhausted.
There are many other points in the management of the X-ray tube
which must be learned as the result of experience. The fact must always
be borne in mind that it is the tube which is the determining factor in radio-
graphy, and too great care cannot be taken of the X-ray tubes when in or
out of use. Powerful currents if instantaneous do not harm the tube, but if
prolonged the vacuum is lowered and the tube ruined. The quicker the
exposure the more useful is the resulting radiograph Hkely to be. It should
be noted that when a tube is used for all purposes, i.e. screening and radio-
graphy with heavy discharges, the balance of the tube is often seriously
disturbed, regulation being then a matter of increasing difficulty. It is
a good plan to keep one tube for screening and another for heavy
work.
The efiect of the most powerful impulse on the tube is hardly perceptible,
a current of 100 milhamperes or more passing through a tube for the tu-q oi
a second leaving hardly any trace on the anti-cathode. This current may
THE MANIPULATION OF THE X-RAY TUBE
43
be employed on the cheapest form of tube wdthout injuring it. There is,
however, a tendency for a part or the whole of the current to arc round the
tube if the vacuum is too high, consequently tubes with long stems or necks
are necessary if hard ones are to be used. With these powerful impulses
the soft tubes give the best results.
While for the taking of instantaneous pictures the most powerful installa-
tions are the best, it must be pointed out that quite good rapid radiographs
can be produced by the use of installations of moderate power, provided the
operator knows the apparatus he is using, and particularly if he possesses that
knowledge of the X-ray tube which is, after all, the chief essential.
The Manipulation of the X-ray Tube. — The X-ray tube should
whenever possible be placed at a distance of at least 6 or 7 feet from the
source of energy (coil, etc.). If used within this distance there is a probability
that the magnetic field may af!ect the cathodal stream, and thus alter the
focus of the tube.
When the tube is supported by any form of clamp, the latter should
grip the cathodal neck, below the level of the concave cathode, this being
the strongest part, and should not
clamp it too tightly. Before turn-
ing on the current, the tube should
be carefully dusted, or dried if there
is any moisture present.
The positive pole of the coil or
other apparatus should be connected
by well-insulated cables to the anti-
cathode of the tube, and the nega-
tive pole to the cathode. It should
be seen that all loose wires or metal
fittings are quite clear of the tube.
The regulating wire should be
placed well back from the cathode
— say, at a distance of 6 or 7 inches.
The point is emphasised in another
portion of this work. There are exceptions to this rule in the manipulation
of those tubes which work best with the regulator at a fixed distance from
the cathode, according to the hardness of the particular tube and the
purpose for which it is being used.
The current may now be switched on, starting with all resistance in,
and gradually cutting this out until the tube fluoresces brightly and steadily.
If the tube is inclined to spark over, bring the regulator to within a
distance of 4 or 5 inches of the cathode, so as to provide a kind of safety-
valve action. This will allow of the sparks passing between the regulator
rod and the cathode, and tend to reduce the vacuum of the tube and so avoid
the tube becoming punctured.
Before deciding that a tube needs regulation, allow it to run for a minute
or two to give it an opportunity of finding its balance. Often it will be found
Pig.
39. — Connection of the X-ray tubes to coil.
Valve tube on positive pole.
44 RADIOGRAPHY
tliat a tube so treated will settle down after a sliort run. In other words,
do not be in too great a burry to regulate tbe tube. A little more or a little
less current passing for a short time may successfully regulate the vacuum
and allow of good work beiag done.
If regulation is necessary, proceed to adjust the regulating rod at a
distance which will allow sparks to pass between the rod and the cathode
until the tube works smoothly, and then remove the regulating rod away
from the cathode and test the tube again.
Hardening the tube can only be satisfactorily done by gradually working
a soft tube up through using it for very light work or for light treatment
untU it attains the necessary degree of hardness. Hardening by means
of reversing the current is a method which should never be resorted to.
When a tube becomes hopelessly soft, the only satisfactory thing to do
is to have it re-exhausted.
When work is finished, if the tube is not kept permanently in position,
it should be removed from its shield with great care, particularly while
warm. If possible, it should then be placed upon a rack (which should be
padded).
Description of Methods used for Regrenepation of the Vacuum
of the X-Ray Tuhe. — All tubes (excepting those of very simple construc-
tion), are fitted with a device for lowering at will the vacuum or internal
resistance of the tube. The proA^sion of this regulator materially increases
the life of the tube. It should, however, be always borne in mind that
regulation is to be regarded as the ultimate process, and not as an incidental
to the working of the tube.
The number and variety of the regulators of X-ray tubes is a striking
demonstration of the fact that the perfect regulator has yet to be introduced.
Most of the present-day regulators are efficient up to a certain point. A few
of the most commonly used will be described.
The Mica Regulator. — This consists of a small auxiliary chamber, in
which is placed an electrode supporting a series of discs of mica. Facing
the discs is a small metal knob which has no utility other than that of pre-
venting a possible puncture of the tube, while regulation is taking place.
Attached by a hinged cap to the mica electrode is a wire which ma}'' be
brought into contact with the cathode terminal of the tube.
The method of lowering the vacuum of the tube is as follows : The
jointed arm, E F, is moved (by means of a piece of wood, glass, or other
non-conducting substance) towards B for a few seconds, whilst current is
passing through the tube, when sparks should pass between F and B.
The passage of the current between the latter two points (as shown by
the sparking) results in the partial suspension of the current from its
normal path ; and during the flow of the current through the electrode in
the auxiliary tube, a small quantity of gas is liberated, with the con-
sequence that a reduction in the vacuum takes place. When this has been
achieved the sparking will automatically cease, the resistance of the tube
itself having become less than that of the gap F B. The wire F should
THE regenp:ration of the vacuum
45
now be thrown well back, and the tube run cautiously for the first few
minutes after regulation.
The regulation of the tube during use may be made automatic, if desired,
by placing the wire F at such a distance from B that sparking (with conse-
quent regulation) takes place whenever a certain degree of vacuum is attained.
This distance may easily be determined by experiment with the individual
tube in use.
In the case of a tube which fails to regulate by the above method, it is
permissible to remove the lead from the cathode and attach it to the loop E.
The current should now be passed with extreme caution, the pressure
being very carefully increased until the gas is expelled from the mica.
In order to appreciate the degree to which regulation is taking place,
the mica disc should be carefully watched while the shunt circuit is established.
It will be seen that the mica shows little flecks of red here and there, and when
these appear, it is a sign that gas is being expelled. The time during which
Fig. 40. — Mica regulator. (C. Andrews.)
A, Anti-cathode. C, Mica disc. H
B, Cathode. D, Carbon. F
Wire,
the current should be passed through the regulator depends obviously upon
the degree of hardness of the tube, and the amount of softening which it is
desired to attain ; but in any case it is wiser to switch of! the current as
soon as the fiery appearance is seen in the mica, swing back the regulator
wire, and test the tube ; and then to repeat the process of regulation if
necessary.
The regulator shown is merely a variation of the standard mica pattern,
and is fitted to some smaller tubes on account of its greater convenience
where a 125-mm. bulb is employed. The mechanism is the same, but in
place of the hinged wire, a shaped wire is fitted on a spring and pin bearing.
Normally this wire rests in the position illustrated. To effect the softening,
the wire is tilted with a piece of glass or wood until F B are in contact, when
the eiiusion of gas from the mica takes place.
Larger models are fitted usually with a double regulator, namely carbon
and mica.
This consists of a chamber exactly similar to that described above,
excepting that, in place of the small metal knob, there is fitted an electrode
carrying a cylinder of carbon. This is capable of giving off gas in exactly
46
KADIOGKAPHY
the same way as does the mica disc ; and so, in this double regulator, one has
two supplies of gas upon which to draw. By means of a thumbscrew the
regulator wire can be changed from one side of the regulator to the other,
so that when one source of gas is exhausted, the second may be brought into
use. The carbon regulator is operated in the same way as the mica, but it
should be noted that there is no " fiery " appearance with the former, and
also that the carbon works rather more freely than the mica. Care should
therefore be exercised in order to avoid over-regulation.
In the ordinary way, a current of 1 or 1^ milliamperes will cause the
standard regulator to work in a few seconds, but in some cases, and especially
when the regulator has been much used, a greater current may be necessary
in order to heat the carbon or mica sufficiently. Experience will demonstrate
this. The gases which are supplied by it to the tube allow the latter to
remain constant and steady.
The regenerating arrangement with which some tubes are provided, is
constructed on the principle of osmosis. The metals of the platinum group,
especially palladium, have the peculiarity that they allow hydrogen to pass
while incandescent. A tube of palladium, closed at one end and open at
the other, is sealed into the neck of the tube. To protect it against
accidental damage it is covered with a test tube, which can be taken ofE.
When the tube has become too hard, remove the test tube and apply a
spirit flame for a few seconds to the palladium tube till it is dark red.
The hydrogen contained in the spirit flame penetrates into the inside of
the tube, and makes the tube softer. The flame must not be brought
near the point where the metal is sealed with the glass.
After the tube has been regenerated time should be allowed for com-
plete coohng before it is used again. It is advisable to bring the tube to the
desired degree of softness each time before it is used, and only to heat the
extreme end of the palladium tube.
The Bauer Air-Valve Regulator. — Another form of regulator is the
Fig. 41. — Bauer air-valve. (Favre.l
air-valve invented by Mr. Heiaz Bauer. This consists of a delicately-
constructed valve, closed by a column of mercury, and fitted with an air
METHOD OF USING GUNDELACH REGULATOR 47
filter. By means of a small Kand pump and an india-rubber tube, the
column of mercury is depressed so as to open a very small aperture, through
which a minute quantity of air is thus allowed to pass. The mercury rises
almost immediately, and the opening is again sealed, the vacuum of
the tube having meanwhile been lowered by the admission of the air. If
desired, the Bauer valve may be worked with a long rubber tube, thus
allowing of regulation taking place from a distance, and while the tube is
actually running.
Gundelach Regulator. — Another very good regeneration apparatus may
be described.
This arrangement consists of a little condenser which is made in the form
of a cylindrical glass tube covered with an imperfect conductor of electricity.
By special treatment this conductor is made to absorb a large quantity of
gas. It is then covered with a second glass tube, and both cylindrical glass
tubes are so treated that they cannot be pierced by a spark.
'^ I > - »
Fig. 42. — Gundelach tube with, regenerator. (Siemens.)
a, wire. b, wire. c, metal cap. d, metal cap.
When the tube has become too hard, put the wire 6 of the regenerat-
ing arrangement in contact with the metal cap d of the tube. The other
wire a has to be so far from the metal cap c that a shunt-spark passes.
This shunt-spark should be half as long as the equivalent spark of the
Rontgen tube after regeneration, because the resistance of this regenerating
arrangement is considerable. The current produces some gas from the
substance of the regenerating arrangement, and after a few minutes the tube
will again fluoresce regularly. The regeneration, however, is only completed
when the shunt-sparks have ceased to pass. After regeneration turn back
both wires. This new regulator will work easily even when the resistance
of the tube has become so great that no electric current will pass through
the Rontgen tube.
This arrangement has the great advantage that owing to the two con-
ductors being separated by a glass tube, the gas is set free uniformly from
48 RADIOGKAPHY
all parts of the conductors, and the whole of the gas contained therein,
which is considerable, can be utilised.
In order to obtain good pictures it is generally necessary to regulate
the hardness of a tube each time previous to using it, and the tube should
be adjusted for a medium hardness ; and this should be done by means
of the regenerator.
Suppression of Reverse (Inverse) Current
The reverse current is obviously a great inconvenience and must be got
rid of if good negatives are to be obtained. It is possible to keep it down
to a minimum by using a low voltage, a high self-induction, and a low
frequency in the primary coil, but if intense discharges are required we cannot
suppress it entirely in this way, and other means must be adopted.
Valve tubes or spark-gaps are frequently connected in series with the
X-ray tubes.
In a Spark-gap the current can discharge easily between a point and a
plate if the point is the positive pole, but it does not do so if the point is
the negative pole. It is possible, then, to create an impediment or resistance
Fig. 43. — Spark-gap. (Siemens.)
to the cm-rent in one direction only, whereas the passage is left free in
the other.
There are many types of Valve tubes, the most commonly used being
the single valve tube, but the triple valve tube is also used.
The nature of reverse current has already been explained. In all
coil outfits this has to be checked. It is possible by a careful adjustment
of primary current, interrupter, and tube, to cut this down to a minimum,
but the slightest disturbance of these factors gives rise at once to a percentage
of inverse current, which, if allowed to remain, has a deleterious efiect upon
the tube and tends to harden it. Should it become very hard the persistence
of inverse current with strong currents in the primary leads to damage of
the tube ; sparking takes place, and the tube is punctured.
It is generally appreciated that the current which is utilised in the pro-
duction of X-rays is that which is passing when the current is breaking, e.g.
when the magnetic field is at the point of collapse, and it is the endeavour
to obtain a maximum tension at the moment, and to relieve or " break "
such tension with sufiicient speed and completeness, that gives rise to the
constant alterations and improvements — ^real or fancied — in modern medical
electrical apparatus. The more complete the saturation of the induction
ACTION OF REVERSE CURRENT ON X-RAY TUBE 49
coil, and the more suddenly the saturation can be " vented," as it were,
through the secondary circuit, the more efl&cient (other factors being equal)
the phenomenon of the Rontgen rays produced.
On the other hand, the current which is passing when the current is
" making," e.g. when the cycle of the magnetic field is first commencing
in the primary of the coil, is flowing in a reverse sense to that of the current
at " break " : and it can therefore be seen that if this current Ls allowed to
flow through the X-ray tube, it cancels, as it were, a portion of the " break-
ing " pressure equal to its own. Now, the result of this is not only a loss
of efiiciency in that it is a loss of working current. The effects are,
unfortunately, more far reaching than that, the X-ray tube becoming
irretrievably damaged. In the first place, the actual passage of current in
the " reverse " direction through the tube means that the anti-cathode, or
positive pole of the tube, becomes, for an instant, cathode, and vice versa.
Now, it is an estabhshed fact that the cathode electrode breaks up much
more freely and quickly than the anti-cathode, and for this reason the
cathode is always made from aluminium, which is less destructible in this
sense than any other metal. But if the cuirent is reversed, and the
'"' cathode " is, for the moment, the copper "anti-cathode," the destruction
is much more rapid, and particles of metal are torn ofi from the surface.
The fragments of copper, tungsten, etc., thus detached are projected
with enormous rapidity towards the wall of the tube, to which they adhere,
forming a thin metallic coating, particularly on the back zone of the bulb
{e.g. behind and above the plane of the surface of the target). The result
of this coating of metal is to absorb all the free gas in the tube, and is the
explanation of an old blackened tube remaining often dead hard, however
much it may be regulated or re-exhausted. The blackening described above
must not be confused with the violet coloration in front of the plane of
the target, which latter is a normal condition in all tubes after use, and
which is free from objection.
The second ill-effect is that of overheating. If the usual form of milli-
amperemeter, known as the " moving coil " type, be employed, its reading
is that of the difference between the " correct " and " reverse " currents.
For example, supposing the current in the right direction to be equal to
2 milliamperes, and that in the wrong or reverse direction to be equal to
1 milliampere, the milHamperemeter would indicate 1 milliampere. But
although this would be accurate so far as the measuring of the current itseK
went, it must be remembered that the heating efiect of an electrical current
increases as the square of the amperage. So that, although the operator may
say, " The tube is all right ; it is taking only 1 milliampere," we are subject-
ing it to the strain of 3 milliamperes so far as heat is concerned, e.g. nine
times the heat of a real 1 milliampere current. As has already been pointed
out, it is mainly the heat which destroys the balance of the vacuum of
the X-ray tube.
It is admittedly a very difiicult matter to construct a modern installation
which shall be free from reverse current, particularly as with the higher
4
50
RADIOGRAPHY
amperage which is demanded for rapid work, high voltages must also be
employed, and the greater the voltage the greater the reverse discharge.
The only means, therefore, of combating the evil is to introduce some device
which shall " rectify " the discharge, e.g. eliminate the reverse current while
interfering with the proper current as little as possible.
In order to effect this, many contrivances have been tried, notably a
simple " spark-gap " and various forms of mechanical rectifiers. The most
usual and most efBicient method is, however, the valve tube, a vacuum
tube which permits the current to pass unobstructed in the right direction
but which should suppress absolutely the reverse or making current.
Single Valve Tube. — This valve tube, owing to its special construction,
is much less inclined to become hard than the simpler types of valve tubes.
It is, however, fitted with the new regenerator so that it can be maintained
at a uniform degree of softness ; this should be maintained at about 16 mm.
equivalent spark-gap. When the tube requires regenerating one wire should
be connected to the anode cap (positive), and the other held at a distance
of about 5 mm. from the cathode cap (negative). As soon as the tube shows
a white foggy light the regeneration is finished.
m.
)^-*^
Fig. 44. — Single valve tube. (C. Andrews.
Fig. 45. — Trii:)le valve tube. (C. Andrews.)
Formerly when it was desired to rectify on higher voltages, or while
using heavy currents, two or more valves were placed in series; but a difficulty
then arose by reason of the fact that such valves did not always increase
in hardness to the same degree, and it was therefore almost impossible to
maintain an efficient rectification, and, at the same time, to pass the full
amount of current needed. In order to overcome this trouble a " double "
valve was designed, consisting of two bulbs and sets of electrodes, each
exactly similar to one single valve, but joined together in such a manner
that one vacuum is common to both chambers. The latter are then con-
nected in parallel, and placed in series with the X-ray tube, the result being
that the backward resistance is doubled, the current flowing between the
two sets of electrodes. With such a double valve, complete rectification
on voltages up to, say, 200 is obtainable.
The Triple Valve is constructed similarly to the foregoing, but has three
VALVE TUBE8
51
intercommunicating chambers, and is intended for use on the highest
voltages and for the heaviest discharges.
Valve tubes may be had either of clear glass, of blue, or of a deep amber
colour. The latter is preferred by many workers, as the colouring serves
to disguise the fluorescence, and thus permits of a better judgment of the
condition of the Eontgen tube itself.
High-tension Rectifier. — A different form of valve is that known as the
high-tension rectifier. It consists of a long aluminium f mmel and a curved
mirror, the bulb being spherical, and of a diameter of approximately 18 cm.
This form of valve is very efficient, even on high voltages, but it has a ten-
dency to increase in vacuum somewhat rapidly. For this latter reason an
osmosis regulator is provided, so that regulation is possible as often as desired.
French Type. — Yet another form is that known as the " French type,"
which is very similar to the single valve. It has, however, in place of the
plate anode, a thin pin with a slightly flattened head, and the neck of the
Fig. 46. — French valve. (C. Andrews.
Fig. 47. — Oliver Lodge valve tube. (Cossar.
tube surrounding this is of much smaller diameter than in the other cases.
The action of this valve is very perfect, complete rectification being obtained
without any appreciable loss of current. The French pattern is, however,
rather more delicate than the others, and also tends to go up in vacuum
rather quickly. The provision of an osmosis regulator permits, however,
of the latter trouble being overcome.
The Oliver Lodge valve tube is often used. It has the disadvantage that
it cannot be regulated, but it is claimed for it that it does not require regula-
tion. This claim is open to question. When it is necessary to check the
reverse current which is found when very heavy discharges pass through
a tube a number of these valve tubes may be placed in the circuit.
Regulation of the Valve Tubes. — The regulation of valve tubes is
efiected in a similar way to that of X-ray tubes, according to the type of regu-
lator in use. In the case of the mica or carbon patterns, the lead which is
normally attached to the plate (anode), should be attached to the ring of the
regulator, and current passed until the blue appearance has been restored to
the valve tube. The lead must then be reconnected to the anode terminal.
52 RADIOGRAPHY
Valve tubes should never be worked "hard." An intermediate vacuum,
giving a Geissler discharge in the body of the tube, with a slight apple-green
tint round the spiral base, will be found best. Do not forget also, that a
'■' hard " valve tube may be emitting an appreciable quantity of Rontgen
rays, with a consequent need of protection for the operator.
,0=€t
\
Fig. 48. — Gundelach valve tube. (Siemens.)
Bauer Air-valve. — The latest improvement in the valve tube is the intro-
duction of a Bauer air-valve for the regulation of the vacuum. This is
very useful and easily handled by the use of a small hand-pump, a long
rubber tube allowing of regulation from a distance.
When intensive currents are used it may be necessary to put a valve
tube on each pole or even to have 6 or 8 valve tubes in series. By using
valve tubes the amount of inverse current can be practically abolished when
medium currents are employed, but when very heavy currents are used it is
not possible, or hardly ever possible, to abohsh it.
There are several other varieties of valve tube of more recent construc-
tion. The various types described are useful on installations of medium
power, but if they are used on the more powerful installations of recent date,
they soon begin to vary in hardness, and add considerably to the diflS.culties
of the radiographer. This is particularly noticeable when the installation is
used alternately for short exposures and long ones. The balance of the
valve tube is disturbed, and it will require almost constant regulation. It
should be pointed out that when valve tubes are used they require nearly as
much regulation as the X-ray tube. When the X-ray tube is known to be
right and the results are not satisfactory, attention should be paid to the
condition of the valve tube. Of the more recent type of valve tubes the
most efficient is one manufactured by the Polyphos Company.
Valve tubes from America are promised which should be a great
improvement on the ones at present in use in this country.
DETECTION OF INVERSE CURRENT
53
Method of Detecting- lleverse (Inverse) Current.— A good guide
to the presence of reverse current is the appearance of the tube in action,
rings then appearing on the aspect of the tube behind the anti-cathode,
and the green light in front not being so clearly cut as when there is no
trace of reverse current. See frontispiece.
The continued presence of reverse current leads to changes in the con-
dition of the tube. It gradually hardens, and the change in its state may
show itself in a variation in the sounds produced when in action.
The best method of detecting reverse current is by the use of an oscillo-
scope tube. The construction of such a tube is worthy of description. Two
aluminium wires, separated by a small gap, are enclosed in an oblong glass
Fig. 49. — Oscilloscope tul.e. (Siemens.)
tube, and the wire connected with the negative pole becomes, when the
current passes, surrounded by a violet fluorescence. If the current discharges
in one direction, only one of these wires shows the violet light, but if each
wire is alternately negative and positive both wires become fluorescent and
the length of the fluorescent band indicates the intensity of the current,
so that we can compare the relative strength of the closing and breaking
currents.
There are several varieties of tube but the diagram illustrates the
general type in use.
The instrument is useful. It records
the current passing in one direction
through the tube. If reverse current
is present it represents the difference
between the two currents. When both
are equal then no reading is recorded.
If the reverse is greater than the current
in the right direction, then it records
on the wrong side of the zero mark.
When the oscilloscope tube shows
that reverse current is present, then
valve tubes must be used to check the
reverse. The combination of milliam-
peremeter, valve, and oscilloscope tubes
is a most useful one, helping greatly to
regulate the exposures.
The X-ray tube afiords an excellent
indication of the presence of reverse
current. The change in the appearance
of the tube which has reverse current passing through it is illustrated in
the coloured frontispiece.
Fig. 50. — Oscilloscope tube in action.
(Schall.)
a, The appearance of a tube with the current
passing in the right direction with a trace
of reverse current.
h. The appearance with the current passing
in both directions in almost equal pro-
portions.
54
EADIOGKAPHY
Secondary Radiations, Cause, and Methods of Suppression. —
Secondary rays are produced by the reverse current. All those X-rays
which do not emanate from the focus of the anti-cathode are called secondary
rays. They have the same penetrating power as the primary rays and are
plentiful in hard tubes, but they project the outlines of the objects in other
directions than the primary rays, and a loss of sharpness results.
When they are present it is necessary to do something to prevent
deterioration of the negative. Secondary rays are also produced, or a
diffusion of the primaryrays takes place in the patient's body. It is probable
LCBA ABCD
Fig. 51. — Diagrams showing the paths taken by primary beams and secondary rays. (Schall.)
that both of these manifest themselves during a long exposure. Fig. 51
shows the path taken by the primary beam, and the manner of projection of
secondary rays upon the photographic plate.
The X-rays, A A, emanating from the focus of the anti-cathode project
a shadow, B B, of the object, 0, on the plate. If there were no secondary
rays this shadow would be of uniform darkness from B to B, and the space,
BCD, would be free from any shadow. But if any current discharges in
the wrong direction, the so-called secondary rays are generated on the glass
of the tube. They are indicated by the dotted hues h b. Although weaker
in intensity, they project shadows, and in another direction than the primary
rays will do ; the shadows overlap, and the part between A B will not be so
SUPPRESSION OF SECONDARY RADIATIONS
00
dark as that between A A and the space between B C mil not be as clear as
that between C D. The effect of the secondary rays is therefore to make the
outlines less sharp, and to cause a general fogginess. In consequence of this
some details will become indistinct and the finer ones will disappear entirely.
In order to minimise the effect of the secondary rays produced by
reverse currents upon the plate, diaphragms are used. A diaphragm alone
is not sufficient, and an extension tube should also be combined with the
diaphragm.
The following illustration shows this method of checking these ill-effects
to some extent.
The illustration (Fig. 52) shows the primary or principal rays a a
emanating from the anti-cathode A ; the dotted Hues 6 h indicate secondary
^ =6
Fig. 52. — Diagram showing the use of a dia-
phragm between tube and plate. (Schall. )
Fig. 53.
-Diagram showing the use of a cylinder
diaphragm. (Schall.)
rays emanating from the glass wall of the tube. If we place a diaphragm
between tube and plate, some of these secondary rays are stopped, and, the
nearer the diaphragm to the tube, and the narrower its aperture, the more
efficient will it be. But as metal plates cannot be brought quite close to the
tube, some secondary rays will still reach the plate unless a cylinder diaphragm
is employed. Fig. 53 shows why a cylinder diaphragm is bound to exclude
more secondary rays than a flat diaphragm can do; the cylinder diaphragm
can also be used with advantage for compression.
Instruments for Estimating the Hardness of the
X-Ray Tube.
The X-ray bulb in action presents a picture which in itself is a guide
to the condition of the tubes as regards hardness, presence of inverse current,
and radiographic value, but if good work is to be maintained it is necessary
56
KADIOGEAPHY
Fig. 54. — Adjustable spintermeter.
(Watson.)
to be able to record the actual conditions under which a particular standard
has been attained. When this has been done it should be possible to repro-
duce the condition of tube necessary at any time.
There are several methods for estimating the degree of vacuum (or
hardness) of the X-ray tube. These are (a) measurement of the alternate
spark-gap, (6) the Bauer QuaUmeter, (c) radiometers : (1) Walter, (2) Walter-
Benoist, (3) Wehnelt crypto-
radiometer, (4) measurement by
the milhamperemeter.
A rough though practical
method of estimating the inter-
nal resistance of the X-ray bulb
consists of the Spintermeter,
by means of which the alternate
spark-gap is measured.
A convenient form of spin-
termeter is here shown. The
action is simple. The point A
is withdrawn to its limit, and
the tube set in action. By gradually approximating the point A to the
point B a position is reached when the current, instead of passing through
the tube sparks between the points A and B, a
scale attached giving the distance in inches or
centimetres. The spark-gap is measured, and
gives approximately the hardness of the X-ray
bulb. The spintermeter may be attached to
the coil, or more conveniently mounted on a
separate base, and placed at some distance
from the coil.
The Bauer Qualimeter is an instrument
for determining the degree of hardness of the
X-ray tube. It is useful, but not always to be
relied upon.
This instrument is connected by a wire to
the negative terminal of the coil or the cathode
of the tube. It is a static electrometer and
condenser which indicates automatically the
potential of the cathode, and hence the quality
of the X-rays. The apparatus consists of two
wings, which swing between two fixed plates.
Both wings and plates are equally charged, so
that a repulsion takes place between them. Fig. 55.— Bauer qualimeter. (Favre.
The intensity of this repulsion is in exact
proportion to the electrical tension in the secondary circuit, and is indicated
by the deviation of a pointer over a suitably divided scale.
As is well known, the penetration of the X-rays is a function of the
BAUER QUALIMETER 57
electrical potential in the secondary circuit, so that a simple measurement
of this potential between the anode and cathode will give as an indication
of the hardness of the tube. The scale is gauged according to the absorption
of the X-rays by sheets of lead of different thickness, increasing regular
from one-tenth of a millimetre to one millimetre.
No. 1 on the scale denotes X-rays of such a hardness as to be totally
absorbed by J^^J millimetre of lead. When the index is at No. 10 we know
that the tube is giving out rays which will penetrate 0-9 millimetre of lead,
but will be totally absorbed by 1 milhmetre of lead.
As already explained, the instrument is unipolar, being joined up by a
single wire to some point in electrical connection with the cathode. The
instrument is contained in an ebonite case, which swings freely from a bracket
on the wall or a stand, so as to be always in a vertical position.
The following experiment will demonstrate the use of the instrument.
The tube is disconnected, and a current from the generator is sent through
the spark-gap. In this case the deflection of the qualimeter becomes greater
with the increasing spark-gap, while the reading of the milliamperemeter
recedes. The spark-gap itself is often used for gauging the hardness of the
tube. This proceeding, however, is not exact enough for practical purposes,
as the resistance of the spark-gap is dependent upon the form of the electrode
ball, point, or disc, and upon the humidity of the atmosphere.
No metallic surface should be allowed to be within a distance of 8 to
10 inches from the instrument. The purposes for which the qualimeter
can be used are the following :
Therapeutics. — ^It is becoming more and more imperative to regulate
the hardness of the tubes to the various diseases treated. As modern
pubhcations almost always give the degree of hardness in qualimeter degrees,
it is obviously necessary to employ the qualimeter to obtain the same results.
The spark-gap, which has very generally been used up till now, is to be
rejected for the reasons mentioned above. In addition to this it is possible
by the help of the qualimeter, to use the so-called indirect calculation of
the erythema dose instead of the direct measurement by the Sabouraud
pastille, in cases where the degree of hardness employed is always
approximately invariable, as is the case in the treatment of the skin and
deeper tissues.
The process can be shortly described as follows : Take a new X-ray
bulb and give an erythema dose, noting the reading of the milliamperemeter
and the qualimeter and the time. The product of these three factors — time,
milliamperemeter, and qualimeter degrees — will be always found the same
for the erythema dose (under an approximately unvarying degree of hard-
ness), however much the two other factors — intensity and time — may be
varied. This method has been scientifically proved by Klingelfuss of Basel.
A practical example will serve to illustrate the above. If an erythema dose
has been reached in ten minutes with a hardness of 3 Bauer-degrees and an
intensity of 4 milliamperes, the product will be 10 x 3 x 4=120, If a bulb
is being employed which registers 3 degrees of hardness with an intensity of
58 EADIOGRAPHY
2 milliamperes, it will take twenty minutes to produce the same result :
the product will again be 2 x 3 x 20=120. For treatment of the skin and
deeper tissues, two different degrees of hardness are generally used (for
example, 3 Bauer and 7 Bauer), and the erythema dose need only be calcula-
tive once for all. Shght fluctuations in hardness make no difference, and if
they occur during exposure they can be adjusted by regulating the primary
current. On the other hand, the current employed must be kept within
such bounds that the tube remains steady. Should the current through the
tube be too strong or too weak, more or less current may be passed through
the tube by adjusting the shunt. Too weak a current hardens the tube,
whereas too strong a current has the opposite effect.
For comparative scale of the usual instruments for measuring the
hardness of tubes, see page 61.
Technique for Exposures. — The time of exposure can be calculated in the
same way as that for an erythema dose. We first ascertain within what
time and with what degree of hardness and intensity a good Rontgen
negative of any particular region is obtained. These readings may be noted
on a chart hung within the protective cabin, and in this way, by using the
same figures, a satisfactory result can always be obtained, and failures
excluded. It is here that the qualimeter is particularly useful, since different
degrees of hardness are required for the production of good pictures of
various parts of the body. If the operator prefers to use one tube for all
purposes, he will find the Bauer air-valve tube most practical. With this
he is able to adjust the tube to any degree of hardness desired. For in-
stantaneous exposures the most important point is to adjust the hardness
of the tube so that a sufficient number of hard rays may be emitted. To
ascertain this, the tube should be driven with a normal intensity of 2 milli-
amperes, and the hardness tested by the qualimeter. From the resulting
negative it can be immediately ascertained whether the tube is too high
or too low. If the picture is too faintly shaded, the degree of hardness was
too low ; if it is too dark, the degree was too high.
As the result of considerable experience in the use of this instrument
it may be stated that the quahmeter is particularly suited for radioscopic
work, since it indicates the hardness of the tube at a distance, and without
the operator being brought into dangerous proximity to the tube in order to
measure its hardness.
As has been said, the qualimeter has not only created a possibility of
working with greater exactness, but — and to this we again call particular
attention — ^it is not now necessary to come within the dangerous area for
the purpose of ascertaining the degree of hardness. Finally, with its help
the tubes can be worked much more economically.
Radiometers. — These serve to determine accurately the degree of
hardness of the tubes, that is to say, the penetrability of the rays.
Walfer^s Radiometer consists of a sheet of lead mounted on a wooden
frame and with eight circular holes, combined with an adjustable fluorescent
screen. The holes are covered with platinum foil of a thickness varying in
RADIOMETERS
59
geometrical progression from '•t)05 mm. for hole No. 1 to '64 mm. for hole
No. 8. If the apparatus is placed in the path of the rays a certain number
of holes become visible on the fluorescent screen, the number depending on
the hardness of the tube. The degree of hardness is indicated by the largest
cypher marked on the visible holes.
Fig. 56. — Walter's radiometer. (Siemens.)
The Walter-Benoist Radiometer has aluminium apertures of various
thicknesses and a piece of silver foil. One of the aluminium apertures will
show the same degree of brightness as the silver foil. The cypher on this
aperture indicates the hardness of the tube.
Fig. 57. — Beuoist radiometer.
(Siemens. )
Fig. 58. — Protected front
for Fig. 57.
A simple form of Benoist radiometer, with slots for screws, may be fixed
on the fluorescent screen ; the lead glass covering the latter protects the
operator.
Wehnelt's Crypto-Radiometer is an improvement on the foregoing radio-
meters. It is provided with a wedge-shaped aluminium strip, and alongside
this a flat silver strip, both of which can be moved by means of a ratchet over
a brass plate provided with a thin slit. The apparatus is adjusted until
both strips show the same degree of brightness on a fluorescent screen. A
scale indicates the position of the aluminium strip, i.e. the penetration of
the tube.
This is a useful instrument ; it is efficiently protected, and will be
60
RADIOGRAPHY
Fig. 59. — Wehnelt's crypto-radiometer.
(Siemens.)
found to be extremely useful for routine work. The radiometer can be
fitted betdnd the lead-lined screen, and a suitable tube-holder attached to
the tube while it is being tested. A sht must be cut in the lead linings
of the screen. Then the apparatus may be used with safety.
When using these radiometers, and particularly at the present time
when heavy currents and hard tubes are
coming into general use, it is necessary
to point out that the protective devices
supphed with the measuring apparatus
are not nearly sufficient for the protec-
tion of the operator if many observations
have to be made daily. The instru-
ments should be mounted on a screen
lined with thick lead, and the slots for
comparing standards should have thick
lead glass.
The instruments described all esti-
mate more or less accurately the hard-
ness of the X-ray bulb. There are also instruments which measure the quan-
tity of current actually passing to the tube. These are useful in estimating
the exposure necessary at particular times. Later, the exact method of
combining all the factors required for the estimation of exposure will be
described. For our present general purpose it is sufficient to state that there
are instruments used to measure the current passing through the tube, the
actual quantity of which will vary with the internal resistance of the tube.
For example, a soft tube will allow, say, 10 milliamperes to pass, whilst with
the same primary current a much harder tube will only allow, say, 1 milli-
ampere to pass.
Measurement of X-Rays by Milliampepe-
meter. — A milliamperemeter is necessary for
this' purpose when radiographic exposures are
given, and acts by estimating the quantity of
current passing through the X-ray tube. That
shown is a Deprez-d'Arsonval moving coil in-
strument, and it is an advantage to have the zero
in the centre of the scale for measuring positive
and negative currents. They do not show the
actual current traversing the X-ray tubes, but
its mean value, which can, however, be taken as
a relative measure of the intensity of the rays.
So long as the pointer remains stationary this
indicates that the hardness of the tube is con-
stant. Should the tube, when in use, become
harder, the pointer will move towards zero. The instrument is as a rule
specially constructed so that it is impossible for sparking to occur inside,
and the pointer should be well damped. There are other instruments for
Fig. 60. — Milliamperemeter.
(Siemens.)
MEASUREMENT OF HARDNESS OF TUBES
CI
measuring the quantity of X-rays used in dosage. These are described
more fully in the section on Radio-therapeutics.
The table below gives the comparative values of the instruments most
frequently used, namely : Bauer, Wehnelt, Walter, and Benoist.
Comparative Scale of the usual Instruments for measuring the
Hardness op Tubes
soft medium hard
Bauer ....
1
2
3 4
5
7-5
6
7
8
9
10
Wehnelt
1-5
3
4-5 6
9
10-5
12
13-5
15
Walter
1
1-2
2-3 3-4
4-5
5-6 1 6-7 7-8
Benoist
1
2
3 i 4
5
6 7 8
9
10
The ingenious method used for the control of the Coohdge tube appears
to be the perfect one for the estimation and control of the hardness of the
X-ray given off from the bulb.
The penetrating power of the X-rays is dependent upon the speed of
the cathode stream, and the latter is varied by increasing or diminishing
the potential at the terminals of the tube. The provision of an ammeter
in the battery circuit gives the means necessary for estimating the hardness
of the ray. The miUiamperemeter in the secondary circuit gives the current
passing through the secondary circuit. By using these two indicators
together it is possible not only to estimate but to produce at mil a particular
and fairly constant type of X-ray. This not only dispenses with other more
tedious methods of estimation but enables the operator to reproduce at any
time the particular ray he may require.
TUBE STANDS, COUCHES, COMPRESSORS, AND
SCREENING STANDS
The X-Ray Tube-Stand
There are many varieties and adaptations of this piece of apparatus.
The chief essential is that the shield, whatever it may consist of, should be
efficiently protective, and of a size capable of holding easily the largest tube.
The clamps should have an easy movement, and as little metal as possible
should enter into the structure of the shield and tube clamps. This is
particularly desirable when heavy currents are used, for otherwise the current
may spark from the tube to the metal, and lead to a marked diminution of
current passing through the tube and to disappointment in results. The
tube is frequently punctured if these precautions are not taken.
There is a type of protected tube-stand which, with some modifications,
is made by all the principal manufacturers, and its essential points are
enumerated below. Such a stand will answer very well, not only for thera-
peutic work, but in small installations for radiography and radioscopy. It
consists of a wooden tube-box, fined with protective rubber, and as some of
these boxes err on the small side, this is a point that should be noted. To
the front of this box all diaphragms, applicators, and pastille-holders can be
fitted. This box is attached to a horizontal wooden arm by a mechanical
method, and this part should be carefully examined to avoid subsequent
disappointment and annoyance. As the tube-box may have to carry con-
siderable weight and still be used at all angles and positions, each move-
ment should be controlled by a separate solid metal clamp, and not by
one that can wear or compress. It is better to pay a little more for extra
work in this direction than to court disaster by some part not holding well,
and perhaps allowing the tube-box to drop in the middle of an exposure.
The horizontal wooden arm has a rack-and-pinion adjustment, which is fitted
by means of a bracket, with a vertical rack-and-pinion movement attached to
a wooden upright, which in turn should be mounted on a solid metal base,
not a wooden one, so as to make a stable and fairly rigid apparatus. All
adjustments can then be conveniently made. An elaboration of this is the
pillar tube-stand, suitable for use with much larger outfits and for all kinds
of work.
Description and Use of Pillar Stands. — The pillar stand (Fig. 61)
consists of a solid pedestal with castors, which carries a vertical column of
62
THE PILLAR TUBE -STAND
G3
steel tube. An adjustable sleeve, to which one end of the wire is secured,
is mounted on this column. The wire runs over a pulley, and carries a
movable lead weight inside the steel tube, which serves to balance the tube-
box and the whole movable system. The sleeve can be locked in any
position by the lever. The pulley is secured to a ball-bearing, and can
revolve freely round the top of the column. The sleeve has a horizontal
Fig. 61. — Pillar stand, protected tube-box and accessories. (Siemens.
arm, which carries a second sleeve. In order to avoid a displacement of
the sleeve in the longitudinal direction of the arm, the latter has a groove
at the end, which engages the screw of the lever. The tube-box is hinged
to the sleeve in such a manner that it may be revolved horizontally through
an angle of about 90°. In order to fix the position of the angle, there is a
circular slot above the hinge, through which travels the screw of the lever.
If, now, the lever is turned to the right, its head is firmly pressed against the
64
EADIOGKAPHY
slot, and thereby prevents any further rotation of the hinge. The sleeve,
together with the tube-box, can be turned radially to the arm. The sleeve
is locked by tightening up a screw by means of the lever, so that the sleeve
is pressed on to the arm. Thus, the tube-box can be moved as follows :
{a) up and down ; (6) round the column ; (c) round the arm ; {d) through
an angle of 90° round any axis vertical to the arm, so that this pillar stand
permits of adjusting the position of the tube within the widest limits.
The tube-box itself is lined inside with lead rubber material, as a
Fig. 62. — A form of tube-stand, which
combines many useful mechanical move-
ments, (Watson.)
Fig. 63. — A convenient type of tube-
stand with iris diaphragm.
protection against accidental effects of the rays. Its back forms a door.
The front is provided with a rectangular opening of about 170 x 220 mm.,
in which the accessories subsequently to be described are inserted. In order
to be able conveniently to manipulate the tube-box during adjustment, it
is provided with a handle. One of the sides is fitted with an observation
window of lead glass, through which the X-rays can only penetrate with
difficulty, and this may be closed by the shutter, when making a fluoro-
scopic examination. Two pieces of wo©d with slots are fitted to the under
side of the box, between which the -tube-holder, together with the tube
THE TUBE STAND
65
is inserted. The holder must be secured to the cathode neck of the tube.
The latter must be so mounted that the anti-cathode is turned towards the
front of the box (with the opening for the X-rays), and occupies about the
centre of the box. The tube-holder can be fixed by turning the wood screw
to the right.
In order that neither the operator nor the patient may receive shocks
due to sparks jumping from the tube to any part of the stand, a terminal
is mounted on the pedestal, which is connected ^^^th all the metal
parts of the stand, and also with the accessories, which are inserted in
the front opening of the box through the metal strip which runs along
the tube-box. This terminal must be connected to a water-pipe by means
Fig. 65.-
FiG. 64. — Tube-box with extension tube.
-Tube-box with rectangular
diaphragm.
of an insulated or bare wire, or to an earthed conductor, should this be avail-
able on the supply mains.
In order to prevent any accidental movement of the stand, two screws
are provided in the pedestal by means of which the latter may be slightly
raised, so as to put the two castors out of gear.
Accessories. — 1. A wooden Carrier with an opening (about 170 x 170
mm.), which is inserted in the front of the tube-box, and feed by means of
the screw. In order to centre the X-rays, it may be adjusted up and down
to the extent of about 30 mm. The accessories mentioned subsequently,
compressor diaphragm, iris diaphragm, and holders, can be attached to this
carrier ; for this purpose it is provided with a small spring, which snaps
into a corresponding small slot in the accessories themselves, and thus
prevents them from falling out when the tube-box is rotated. The carrier
should be so inserted in the box that the spring is on the same side as the
screw, so that the metal strip makes metallic connection with the strip on
the opposite side, and thereby the metal parts of the carrier, as well as of the
accessories which it carries, are earthed,
2. The Compressor Diaphragm, of about 140 mm. long by 125 mm.
diameter, which serves, like the compressor diaphragm of Professor Dr.
Albers-Schonberg, to produce radiographs with good contrasts, this being
5
66 KADIOGRAPHY
attained primarily by screening the rays not required, and partly by
efficiently fixing or compressing the patient.
3. An Iris Diaphragm, which must be inserted in the carrier in such a
manner that the spring snaps into the slot. The largest diameter of the
opening is about 105 mm. and the smallest about 25 mm.
4. A Holder, which must be inserted in the wood carrier, and is intended
for holding the three diaphragms as well as the centering device. This
holder must also be inserted in such a manner that the spring snaps into
the corresponding slot. A Holder for the lead-glass tubes, or applicators,
which must also be inserted in the wood carrier. The tubes can be fixed
by turning a wooden screw.
5. Four Lead Glass Tubes, of 100 mm. length, with diameters of about
18, 40, 50, and 75 mm. respectively. The largest tube is conical, and should
be inserted into the carrier at its widest end.
6. A Centering Device, which consists of a small metal tube attached
to a circular plate, to the free end of which a small circular screen of
barium platino cyanide is attached. The centering device must be inserted
in the holder. In order to centre the tube, the latter is switched on,
and the wood carrier with the centering device is moved until the small
fluorescent screen is in a state of complete fluorescence, that is, until
it shows a complete circle and not only a part of the circle. Centering can
also be well effected without the tube being switched on, by removing the
cap and the little screen from the centering tube, and observing the anti-
cathode through the latter, and then adjusting the tube until the centre of
the anti-cathode is observed.
7. A Shutter Diaphragm, the aperture of which can be variably adjusted
by means of levers, in the form of a rectangle. The largest aperture
is 120 X 120 mm.
8. Holders for the Tubes. — In order to avoid the unnecessary removal
of the tube-holder from the tube, when another tube is employed, extra
tube-holders are recommended, so that with this arrangement the tubes
are always centered when they have once been adjusted.
9. A Pastille Holder. — This can be inserted in an opening in the base
of the box, and is provided with a circular slot, in which the re-agents
of the Saboraud and Noire radiometers are inserted. By turning the metal
piece the re-agents are prevented from falling out.
Instructions for Use. — The stand is earthed, as already described, by
connecting the terminal by means of a wire with gas or water pipe,
or possibly with the neutral wire of the supply mains. When moving the
tube-box, the handle can always be held with one hand. In order to
adjust the box, it should be brought to the desired position by loosening the
lever, and then fixed rigidly at once by means of the same lever. This
lever when loosened should only be turned so far as to enable the box to be
easily revolved. Then the box can be turned into the desired position
round the arm, and &Ked again by means of a lever. Finally, the box is
raised to the desired height, and if necessary rotated round the colunm,
THE X-RAY COUCH 67
and then tightened up again by means of the lever provided. Care
should always be taken that the fixing screw for the tube-carrier is well
tightened up, so that the wood carrier does not fall out when turning the
box. Should it be desired to apply fluoroscopy or radiography to thick
parts of the body, the wood carrier front may be completely removed.
Couches and Stands
A simple couch will suffice for a small installation. In large institu-
tions, where a considerable amount of work has to be got through quickly,
a couchi with mechanical contrivances is necessarv. The couch should be
Fig. 66. — A eouvenieut form of X-ray couch. (Siemens.)
jPitted with a protected tube-box, the top of the table is so constructed that the patient may be
moved in several directions to facilitate centering of parts of the body over the X-ray tube.
sufficiently protected, and should have conveniences for working with the
tube below the table. When possible overhead work should be undertaken.
Tfiis compressor is a most important piece of apparatus, mounted
upon a suitable table with adjustments and tube-carriers, and is a great help
tto the radiographer, since it facilitates the work and saves time if the adjust-
anents are easily worked. There are many forms to select from, and a great
deal must be left to the individual worker.
The Albers-Schonherg Compressor is the best-known pattern, and such
a compressor apparatus has become an absolutely essential auxiliary for
radiography. The chief advantages which are guaranteed to the radio-
grapher by its proper use may be briefly summarised as follows :
1. By means of the compressor diaphragm the secondary rays which
affect the value of the radiograph can be screened completely.
2. The parts under examination can be kept absolutely at rest, so that
68
RADIOGKAPHY
Fig. 67.— Albers-Sclionberg compressor. (Siemens.)
Fig. 68. — A couch fitted with protected tube-box underneath. (Butt.)
This has movements in three directions, and is arranged for stereoscopic work. Au upright
attached to the box carries a horizontal arm to which is fitted a plumb-line to indicate the
exact position of the anti-cathode of the tube. On the upper aspect of the couch a movable tube-
holder is fitted. This has attached to it a compression diaphragm. It is also arranged for
the taking of stereoscoj^ic negatives.
ON THE USE OF THE COMPRESSOR 69
want of sharpness, due to voluntary or involuntary movement, to respiration
or pulsation of the heart, is eliminated.
3. All parts of the human body can be radiographed, so that the com-
pressor apparatus can be employed for all exposures required, \\^th the
exception of general exposures over a large area of the body.
It is now generally recognised that a certain quantity of X-rays are
given off by the glass walls as well as by the other metal electrodes of the
tube, in addition to the bulk of the X-rays emanating from the anti-cathode.
Owing to the presence of inverse current in the tube, some cathode rays are
produced from the anode, and others also start from the edges of the cathode,
and these are all converted into secondary X-rays.
These secondary X-rays, which are produced in much larger quantities
in hard than in soft tubes, are the primary cause of lack of definition, detail,
and contrast ; they produce general fog in negatives, and so lessen the
value of the results of the more difficult radiographs.
The compressor apparatus consists of a lead-lined metal cylindrical or
rectangular box, with an opening at
the upper end for the insertion of
diaphragms. The cylinder effectu-
ally absorbs and screens off all stray
secondary rays, allowing only those
X-rays emanating from the anti-
cathode to reach the photographic
plate. This can be proved at any
time by observing a fluorescent f^g. gg.-Extension tube of a Kidwig compressor
screen placed below the cylinder, to show method of compression. (Siemens. )
when a brightly illuminated centre
only will be seen ; a wider circle of fluorescence, indicating the presence of
stray secondary rays, is only observed when inefficient diaphragms are
employed.
By the time the X-rays have traversed the distance between the tube
and the fluorescent screen or photographic plate, they have become very
much diffused, and the thicker the subject the greater the diflusion. The
primary object, therefore, is to reduce this distance in order to obtain quicker
exposure and sharper and more brilhant radiographs, and for this purpose
it is' necesary to combine a compressor with the cylinder. The end of the
cylinder is fitted with an ebonite rim, and the whole apparatus is raised
and lowered by a lever.
Some parts of the human body can be compressed three or four inches
without causing any discomfort to the patient, and the time of exposure is
thus very greatly reduced. The compressor is also of great use in reducing
the movement due to respiration, and thereby conduces to greater sharpness
and definition in the radiograph.
There are modifications of this type of compressor which are preferred
by some workers, and possess advantages over the Albers-Schonberg. The
compressor introduced by Dr. Gilbert Scott possesses all the advantages
70
RADIOGRAPHY
of the Schonberg apparatus, and is much more adaptable and easy of
manipulation.
The Upright Screening" Stand. — This useful piece of apparatus may
be simple or very complicated, with conveniences for stereoscopic exposures.
All movements must be easy. Several types of screening stands are
illustrated. The most useful are Levy-Dorn, Wenckebach, the extremely
Fig. 70. — Screening stand arranged for stereoscopic work in the ^ipright position.
(Butt.)
The apparatus is arranged so that tube- and plate-holder move automatically at the
right moment. The whole mechanism is controlled from the switch table.
ingenious but complicated one designed by Schmidt of Berlin, and the
apparatus of Butt with automatic stereoscopic movements. Care should
be taken to ensure the complete protection of the operator. The fluor-
escent screen should have protected handles, and the front must be pro-
tected by thick lead glass. This should be tested to make sure that it is
efficient.
The Levy Dorn Screening Stand is constructed in such a manner that it
SCREENING STAND
71
can be used for other purpo'ses in addition to screening, and so it forms
a very complete type of apparatus, particularly in small hospitals where
the space devoted to the X-ray department is very limited. The ap-
paratus consists essentially of a large, totally enclosed protective lined
tube-box, with lead-glass observation window fitted with sliding shutter
on one side ; at the back is a door and on the front is fitted the dia-
phragm, compressor tube, and other pieces of apparatus. This tube-box is
mounted on a carrying frame, which is fitted A\dth slots, so that it can be
brought nearer or taken further from the patient, also the whole box can
be entirely rotated. The frame carrying the tube-box is attached to a strong
square framework, running up and down between the upright sides of
Fig. 71. — Screening stand arranged for work
beneath the table. (Siemens. )
Tig. 72. — Screening stand arranged for examina-
tions in the upright position. (Siemens.)
the stand. This frame is fitted with counterweights, so as to move freely
up and down, and on the front of it are two rods projecting forward, and
sliding on these rods is a metal carrier and carriage for holding the fluorescent
screen or plate-holder, which can be angled to follow the contour of any part
it is desired to examine or radiograph. The whole of the control of this ap-
paratus can be manipulated from the front, so that it is entirely unnecessary
for the operator to put his hands near the tube-box. As will be seen,
the fluorescent screen can be moved freely across the patient by means of
its own protective handles ; the aperture of the diaphragm is controlled by
means of the two flexible cables and handles seen on the right in Fig. 71 ;
the handle on the left-hand side causes the tube-box to travel from side to
side at the back, and the large wheel seen on the right is for raising and lower-
ing the whole of the frame carrying the tube-box and screen-carrier. Now,
72
KADIOGKAPHY
Fig, 73. — Screening stand arranged to work as a
compressor. (Siemens. )
as to its other purposes, the tube-box can be lowered to the ground and
rotated, a quarter-revolution bringing the opening of the tube-box towards
„, the ceiling of the room. A couch or
table can be moved over the box in
this position, and examinations and
radiographs made with the tube
below. Or, on the other hand, the
tube-box can be rotated from its
screening position a quarter-turn in
the other direction, so that the aper-
ture is towards the floor. The frame
carrying the tube-box can be now
raised upwards, a compressor tube
affixed, and the front of the box
and a couch or table passed under
or through the stand. The tube-
box can now be lowered, and
compression work undertaken as
with an Albers - Schonberg com-
pressor. If the tube-box be rotated
a half-revolution, then the patient
can be brought close up to the
diaphragm, and on the other hand
tele-radiographs can be accurately made with the aid of a simple centering
arrangement provided with the apparatus.
The Wenckebach Screening Stand is somewhat different, and is con-
structed for screen examinations and exposures from the screening position
only. It is, however, an excellent stand for those specialising in screen
examinations. It is constructed in two units. One unit might be called the
screen unit and the other the tube-box unit. The former consists of a frame
carrying the fluorescent screen and plate-holder, which fits into a parchment
frame marked with divisions, so that a note can be made of the exact position,
and an examination repeated. This frame and screen is counterbalanced,
and can be easily raised or lowered in a large upright framework. On the
back of this framework are fitted at convenient intervals bands for passing
round the patient to keep him in a fixed position. There is also a lamp
which throws a light on the scales of the second part of the apparatus. The
latter or second part consists of a large protective-lined tube-box, mounted
on a frame which is carried on a second upright framework, and from this
project forward, one on either side, two long arms with convenient wheel
handles, one on the left-hand side for raising and lowering the tube-box,
and one on the right for moving it across from side to side ; also close beside
the latter are the two flexible cables and handles for controlling the aperture
of the diaphragm. This second part is mounted on rails laid in the floor, and
the object of the long arms is that the operator, while maldng his screen
examination, can push the tube further away, or draw it nearer the patient
UNIVERSAL PROTECTIVE STAND
73
with the utmost comfort and ease. A stool can also be provided to support
the patient if necessary.
Fig. 74, — Wenckebach .screening stand.
(Siemens.)
Fig. 75. — Wenckebach screening
(Siemens. )
Universal Safety and Protective Tube-stand. — The demand for
a universal apparatus is increasing as the real importance of the Rontgen
examination of the internal organs is recognised. There are, of course,
various devices for radiographing the patient in a standing or sitting position,
but a simple and handy universal apparatus for both fluoroscopy and radio-
graphy is much to be desired. The desiderata of such an apparatus are
many. The most important of .these are the fixation of the body, the
straightness of the trunk, and the accurate adjustment of the normal ray
to any desired point on the surface. In addition, any such apparatus, if
it is to be universal, must be equally efl&cient when the patient is reclining,
sitting, or standing, and should be easily adjustable for tele-radiography up
to a distance of 2 metres or more. Finally, it should be capable of being
easily and quickly handled, and it should not be too expensive.
First, as to the straightness of the trunk. It is absolutely essential that
this should be as accurate as possible for exact radiography, and for locaUsa-
tion and measurement of the internal organs. Straightening by the eye is
quite inadequate. The difficulty may be overcome satisfactorily by a
mechanical device which carries out this straightening automatically. The
trunk is often moved during the exposure, even by intelligent patients, and
the picture thereby spoilt. This difficulty is partially overcome by in-
stantaneous exposures of one-hundredth of a second or less ; but, never-
theless, an efficient means of holding the patient is absolutely necessary
since no movement should take place between the completion of the adjust-
74
KADIOGEAPHY
ment of the part to be radiographed and the exposure of the negative.
Moreover, it is of importance to minimise to a certain extent the costal and
abdominal respiratory movements, especially in the radiography of the
kidneys.
The apparatus shown in Fig. 76 is constructed from this point of view.
It consists of a heavy base and framework, with a well-protected tube-box,
which can be moved in all directions, the fluorescent screen being suspended
by cords and counterpoises. There is in addition a special tube adjustment,
and a set of rails and a small table for distance radiography.
The fixation board, which will take a plate-holder of any size, is furnished
mth three pairs of padded clamps, each pair being moved by the simple turn-
ing of a single handle, so that they
are always at the same distance
from the middle line of the board.
The upper pair are made in the
form of well -padded shoulder-
caps, inclined in such a manner
that, when brought together, they
hold the patient's shoulders
firmly, and at the same time
press them against the plate-
holder. To the top edge of the
board is attached an adjustable
support for the chin. Between
the two lower pairs of clamps is a
broad compression band, which
can be readily tightened up by
turning a handle. Another
handle can raise or depress the
plate-holder, so that even after
the fixation of the trunk the
plate may be brought to any re-
quired height, or depressed as
much as 20 centimetres below
the board, for radiography of the pelvic organs.
In the centre of the supporting board is a large opening for the diaphragm
tube, for use in radioscopy. There is also a receptacle for small cross-shaped
lead labels, backed with plaster, which can easily be attached to any portion
of the skin.
For radiography in a reclining position the fixation board may be
detached from the framework. As it weighs only 40 pounds, it can easily
be carried by one person, and placed on the X-ray table or ambulance.
The framework is 6 feet high, and is mounted on castors. It is provided
with a small wooden frame with counterpoises, which is easily adjustable by
means of a hand-wheel at the back. This carries the fixation board and
clamps, and the guide rails for the tube-box and fluorescent screen.
Fig
itaud.
7tj. — Auseful forui of universal exauiiuin
(Siemens. )
This combines nearly all the movements that are
necessary for a complete examination, and is efficiently
protected.
USES OF THE UNIVEKSAL STAND 75
For radiography of the stomach, the fixation board may be brought
forward in an inclined position by means of two hinged wooden flaps.
The tube-box travels along the guide rails by means of an endless screw,
and can be moved vertically as well as horizontally. The trolley which
carries the spindle is locked in the central position by a spring, thus giving
at once the position in which the focus of the tube and the normal ray are in
line with the centre line of the fixation board, and therefore with the axis
of the patient's body. The guide rails are graduated so as to give the exact
distance of the focus from the plate. The tube is centred once for all by
means of an adjustment tube attached to the diaphragm. It is supported
in its wooden box by a wooden screw and three pads covered with felt.
The focus-tube adjuster is a tube at right angles to the plate and the
body of the patient. This is moved about by a special sHde till its aperture
coincides with a point on the surface of the body which has previously been
marked by a lead label. In order to focus the central normal ray, this
tube is adjusted till the lead label coincides with the crossed threads in the
tube, reflected by a small mirror, and viewed through a lateral eyepiece.
The tube-adjuster is thus in every position perpendicular to the plane of the
photographic plate, and its extremity is always exactly 50 centimetres from
the plate. At the side of the tube-box is a spring tape-measure, by means of
which the exact focus distance, up to 2 metres or more, may be determined.
The fluorescent screen is suspended by cords and counterpoises, and
moves up and down in exact correspondence with the tube-box. Its move-
ment is effected by means of a hand-wheel at the back of the apparatus.
For distant radiography the rails are attached to the foot-board, and a
small table on three wheels placed on the rails. The tube-box is unscrewed
from the spindle, and fixed in a slot in the far side of this table.
The principal uses of the apparatus are :
1. Radioscopy of the internal organs, under absolutely constant con-
ditions,
2. Distant exposures (2 metres) with the patient vertical or horizontal.
3. Radiographic exposures of all kinds (universal tube-stand).
The examination of the internal organs may be made in the rechning,
standing, or sitting positions. In order to straighten and fix the trunk,
it is advisable, first, to bring the shoulder-caps in light contact with the
shoulders, and then to lower the whole fixation board, with the attached
overhead rails, firmly on to the shoulders, so that they are exactly at
the same height. The handle is then turned until the shoulders are firmly
pressed back against the plate-holder. When placed against the pads, the
patient will naturally assist the adjustment by moving towards one side or
the other, until the pressure of both sides is sensibly equal. The trunk
itself is pressed against the plate, by tightening up the compressor band
by means of the fourth handle.
After the patient has been fixed, the plate may be brought into the best
position by turning the handle. The next thing is to mark with a lead
cross the point on the surface of the body which has to be f ocussed, and the
76 RADIOGKAPHY
centering tube is brought into immediate contact with this cross. Since this
little focussing-tube is exactly in the centre line of the apparatus when held
by the spring catch on the transverse rail, the centre line of the body — for
instance, one of the spinous processes — must be brought into line with the
tube by slightly turning the trunk. The tube may now be run back to the
required distance as measured on the guide rails, and the normal ray remains
accurately adjusted with regard to the specified point on the surface of the
body ; it may easily be readjusted at any time if required. For long
exposures the tube-box can be kept more steady by supporting it also on
the small table. With a little practice the whole process of straightening the
trunk and fixing it, together with focussing and bringing the ray vertically
on to the plate and determining the distance of the tube, can be performed
in under one minute.
For a " standard exposure," the question of the distance of the focus-
tube from the plate is of the greatest importance. This " focus distance "
should be constant. It is a matter of some difiiculty to determine
whether to make the " standard exposure " a short one, getting a sharp
picture, but with considerable distortion ; or whether to make it a
distance exposure, say at 2 metres, with Httle distortion, but faint and
often with hardly satisfactory definition. Apparently, there is only one
solution of the problem at the present time — namely, to have two " standard
focus distances " : 70 centimetres for near exposure, and 2 metres for
distance exposures.
The advantage of telerontgenography as avoiding distortion admits of
little doubt, but this is of slight service at present, when such exposures
are very seldom successful. The principle of the " standard exposure "
necessitates conditions which are easily reahsable by any one, viz. a near
exposure of 70 centimetres. Such an exposure may now be made satis-
factorily in a very short time. The focussing for a " standard exposure "
can be carried out suitably once for all on the axis of the body, in which
case the distortion of any internal organ, such as the heart, in the region of
the centre line, is extremely shght. There remains a distortion of the con-
tours towards the periphery. Alban Kohler and others have shown that
the displacement of the image of the left edge of the heart is greater by
1 centimetre with a focus distance of 70 centimetres than with a focus
distance of 2 metres. This error of 1 centimetre need not cause any per-
plexity so long as it is constant, and in proportion to the whole thorax picture
and to the surface landmarks. If, for example, we have projected on the
plate the mammillary line, a radiogram taken under similar conditions will
always show the outer edge of the heart in a definite relation to this line
and to the outer boundary of the thorax. The same holds good for disten-
sion of the aorta and for other departures from the normal. One can there-
fore make a diagnosis from the plate alone, on the assumption that the
exposure is a " standard " one. The distance of 70 centimetres is recom-
mended because it strikes the mean between distortion and good definition
in the negative. The tube-director of the apparatus is adjusted for this
" STAND AED" EXPOSURES 77
focus distance of 70 centimetres, so that no measurement whatever is neces-
sary. Moreover, a locking device is attached to the guide rails at 70 centi-
metres, so that the standard distance is oVjtained automatically.
Finally, in order to give an indication on each plate that the " standard
exposure " has been given, the position of the normal ray is indicated on each
plate by the projection of the lead label on the specific " landmark." This
is a check on the whole adjustment, and at the same time a characteristic
sign of the particular normal exposure in question. As these anatomical
points are constant for each region, they serve the purpose much better than
the umbilicus usually employed, which is seldom selected as the focussing-
point, and consequently varies in the position of its projection.
The following are the specific normal points, or Rontgen landmarks,
for the examination of the internal organs. They are all on the median line
of the body.
Standard Points on the Median Lines at Various Levels.
Chest: 1. The xyphoid process (anterior position).
2. The line between the angles of the scapulae (posterior
position).
Abdomen : 3. Line between the spines of the ilia (anterior position).
4. Line of the iliac crests (posterior position).
Pelvis : 5. The lower edge of the symphysis pubis.
6. The tip of the coccyx.
The landmark for the " standard exposure " of the hip- joint is the centre
of Poupart's hgament. This is the only landmark which is not median.
A flexible ruler is supplied with the apparatus, which renders it easy to
obtain the exact position of the adherent lead disc, by marking on the skin
the intersection of the median line with the transverse line.
Such anatomical points or landmarks have, however, the disadvantage
that they cannot in every case be accurately determined, and are not always
quite constant. With the Universal Apparatus, therefore, a set-square is
supplied, which gives the Rontgen landmarks without further measurement.
By a very simple device the distance from the shoulder to the crest of the
ilium is measured, and divided into three equal sections. The upper division
gives the level of the Rontgen point for chest exposures, and the lower
division for stomach exposures, whether dorso-ventral or ventro-dorsal.
These points are absolutely constant and easy to determine.
When reference is made to a " standard radiogram " of an internal
organ, the first thought is of the heart, as the great aim of X-ray technique
has always been to provide an accurate and useful picture of this vital organ.
When it was impossible to reproduce the actual size of the heart, and even
pictures with a similar amount of distortion could not be obtained, the
orthodiagraph was devised to provide a tracing of the organ from a
number of isolated points. At that time exposures of the internal
organs were considerably below the present standard. By making an
78 RADIOGEAPHY
orthodiagram one obtained, at any rate, a dotted normal projection
of this organ, even although it was influenced somewhat by the personal
factor of the operator. There were in addition several sources of error
due to the process and to movements of the patient. All these dis-
.advantages are avoided by the use of the modern rapid exposure with
reinforcing screen. Moreover, it is difficult to take an entire orthodiagram
during the same phase of diastole, and the drawing, which requires some
time to make, often shows one part in diastole, another in systole. The
tracing, therefore, often affords a much less accurate diagnosis than the
photograph in which we have the united product of diastole and systole, and
the contours are constant, and in their true relation to the margin of the
thorax and other landmarks. By means of the small adjustable sector,
it is easy to determine on the plate the constant line midway between the
axis of the body and the outer edge of the ribs at the level of the diaphragm.
The normal heart does not project beyond this hne, and its margin forms
n definite angle with the axis, which may be measured by the diagonal of
the instrument. If now the sector be laid on the patient's chest, and the
constant middle line is displaced 1 centimetre inwards, so as to correct for
distortion of the shadow, we may draw the actual size of the heart on the
skin, and check it by the image on the plate. In any case, this so-called
" constant middle fine " provides a landmark which is much more trustworthy
than the extremely variable mammillary line. This constant line may be
easily determined by using the sector.
In conclusion, we would draw attention to the importance of the " stand-
ard exposure " for examinations of the intestinal tract, where we have often
to make a series of successive exposures of the same patient. An accurate
comparison is impossible, except when the pictures have been made under
exactly similar conditions. Further, it is of the greatest importance to know
precisely the position of the pylorus, the fundus ventriculi, and the transverse
colon. The possibility of incorrect diagnosis in consequence of variable
•adjustments should be altogether excluded.
Universal Examining" Chair. — This chair is used chiefly for screen
work and for superficial radiographs. The chief object in view in the design
rof the chair is to obtain as exact and as reliable a fixed position for the
patient as possible. This is obtained by two wide straps fixed to the sail-
cloth back of the chair, which hold the patient in an upright position, and by
two easily adjustable axle supports, which prevent any movement sideways.
'The feet are well supported by a footstool, which may be adjusted to any
ieight. When taking screen observations of the stomach, the seat can be
leplaced by a bicycle saddle, which is better suited for this work.
In order that the observer can undertake the examination of these parts
in the most comfortable position, and without bending, it is necessary,
-after fixing the patient, to bring him to the height desired by the observer.
This is attained by an oil pump which is built into the very massive base of
the chair, and which is operated by pressure of the foot on a pedal. The
locking of the chair takes place automatically after the foot is removed.
EXAMINING CHAIR
79
The fluorescent screen necessary for observation is secured by a holder
fixed to the arms of the chair, and may be adjusted in all directions. In
addition, the screen can be removed very easily, so that it may be replaced
quickly by a dark slide contain-
ing the photographic plate.
Should it be desired, after the
examination has been completed,
to bring the patient back into the
original position, it is only neces-
sary to depress the second small
pedal in order to release the
locking device. Thereupon, the
chair sinks slowly into the original
position, owing to the excellent
braking power of the pump.
The chair can be moved
about easily, and may also be
turned round its vertical axis with
the foot, so that the hands of the
radiographer need never come in
the path of the rays.
Rieder's Exposure Stand.
— Another very useful piece of
apparatus is an exposure stand,
originally used by Dr. Rieder for
taking radiographs, with the
patient either sitting or standing.
It is specially suitable for thorax,
stomach, and abdomen exposures.
Another valuable addition is
a little protective lead-lined Fig. 77.— Examining chair fitted with mechanical
screen, with an adjustable lead- .r^^'^^^'^ts to facilitate the rapid manipulation of
' _ J _ the patient. (Siemens. )
lined sliding leaf, arranged with a
clamp for fluorescent screen and plate-holder. This little apparatus should
be mounted on good castors so as to move freely, and it can be used for
many purposes. It is constructed primarily for the protection of the operator
when screening, but it can also be used for the patient to stand against, and
to support himself whilst being radiographed. It can be used in conjunc-
tion with any X-ray couch, screening-stand, or tube-stand, and also if a
long therapeutic appHcation has to be made this screen can be placed
between the operator and the tube, so that no radiation from the latter
falls on the operator.
THE ARRANGEMENT OF APPARATUS
In a work of this size it is difficult to deal adequately with so wide a
subject, but for practical purposes it will be sufficient to describe :
(1) A small installation.
(2) An installation for a general hospital or consulting radiologist.
(3) An installation for a special hospital.
(4) An installation (a) for a hospital for military service, (6) for field
service.
Each scheme will be capable of modifications according to local demands,
but the basis of each should form a working nucleus upon which the individual
operator may build a complete scheme. A scheme for the arrangement of
apparatus and a system of dealing mth photographic details will also be
included. A system of filing negatives and reports should be adopted in
every department.
1. A Small Installation
There is a demand for small installations to meet the needs of practi-
tioners desirous of examining their cases in the course of ordinary consulta-
tion, of school clinics, especially those where treatment is carried out, and
where occasional radioscopic examination is required, and finally of small
hospitals, where for various reasons an elaborate installation is not possible.
A comparatively large coil (say 15-inch spark-gap) is desirable. Further,
a simple control apparatus is required, either mounted on the wall or pre-
ferably on a wheeled trolley ; and a mercury interrupter, with dielectric of
paraffin or preferably of gas ; when rapid exposures are desired, an electro-
lytic interrupter should be added, and this necessitates a change-over switch
in the control apparatus. In order to suppress reverse current, an adjustable
spark-gap, introduced in the secondary circuit, is sufficient where small
currents are used ; while for heavier discharges, obtained by using the
electrolytic interrupter, valve tubes are necessary. A suitable tube-holder,
with efficient protection and with the necessary fittings for therapeutic work
is required, viz. tripod for treatment of ringworm, pastille holder, filters,
etc. A simple examination-table with three-ply wood or canvas top, and a
simple screening-stand are requisite. A vellum window may be fitted into
a wooden frame which can be moved to any portion of the couch. This
allows practically all the rays to pass through to the fluorescent screen,
and gives the maximum value in screening. These may be combined in
an apparatus which may be used for either purpose. A fluorescent screen,
80
ARRANGEMENT OF APPARATUS
81
protected with lead glass and provided with hand-guards, a supply of
X-ray tubes, X-ray proof gloves, Benoist radiometer, oscilloscope tube,
milliamperemeter, and photographic plates are also necessary. When
instantaneous exposures are to be carried out, a casette for plates with an
intensifying screen must be added.
SijiniermeteT
Fig. 78. — Aconveuient form of apparatus arranged
on an upright cabinet. (Watson.)
Fig. 79.— To illustrate the parts as
arranged in Fig. 78.
Portable Apparatus.— This may take the form of a trolley outfit
in a compact cabinet, capable of being wheeled from ward to ward, and
obtaining its current supply from the electric mains. For work in private
houses or institutions unprovided with electrical installation, it is necessary
to have an outfit which derives its current supply from accumulators.
Essentially it is the same as the small installation described above, but a
12-inch coil is for various reasons more convenient. A mercury-interrupter
of the " Sanax " type is convenient ; a tube-stand of lighter construction
and a portable examination table may be added. The connections of the
82 RADIOGEAPHY
accumulators are illustrated in the accompanying diagram. When exposing
plates with a portable apparatus, a casette and intensifying screen should be
used, as these greatly shorten the length of exposure.
2. Installation for a General Hospital or Consulting
Radiologist
The essential features of a somewhat more complex installation may be
briej&y enumerated.
(a) One or more coil outfits, with, where possible, a powerful instrument,
such as a high-tension rectifier, a Snook machine, or a powerful coil outfit
fitted with three breaks (mercury with gas dielectric, triple Wehnelt, and, if
possible, a single-impulse switch). With a high-tension rectifier apparatus
one can add a single-impulse switch.
(6) A second outfit of less capacity is useful as a stand-by in case of a
break-down. This is an important point, because in a large institution
work must go on constantly.
(c) Overhead high-tension cables, properly insulated, should be stretched
from one end of the room to the other.
{d) A change-over switch is useful when two installations are used,
and another switch for quickly connecting to various pieces of apparatus.
This may also be accompanied by adjustable tube leads, running on wheels
along the high-tension cables. The plan shown on p. 83 illustrates the best
arrangement of apparatus when one room only is available. The various
pieces of apparatus are marked on the plan.
The dark room should be in close proximity to the X-ray room, but
care should be taken to ensure thorough protection of the unexposed plates
and papers.
For large institutions a suite of rooms is necessary. The plan on page
84 shows the arrangement of rooms at King's College Hospital. The
rooms are marked according to the use they are put to. When a separate
building is available, it can be specially planned to meet the requirements of
the institution.
Should it be necessary to plan an X-ray department, great care should
be paid to the arrangements of the radiographic room. The fighting of this
room should be carefully planned. A large window means that trouble will
arise when it is necessary to darken the room, consequently the smallest
possible window space must be allowed. The radiographic room must be
large. It should have in close proximity to it a waiting-room, one or more
dressing-rooms, and a preparation-room where patients may be anaesthetised
or an opaque enema administered prior to taking the patient to the radio-
graphic room. This room should have an adequate supply of hot and cold
water and other conveniences. These additional rooms should open into
the radiographic room. Doorways should be wide enough to allow of the
passage of a large trolley.
83
84
EADIOGRAPHY
Fig. 81. — Plan of the X-ray and electrical departments at King's College Hospital. (By kind
permission of W. A. Pike, Esq., F.R.I.B.A.)
The cubicles marked "electrical treatment" are fitted with X-ray installations. The room
marked " dressings " has since been fitted up as an operating-theatre for electro-coagulation and
for operations for removal of foreign bodies under X-rays.
INSTALLATION FOR A SPECIAL HOSPITAL 85
3. Installation for a Special Hospital
The plan of an Electrical Institution is shown on page 86 ; this building
was specially planned for the purpose, and is quite complete in details.
The ground floor contains a waiting-hall with lavatory accommodation,
a small consulting- room with dressing-rooms, — the former fitted \nth. a
desk, filing cabinet, and examination lamps, etc.
The Radiographic Room. — This contains the large single-impulse
apparatus, with the regulating apparatus in a lead-lined protection cabinet.
A couch and screening-stand form the chief accessory apparatus. Cupboards
for tubes, etc., form part of the furniture of the room. There is a viewing-
box, to take two 15 by 12 negatives, a stereoscope, and a large viewing-box,
to take six 15 by 12 plates, each with removable fronts, adapted to hold
smaller plates. Two dark rooms adjoin the radiographic room. The inner
dark room is fitted with the viewing apparatus, which will be described in
detail later.
The First Floor. — This is devoted to radio- and electro-therapy, and
has, in addition to the special X-ray treatment cubicles, cubicles for
carbon- dioxide snow work, radium treatment, diathermy, the mercury
vapour lamp, Schnee four-celled bath, and galvanism and faradism.
A feature of this room, and also of one at a general hospital, is a small
room fitted as an operating-room for diathermy, electro-coagulation, and
operations for the removal of foreign bodies under X-rays. A photograph
of one of these rooms is shown on page 266 to give some idea of the
arrangement of apparatus.
The Dark Room. — When a large amount of work has to be got through
it is necessary to have a large and well-equipped dark room, with possibly
an outer dark room. This should contain cupboards for plates, papers, etc.
A reducing lantern is useful for the supply of reduced prints, lantern sHdes,
etc. The dark room should be carefully planned to facilitate speedy work-
ing. The entrance should be carefully guarded by two doors with an interval
between. It is an advantage to have them so arranged that the two cannot
be open at the same time. Shelving and cupboard accommodation should
be provided. The ventilation should be good, and the heating of the room
should be carefully attended to. Several fights are required : (a) Two or
more ruby lights ; (6) a yellow fight for printing, etc. The development
should be arranged for at one end of the room, a capacious sink with a good
supply of hot and cold water being provided. Next to this is placed a
washing tank, then a fixing tank or tanks, and lastly another washing tank.
These should all be large and deep. A drying rack should be placed at this
end of the room, and a viewing-box for inspection of the negatives when
wet. Plates and papers should be kept in a cupboard at the opposite end
of the room, if an outer dark room has not been provided.
In the largest hospitals the organisation of the electrical department
becomes more involved. It is only when the whole department is under
86
RADIOGEAPHY
efficient control that good work can be turned out in a routine manner.
The efficiency, therefore, of such departments depends on thorough organisa-
tion more than on individual effort. All the workers must be trained to
:^
Fig. 82. —Plans of the electrical department at the Cancer Hospital, Fulham.
(By kind permission of E. M. Pole, Esq.)
perform their particular part of the general whole in the most efficient manner
possible.
X-RAYS IN MILITARY SERVICE 87
4. Installation for a Hospital for Military Service
Equipment for Military Radiography. — Radiography has been
found to be of great use in the detection of fractures and foreign bodies.
Its value therefore in the medical equipment of the military service is
beyond doubt. Thorough equipment and organisation are necessary to
obtain the maximum value, as it is often a matter of great difficulty
to deal in the most efficient manner wdth the large amount of work which
at times presents itself. The ideal scheme is one which is simple, com-
prehensive, and efficient, and this entails much prehminary detail work.
An efficient scheme, and one which commends itself, consists of : (1) An
installation at a base hospital, (2) a serviceable installation at a collecting
hospital, (3) a portable outfit for use on the field.
(1) The equipment at the base hospital should be complete in every
detail, because it is here that very important work must be thoroughly and
expeditiously carried out.
The question of staff depends on the amount of work required, but the
equipment suitable for a general hospital is suitable for such a base hospital.
The advantages of a thorough equipment are other than purely radiographic,
as it can be used as a training school where medical men, nurses, and orderHes
can receive appropriate instruction in all branches of the work. Also it is
here that cases requiring very careful investigation and exact localisation
can be referred from the collecting centre.
(2) The Collecting Hospital. — This outfit should be more or less a
stationary one, with ample conveniences for photographic work ; but at the
same time the apparatus should be arranged to allow of quick transport
from place to place when the forces are moving rapidly.
The following apparatus should place a useful outfit in the hands of the
radiographer: (1) Electrical Supply. To obtain the necessary electrical supply
the choice lies between (a) accumulators and (6) petrol engine and dynamo.
The latter is undoubtedly the better, though it is a good plan to include a set
of accumulators which can be charged from the dynamo. The petrol engine
and dynamo are mounted on a combination bed-plate ; a magneto ignition
carburettor fuel tank and radiator should form part of the set. At a speed
of 700 revolutions per second the apparatus should generate 1 kilowatt or 100
volts and 10 amperes. The whole should be completed with shunt regulator
switch-board for charging accumulators, and there should be a radiator for
cooling purposes. This set should be arranged for direct connection to the
X-ray apparatus. (2) A set of portable accumulator batteries consisting of six
cells and 50 ampere-hour output. (3) A 12- or preferably a 15-inch portable
coil with subdivided primary with a condenser and a small moto-magnetic
interrupter ; this will be found useful as a second break when the larger
one is out of action. The coil should be fitted into a strong outer wooden
case for transport. (4) The interrupter should be of good size, and one of the
many mercury jet interrupters will be most suitable. The motor should be
KADIOGEAPHY
wound to work at 100 volts on direct current, which is derived from the petrol
electric set. (5) A small switch-board and rheostat with the auxiliary control
switches should be included. This may be arranged in the form of a box,
which, when closed, allows of ready transport. (6) A simple tube-stand with
mechanical movements is necessary. It should be readily taken to pieces
if required. (7) An X-ray couch. This should have folding legs, and should
be light and fairly rigid. It should be constructed so as to allow of screening.
(8) X-ray and valve tubes. It is well to have a good supply of these. When
it is necessary to have the installation removed to another base they should be
packed in large boxes, and should be suspended from the top or sides of the
box so that they may not easily be broken in transit. Three to six tubes
will form a good set for ordinary use. (9) A fluorescent screen fitted with
Interrupter
Battery Coil in cabinet
Fig. 83. — Portable X-ray installation arranged for radiography from beneath couch.
lead glass and protective rubber handles. Also several pairs of lead-lined
gloves will be necessary. (10) Intensifying screens with casettes. A simple
form of localiser should be included. Photographic conveniences : these
must be left to the calls of the particular place the installation has to serve.
When a dark room is not available it must be provided for. A small dark
room may be constructed of wood built in sections, or a tent may be requisi-
tioned. The fittings should consist of lead-hned benches, with sink and
waste pipe. A water-supply can be connected to the sink if such is available.
A good supply of flexible tubing will be found useful when water has to be
brought from a distance. A dark-room lamp with a safe light should be
included. A candle will give sufficient illumination. (11) Developing
dishes of sizes up to 12 inches by 14 inches, also draining racks, etc. (12) A
supply of X-ray plates and X-ray paper. The latter is useful when it is not
PORTABLE FIELD OUTFIT
89
convenient to use plates. An X-ray paper for direct radiography has been
prepared. This, though not so good as the plate, is much more convenient
for transport. (13) A supply of chemicals. The tabloid developers are very
useful, as they are readily made up in a few minutes. The installation may
be varied according to the needs of the radiographer, the important point
being to provide a high standard of efficiency, combined with the possibility
of rapid movement if such be required. The efficiency will depend upon the
knowledge the operator has of his apparatus. He should be conversant with
the mechanical details of all parts, and should be able to pack, re-install, and
get into working order quickly. Practice wdll soon enable him to do all that
'-^.
Fig. 84. — Portable X-ray installation packed ready for transit (Medical Supply Association).
is necessary. When a large amount of work has to be done, assistance must
be available. One or more medical radiographers should accompany each
installation, and several orderlies or nurses must be trained to carry on the
work at any time.
In the case of large armies there must necessarily be several installations
working at various places. To facilitate rapid work a system must be
employed.
The difficult cases may be transferred to the hospitals at home if the
patient is in a condition to travel and the symptoms are not urgent. By
doing this the collecting hospitals are reheved of heavy work, involving
much time, and are able to attend to the more urgent cases as they
come in.
90 EADIOGEAPHY
For localisation of foreign bodies several methods may be used ; these
are fully described in the portion of the book dealing with localisation.
(3) The Field Outfit. — The essential is portability. The best arrange-
ment for work on the field is a small but serviceable installation fitted up in a
motor transport, the engine of which can be used to drive the dynamo which
generates the electricity. By this means a more powerful installation can
be used than when dealing with accumulators. The whole apparatus can
be fitted up in a motor bus, a portion of which can be screened of? to form
a small dark room.
Necessary Apparatus. — (1) A dynamo, (2) mercury jet interrupter,
(3) fifteen-inch coil, (4) X-ray couch with all accessories, (5) tube-stand
with mechanical movements, (6) fluoroscope for screening, (7) plates, tubes,
and dark-room requisites.
An extremely compact and portable outfit is illustrated on pages 88
and 89. It is most suitable for field work when petrol engine and dynamo
are not available. It combines portability with considerable efficiency.
It consists of :
(a) Set of accumulators.
(6) Hand-driven interrupter, which controls the current derived from
the accumulators.
The method used for obtaining the required speed from the interrupters
is somewhat ingenious, a cylindrical weight inside the interrupter giving the
effect of a fly-wheel, and permitting a regular speed to be obtained.
(c) Coil enclosed in a cabinet which is arranged to form a complete case
for the whole outfit.
(d) Tube-holder combined with the cabinet.
The small portable set when not in use for field work may be used for
radiography of cases in the wards of the hospital. There are many patients
who are not fit to be moved to the radiographic room ; such cases can con-
veniently be done in bed when a portable set is available.
PRODUCTION OF THE RADIOGRAPH
The question of exposure in radiography is one which is ever before us.
How long an exposure must we give for a particular region ? Before making
a statement on the question of time it is necessary to consider the various
factors which govern the exposure.
The Plate or Film Employed
This is the first point for consideration. X-ray plates are specially
prepared for radiographic Avork, and any of those on the market are
good. In this country the most suitable and best know^n are those of
Ilford, Wellington, Warwick, Wratten, and the Barnet. The emulsion is
spread over a sheet of glass, and the plate is enclosed in two light-tight
envelopes. A second envelope is used to avoid the danger of fogging when
one only is employed, by accidental admission of light or through pin holes
in the paper.
These special X-ray plates are expensive, so when a large amount of
work has to be got through, a cheaper plate may be used for the detection
of fractures of the extremities. When a fine detail is not essential, as in
determining the presence of a fracture or dislocation, any ordinary photo-
graphic plate can be used. The plate may be placed in a special casette, in
which case the black envelopes are not required. Care must be exercised in
the dark room, when opening a box to take out a plate, to make sure that
the light is " safe."
When the dark room is in close proximity to the radiographic room,
some form of protection must be employed to prevent the plates from being
fogged by X-rays. A box lined w-ith several millimetres of lead will be
sufficient to serve for the protection of these.
Manufacturers are endeavouring to produce a plate which will be much
faster than those at present in use.
Exposure
The length of the exposure depends upon :
(1) The quality of the tube and the degree of penetration.
(2) The strength of the current employed, the size and quahty of the
coil, and the type and frequency of the interrupter.
91
92 EADIOGRAPHY
(3) The thickness of the object.
(4) The distance of the tube from the plate.
(5) The rapidity of the X-ray plate.
The Quality of the Tube. — The operator must know the quality of
his tubes well, A hard tube should rarely be used if good radiographs are
required. A soft tube will give good detail in all the parts, but particularly
of the soft parts, where a diagnosis is required of their condition. For fine
detail in bones it is better to give long exposures with a soft tube, and trust
to the increase in the time to give the necessary detail.
The Intensity of the X-rays is in proportion to the penetrating
power of the tube multiplied by the number of milliamperes used. With
one and the same tube, 1 milUampere for 60 seconds, or 2 milhamperes
for 30 seconds, or 10 milliamperes for 6 seconds will produce the same effect
on a plate. If tubes of different penetrating power are used, the number
of milliampere-seconds required with a soft tube may be three to five times
as great as that required with a hard one. To produce a certain density on
a plate, 30 seconds' exposure with a current of 2 milliamperes may be
sufficient with a hard tube, whereas with a soft one either 150 seconds may
have to be given with a current of 2 milhamperes, or else 30 seconds
with a current of 10 milhamperes.
The next factor in the calculation of the exposure is the thickness of
the subject. Chest and abdomen, for instance, may have the same thick-
ness, but if the latter requires 200 milliampere-seconds, 50 to 80 milliampere-
seconds may be enough for the former, because the chest contains the
lungs filled with air, whereas the contents of the abdomen have a greater
atomic weight. For the same reason the head requires more milliampere-
seconds than the chest, though both may have the same thickness. The
intensity of the X-rays is in inverse proportion to the square of the
distance. While one is aware that any increase of distance means
prolongation of the exposure, it is a good point to get a good distance
away from the plate. The farther the distance between the anti-cathode
and the plate up to a limit of about 6 feet the sharper will be the resulting
radiograph. At the distance of 6 feet a natural-sized picture is obtained,
with no distortion. This distance may be employed when the exact size
of an organ like the heart is desired ; a good average working distance is
about 2 feet for parts of average thickness.
A slide rule enables us to find out the necessary exposure approximately.
The first scale contains figures for the distance between anti-cathode and
plate, varying from 12 up to 200 cm. On the second scale, figures for the
thickness of the object, varying from 2| up to 50 cm., will be found. On
the third scale is the penetrating power of the tube in Wehnelt units, from
2 up to 18 ; and the fourth scale contains the figures for the milliamperes
used, and rises from 0-5 up to 50 milliamperes.
By adjusting the two slides so that the figures for the distance, thickness,
penetration, and current which are being used are opposite to one another,
the index on the second slide points to the number of seconds required for the
ESTIMATION OF THE EXPOSURE
93
exposure, which is on the fifth' scale, beginning with I and rising up to 120
seconds.
On this basis it is possible to set down an Exposure Table which shall be
of some practical utility to the beginner. There are of course so many
special conditions that come into the matter that it is not possible to lay
SCHALL » SON
Bjjr Expocurts
PLATS. IN CTM.
M M 1! 10 5»
f •? I " li? I » I :
LCHSCK. M.
1 — I ill',' ['i'l'!'l',i''",i'^''i-'^''J,'"'i ' i ' i
rrrr ^^
J ' 1 'i'i4'i'riv"'i""i"'ri 'i'j'i' i'L'.
EXPOSURE IN SECONDS
Fig. 85.— Slide rule.
down hard and fast rules. Actual experience with the outfit and tubes
is essential, combined with the exercise of good judgment. The following
table will therefore only be taken as a guide, remembering always that
if the tube be softer or the distance greater the exposure must be corre-
spondingly increased. The exposure must also be increased for abnormal
stoutness, and so on. Above all, each focus tube, no matter what its degree
of hardness, must be worked to just that extent which signifies maximum
eflaciency, neither under-running nor overstraining. This point is dealt
with fully in the chapter on Tubes.
Object.
Distance
from plate
to anti-
cathode.
Penetration.
Wehnelt
Scale.
Benoist and
Bauer.
M.A.
Seconds.
Skull, occipito-frontal
Skull, transversely ....
Skull, teeth (with film inside) .
Cervical vertebrae ....
Shoulder .
Thorax
Lumbar region
Abdomen
Ribs
Knee-joint
Femur
Ankle and foot
Wrist, hand
Stomach (Bismuth meal) .
Kidney
Pelvis
Hip-joint
Heart
Lungs, diagnosis of early tuberculosis
Inches.
18
18
15
18
18
18
18
22-28
22
22
18
22
18
24
18
24
24
24
22
9-10
6-7
9-10
6-7
8
5
8-9
5-6
7-8
5
7-8
5
8-9
5-6
8-9
5-6
8-9
5-6
8
5
9
6
6-7
4-5
6
4
9-10
6-7
6-7
4-5
9-10
6-7
9-10
6-7
9
6
6-7
4-5
90
140
15
70
80
80
180
75
75
70
90
30
12
100
180
200
150
45
100
The above exposures are calculated without intensifying screen. If a
screen be used, the exposures are reduced to about x^th or y^th.
Rapid radiographs in one or two seconds, or even fractions of a second,
M
RADIOGRAPHY
are secured by powerful intensified coils of, say, 16-inch spark length running
with centrifugal motor mercury interrupter, utilising a heavy primary current,
and in conjunction with a good heavy-anode tube that has been well tuned
up. After practical experience, and after becoming a thorough master over
the peculiarities of his own outfit and his own focus tubes, the beginner
will soon find that he is able to reduce exposures very considerably all round.
With a single-impulse apparatus radiographs of the chest may be
obtained when an intensifying screen is used in y^ of a second. The more
recent forms of this apparatus enable the worker to obtain good radiographs
of stout patients in this time. For the abdomen the output of the apparatus
is not sufficient to produce good results. In such instances recourse must
be had to comparatively short-time exposures. With an automatic cut-out
switch tV or ^ of a second may then be sufficient. The aim of all workers
is to produce instantaneous radiographs without the use of the intensifying
screen. The Coolidge tube, with its capacity for passing heavy discharges,
jnay be a means to this end.
ExposTJKE Tables
Comparison of Different Radiometers
Benoist ....
2
2*
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Benoist-Walter .
1
2
3
4
4*
5
5^
6
Walter ....
2-3
3-4
4-5
5-6
6
6-7
7
7-8
Wehnelt
1-8
3-3
4-9
6-5
7-2
8
9
10-5
13
15
Bauer ....
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The Intensity of the X-rays varies with the Distance between Anti-cathode
and Plate or Object. — The intensity of the X-rays is in inverse proportion to
the square of the distance. If we have to expose for a certain object 3
.seconds, with a distance of 10 inches between the anti-cathode and the plate,
the time of exposure required with
will be
10 12 16 20 25 30 40 50 60 80 inches
3 4-32 7-68 12 18-75 27 48 75 108 192 seconds
■or, expressed in other figures
Distance
Exposure
10
10
14-1
20
17-3
30
20
40
22-4
50
24-5
60
26-4
70
28-3
80
30 cm.
90 M.A. seconds.
'The distances usually chosen are :
For teeth, toes, fingers, or hands
Arms, neck, leg, or foot
Nose, head, shoulder, knee .
Chest, kidney, pelvis .
10 to 12
12 „ 15
20 „ 22
22 „ 25
inches.
The distances given are approximate only. When the subject is fairly
thick, it may be necessary to have the tube at a greater distance ; also,
when the object from a diagnostic point of view is likely to be obscured by
shadows thrown by structures in front of it, it will be found advantageous
to have the tube close to the surface of the body.
PHOTOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUE 95
Caution
The distance chosen depends upon the thickness of the subject. At the
longer distances we must employ apparatus of varying power, such as an
intense single-impulse coil, or one of the forms of high-tension rectifier.
The additional advantage of working at long distances from the tube
is that both the patient and the person screening are less likely to be damaged
by the X-rays.
Care must be increased when working at a short distance, especially
when repeated examinations of a particular patient are required, that the
patient is not damaged. If work must be done at a close range it is wise to
have in front of the tube a screen of aluminium 1 mm. thick. This does not
cut oii any of the penetrating rays, but retards the softer ones, which are
likely to damage the skin.
The exposure times given on page 94 are only approximate, and should
not be taken as an absolute guide. They illustrate the principle of exposures
rather than the practice. Conditions vary with different apparatus, conse-
quently the operator must clearly understand his outfit, particularly the
X-ray tube. When very rapid exposures have to be made the difficulty of
accurate work is increased, there being no great latitude upon which to work.
Single-impulse exposures, when an intensifying screen is used, are com-
paratively easy, but even here the correct condition of the tube must be
obtained if perfect radiographs have to be produced. A tube a trifle too hard
will give an over-exposure, while a soft tube will give an under-exposure.
It is possible that when tubes constructed on the principle of the Coolidge
tube come into general use, the technique of exposure will require to be
largely remodelled.
The Adjustment of the Radiographic Plate
For X-ray examinations a special plate is employed. It is made more
sensitive, and gives greater detail by reason of a thicker emulsion, containing
more silver salt than the ordinary photographic plate.
The plate is placed in a casette or two light-proof envelopes in the dark
room, the film side of the plate being placed towards the object to be radio-
graphed.
The centering of the plate is a matter of some importance, most modern
couches having devices by which this may be done automatically. The
best method of centering is one devised by Dr. Ironside Bruce, where the
central ray from the tube can always be located by means of a plumb-line
operating over the top of the couch. This may also be used for getting the
centre of the plate exactly in the centre of the part to be examined.
The part of the patient to be examined should always be as close to
the plate as possible. On the couch some form of compression must be
employed to keep the parts as quiet as possible. When the screening-stand
is used, the part is first examined by the aid of the fluorescent screen, and
96
EADIOGRAPHY
the diaphragm adjusted to cover the part required. The fluorescent screen
is replaced by the X-ray plate in a casette and clamped in position, and the
patient may be fixed by a strong linen band or a bandage. The shorter the
exposure the less risk is there of movement on the part of the patient spoiling
the result.
The Use of the Intensifying Screen
Though negatives obtained by the use of the intensifying screen may
not perhaps be of the same high technical quality as the best radiographs
Fig. 86. — Normal hand to illustrate value of an intensifying screen.
(a) An intensifying screen was used for this (b) Taken without an intensifying screen with ten
radiograph, the exposure being yV "^f that for (b).
The radiogTaph was considerably over-exposed.
times the exposure. Note the detail in soft parts.
made by powerful installations without a screen, it should be noted that
when skilfully used, pictures so obtained with apparatus of moderate power
are, from a diagnostic point of view, of much greater value than those
obtained without a screen. This is especially the case when radiographing
parts of the body where movements are constantly going on, as in the chest
and abdomen. The plate must not be over-exposed, otherwise grain, due
to contact with the screen, is bound to appear. A soft tube also is necessary
when the screen is used, and it should be noted that there is not quite the
same degree of latitude in the matter of exposure, but when all conditions
are correct, radiographs so obtained can hardly be distinguished from those
taken without the aid of the intensifying screen. This applies not only to
the plate, but more particularly to the print, and a little experience with an
DEVELOPMENT OF THE PLATE 97
average installation of moderate power and a screen will soon teach anyone
how to obtain valuable diagnostic negatives, and enable the operator to do
quick work, which would otherwise be beyond his reach.
For the purposes of diagnosis in regions such as the heart, lungs, stomach,
or intestines, the value of radiographs so obtained cannot be overestimated,
as with any of the modern intensifying screens it is quite possible to get
results showing practically no grain.
It is most important that every care should be taken to avoid damage
to the delicate surface of the screen, because any scratches or other markings
causing an abrasion of the surface will certainly be produced on the negatives.
Before placing the screen in the holder it should be carefully dusted
with a wide camel-hair brush. The film side of the plate is brought into
contact with the fluorescent coating on the screen, care being taken to avoid
rubbing the surfaces together. When making the exposure the film side of
the plate should face the X-ray tube. When the screen is not in use it should
be placed in such a position that it cannot get damaged or splashed with
chemicals. The value of an intensifying screen is illustrated by the figures
on the opposite page.
Development
The general description of the dark room has been given in the chapter
on the arrangement of apparatus, etc. It is essential to take the same care
in the development of X-ray plates as is necessary in developing the fastest
of ordinary photographic plates.
Specially prepared X-ray plates are slightly sensitive to red light, and
care must, therefore, be taken to avoid more light falling on the plate during
development than is really necessary. This can be accomphshed in the
following ways :
1. The employment of a carefully tested " safe-light " glass in front
of the source of illumination. This screen must be tested in the conditions
under which it will work ; thus, if electric light is used, a bulb of the same
candle-power should always be used in the lamp.
2. The electric bulb may be immersed in a solution coloured by bichrom-
ate of potash and an aniline dye. To ensure greater safety the globe con-
taining the lamp should be covered with a layer of yellow and ruby fabric.
Provided exposure is not unduly prolonged, the X-ray plates may be
developed in this light. The dark room lamp should have in a convenient
place a switch in order that the light may be turned off when developing the
plate.
3. A cover to fit the developing dish may be placed over it immediately
the plate is immersed, and not removed for several minutes, as it is in the
early stages of development that plates are most easily fogged.
4. The plate may be developed in the dark.
The Choice of a Developer. — Any properly balanced developer can
7
98 EADIOGEAPHY
be used, the majority of workers using that recommended by the makers of
the plates. Of these (1) Metol-hydrokinone, (2) glycine, (3) rodinol, (4)
pyro-soda are the most commonly used, and each has its own advocate.
The formula for one of the most largely used — ^metol-hydroldnone — is : —
Metol, 20 grains ; hydrokinone, 80 grains ; sodii sulphite (crystals), 2
oz. ; sodii carbonate (crystals), 2 oz. ; potassii bromide solution (10 per
cent.), 80 minims ; water, 20 oz.
The Preparation of the Developer. — (1) The metol must first be
dissolved in 8 ounces of pure water (warm). When thoroughly dissolved
the hydrokinone is added.
(2) The sodas and bromide are then dissolved in a further 8 ounces
of warm water, the two solutions mixed, and made up to 20 ounces.
It is most important that each ingredient be allowed to dissolve
thoroughly before the next is added. The developer is then allowed to cool,
and to ensure the best results, should be used at a temperature of 60° F.
The following facts explain the reason for this insistence on a imiform tem-
perature : Metol and hydrokinone act differently on the photographic
plate, metol being employed to obtain good detail, while the hydrokinone
ensures density. The hydrokinone acts best at a temperature of about
65°, and becomes practically inert below 45°, and, therefore, in order to ensure
that both agents act to the best advantage, it is necessary to work at about
60°. For this reason in cold weather the dark room should be kept at a
little above 60°, and at a level temperature, in order that the dishes and
solutions should not fall much below. In very cold weather, when plates
are obtained which are lacking in density, but show fine detail, — when all
other factors employed in the exposure of the plate have been favourable,
and a good strong negative was expected — the explanation is often found to
be a faulty temperature of the developer.
Caution. — ^If the metol is not allowed to dissolve thoroughly before
the other chemicals are added, it will crystalhse, and be precipitated in the
form of granules. Should any of these settle on the plate during the process
of development, small black spots with soft edges are Hkely to appear in
those places where the granules have settled. Moreover, in using the
developer improperly made up, the full strength is not available, and such
conditions may account for failure to obtain the best possible results. A
freshly made developer should be almost transparent in appearance and
free from colour ; stale developer is from a light- to a dark-brown in colour.
In hospitals and similar institutions, and with many radiographers, the
practice is to have the developer made up by the chemist or his assistant,
who does not understand the importance of extreme purity of chemicals
and exact weighing, and so frequently sends up a hastily prepared developer
which may spoil many otherwise good results. In large institutions a
skilled photographer should be attached to the department, whose duty it
should be to attend to the preparation of all solutions used.
When specially good negatives are desired it is a good plan to have a
stock solution of sodium sulphite and carbonate in the proper proportions
FIXATION OF THE DEVELOPED PLATE 99
ready at hand. The metol and hydrokinone are then freshly prepared in
warm water when wanted, and added as required, as is also the bromide
solution. If these points are attended to, there should be no difficulty in
obtaining really first-class negatives. The developing solution should not
be used for more than three or four plates in succession ; if used too often
it becomes oxidised by exposure to the air, and ceases to yield satisfactory
results.
A developer which has already been used for a number of plates should
not be kept for further use. Oxidation having commenced A\ill continue until
the solution ultimately becomes nearly black and quite useless. The freshly
made metol and hydrokinone, if kept in properly stoppered bottles, will
keep in good condition for a considerable time.
With normal exposures the image appears in about fifteen seconds,
and development is complete in four to five minutes ; but in cases where
the exposure has been very short, the image appears more slowly, and the
time of development is proportionately longer. Where instantaneous
exposures have been given, such, for instance, as j}q of a second, development
from fifteen to twenty minutes may be necessary in order to secure the
desired results. Under these circumstances it is advisable to keep the
developing dish covered over in order to avoid any possibility of fog from
prolonged exposure to the dark room light during the process of development ;
and the dish should be gently rocked until development is complete. The
use of a weak or highly restrained developer should be avoided.
Fixing
After development the plate should be rinsed for at least thirty seconds
before placing in the following fixing-bath :
Hyposulphite of soda, 1 lb. ; potassium metabisulphite, | oz. ; water
to 80 oz.
If the fixing-bath is required for immediate use it is advisable to dissolve
the potassium metabisulphite before adding the hypo, but hot water should
not be used for the purpose.
Allow the negative to remain in the hypo bath until thoroughly fixed,
and on no account examine a partially fixed plate by daylight, or stains will
appear on the fUm which cannot afterwards be washed out.
If the plate is not washed free from developer before being placed in
the fixing-bath, yellow stains will appear on the film which are very difl&cult
to remove.
Washing and Drying
After complete fixation, the plate should be washed in running water
for at least one hour, and then placed in a well-ventilated room, free from
dust, until dry. If a negative is required for use immediately after develop-
ment, fixing, and washing, it may be dried rapidly by the following method :
100 EADIOGRAPHY
The surface moisture is first removed by allowing the plate to drain,
or it may be carefully removed mth a wad of cotton-wool or a pad of fine
chamois leather. It is then placed in a methylated spirit bath for four or
five minutes, and rocked as in development. It is then removed, and
placed in a current of air or in front of an electric fan, when it will dry very
rapidly, or it may be placed in a specially arranged drying-oven.
Reduction
It is sometimes necessary to reduce a developed plate which has been
made too dense. The following solution will be found very useful for the
purpose : Potassium ferricyanide, 120 grains ; water to 20 oz. A dram or
two of this is added, just before using, to each ounce of ordinary hypo solu-
tion as used for fixing photographic plates, i.e. hypo, 4 oz. ; water to 20 oz.
The plate is immersed in the reducer when it is to be acted on all over, or if
for local use, the solution is apphed with a httle tuft of cotton- wool. The
plate after reduction is well washed and dried.
Intensification
Negatives which are not sufiiciently \dgorous omng to some error in
manipulation may be greatly improved by the process of intensification.
The film should first be hardened in the following bath : Formalin, 1 part ;
water, 10 parts. In this bath the negative should be allowed to remain for
five minutes, after which it should be rinsed for a few nnnutes, and then
placed for exactly one minute in the following bath : Potassium ferricyanide,
20 grains ; potassium bromide, 20 grains ; water to 20 oz.
Too long an immersion causes the image to bleach, and this should be
avoided if it is desired to retain the original gradation. In the time pre-
scribed there is no apparent change, but the clearing agent has done its work,
which is the prevention of green fog in the subsequent process of intensi-
fication. The negative should now be rinsed for a few minutes, and then
intensified in the following stock solutions :
{a) Silver nitrate, 800 grains ; distilled water to 20 oz.
(b) Ammonium sulphocyanide, 1400 grains ; hypo, 1400 grains ; water
to 20 oz.
Half an ounce of {a) should be taken and added slowly to half an omice of
(6), stirring vigorously with a glass rod. Sufficient silver nitrate solution
must be added until the precipitate formed is dissolved with difiiculty.
To this solution should be added : 1 dram of a 10 per cent, solution of pyro
preserved with sulphite, 2 drams of a 10 per cent, solution of ammonia.
The negative should be placed in a chemically clean dish, and the silver
nitrate solution poured over it. In a minute or two the deposition of the
silver begins to take place, and as soon as sufficient density has been acquired,
the negative should be placed in an acid fixing-bath until the slight pyro
stain is removed. After this bath the negative should be well washed, it
PRINTING FROM THE NEGATIVE 101
being well, during washing, to lightly rub the surface of the film with a tuft of
cotton wool to remove the slight surface deposit which will be found upon it.
It is important that the negative to be intensified must have been thoroughly
fixed in a clean, fresh hypo bath, and not merely have been left for some
indefinite period in a stale or dirty solution of hypo that has been used
on other occasions. A useful method is to bleach the washed negative in a
saturated solution of perchloride of mercury, wash well, and then place in a
strong solution of ammonia.
Printing
The printing of au X-ray negative is an art which is too often neglected
by the radiographer. A well-finished print, nicely glazed and suitably
mounted, is the finished work of the expert, and should always be aimed at,
slovenliness here being quite inexcusable. It must be remembered that the
average plate will produce a print which will explain the conditions found,
and in the majority of cases it is on the print that the radiographer is judged.
Consequently it should always be the aim to tuin out a good print. The
three papers commonly used in printing are :
(1) Bromide paper. (2) Gas-hght paper. (.3) Silver paper.
Nos. 1 and 2 are the most frequently used because of the conveniences
they offer. The best prints are undoubtedly obtained by using P.O. P. paper,
the difficulty being, however, that a strong fight is required, and the operator
is dependent in the majority of cases on daylight conditions. When day-
light is not available these papers may still be used by the aid of an arc
lamp, by the use of which a negative may be printed in from ten to fiiteen
minutes.
The toning and fixing of papers so prepared is a fittle more troublesome
than when papers (1) and (2) are employed, which possess the advantage over
silver paper that they give the operator the opportunity of producing a good
print by careful development, as by careful manipulation prints of good
diagnostic value can be obtained from very indifferent plates. It must be
insisted upon that the touching in of detail should never be practised in
radiographic work. Though largely used in artistic photography, it has no
field here.
In hospitals and in private practice, where large plates are used and
several are taken of the same subject, reduced prints may be obtained by the
use of a reducing lantern. By using an apparatus of this kind it is possible
to obtain in a small space prints of the largest plates. These may be mounted
in series on a large mount, and despatched to the physician or surgeon in
charge of the patient. These reduced positives are quite sharp, show all
the detail of the large prints, and may be included in the notes of a case.
Plates when dried should be carefully cleaned and particulars attached to
them. When examined and reported on, they should be filed away and
indexed. The card index system will be found most useful for this purpose.
Special cards may be printed to suit individual requirements.
102
RADIOGRAPHY
Further Points in Exposure and Development
It is worthy of note that a practical knowledge of photography is very
helpful to the radiographer, and in no part of his work more so than in the
development of his plates. Fortunately for the majority of workers whose
An exposure
of
12 sees.
10
An exposure
of
28 sees.
24
20
16
12
Fig. 87.
-To illustrate the latitude of exposure. Each of the twelve exposures gives a good
negative. These exposures were made with a moderately soft tube.
knowledge of photography is slight, considerable latitude in the exposure
time exists.
First Experiment. — In the course of a number of experiments performed
for the purpose of ascertaining this point, it was found that if a limb of even
thickness was radiographed, being divided into areas which allowed of twelve
exposures of different duration, commencing with 2 seconds and ranging up
to 20 to 30 seconds, useful negatives were obtained from each exposure.
PRACTICAL POINTS IN EXPOSURE 103
The development was necessarily uniform, as all the exposures were on the
one plate.
Second Experiment. — On this occasion the same duration of exposure
was given to each part, and it was found that useful negatives were obtained
by varying the time of development.
Third Experiment. — This experiment was carried out with a view to
ascertaining the influence of temperature on the action of the developing
agent. A wide range of variations was found which are very instructive.
Using the same exposure for two plates and developing them side by side,
one solution being about 20 per cent, colder than the other, it was found that
at a temperature of 60° development was rapid, detail good, and density
Exposure
2 seconds.
Fig. 88. — To illustrate the latitude of exposure. Exposure with a hard tube.
correct. If the temperature was below 45° the resulting picture showed
detail, but httle density, indicating that the hydrokinone had not been able
to use its influence.
Fourth Experiment. — On this occasion variations in exposure were made,
the times of exposure being as 1 to 5. The plate exposed for the shorter
time was developed at 60° and the other at a low temperature. It was
found that the first plate gave the better result.
These experiments indicate that by giving minimum exposures the wear
and tear on apparatus and tubes is lessened, and the fogging of plates by
secondary radiations avoided, while by proper manipulation of the developing
solution better pictures are obtained. A further advantage of using the
104 KADIOGRAPHY
developer at a proper temperature is that we lessen the risk of fogging the
plate bv prolonged exposure to even a " safe ruby " light, and also the risk
of chemical fog from prolonged immersion. These points have been elabor-
ated with the intention of showing the advantage of working under proper
conditions. It is hoped that they may explain many failures in cases where
good results should have been obtained.
Instructions for glazing Gelatino-Chloride Prints
When the print has been prepared it is necessary to glaze and mount it
on a cardboard. Too great stress cannot be put upon this part of the work.
A properly glazed and mounted print is the final effort of the radiographer.
Plate Glass should be thoroughly cleaned in w^arm water and soda to
remove dirt and grease, and then well rinsed in plain water to remove soda.
Polish ofi: carefully with spirits of wine, and soft leather. Sprinkle a httle
powdered French chalk, and again poHsh off lightly with soft leather.
Prints should be previously well hardened in alum or formalin. If
alum is used, the solution should be filtered before use, and the print well
washed after. If formalin is used, a short washing will suffice.
Place the print direct from washing-water on to the glass, one corner
first, allowing the surface to roll into contact ; the action of the water will
then exclude air bells. Or the print may be placed on the glass entirely under
water. Lay the glass on a firm flat table, cover with a piece of clean, smooth
blotting-paper, and squeeze lightly with a rubber roller. Heavy pressure
should not be used, but merely sufficient to remove the surplus water, leaving
the print in actual contact with the glass.
Backing. — Cut a piece of waterproof backing paper a little smaller than
the print. Paste with stiff brush evenly and thinly, and squeeze lightly
into contact with the back of the print on the glass. Leave till thoroughly
dr^. Then insert the point of a knife under the edge of the print, when it
will strip off with an enamelled surface.
STEREOSCOPIC RADIOGRAPHY
A great deal of importance is attached to stereoscopic radiography,
many workers going so far as to state that a quick stereoscopic radiograph
possesses as much value as a Rontgen cinematographic result. It is certainly
most useful in depicting subjects like renal calculi, stomachs, intestines, and
fractures, especially of the pelvis and femur ; but opinion is very divided as
to its value in locating foreign bodies, many workers claiming that better
results are obtained by the comparison of two different radiographs taken at
a much wider angle. When observing any object or group each eye sees
quite a different picture, but the two images thus seen are combined into one
picture by the brain, which has the property of perspective. To accurately
radiograph stereoscopically, therefore, it is necessary that the points of view
should be the same distance apart as the pupils of the two eyes, but in radio-
graphy it has been found that to produce the best rehef it is necessary to
exaggerate the stereoscopic effect. It is necessary, therefore, to take two
successive radiographs on two different plates, which are placed in exactly
the same position, to keep the patient absolutely stationary, and to shift the
tube a few centimetres to either side of the centre. The correct degree of
movement for the tube has been calculated by Marie and Ribaut, who have
given the following table, but this need not be absolutely followed if the
movement of the tube is recorded.
Marie and Ribaut's Table
Thickness of part
Distance of the Anti-cathode to the surface of the Body. |
to be radio-
graphed.
1
20 cm.
30 cm.
40 cm.
50 cm.
cm.
cm.
cm.
cm.
cm.
2
4-4
9-6
16-2
^
4
2-4
5-4
8-8
13-5
6
1-7
3-6
6-1
9-3
8
1-4
2-8
4-1
7-3
Distance to which
10
1-2
2-4
4-0
6-0
j- the tube must be
15
1-8
2-9
4-3
displaced.
20
1-5
2-4
3-5
25
1-3
2-1
3-0
30
1-2
1-9
2-7 J
The point to bear in mind is that the nearer the object of interest to the
plate the greater the distance the tube must be moved between the first and
second exposure. After the exposure and subsequent development the two
105
106 RADIOGRAPHY
images must be optically fused into one, and for this purpose there are
many forms of stereoscopes, such as the Wheatstone reflecting, prism stereo-
scope, and the Pirie hand stereoscope. Both pictures can be reduced and
viewed in a hand stereoscope.
As to the necessary apparatus for taking stereoscopic radiographs,
if only those parts of the body which can be kept stationary without
effort are required, and time is not an important factor, then an ordinary
stereoscopic plate-holder can be used where the patient lies upon a holder
with a top which is transparent to the X-rays. Into this holder place two
plate-holders, which can be exchanged without moving the patient. On the
other hand, if stereoscopic results of those parts of the body which cannot
be controlled voluntarily are required, then an automatic arrangement
must be adopted to shift the tube and the plate synchronously and in-
stantaneously (see Fig. 70). There are already several of these devices on
the market, but they are daily being improved, and we shall no doubt
shortly have a perfect one produced.
Stereoscopic fluoroscopy has also been attempted, but although possible
and indeed successful with parts of the body such as the hand and the foot,
this has hardly been satisfactory with the thicker parts.
THE LOCALISATION OF FOREIGN BODIES
The demonstration of a foreign object in any part of the body is one of
the most useful functions of the X-ray examination, and its accurate localisa-
tion is one of the most difficult duties of the radiographer. Even after a
body has been definitely localised, the surgeon may not be able to measure
exactly the distances from given points so as to make his incisions and extract
the foreign body at once. There are fallacies in the interpretation and mis-
calculations of distance, and, lastly, it must not be forgotten that if a foreign
body is located, the patient must be placed in exactly the same position at the
time of operation as he occupied when the radiographs were taken. A slight
degree of flexion or rotation of a limb will upset the calculations, and the
foreign body may be found to be as much as 1 or 2 inches away from the spot
at which it had been localised. It must also be pointed out that if a
locahsation is to be of its greatest value it should be done immediately
before the surgeon operates ; if possible it should be done in the operating
theatre. Where many cases require investigation a small theatre should
be attached to the X-ray department. Of the various methods for locahsing
foreign bodies the most useful and probably the best known is that intro-
duced by Mackenzie Davidson. The details of the method will be dealt
with later. Modifications of this method exist, and have been used by
many workers. Foreign bodies are met with in all parts of the body, and
the localisation will vary in difficulty according to the part in which a
foreign body is found. In the limbs they are comparatively easy of localisa-
tion, but in the skull, thorax, and abdomen the greatest difficulty may be
experienced.
Probably the best all-round method of localisation in the latter regions
is the stereoscopic. This is carried out in the same way as in ordinary
stereoscopic work. Two plates are necessary, and in most cases it will be
found useful to place on the skin of the patient an opaque body which will
give a shadow, and may be used as a landmark for subsequent comparison.
By employing cross wires the stereoscopic may be used in conjunction with
Mackenzie Davidson's method. Stereoscopic plates should be developed
together in order to secure, if possible, the same density of negative ; simi-
larly the condition of the tube and length of exposure should be the same
for each plate. A note should be made of the position of the plate in relation
to the body of the patient. This will be found useful when it is necessary to
107
108
EADIOGEAPHY
state the exact position of the foreign body in relation to fixed anatomical
landmarks.
Good stereoscopic negatives, when viewed in the stereoscope, show
perfect pictures, with the correct perspective for the parts shown, though
Fig. 89. — Wheatstone stereoscope. (Watson.)
the exact localisation of a foreign body may be difficult or in some instances
impossible. A Wheatstone stereoscope should be employed whenever
possible, as it affords valuable aid by means of its adjustable parts in quickly
getting the correct position of the plates. When this comparatively elaborate
stereoscope is not available, a Pirie hand stereoscope will be found useful.
Pirie Stereoscope for the Examination of X-Ray Negatives.
— The Pirie stereoscope is arranged on entirely different lines from the
instruments which have been heretofore employed for the examination of
stereoscopic X-ray negatives.
Instead of using reflecting
mirrors, a double reflecting
prism is used. For conveni-
ence the prism is mounted in
one of two metal tubes, which
are bound together by a con-
necting piece, the second tube
being a plain one only, and
serving to exclude extraneous
objects from view. The
stereoscope is light, the metal
part being constructed of aluminium, and can be easily carried in the pocket.
A feature of the Pirie stereoscope is the ease with which stereoscopic vision
is obtained. It frequently happens that persons who are not accustomed
to examimng stereoscopic negatives wish to do so, and with the old form of
reflecting mirror stereoscope this has always been a difficult matter, very
often ending in failure. With the Pirie stereoscope, however, it is almost
impossible for anyone to avoid seeing the negatives stereoscopically. The
negatives are taken in the usual manner and are placed side by side, either
Fig. 90. — Pirie stereoscope.
SIMPLE METHODS OF LOCALISATION ]09
in suitable boxes provided wtK electric light, or they can be rested on the
framework of a convenient window.
The distance at which the negatives are observed depends upon the
distance between the centres of the negatives, that is to say, the size of the
plates. For instance, the best position to inspect a pair of 12 inch by 10 inch
negatives placed as closely together as possible is about 3 feet 6 inches.
When looking at smaller negatives it is necessary to come much closer in
order to obtain a comfortable stereoscopic effect, or with larger negatives
the distance must be increased.
The negatives should be on a level with the eyes and if possible slightly
tilted towards each other.
By concentrating the attention through the plain tube {i.e. the one with-
out the prism) and centering the image on the corresponding side, a stereo-
scopic effect is at once perceived even by those who are unaccustomed to
stereoscopic work.
The correct position of the foreign body may be located and a statement
made as to its relative position to well-known landmarks, but when operation
for removal is contemplated the surgeon should examine the plates on the
stereoscope and form a mental picture of the position of the foreign body
which should guide him throughout the operation. To facilitate this a
stereoscope should be placed in close proximity to the operating theatre.
Simple Methods of Localisation. — There are simpler methods for
localisation which may be employed in cases which are not likely to
require an exact degree of measurement. Foreign bodies in the limbs
come under this heading. It is obvious that in some instances one
negative is sufficient to indicate the position of the foreign body, though
it is surprising how difficult an apparently easy case may become under
some circumstances. All operations for removal should be undertaken
as soon as possible after the radiograph. More difficult cases require more
elaboration, and in all instances of bodies in the limbs two radiographs should
be taken : (1) antero-posterior position, (2) lateral position. The limb need
not be moved when these exposures are made. A simple plate-holder with
a second one at right angles will suffice. The tube alone requires to be moved.
An examination of the two negatives should give the position of the foreign
body. In the plate taken in position (1), the distance from a given point,
probably a bony landmark, is taken. The plate taken in position (2) shows
the depth from the surface. In most instances this should be sufiicient, as
the operator has only to measure the distances and make a mental note of
the position.
In order to get a graphic record of the measurements, a simple plate-
holder can be constructed with an inch or centimetre rule, which slides over
the surface of the plate so that it may be placed in relation to a bone or foreign
body. A second inch or centimetre scale runs at right angles to the longi-
tudinal one. The marks on the scale are rendered opaque by inserting
pieces of wire into the wood at the correct distances. The second plate-holder
is fixed at right angles to the first one and also has sliding scales. The
110
EADIOGEAPHY
foreign body may be located by screening prior to the taking of the plates.
When the two negatives are examined it is easy to locate accurately the
G
*o»fe
Fig. 91. — Diagram to show method of taking a lateral view.
A, Source of X-rays. H, Shadow of foreign body on plate.
D, Foreign body. F, Shadow of bones.
0, Bones. G, Graduated scale.
B, Limb.
foreign body. The plates have on the surface an exact rule for measuring.
For exact localisation the Mackenzie Davidson method should be employed.
Method employed in Mackenzie Davidson Localisation. — The
central ray emitted from an X-ray tube has to be definitely found. To do
this it is necessary to have an arrangement for determining the central ray.
The tube is accurately fixed on the box beneath the table ; the latter moves
in two directions on trolley wheels. The central ray is located by means of
cross wires, or a plumb-line rmming on pulleys and moving with the tube,
so that whatever the position of the tube the plumb-line always indicates the
position of the focus of rays upon the anti-cathode. The distance of the
anode from the top of the couch is constant, and should be recorded on a
convenient place on the couch ; the distance of the plate from the top of the
couch must also be taken into consideration. The two added together give
the distance of the anode from the plate. When working with the tube above
the patient, the two positions of the anode are secured by moving the tube
along a horizontal bar which is marked with a milhmetre scale, running both
ways from a central point at zero. The sensitive plate or film is placed under-
neath, and protected in the usual way by black paper, or it may be placed in
a light-tight casette. Two wires are laid at right angles to each other on the
photographic envelope, and so placed that one of them runs in the same
direction as the horizontal bar which carries the tube above, and their point
of intersection Hes beneath zero on the scale. The cross wires may be
MACKENZIE DAVIDSON METHOD
111
fastened to a thin board or sheet of vulcanite, and retained in position over
the sensitive plate by drawing-pins, or they may be permanently fixed to a
frame, upon which the plate is placed. The marks corresponding to the cross
wires should be painted with aniline ink or silver nitrate solution, so as to leave
a mark on the body of the patient, and it is convenient to identify one of the
corners of the plate by some opaque object, such as a small coin, with a
corresponding sign on the adjacent skin surface. Two equidistant points
are marked of? by clips, or any other method, at each side of zero on the
horizontal scale bar, at a distance decided on by the operator. The focus-
tube is drawn up to one side-clip, and an exposure made. It is then pushed
A
-0
over to the other clip, and
a second exposure made
of equal length. The dis-
tance from the centre point
of the anode to the plate
is then accurately mea-
sured. Accurate data have
now been obtained, from
which the operator may
calculate the exact relation
of a foreign body in the
tissues to the aniline cross
mark on the patient's skin.
When the tube is
operated from below a
similar arrangement is
used, the tube being first
centred over a known point
of the part to be radio-
graphed. A scale is at-
tached to a convenient part
of the table and the move-
ment to one side (a known
distance) is made, say 3 cm.
The tube-box is fixed and the exposure is then made. The plate is removed
and a second one placed in exactly the same position. The tube is now
moved 6 cm. in the opposite direction to the first movement, and the second
exposure is made. It should be noted that the frame with the cross wires
and the plates occupies the same position relative to the patient during the
two exposures. It is also possible to make the two exposures on one plate
by exposing only half at a time, thus enabhng a little time to be saved in the
subsequent procedures for locahsation.
Having obtained the radiographic records the next step is to proceed to
the exact locahsation of the foreign body. This is done by means of the
cross-thread localiser (Mackenzie Davidson). The apparatus consists of an
adjustable horizontal bar, which is marked with a millimetre scale starting
Fig. 92.-
D C
-Diagram showing Mackenzie Davidson method.
(After Walsh.)
.1, First position of tube. D, Shadow thrown on plate by
B, Second position of tube. tube in A position.
S, Skull or limb. C, shadow thrown on plate by
F B, Foreign body. tube in B position.
Dotted lines represent the paths of the rays.
112
KADIOGRAPHY
from a central zero, and is notched to correspond on its upper edge ; a
plate-glass stage marked with two lines at right angles to each other, the point
of intersection lying exactly beneath zero on the horizontal bar. Beneath
the stage is a hinged reflecting mirror. The developed negative or tracings
of the two plates on a celluloid sheet is placed film upwards on the glass
stage, and the shadow of the wires made to correspond with the cross mark
on the stage. The bar is next raised or lowered so as to bring the zero of the
scale to the same distance from the scale as that of the centre of the anode
from the sensitive plate when the exposures were made. Two fine silk threads
are next passed over the horizontal scale bar. Each thread has a weight at
one end to keep it taut, and is fixed in a notch on the scale corresponding
with the distance of the
anode from zero during
the original exposure.
The other end is
threaded into a fine
needle fixed in a piece
of lead. The path of
the thread between the
notch on the scale and
the eye of the needle
represents the path of
the X-ray and is mov-
able. A second thread
is passed through the
notch at the other end
of the horizontal bar.
It represents the path
of the rays during the
second exposure after
the tube has been
moved.
With two such
threads, then, it will be
easy to trace the path of
the rays in relation to a body interposed between the focus-tube and the
sensitive plate. One threaded needle is placed upon any particular part of
one of the photographic shadows of the foreign body, and the other needle
upon a corresponding part in the second shadow. The point where the
threads cross and touch each other will represent the position of the part of
the foreign body chosen for location. A perpendicular is then dropped
from the intersection of the threads to the negative below, and a mark
made where the perpendicular touches the negative. The distance of the
spot thus marked out from the cross wires is measured by a pair of com-
passes. The operator is now in possession of the required measurements.
If the distances are 3 cm. and 1 cm., and the depth from the crossing of
Fig. 93. — Mackenzie Davidson cross-thread localiser. (Cox and Co.).
MODIFICATIONS OF MACKENZIE DAVIDSON METHOD 113
the threads to the plate 2| cm,, then he knows that the foreign body
lies at 2| cm. from the surface of
the patient's skin, at a distance of
3 cm. and 1 cm. from the cross
wires, in a quadrant that is easily
determined by reference to the
distinguishing mark placed there
when taking the double-exposure
radiograph.
Dawson, Turner, and others
have published a simple formula
for localising. Two radiographs
are taken on one plate by moving
the tube a known distance. The
distances are measured from tube
to plate (A), between the two posi-
tions of the tube (B), and between
the two shadows on the photo-
graphic plate (C). Let x equal the
Fig. 94.-
-Diagrani to illustrate simple formula for
localising. (After Walsh. )
distance of the foreign body from the plate.
Then
X
axe
h+c
Supposing a to be 33 cm., 6 10 cm., and c 1 cm., then
33x1
x =
= 3 cm.
10 + 1
Mackenzie Davidson has suggested a short method
of locaUsation which, while based on his original
method, allows of more rapid locaUsation. The
central ray is determined and the position fixed
by means of a plumb line. The foreign body is
located directly under the point of the plumb hne.
A mark is made upon the skin, a plate is exposed,
the tube is moved a known distance, and a second
exposure made. The depth of the body is deter-
mined by calculation in the ordinary way. Two
cross wires, arranged at right angles, must be used.
Dr. Hampson has simplified this method still further
by having a graduated scale fixed to the fluorescent
screen. By movement at the time of screening he is
able to say the depth of the foreign body at a point
vertically below the skin mark. This method can
only be used at a fixed distance in all cases unless
separate scales are worked out for each position of
the tube in relation to the screen or plate. The
method is more fully described on p. 114.
8
Fig. 95.'— To illustrate Mac-
kenzie Davidson's short
method of localisation.
4 : X : : 10 : 50 - a-.
F B, Foreign body.
A, First position of tube.
B, Second position of tube.
C, Position of image of F B in
first position. A mark
is made on the skin at
this spot.
D, Shadow of T^iJ in second
position of tube.
114
RADIOGEAPHY
l^ i trT ' i" f Ti'V; i ^T ' VTi'k"r''r"'Y"'1 r " ' ^ ''
cm. Depth: RB.
Fig. 96. — Graduated scale in Hampfsoii localiser.
Hampson's Method of Localisation.— The method introduced by
Dr. Hampson is briefly as follows :
Place the patient on the couch and arrange the tube in the tube-box
with the focus point at a determinate distance, say 50 cm., beneath the surface
n of the screen. Contract the
fm on \crppn
' '■ *^" ^^i^^it- diaphragm openmg so as to
make it easy to centre the
foreign body in the field of
view. The rays through it
will be practically vertical,
and a small arrow head or
other metallic mark fixed
on the skin will locahse the
selected point of the foreign
body in two dimensions,
along and across the trunk or limb. For the estimation of the depth a mark
is placed on the glass of the screen over a selected point of the foreign body.
Move the tube-box, and with it the focus, a known distance, say 10 cm.,
and mark on the glass the new situation of the selected point, opening the
diaphragm wider if necessary. Measure the distance that the shadow of
the point has travelled, read this off on the upper side of the scale. Fig. 96,
and the corresponding number on the lower scale
will be the depth of the foreign body beneath the
screen. If the part of the patient under examination
is concave and does not touch the screen, this must
be allowed for in stating the depth.
In cases where the distance between the screen
and focus point cannot be permanently adjusted, the
same result can be obtained with very little trouble
and delay. Ascertain by measurement what the
distance is, mark the traverse of the shadow as
before, and then work out the result as follows :
AB, Fig. 96a, is a line equal to the vertical
height from screen to focus.
AC is the horizontal movement of the focus.
BD is the horizontal movement of the shadow
on the screen.
Draw a line DC intersecting AB in E.
Then BE is the depth of the foreign body below
the screen.
The correctness of the result depends on the
accuracy of the measurements, so these should be
made as few as possible in order to reduce the occasions for inaccuracy.
It is, therefore, better to measure directly the distance from focus level
to screen by means of a large pair of callipers.
Other distances than 50 cm. may be used, but a separate scale must
Fig. 96a.- — Hampson local-
iser. Diagram to illus-
trate method.
FOREIGN BODIES IN SPECIAL LOCALITIES 115
be prepared for each distance. A table prepared for the 50 cm. interval will
be found useful :
-h cm. ti'averse on screen means a depth of 2J cm.
i „ „ „ H :,
2 „ „ „ 8^ „
3 „ „ „ Hi „
4 „ „ „ 14^ „
Shenton's Method of Localisation. — Shenton relies entirely on the
screen method of examination and denounces all radiographic methods.
He uses a circular diaphragm of small diameter and centres this accurately
under the foreign body. A metallic pointer or probe is now passed between
the screen and the limb under investigation, and its tip placed over the
shadow of the foreign body, or to be more correct, the shadow of the probe
is watched until it coincides with the shadow of the bullet, the probe is held
steadily in position, the room is lighted up, and the exact position of the
probe point is marked upon the skin surface. This is a point immediately
over the bullet, and it is manifest that an incision carried to a correct depth
must find the object sought for. It remains therefore to ascertain the exact
depth at which this lies. A straight probe is used. Around it is twisted
a piece of lead foil or soft wire so as to make an appreciable bulge. Turn
the limb upon its side, i.e. at right angles to its former position ; then place
the tip of the prepared probe on the spot marked upon the skin, letting the
probe lie horizontal to it, or in other words, parallel with the screen. Next
slide the piece of lead foil along the probe until its distance is equal to that
of the point from the bullet or other foreign body. The distance between
the point of the probe in contact with the skin and the bulge caused by the
lead foil is equal to the distance between the skin surface and the position
of the bullet. The distance may be measured upon the probe, and the
operator is in a position to say that the bullet lies under the spot already
marked upon the skin, and that the depth corresponds to a known
distance as measured by the probe and the movable bulge upon it.
Shenton has introduced a localiser which he says is really a depth-gauge.
This is a very ingenious and useful apparatus for locahsing foreign bodies
in the limbs.
Localisation of Foreign Bodies in Special Localities
Localisation of Foreign Bodies in the Eye and Orbit. — (a)
Mackenzie Davidson method. This is a method for exact localisation
of a foreign body in the eyeball, A special adjustable head-piece, fixed
to a chair, is employed. It usually consists of a horizontal arm, carrying
an open rectangular framework, across which two wires, one vertical and the
other horizontal, are stretched, and against which the photographic plate is
placed. Attached to the framework is a small rifle " sight," at the same
level as the intersection of the cross wires, the use of which will be presently
116 KADIOGRAPHY
described, while below and to one side is a chin-rest, so that the patient does
not move his head while the plates are changed and the exposures made.
Parallel to the arm carrying the open framework is another arm, bearing a
sliding clamp for the X-ray tube. In this way the tube always moves
parallel to the horizontal cross wire. The tube is first arranged with the
glistening point of origin of the X-rays on the anode exactly opposite the
intersection of the cross wire, this being done by arranging the rifle " sight,"
the point of intersection of the wires, and the point on the anode, all in the
same straight line. The distance between the point on the anode and the
intersection of the wires, usually about 35 cm., is carefully measured. The
patient now sits in the chair, with his head between the two horizontal arms,
and with his chin placed on the chin-rest, places the side of his head (injured
eye side) against the cross wires, so that they are between his head and the
photographic plate, and looks straight forward, as if at a distant object, so
that the visual axis of his eye is parallel to the horizontal cross wire. A piece
of lead wire, exactly 1 cm. long, is fixed to the lower eyelid of his injured eye
by adhesive plaster, and the distance between the upper end of the wire
and the centre of the cornea in this position noted. The tube is now moved
3 cm. to one side of its original position and an exposure made. Another
plate is put in position, and the tube slid 6 cm. in the opposite direction,
and another exposure made without the patient moving his head. The two
plates are developed and fixed in the usual manner. The head-piece is usually
made with the cross wire framework and tube-holder fitting on both arms,
so that either eye can be radiographed.
The shadows of the foreign body, if there is one, on the negatives have
now to be localised, and for this purpose the cross-thread localiser is used.
This is simply an apparatus for placing the negatives in exactly the same
geometric conditions under which they have been made, and it has been
fully described on page 112.
With these means we can now reconstruct the exact conditions under
which the two skiagrams were taken. The horizontal bar is arranged so as
to be at the same distance from the plate-glass as the point on the anode was
from the cross wires. The two threads passing through the two notches
3 cm. to each side of the central point of the bar will, therefore, represent
the paths of the X-rays when the exposures were made.
A thin piece of varnished celluloid, also having cross lines scratched on
it, is placed against the film side of the negative, so that the cross lines corre-
spond in both, and the position of the foreign body is marked by pen or pencil
on the varnished celluloid, as well as the shadow of the lead wire on the lower
eyelid. The same is done with the other negative using the same piece of
celluloid. In this way we get two shadows of the foreign body and of the lead
wire in their relation to one outline of the cross wires. The celluloid with
these markings is now placed on the plate-glass, with the cross lines corre-
sponding in both. The ends of the cross threads attached to the weighted
needles are placed on the markings of the foreign body in such a way that the
shadow of the foreign body to the right is at the end of the thread passing
FOREIGN BODIES IN THE EYE AND ORBIT 117
through the notch on the left, and vice versa. These threads representing
the paths of the X-rays in the two exposures, the points where they cross will
represent the point in space of the foreign body.
To localise the point one has to measure the perpendicular distance of
the intersection of the threads from three planes at right angles to each other.
The vertical distance of the point of intersection from the celluloid is measured
by a pair of compasses, and this distance represents the depth of the foreign
body from the skin, as the side of the head was against the cross wires. Next,
the distances between the two vertical planes represented by each of the cross
lines, and the point of intersection, are measured. To do this an upright
square is placed with its edge coincident with one of the cross lines, and the
perpendicular distance is measured by compasses. The same is also done
with respect to the plane of the other cross line. These measurements
determine a point on the skin at the side of the head directly beneath which
the foreign body lies, provided we know the relation of the cross wires to the
patient's skin. If the foreign body is of any size it is necessary to determine
the exact location of each end of its shadow, but if it is very small one measure-
ment is sufficient.
As the location of a foreign body as being at such and such a depth from
the skin of the temple would not give the surgeon much practical help, one
must be able to state its relation to the part of the eyeball. It was for this
reason that the lead wire was placed on the lower eyelid. The location of
the upper end of the lead wire is determined in relation to the three planes
exactly as the foreign body was, and after this it is merely a matter of addi-
tion or subtraction to be able to tell how many centimetres the foreign body
lies behind, at a higher or a lower level than, and to which side of, the upper
end of the wire. We already know the distance between the upper end of
the lead wire and the centre of the screen, and as the wire is usually at the
same level as a vertical line from the front of the screen, we can give the
surgeon a definite point at which the foreign body is lying in relation to the
centre of the cornea, so many centimetres behind parallel to the visual axis,
so many horizontally to the nasal or temporal side, and so many above or
below it. For example, suppose we have found the position of the inter-
section of the cross threads marking the foreign body (6) to be 1-9 cm. above
the celluloid, 3 cm. behind the plane of the vertical cross line (B), and 1 cm.
below the plane of the horizontal cross line (A), and the intersection of the
thread working the upper end of the lead wire {a) to be 2-9 cm. above the
celluloid, 1-2 cm. behind the plane of the vertical line (B), and -6 cm. below
the plane of the horizontal line (A), then by subtraction the foreign body is
1 cm. to the temporal side, 1-8 cm. behind and -4 cm. below the upper end
of the lead wire, and as the latter is -5 cm. below the centre of the cornea, we
are able to say that the foreign body lies 1-8 cm. behind, 1 cm. to the
temporal side, and -9 cm. below the centre of the cornea, with the eye looking
at a distant object.
Lastly, it should be remembered that the skiagrams taken in this way
are stereoscopic, and if so viewed will give a stereoscopic effect ; and as
118 KADIOGRAPHY
the lead wire is of the known length of 1 cm., it maybe used stereoscopically
as to scale to estimate approximately the size and position of the foreign body.
(6) Sweet's Method of Localisation. — Dr. Sweet's method of localising
foreign bodies in the eye and orbit is carried out by means of the special
apparatus designed by him for the purpose. The illustration on page 124
shows the device, which comprises a head-rest for securing the head of the
patient above a plate-holder, so that plates can be changed and one-half
exposed without disturbing the patient. The pneumatic cushion shown
is placed between the patient's head and the plate-holder.
In use, the patient's head is placed in position and the indicator shown on
the right-hand side is placed in exact alignment with the centre of the cornea.
The indicator is then pushed gently up to the eye itself, and when just touch-
ing it is released and carried back by a spring exactly 10 millimetres. Two
exposures are made, the first with the anti-cathode of the X-ray tube in the
same plane as the plate, and with one-half of the plate covered. The un-
exposed half of the plate is then brought into position, and a second exposure
made with the tube slightly tilted. After development the positions of the
foreign body and of the indicator are plotted upon a special chart sheet, a
number of which are supplied with every instrument. It should be noted
that it is not necessary to place the tube at any known distance from the
plate, or move the tube an exact distance for the second exposure. The
special charts prepared on squared paper show exactly the relative position
of the indicator and foreign body.
(c) Stereoscopic Method. — This is a most useful method, and should
always be employed, even when an exact localisation by other methods has
been carried out. It is necessary to take the radiographs in two positions :
(1) Lateral, and (2) antero-posterior. When these radiographs are examined
httle doubt should exist as to the size and position of the foreign body,
provided the operator knows the position of the plates when the radiographs
correspond.
When used in combination with Mackenzie Davidson's method it is
the most accurate of all.
(d) Simpler methods may be employed. Two positions are necessary :
(1) Lateral, (2) antero-posterior. Two pictures of the foreign body are
obtained on one plate by maldng the first exposure with the eye looking
upwards, the second with the eye looking downwards. Movement indicates
the position of the body in relation to the eyeball. An antero-posterior plate
should also help to locate the position of the foreign body. This method is
necessarily inaccurate, and can only be used to determine the presence of a
foreign body. Should operation be necessary, then an exact localisation
by the Mackenzie Davidson method must be carried out. In regions of the
body, such as the thorax and abdomen, the same measures may be employed.
Stereoscopic radiograms of the thorax in the antero-posterior and lateral posi-
tions should sufiice to indicate the position of the foreign body. The cross-
thread method of localisation should be employed as a confirmatory measure.
Localisation of Foreig-n Bodies in the Skull. — The methods
SIMPLE METHODS OF LOCALISATION 119
available are (a) stereoscopic ; (6) stereoscopic combined with Mackenzie
Davidson method.
A simple method may be employed when it is not possible to have
access to the two methods referred to. It is one which anyone possessing an
X-ray installation can carry out, and which has proved useful in many
instances. Three plates are required : (1) Right lateral, (2) left lateral, (3)
antero-posterior. For the localising of foreign bodies in the head the skull
is divided into sections by means of flexible wire. A piece of wire is fixed in
the longitudinal diameter, extending from the nasion in front to the external
occipital protuberance behind. A second wire is carried from the nasion
through the centre of the external auditory meatus backwards to end
Fig. 97. — Bullet in brain. Fragments in face.
below the occipital protuberance. A third wire is carried vertically over
the skull from one external auditory meatus to the other. Three plates
are taken and compared. When the foreign body is sharper on one plate
than on the others it indicates that it is nearer to the side on which it is
sharpest. The antero-posterior plate confirms this observation. The lateral
pictures also serve to show the relationship of the foreign body to a well-
known landmark at the base of the skull.
Localisation of Foreig-n Bodies in Regrion of Hip and Shoulder.
— In these regions it is impossible to get more than one position, so stereo-
scopic radiographs should be taken. These combined with the Mackenzie
Davidson method give the most accurate results.
Localisation of Foreig-n Bodies in the Limbs. — In a number of
instances it may be possible to locate the foreign body by screening alone.
120
EADIOGRAPHY
In other instances one of the methods described by Mackenzie Davidson,
Hampson, Shenton, and others may be used. The position of the foreign
body is ascertained and a mark placed on the skin surface immediately
Fig. 98. — Fracture of lower jaw ; foreign body in soft parts ;
a portion of shrapnel above the jaw bone.
over it. The tube is then moved and the second position of the foreign
body noted. It is then a matter of calculation to estimate the depth of
the foreign body. Hampson does so by means of the graduated scale,
Shenton by the use of the probe
with a bulging point on it, and
by placing the limb at right
angles to the position it occu-
pied when the mark was placed
over the foreign body.
Localisation of Foreign
Bodies in Deep Parts of the
Body. — In several of these
regions the locahsation of a
foreign body is a matter of
extreme difficulty, notably in
the thorax abdomen, pelvis,
axilla and region of the hip.
The exact position may be
marked out both stereoscopi-
cally and by the Mackenzie Davidson method, and yet the necessity of
avoiding anatomical structures may render the subsequent removal difficult.
In some cases it may be helpful to take a lateral view of the thorax or
Fig. 99. — Fragment of shell in region of hip-joint.
FOREIGN BODIES IN THE LIMBS 121
spine. This may enable us to say at once where the foieij^n body lies
Fig. 100. — Fracture of tibia,
portions of shell in limb.
Fig. 101. — Fragments of bullet in limb ; arrows indicate
position of wounds. Graduated scale over bone. Hori-
zontal line indicates distance from edge of bone, oblique
line distance from upper arrow.
in relation to a bony landmark, but for exact localisation it is necessary
to use the cross thread method.
It has been suggested that X-ray
localisation in several cases bas
complicated the removal rather
than been helpful. In order to
obviate such complications the
following method might be adopted.
The foreign body should be
accurately located by the Davidson
method and stereoscopic plates
taken. The exact spot is marked
out and the plates viewed in the
stereoscope. These two give the
exact spot where the body hes.
For removal the following pro-
cedure is suggested.
In the operating theatre or the
X-ray room a simple table is con-
verted into a combined X-ray and
operating-table by using one of the
simpler tube-stands which allows of a tube- carrier being placed under
the table, a second arm carrying the fluorescent screen. The latter has
Fig. 102. — Fragments of shrapnel in hand.
122
KADIOGRAPHY
attached to it a small scale with moving points, such as the Hampson,
or one made by Watson and Sons. The tube is accurately centred and
the distance between the anti-cathode and the screen ascertained. The
patient is prepared for operation and placed on the table. The body
is then located on the screen, the skin being marked by a small
incision at a point corresponding to the shadow. The foreign body
lies just mider this spot. The depth is ascertained by a displace-
ment of the tube a
^li known distance, the
scale on the screen
automatically record-
ing the depth in cen-
timetres. This read-
ing should be com-
pared with the result
obtained by the Mac-
kenzie Davidson
method, and if they
correspond the sur-
geon has an accurate
statement of the
depth of the foreign
body. If owing to
the anatomical struc-
tures interposed on
the hne of the body
it is not possible to
cut straight down
into it, it can iii
nearly every case be
found by probing. Should the surgeon fail to find the body quickly,
aimless probing should not be continued. The hght of the room should be
excluded, the X-ray tube turned on, and the surgeon will at once be able
to see how far his instrument is from the foreign body and guide his
forceps to it.
The length of time the operator is exposed to the rays need not be more
than a few seconds, but if many cases daily require to be screened, some
method of protection must be employed. By cutting down the diaphragm
so that only a small pencil of rays emerge and using long-handled instruments
there should be very httle risk to the operator.
Fig. 103.— Arrangement of X-ray tube and fluorescent screen for
accurate localisation by screen or plate.
RADIOGRAPHY OF THE NORMAL BONES AND JOINTS
A thorough acquaintance with the normal appearance of these parts is
necessary on the part of the radiographer before he proceeds to an interpreta-
tion of the many variations which he may be called upon to describe. Not
only must he know the chief bones and joints from any one aspect, but he
should by a careful study of the parts know them from any point of view.
It may not be always possible to get the patient into the position of ease which
is generally the one in which the parts can be radiographed most readily.
A patient sufiering from an injury to a joint may not always be able to take
up a position on the X-ray table which will enable the operator to radio-
graph the part to the best advantage ; the apparatus may have to be adapted
to the patient instead of the patient to the apparatus, hence it is necessary
that the operator should be familiar with the parts from several points of
view. In ordinary cases of fracture of the bones in the vicinity of a joint it is
always a good rule to radiograph the parts in at least two positions.
The Skull and Accessory Sinuses
There are several positions of the skull which lend themselves to the
production of good radiographs. Of these the lateral is the most useful, as
it gives a general impression of the whole skuU and soft parts, the articulations
at the base, and a lateral view of the cervical vertebrae. There are various
modifications of this position, to be considered in detail later, which are
extremely useful when special areas require to be investigated. To get good
radiographs of the skull, it is essential that the head should lie fiat on one side,
and be held absolutely still during the exposure. A useful instrument for
fixing the skull is that supplied with the Sweet localiser, since it may be used
in all positions of the skull. It has two or more clamps attached to a base,
upon which the plate may be placed. These clamps keep the head in the
same position while several radiographs are produced.
Among the numerous pieces of apparatus which can be used for the
radiography of the skull, there may be noted a simple chair, devised by
Dr. Martin Berry, which promises to answer all the requirements of the
radiographer. This apparatus has a movable back, with a circular hole
in it. The movement is in the vertical direction, to adapt the central
hole to the varying length of the patient when seated in the chair. Side
clamps fix the head after the necessary angle has been determined. This
angle is obtained by a rod moving along the quadrant of a circle. The head
123
124
EADIOGEAPHY
is placed to correspond with the angle on the apparatus, the plate being placed
always at the same angle in relation to the tube. An efficiently protected
tube-box is placed on the back of the chair. It can be accurately centred,
and has both vertical and transverse movements to facihtate rapid adjustment
behind the part to be radiographed. The tube always occupies the same re-
lationship to the plate, the head being tilted to the required angle. To obtain
a picture of the two sphenoidal sinuses side by side, a plate is placed under
the chin and the tube over the vortex at right angles to the plate. A film
placed in the mouth well backwards under the head and soft palate will give
a similar picture. Or the patient may he on a couch with the plate under-
neath and a compressor extension tube brought down on to the head ; this
serves the double purpose of fixing the head and cutting ofi secondary radia-
tions from the tube. The priaciple of the compressor tube has been already dis-
FiG. 104. — Sweet localiser.
cussed. Care must be taken to see that the long axis of the tube is parallel
with the plate, and that the anti-cathode of the tube is accurately centred in
the tube-box before the tube is brought into position. For general purposes a
central position of the tube is all that is necessary, the anti-cathode being
over the centre of the plate, and the base line of the skull corresponding as
nearly as possible with the centre line of the plate in its longest diameter.
The base line of the skull can readily be determined by a method elabor-
ated by Dr. E. W. A. Salmond and the author. A point is taken on the
front of the face corresponding to the nasion, and a line is drawn from this
point backwards through the external auditory meatus to the occipital bone,
ending in the vicinity of the external occipital protuberance. From this
line as a base, other lines may be drawn perpendicularly upwards at stated
PLATE I. — Normal Skulls.
a, Lateral view of normal skull, showing frontal sinuses, sphenoidal sinuses, sella turcica, temporal bones,
cervical vertebras, and lower jaw.
h, Antero-posterior view of adult skull, showing frontal sinuses, orbits, nasal fossae, antra, etc. Frontal
.sinus on left side is opaque.
c, Lateral view of skull to show the sella turcica, articulation of spine to skull ; the temporo- maxillary
articulation on one side is well seen.
KADIOGRAPHY OF THE SKULL
125
intervals, and the skull divided iato three or more sections, these perpendicu-
lar lines being utilised as central points for the radiography of particular
areas of the skull and face. The most useful lines are those drawn at the half
and third distances, or the whole line may be divided into thirds or quarters.
It is hardly necessary in a work of thLs kind to describe variations of this
base line, but for practical purposes several useful methods of localisation
of areas of the skull will be described. For the examination of the mastoid
Fig. 105. — Dr. M. Berry's chair for frontal sinuses, etc.
region a good technique has been described by Dr. Howard Pirie. The
following is the technique he recommends :
Technique. — The patient should he prone on a firm couch. The head is
supported on an inclined plane^ making an angle of 25 degrees with the plane
of the couch, as shown in Fig. 106. The photographic plate rests on this
inchned plane. The head is rotated 90 degrees so that the patient looks directly
to his side ; this brings the mastoid into contact with the plate. The pinna of
the ear is turned forward, so as to obscure the mastoid as little as possible. The
source of X-rays is placed vertically above the head, and the perpendicular ray
is made to fall on a point 2 inches above the highest point of the pinna. The
mastoid on each side must be skiagraphed separately.
The glass of the focus tube should be 9 inches away from the hair. The
exposure required will turn a Sabouraud pastille placed at 2 centimetres from
the glass to one-third of the B tint. A medium hard focus tube (4-5 Benoist),
126
EADIOGRAPHY
with 30 milliamperes for fifteen seconds from a Snook apparatus^ gives a plate
wMch should be fully developed in seven minutes (Ilford plate and developer).
Skiagraphs of both right and left mastoids must be made of every case, as
a single skiagraph of one mastoid is of little value. A different focus tube
should be used for each mastoid, as it is rarely possible to get one tube to remain
constant in vacuum for both exposm-es. Both focus tubes must, of course, be
of the same hardness. This is one of the most important points in the technique
■ — viz., to have two similar tubes of equal hardness and quality. The American-
made tubes lend themselves to this better than any others I have used.
Having secured radiographs of both right and left mastoids, one should
place them side by side in a viewing-box, and note any differences. The radio-
graph should show :
1. The articulation of the lower jaw, and the posterior border of the ascend-
ing ramus of the jaw.
2. The auditory canal, placed
behind the articulation of the lower
jaw, and separated from it by about
one-quarter of an inch.
3. The air cells, which form a
reticulum extending from the articula-
tion of the jaw backwards. The cells
usually appear larger in the lower
part, and smaller above. Sometimes
they extend forwards above the
articulation of the jaw into the base
of the zygoma. It should be remem-
bered that the cells extend well behind
the limit of the mastoid process.
4. The petrous bone surrounding
the auditory canal, appearing as a
dense area superimposed on the
mastoid cells.
5. The outline of the lateral
sinus should be faintly indicated
running through the posterior half of
the cells.
6. The foramen magnum, appear-
ing as an elliptical opening with part of the first vertebra crossing it.
7. The outline of the pinna of the ear.
Acute mastoiditis shows the following departures from the above description :
1. The air cells are obscured, but can still be faintly seen.
2. The outline of the lateral sinus may be a little more defined than normally.
3. The petrous bone is denser.
4. The whole mastoid region is denser.
When one gets an absolutely normal mastoid on one side, and the other
side presents the appearance just described, together with certain clinical signs
and symptoms, one is justified in diagnosing acute mastoiditis.
Chronic mastoiditis is very typical in a skiagraph. It presents the following
departures from the normal :
1. The air cells are completely absent.
2. The petrous bone stands out as a very dense, roughly triangular area,
with its apex pointing upwards and backwards.
3. The posterior border of the petrous bone forms part of a sharp crescent-
FiG. 106.-
-Positioii for nidiograpliy of the mastoid
sinuses. (Pirie. )
PLATE II. — Normal Skulls.
a. Skull of child, plate on anterior aspect showing nasal fossae ; teeth well shown ; there are several
iinerupted teeth seen.
6, Mid area of skull ; a line has been placed on points giving the radiographic base-line ; the line
runs through the base of the sella turcica (dry skull).
c, Lateral view of skull in living subject ; probes have been placed in the frontal and sphenoidal sinuses.
RADIOCJKAPHY OF THE FRONTAL SINUSES
127
shaped line. Tliis crescent-shaped line corresponds with the upper and anterior
border of the lateral sinus.
4. Tlie lateral sinus is fi-efjuently very well shown.
(1) Radiography of the Sella Turcica.- A useful method for the
radiography of the sella turcica has been described by Dr. Finzi. The
patient is placed upon the couch and the tube centred from below. To deter-
mine the exact position two small coins are placed one in each ear. After
these are superimposed under the screen, the tube is then moved upwards and
forwards 1 inch in each direction, and the radiograph taken. A perfect
picture of the area required should be obtained.
When radiographing particular areas of the skull, the diaphragm should
be shut down to the smallest possible size, or if the tube ls used overhead a
small extension tube should be inserted between the tube and the patient.
Pictures obtained in this way will be found to give much finer detail than
those taken with a wide diaphragm. It is important to note that in
radiographs of the skull as much detail as can be obtained is desirable.
(2) The Examination of the Frontal Air Sinuses. — Two methods
may be employed : (a) a lateral view of the skull, showing the air sinuses in
profile ; (6) antero-posterior, the plate on the front of the skull and the tube
behind. A direct antero-
posterior view does not
show the sinuses at all
well, the overlapping of
the shadow caused by the
occipital and temporal
bones obscuring the detail
in the frontal and acces-
sory sinuses. There are
two routes by which the
rays may be passed through
the back of the skull. (1)
The tube may be centred
below the bony mass
formed by the occipital
protuberance : we still
have to traverse the thick
parts of the base of the
skull. (2) A better method
is to place the patient face
downwards on the photo-
graphic plate, the latter
being placed at an angle
of 25 degrees. The tube
is centred well in front Combined chair with clamps for flxation of the head and an
adaptable plate-holder.
of the occipital protuber-
ance, and an oblique though somewhat distorted view is obtained which
Fig. 107. — Chair for cranial radiography.
128
EADIOGKAPHY
shows the frontal air sinuses well. Plate I., showing frontal air sinuses,
taken by this method, illustrates the points to be examined.
(3) For the Examination of the Sphenoidal Sinuses, the
Ethmoidal Sinuses, and the Turbinate Bones, a plate is fixed on the front
of the face, and the tube centred just a little below the occipital protuberance.
This position should also show the bones of the face and the maxillary antrum.
The teeth are also well demonstrated. The condyles of the jaw and the an-
terior view of the tempero-maxillary articulation are also seen, while behind
and a little external is the mastoid process, with its air cells clearly shown.
Plate I., representing a normal skull taken in the lateral position, shows
Fig. 108. — Chair for cranial radiography.
all the important structures at the base of the skull ; the three levels are well
shown, and the various air sinuses are distinctly seen, notably the frontal
air sinuses. Taking the bones of the skull from before backwards, one sees
the orbital plate of the frontal bone, the anterior clinoid process, the sella
turcica, the posterior clinoid process standing well in relief ; extending
backwards, the petrous portion of the temporal bone appears as a denser
irregular shadow ; and, immediately behind, the mastoid air cells are promi-
nently shown. Then, at the posterior portion, the well-marked depression
formed by the occipital bone is shown. The thickness of the bony wall of
the section of the skull shows the two layers of bone with the cancellous
bone between them.
PLATE III. — Skulls showing Departures from the Normal.
a, Lateral view of skull, showing erosion of occipital bone the result of injury with secondary
■disease of bone. Note large frontal sinuses.
b, Skull in a child, showing moulding of the cranial bones resulting from intracranial pressure.
c, Skull from a case of tumour of the brain, situated at the sella turcica ; the detail in the
region is lost.
PLATE IV. — Lower Jaw and Cervical Region.
a, Dentigerous cyst iu lower jaw (buried tooth).
6, Fracture through ramus of lower jaw.
Skull showing good detail in soft parts, absence of teeth, calcified cervical glands.
d, Bismuth food in stricture at upper end of oesophagus.
THE LOWER JAW . 129
In the region of the neck the cervical vertebrae are shown lq profile, the
styloid process extending downwards and forwards between the cervical
vertebrae and the descending ramus of the lower jaw. The zygomatic arch
is seen extending forwards on the lateral aspect of the face. The superior
maxilla gives an irregular shadow and the anterior shows a clear space, the
nasal bones are faintly outlined in profile, and the lower jaw is also shown in
its lateral aspect.
(4) The Lower Jaw is an important bone, and rather difficult to demon-
strate satisfactorily. It may be shown by two methods : (a) showing the
whole of the bone in a skiagram of the face ; (6) portions of the bone may be
demonstrated by placing a film inside the mouth agaiast the part of the bone
it is necessary to show, and using the focus tube outside. The picture then
obtained is a small one, but quite large enough to show a fracture, an abscess,
or disease or damage to a tooth and its socket. The tempero-maxUlary articu-
lation of either side can be satisfactorily shown by centering the tube behind
and a little below the angle of the jaw on the more distant aspect from the
plate,
Plate I., Fig. h shows the chief bony points of the skuU and face taken
from the antero-posterior position. The plate was placed on the face, with
the focus tube behind. The orbits are well marked, and the nasal cavities
show a considerable amount of detail, which is of great value when one
has to consider the possibility of fracture in these regions. The antrum of
Highmore is clearly defined, the zygomatic arch stands out prominently,
the lower jaw is thrown out in relief, and behind there is a distinct picture
of the mastoid portion of the temporal bone with the air cells.
Plate I., Fig. c shows a small and more distinct view of the central
portion of the bony parts of the skull. The points to observe are the levels
of the bone of the skull in relation to the exterior, the clinoid processes with
the sella turcica between, the relation of the chief sutures to the various levels,
and the well-marked grooves in the inner table of the skull for blood-vessels.
A clearly defined shadow is thrown by the pituitary body situated in the sella
turcica. The cervical vertebrae in relation to the bone of the skull show up
well. The condyle of the lower jaw, situated in its articular cavity, is also
evident, and a fairly good idea of the general contour of the latter.
(5) The Examination of the Mouth, and especially the Teeth, is
one which calls for special attention. The general outline can be obtained
by plates placed on the exterior, the tube being angled to prevent overlapping
of the shadows produced by the two sides. Better results can be obtained
when films are placed in the interior of the mouth against the area required,
the tube being centred over the film from the outside. A suitable mouth gag
may be used ; this possesses the great advantage of preventing movements
during the exposure ; a piece of cork or a towel rolled up tight is also very
efficacious when other appliances are not at hand.
Special appliances have been devised for the retention of the film in the
mouth. A suitably-shaped cork is provided with a slot, into which various
rectangular plates of metal are slipped. These metal plates are soft, and can
9
130
EADIOGEAPHY
be bent into any curve to suit the contour of the mouth, and thus secure a
close contact. The films are wrapped up in paper as usual, with a small
loop of paper left at the back, which is slipped over the metal plate, so that
any curve to which the plate is bent also carries the film with it.
The cork is gripped in the mouth by the patient, it being obvious that
this method enables the film to be held in any position inside the mouth
without any further device or support.
The Cervical Region
The best positions in which to radiograph this area are : (1) The antero-
FiG. 109. — Upper cervical region, antero-posterior view.
Taken with plate behind and an extension tube in front of the open mouth.
posterior, and (2) the lateral. The antero-posterior is comparatively easy in
the lower two-thirds. AVhen the patient is placed with the posterior aspect
on the plate and the tube centred over the middle of the plate, a view is ob-
tained of the whole of the cervical vertebrae and the upper dorsal, the apices
of the lungs coming into the picture, as do also the sternal ends of the clavicles
and the manubrium sterni. The upper cervical vertebrae are obscured by
the basi occiput and the lower maxilla.
Should it be necessary to obtain an impression of the first three cervical
vertebrsB, other methods must be adopted. The base of the occiput and the
THE CERVICAL REGION
131
first and second cervical vertebrae may be examined by placing a plate on
the posterior aspect ; and by using a small extension tube, with the mouth
opened to its widest extent, a good radiograph may be obtained which should
show the condyles of the occipital bone, the odontoid process of the axis,
the atlas, and the third cervical vertebra.
The lateral view of the cervical area shows the whole region from the
occiput down to the upper dorsal vertebrae. This is a good method for
ascertaining the condition of the bodies of the cervical vertebrae, the integrity
of the spinal canal, and the presence of abnormalities of the region. The
presence of cervical ribs can best
be shown by the antero-posterior
position.
The cervical region has been
partially shown in Fig. 109, but
it is necessary to illustrate this
particular region fully, for it is
here that the difficulty of show-
ing a fracture or dislocation may
be very great, and in some in-
stances impossible.
An antero-posterior view of
the neck region is not a very
satisfactory one, because of the
superimposing of the occipital
region and the lower jaw. In
cases where it is desirable to show
the atlas and axis, and the articu-
lation between the former and the occipital bone, it is necessary to take the
skiagram through the open mouth, as described in detail above. The
resulting picture is necessarily small, but large enough to include the
parts desired.
The position usually taken is the lateral one, with the head rotated
towards the plate. It is then possible to get a fairly good outline of the seven
cervical vertebrae and the adjacent portions of the base of the skull. The
bodies of the cervical vertebrae are readily shown, but to get accurate
outlines the head must not be moved to either side.
Fig. 110. — Normal cervical and upper dorsal region
showing the sterno-clavicular articulation. This
position is useful when examinations for cervical ribs
have to be made.
The Bones of the Chest
The Clavicles may be examined in their entire length, or in sections when
the shoulder or upper thorax are in the picture. The patient is placed with
the plate on the front of the chest, and the tube is operated either from below
or from above, whichever is the more convenient.
The Sternum has often to be examined, the position in which it is usually
taken being from behind forwards. The picture is usually confused by the
shadows of the mediastinum and spinal column. An oblique lateral view
132 EADIOGEAPHY
of tlie thorax enables us to examine the whole of the sternum with its articula-
tions. The picture is naturally somewhat distorted, but nevertheless a good
idea may be obtained of its condition, injuries and tumours being readily
shown. The ribs can be shown in these positions, the lateral position
showing the ribs in their entirety.
The Dorsal Spine
Two methods are used here : (1) an antero-posterior, with the plate on
the posterior aspect of the spine ; (2) a direct lateral view. The latter may be
obtained by placing the plate on one side and the tube on the other, the arms
being extended above the head, to get rid, so far as is possible, of the shadows
of the scapulae. The bodies of the vertebrae are then well seen, as is also the
posterior portion of the column with the transverse process, the laminae,
and spines of the vertebrae. The spinal canal can also be seen in the plate.
In taking the antero-posterior view, it is well to have the tube a good
distance away from the plate, the greater the distance the better being the
detail shown in the bones. The exposure has to be proportionately pro-
longed, and if the tube is soft a longer exposure is further necessary. In
examining the spine of children for curvature, etc., the author obtains good
pictures by placing the tube four or five feet from the plate.
Stereoscopic radiographs should always be taken of these spinal cases,
as much more detail can be shown when they are examined in a stereoscope.
This method is most useful in extensive caries of the spine when there is
considerable deformity, as the picture is sharp, and fine changes in the bones
can be detected. When the spine alone is required the diaphragm of the
tube box should be closed down in order to get a long, narrow, slit-like
aperture ; this ensures better detail in the parts required.
The Lumbar Spine
This is radiographed in the antero-posterior position, from the lower
dorsal to the sacrum, by using a large extension tube with compression of the
abdominal contents. It is an advantage in all positions of the spine, thorax,
and abdomen, to diminish the movements of the parts as much as possible.
The methods of compression employed are various. If working from below,
it is an easy matter to have some simple form of compressor attached to the
upper aspect of the couch. An air-cushion is placed between the patient
and the couch to compress the abdominal contents. When using the tube
above the couch, the compression may be obtained by fastening stout linen
bands to the couch, carrying them round the patient, and fixing on the op-
posite side. A long extension tube may be attached to the tube-holder, and
fixed down on the patient by a mechanical device. These are all matters
of detail which can be arranged to suit the individual worker, but whichever
method is employed there can be no question of the great advantages of
compression.
PLATE V. — Normal Lumbar Spine and Pelvis.
a. Normal lumbar spine.
h. Normal male pelvis,
c, Normal female pelvis.
THE UPPER EXTREMITY 133
The Pelvis
This region often requires most careful examination, for injuries, disease,
or calculi. The positions are again two, antero-posterior and postero-
anterior, both being useful. To get fine detail of the sacrum an extension
tube is used, and it should be pressed well down into the pelvic cavity. The
whole pelvis, with the heads of the femora and the acetabula, can be obtained
by using a large plate behind the patient, or by placing the patient on
the anterior surface with the plate underneath, the tube being placed
above the posterior aspect of the patient. For the examination of the
coccyx a small extension tube should be used, and the tube tilted forward
into the cavity of the pelvis, the plate being placed on the posterior aspect
beneath the patient.
The Upper Extremity
The Examination of the Clavicle. — The clavicle requires to be con-
sidered in its whole length. Either extremity will appear in radiographs of
the shoulder and of the thorax. The external end has frequently to be
examined for displacements and injuries. The acromial end of the clavicle
is seen in the several plates illustrating the shoulder-joint.
Examination of the Shoulder-joint. — The shoulder- joint calls for
minute description. It is frequently injured, and should be carefully exam-
ined in all cases of suspected injury to that region. It is usually examined
in the antero-posterior position, first with the plate on the posterior aspect
of the joint with the tube in front, and then with the plate placed on the
anterior aspect with the tube behind. It should always be examined in these
two positions, if one is to demonstrate an injury in the shoulder-joint.
The anti-cathode should be centred as nearly as possible over the coracoid
process. An extension tube should be used, and slight pressure applied to
the part. The pictures obtained by these two positions differ in several
points of detail, the difierences being readily seen when the two radiographs
are compared. The anatomical points seen in the pictures should be — (1) the
head of the humerus ; (2) the glenoid cavity ; (3) the axillary border of the
scapula; (4) the coracoid process ; (5) the acromion process ; (6) the acromial
end of the clavicle. It is usual in such examinations to have the arm by
the side. Supplementary skiagrams can be obtained by extending the arm
out from the side or carrying it directly upwards in line with the long axis
of the body. When it is necessary to examine the tuberosities the arm may
be rotated in the direction necessary to show either one. Should the
axillary border be suspected, the arm should be carried upwards and
forwards and rotated outwards, so as to bring the body of the scapula away
from the trunk.
Plate VI., Fig. h shows the appearance of the parts when the plate is
placed on the anterior aspect of the joint.
The acromion process is best shown when the plate is placed on the
134 EADIOGEAPHY
posterior aspect of tlie joint, with the tube in front, it beiag then possible to
demonstrate the whole of the process and the spiae of the scapula, while the
infra- and supra-spinous fossae can also be shown in their entirety. The
coracoid process is well seen in all of the shoulder negatives, and changes
in its position can be shown, fractures being readily demonstrated.
When fine detail is necessary, and an injury is known to exist in the
region of the coracoid process, a small picture should be obtained, an exten-
sion tube being centred over the process, and the plate being either on the
posterior or anterior aspect of the joint. The greater tuberosity of the
humerus will be clearly shown. Its position and appearance will vary with
the position of the shaft of the bone at the time, as regards rotation outwards
or inwards. With the arm abducted and carried over the head, the shoulder-
joint alters considerably in appearance. The head of the humerus and the
glenoid cavity are well demonstrated, and the coracoid process is also well
seen.
The spine and body of the scapula are often investigated for evidence of
fracture or tumour. The bone shows well in any of the usual positions, but
if the vertebral border is under inspection, it is necessary to take a plate with
the patient lying on it, and the arm abducted and carried upwards towards
the head.
The Elbow-joint. — Four positions are available in this joint, and each
may be modified by the position in which the limb is placed at the time.
(1) Antero-posterior, with plate on the front of the limb.
(2) Antero-posterior, with plate on the back of the limb.
(3) Lateral internal, with plate on the inner aspect of the joint, the arm
being either flexed or extended.
(4) Lateral external, plate on outer aspect of the joint, the forearm
flexed or extended.
Good pictures of the head of the radius and its articulation can be
obtained by slightly flexing and pronating the forearm.
The Radius and Ulna should always be taken in two positions : (1)
lateral, (2) antero-posterior.
The Wrist-joint must always be examined in two planes, the antero-
posterior and the lateral. In both positions the tube is centred over the
carpus. Compression on the limb may be effected by using a long extension
tube, pads of lamb's wool being applied over the part, or sand-bags may be
used to steady the limb.
Metacarpal Bones and Phalang-es. — These frequently call for care-
ful examination. Antero-posterior and lateral pictures may readily be
obtained, but lateral pictures of the middle metacarpal bones are very
difficult to obtain. The hand is placed obliquely on a plate, and the tube
directed well in front of the middle line. The picture is somewhat distorted.
Lateral views of the phalanges can be procured by placing a plate between
the fingers.
PLATE YI. — Normal Shoulder-joint.
«, Normal shoulder -joint, plate on posterior aspect of joint.
b. Normal shoulder-joint, plate on anterior aspect.
c. Normal shoulder-joint, arm abducted.
THE LOWER EXTREMITY 135
The Lower Extremity
The bones of the pelvis are seen in most of the radiographs taken for the
bladder and ureters. The sacrum is readily shown by putting a plate beneath
the patient, and using a compression tube from above. In large pictures of
the region the acetabula with the head of the femur are well shown.
When the two joints are required for comparison, a good method is to
radiograph the lower pelvis, centering the tube just below the symphysis
pubis. Good detail is obtained of the head of the bones, and a good outline
of the acetabulum.
The iliac bones, which often require to be radiographed for fracture,
tumour, etc., may be examined in two positions, with the tube centred over
the middle of each bone, from the front.
The Hip-joint is probably one of the joints most frequently examined.
Two positions are available :
(a) The posterior, when the plate is placed below the patient and the
tube centred over the head of the bone.
(6) The anterior, with the plate on the front of the joint and the tube
centred behind.
Both are useful, and either may give valuable information. The im-
portant point is to make sure that good detail is obtained. This joint is the
most difficult of all the joints from which to obtain good radiographs.
A third position has already been described, where the plate is behind
the patient and the tube centred just above the symphysis pubis.
However obtained, a good radiograph should show the head of the femur,
the cotyloid notch should be visible, the rim of the acetabulum should be
seen superimposed over the head of the bone, and in normal joints the inter-
articular space should be shown. The picture should include the greater and
lesser trochanter and the upper third of the shaft of the femur. The ischium
and pubis should come into the picture, as should also the lower half of the
ilium. In some instances the limb may be abducted and rotated outwards
to throw the head of the femur into prominence.
The Shaft of the Femur may be taken in two directions, antero-
posterior and lateral. Only the lower two-thirds can be seen in the latter
position. When the whole bone is required long, narrow plates must be
used, the tube requiring to be centred at a longer distance, in order to get the
whole of the bone. The lateral view of the femur may be taken from either
side.
The Knee-joint. — This important joint requires careful examination.
(a) Both knee-joints may be taken on one plate. The tube is centred over
the space between the two joints, and either an anterior or posterior view may
be obtained, (6) Plate on posterior aspect of joint, tube in front, (c) Plate
on anterior aspect, tube behind. The patella is well seen by this method of
examination.
For the patella alone, the plate is placed on the front and the tube centred
just outside the external border of the shaft, and directed obliquely down-
136 EADIOGEAPHY
wards to avoid the shadow of the femur obscuring that of the patella. Plates
taken in this position give good detail of the component parts of the joint.
Fine detail should always be aimed at in these examinations. It is often
possible to show apparently slight injury to the bone without an actual
fracture. At a later date this may become the seat of chronic inflammatory
changes, or tuberculosis of a joint may be a sequel to such an injury.
The points to observe are the general contour of the articular
surface, and the space between the condyles, which is usually occupied
by cartilage, but which frequently does not show any detail of the
articular surface, though plates taken with a very soft tube show shadowy
detail of the cartilages and the softer structures of the joint. The normal
position of the patella, the articular surface of the upper end of the tibia,
and the spine of the tibia should be noted. This is of great importance,
for when cases are examined for injuries of the joint we must not overlook
the relations of these parts to one another.
(d) The lateral view of the knee-joint is the most useful one from the
point of view of diagnosis. In it we see the relations of the bony surfaces and
a faint line of the articular cartilage, while in some instances the shadow of
the internal articular cartilage is seen in a very faint, somewhat striated
shadow. The outline of the patella is sharp and clearly cut, the pad of fat
below the patella is frequently shown, and the Ugamentum patellae can be
traced from the lower edge of the patella to its insertion into the tuberosity
of the tibia. The two condyles of the lower end of the femur are clearly
seen, and the head of the fibula with its articulation to the tibia is also
shown. This view of the knee-joint may be taken from either side — internal
or external.
The Tibia and the Fibula. — These bones may be radiographed from the
front or the back, or laterally, from the inner or outer aspects of the limb.
The Ankle-joint. — There are four positions for the examination of
this joint :
(a) Anterior, plate on the front of the limb.
(6) Posterior, plate on the posterior aspect of the limb, the foot at right
angles to the leg.
(c) Lateral internal.
(d) Lateral external.
The Bones of the Foot : Tarsal, Metatarsal, and Phalang-es. —
For a general survey of the foot, the plate may be placed upon the inner aspect
and the tube centred over the mid-point between the os calcis and the end of
the toes.
By making another exposure the outer aspect of the foot may be brought
into closer contact with the plate.
The OS calcis can be examined in three positions :
(1) In the lateral position, plate on outer aspect of foot
(2) Lateral aspect, plate on inner side of the foot.
(3) With a plate placed mider the foot, the patient standing upon it,
the tube being centred behind the bone, well above the insertion of the tendo
THE FOOT 137
Acliillis, and directed obliquely downwards and forwards. A good view of
the whole bone may be obtained in this way.
To obtain a reliable radiograph of the metatarsus and phalanges, the
foot is placed upon the plate and the tube is directed downwards and slightly
towards the heel. The patient may stand upon the plate ; or if he is lying
on the back, the knee-joint is flexed, and the plantar aspect of the foot is
placed in contact with the plate.
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE BONES
The importance of this section is great, as it is necessary to know the
details of ossification and union of these bones. The following descriptions
and drawings are based on those from well-known works on anatomy.
The dates given are those which have long been recognised as the correct
ones, but it is quite probable in the near future that many of those
quoted may have to be revised as a result of systematic investigation on bone
ossification by means of X-ray examinations. It is possible by this means
to ascertain accurately the normal dates of union, but until the work of X-ray
examination has been completely carried out it will be necessary to use
the work of the anatomist.
The chief times of union need only be considered in those bones which are
most likely to be injured. The ends of the long bones, the scapula, and
the pelvis chiefly interest the radiographer. The usefulness of a complete
though necessarily short description cannot be overestimated. Diagrams
and skiagrams will be used to illustrate changes, though it is obviously
impossible to include examples of the epiphyses at all ages. It is hoped that
this section will be found useful for reference, as it is hardly possible for the
radiographer to carry all the dates in his mind.
The Clavicle. — Commencing with the bones of the upper extremity,
we note that this bone is developed from three centres, two for the shaft and
one for the sternal extremity. The centre for the shaft appears very early,
before any other hone ; according to Beclard, as early as the thirtieth day.
The centre for the sternal end makes its appearance about the eighteenth or
twentieth year, and unites with the rest of the bone about the twenty-fifth
year.
The Scapula. — Development takes place by seven centres: one for the
body, two for the coracoid process, two for the acromion, one for the pos-
terior border, and one for the inferior angle. Ossification of the body of the
scapula commences about the second month of foetal life by the formation of
an irregular plate of bone immediately behind the glenoid cavity. This plate
extends itself so as to form the chief part of the bone, the spine growing up
from its posterior surface about the third month. At birth the chief part of
the scapula is osseous, the coracoid and acromion processes, the posterior
border and inferior angle being cartilaginous. About the first year after
birth ossification takes place in the middle of the coracoid process, which
138
PLATE VII. — Normal Elbow and Fractures in Region of Elbow-joint.
a, Normal elbow-joint, antero-posterior loositiou.
b, Injury to epiphysis of olecranon.
c, Normal elbow-joint, lateral position.
d, Fracture through olecranon process.
THE UPPER EXTREMITY 139
usually becomes joined with the rest of the bone at the time when the other
centres make their appearance. Between the fifteenth and seventeenth
years ossification of the remaining centres takes place in quick succession,
and in the following order : first, near the base of the acromion and in the
root of the coracoid process, the latter appearing in the form of a broad scale ;
secondly, in the inferior angle and contiguous part of the posterior border ;
thirdly, near the extremity of the acromion ; and fourthly, in the posterior
border. The acromion process, besides being formed of two separate nuclei,
has its base formed by an extension into it of the centre of ossification which
belongs to the spine, the extent of which varies in different cases. The
two separate nuclei unite, and then join with the extension carried in from
the spine. These various epiphyses become joined to the bone between the
ages of twenty-two and twenty-five years. Sometimes failure of union
between the acromion process and spine occurs, the jmiction being formed by
fibrous tissue or by an imperfect articulation. In some cases of supposed
fracture of the acromion with ligamentous union it is probable that the
detached segment was never united to the rest of the bone.
The Humerus. — Development takes place by eight centres : one for
the shaft, one for the head, one for each tuberosity, one for the radial head,
one for the trochlear portion of the articular surface, and one for each of the
condyles. The nucleus for the shaft appears near the centre of the bone in
the eighth week, and soon extends towards the extremities. At birth the
humerus is ossified nearly in its whole length, the extremities remaining
cartilaginous. At the beginning of the second year ossification commences in
the head of the bone, and during the third year the centre for the tuberosities
makes its appearance usually by a single ossific point, but sometimes, accord-
ing to Beclard, by one for each tuberosity, that for the lesser being small
and not appearing until after the fourth year. By the fifth year the centres
for the head and tuberosities have enlarged, and become joined so as to form
a single large epiphysis.
The lower end of the humerus is developed in the following manner : — ^At
the end of the second year ossification commences in the radial portion of
the articular surface, and from this point extends inwards, so as to form the
chief part of the articular end of the bone, the centre for the inner part of the
articular surface not appearing until about the age of twelve. Ossification
commences in the internal condyle about the fifth year, and in the external
one not until about the thirteenth or fourteenth year. At about sixteen or
seventeen years the outer condyle and both portions of the articulating
surfaces (having already joined) unite with the shaft. At eighteen years
the inner condyle becomes joined, whilst the upper epiphysis, although the
first formed, is not united until about the twentieth year.
The Ulna. — Development takes place by three centres : one for the
shaft, one for the inferior extremity, and one for the olecranon. Ossification
commences near the middle of the shaft about the eighth week, and soon
extends through the greater part of the bone. At birth the ends are carti-
laginous. About the fourth year a separate osseous nucleus appears in the
140 KADIOGEAPHY
middle of the head, which soon extends into the styloid process. At about
the tenth year ossific matter appears in the olecranon near its extremity,
the chief part of this process being formed from an extension of the shaft
into it. At about the sixteenth year the upper epiphysis becomes joined,
and at about the twentieth year the lower one.
The Radius. ^ — ^Development takes place by three centres, one for the
shaft and one for each extremity. That for the shaft makes its appearance
near the centre of the bone, soon after the development of the humerus
commences. At birth the shaft is ossified, but the ends of the bone are
cartilaginous. About the end of the second year ossification commences
in the lower epiphysis, and about the fifth year in the upper one. At the
age of seventeen or eighteen the upper epiphysis becomes joined to the
shaft, the lower epiphysis becoming united about the twentieth year.
The Bones of the Hand. — The carpal bones are each developed by
a single centre. At birth they are all cartilaginous. Ossification proceeds
in the following order : in the os magnum and unciform an ossific point
appears during the first year, the former preceding the latter ; in the cunei-
form, at the third year ; in the trapezium and semilunar, at the fifth year, the
former preceding the latter ; in the scaphoid, at the sixth year ; in the
trapezoid, during the eighth year ; and in the pisiform, about the twelfth year.
The metacarpal bones are each developed by two centres, one for the shaft
and one for the digital extremity, for the four inner metacarpal bones ; one
for the shaft and one for the base, for the metacarpal bone of the thumb,
which in this respect resembles the phalanges. Ossification commences in
the shaft about the eighth or ninth week, and gradually proceeds to either
end of the bone. About the third year the digital extremities of the four
inner metacarpal bones and the base of the first metacarpal bones commence
to ossify, and they unite about the eighteenth year.
The phalanges are each developed by two centres, one for the shaft and
one for the base. Ossification commences in the shaft in all three rows at
about the eighth week, and gradually involves the whole of the bone except-
ing the upper extremity. Ossification of the base commences between the
third and fourth years, and a year later in those of the second and third rows.
The two centres become united in each row between the eighteenth and
twentieth years.
The Os Innominatum is a large, irregularly shaped bone, which,
with that of the opposite side, forms the sides and anterior walls of the
pelvic cavity. In yomig subjects it consists of the separate parts which
meet and form the large cup-shaped cavity situated near the middle of the
outer side of the bone ; and although in the adult these have become united,
it is usual to describe the bone as divisible into three portions : the ilium,
the ischium, and the pubes. Development takes place by eight centres : three
primary, one for the ilium, one for the ischium, and one for the pubes ; and
five secondary, one for the crest of the ilium, one for the anterior inferior
spinous process (said to occur more frequently in the male than in the female),
one for the tuberosity of the ischium, one for the symphysis pubis (more
PLATE VIII. — Normal Knee-joint.
a, Normal knee-joint, lateral view.
h, Knee-joint in young adult, irregularity in region of tubercle of tibia.
c, Normal knee-joint, antero-posterior.
THE LOWER EXTREMITY 141
frequent in the female than in the male), and one for the Y-shaped piece at
the bottom of the acetabulum.
These various centres appear in the following order : (a) in the ilium,
immediately above the sciatic notch, at about the same period as the develop-
ment of the vertebrae commences ; (b) in the body of the ischium, at about the
third month of foetal life ; and (c) in the body of the pubes, between the fourth
and fifth months. At birth the three primary centres are quite separate,
the crest, the bottom of the acetabulum, and the rami of the ischium and
pubes being still cartilaginous. At about the seventh or eighth year the
rami of the pubes and ischium are almost completely ossified. About the
thirteenth or fourteenth year the three divisions of the bone have extended
their growth into the bottom of the acetabulum, being separated from each
other by the Y-shaped portion of cartilage, which now presents traces of
ossification. The ilium and ischium then become joined, and lastly the pubes,
through the intervention of the Y-shaped portion. At about the age of
puberty ossification takes place in each of the remaining portions, and they
become joined to the rest of the bone about the twenty-fifth year. It is
important to bear in mind the development of the bones entering into the
hip-joint, as this region has to be frequently examined for injuries and
disease.
The FemuF. — The femur is developed by five centres : one for the shaft,
one for each extremity, and one for each trochanter. Of all the long bones
except the clavicle it is the first to show ossification ; this commences in
the shaft about the fifth week of foetal life, the centres of ossification appear-
ing in the epiphyses in the following order : first in the lower end of the bone
at the ninth month of foetal life — from this the condyles and tuberosities are
formed ; in the head at the end of the first year of birth ; in the great tro-
chanter during the fourth year ; and in the lesser trochanter between the
thirteenth and fourteenth years. The order in which the epiphyses are joined
to the shaft is the reverse of that of their appearance ; their junction does not
commence until after puberty, the lesser trochanter being first joined, then
the greater, then the head, and lastly the inferior extremity (the first in which
ossification commenced), which is not united until the twentieth year.
The Patella. — ^Development takes place by a single centre, which makes
its appearance about the third year. In two instances it has been seen
cartilaginous throughout at a much later period (six years). More rarely
the bone is developed by two centres placed side by side. Ossification
is completed about the age of puberty.
The Tibia. — -Development takes place by three centres, one for the
shaft and one for each extremity. Ossification commences in the centre of
the shaft about the seventh week, and gradually extends towards either
extremity. The centre for the upper epiphysis appears at birth. It is
flattened in form, and has a thin tongue-shaped process in front, which forms
the tubercle. That for the lower epiphysis appears in the second year. The
lower epiphysis joins the shaft at about the eighteenth, and the upper one
about the twentieth year. Two additional centres occasionally exist : one
142 RADIOGKAPHY
for the tongue-shaped process of the upper epiphysis, the tubercle, and one
for the inner malleolus.
The Fibula. ^ — Development takes place by three centres, one for the
shaft and one for each extremity. Ossification commences in the shaft
about the eighth week of foetal life, a little later than in the tibia, and extends
gradually towards the extremities. At birth both ends are cartilaginous.
Ossification commences in the lower end in the second year, and in the upper
one about the fourth year. The lower epiphysis, the first in which ossifica-
tion commences, becomes united to the shaft first, contrary to the law which
appears to prevail with regard to the junction of epiphysis with diaphysis.
This takes place about the twentieth year. The upper epiphysis is joined
about the twenty-fifth year.
The Bones of the Foot. — The tarsal hones are each developed by a
single centre, excepting the os calcis, which has an epiphysis for its posterior
extremity, just below the insertion of the tendo Achillis. It is seen as a small
oval disc. The centres make their appearance in the following order : os
calcis, at the sixth month of foetal life ; astragalus, about the seventh month ;
€uboid, at the ninth month ; external cuneiform, during the first year ;
internal cuneiform, in the third year ; middle cuneiform and scaphoid, in the
fourth year. The epiphysis for the posterior extremity of the os calcis
appears at the tenth year, and unites with the rest of the bone soon after
puberty.
The metatarsal hones are each developed by two centres : one for the shaft
and one for the digital extremity in the four outer metatarsals ; one for the
shaft and one for the base in the metatarsal bone of the great toe. Ossifica-
tion commences in the centre of the shaft about the ninth week and
extends towards either extremity, and in the digital epiphysis about the
third year ; they become joined between the eighteenth and twentieth years.
The ■phalanges are developed by two centres for each bone, one for the
shaft and one for the metatarsal extremity.
The Hyoid Bone is a bony arch, shaped like a horse-shoe, and is of a
quadrilateral form. Development takes place by six centres, two for the
body and one for each cornua. Ossification commences in the body and
greater cornua towards the end of fcetal life, the centres for the cornua first
appearing. Ossification at the lesser cornua commences some months
after birth.
The Sternum is a flat narrow bone, situated in the median line in the
front of the chest, and consisting in the adult of three portions — the manu-
brium, the gladiolus, and the ensiform or xiphoid appendix. The sternum,
including the ensiform appendix, is developed by six centres — one for
the first piece or the manubrium, four for the second piece or gladiolus,
and one for the ensiform appendix. Up to the middle of foetal life the
sternum is entirely cartilaginous, and when ossification takes place the
ossific granules are deposited in the middle of the intervals, between the
articular depressions for the costal cartilages, in the following order :
in the first piece, between the fifth and sixth months ; in the second and
THE TRUNK 143
third, between the sixth and seventh months ; in the fourth piece, at the
ninth month ; in the fifth, within the first year, or between the first and
second years after birth ; and in the ensiform appendix, between the second
and the seventeenth and eighteenth years by a single centre, which makes
its appearance at the upper part and proceeds gradually doAvnwards. To
these may be added the occasional existence, as described by Breschet, of
two small episternal centres, which make their appearance, one on each side
of the sterno-clavicular notch. These are regarded by him as the anterior
rudiments of a rib, of which the posterior rudiment is the anterior lamina
of the transverse process of the seventh cervical vertebra. It occasionally
happens that some of the segments are formed from more than one centre,
the number and position of which vary. Thus the first piece may have two,
three, or even six centres. When two are present, they are generally situated
one above the other, the upper one being the larger. The second piece has
seldom more than one. The third, fourth, and fifth pieces are often formed
from two centres, placed laterally, the irregular union of which will serve to
explain the occasional occurrence of the sternal foramen or of the vertical
fissure which occasionally intersects this part of the bone. Union of the
various centres commences from below and proceeds upwards, taking place
in the following order : the fifth piece is joined to the fourth soon after
puberty ; the fourth to the third between the twentieth and twenty-fifth
years ; the third to the second between the thirty-fifth and fortieth years ;
the second is occasionally joined to the first, especially at an advanced age.
Ossification of the Skull and the Vertebral Column. — It is
unnecessary to deal extensively with the development of these bones. In
the vertebral column each vertebra is ossified from three centres, two for the
vertebral arch and one for the body. About the sixteenth year five secondary
centres appear : one for the extremity of each transverse process, one for
the extremity of the spinous process, one for the upper and one for the lower
surface of the body. These fuse with the rest of the body about the age of
twenty -five years.
These are the main points in the ossification of the vertebral column ;
but there are exceptions in the case of the first, second, and seventh cervical,
and in the lumbar vertebrae.
The atlas is usually ossified from three centres.
The axis is ossified from five primary and two secondary centres.
The seventh cervical varies in its departures from the normal. A cervical
rib is due to a persistence as a separate piece of the costal part, which becomes
lengthened laterally and forwards.
The lumbar vertebrae have each two additional centres for the mammillary
processes. The transverse process of the first lumbar is sometimes developed
as a separate piece, which may remain permanently un-united with the rest
of the body, thus forming a lumbar rib, a peculiarity rarely met with.
144
EADIOGEAPHY
Radiographic Survey of the Joints showing Epiphyses
The Ankle-joint. — The lower epiphyses of the tibia and fibula are best
seen in an antero-posterior view of the joint. The epiphyseal line is nearly
horizontal in the case of both bones, but that of the fibula is at a lower level
and comes opposite the ankle-joint. The internal malleolus forms the inner
portion of the lower tibial epiphysis, while the external malleolus is practically
Appears at^
2mJ year
Joins body
about
20Vyr
Appears^
at Z^-^yr.
lUnites
about
IZOthyr
Fig. 111. — Showing bones at ankle and foot with epipliyses, and
dates at which they unite with the diaphyses.
Appears
at 3 '■-"_>' r
■Joins 18*-''
to20*-^yrs.
Appears
ytl'week.
entirely composed of the lower epiphysis of the fibula. The latter epiphysis
is greatly concerned in the increase in length of the fibula.
Table of Development of the Taesus
The tarsal bones develop by a single centre.
Os calcis ....
They appear approximately as follows : —
. Sixth month of foetal life.
Sometimes this bone develops from two or three centres of ossification.
Astragalus .... Seventh month of foetal life.
Ninth month of foetal life.
First year.
Third year.
Cuboid
External cuneiform
Internal cuneiform
Sliddle cuneiform
Scaphoid .
Fourth year.
Fourth year.
The ossific centre for the epiphysis of the os calcis appears at the ninth year, and may
sometimes unite before puberty. It may develop from two centres.
THE KNEE-JOINT
U5
Fig. 112.— Foot.
Antero-posterior view, plantar aspect of foot on plate. Age 14.
Knee-joint. — The epiphyses entering into the formation of this joint are
of the'greatest importance, for it is one of the joints most frequently injured.
Appears 9*^
month of
foetal life
Lower end of femur.
Upper end of tibia.
Upper.end of fibula.
Fig. 113. — Diagram to show the epiphyses entering into the knee-joint.
The epiphysis of the lower end of the femur is the only one in which bone
is formed before birth.
10
146 RADIOGRAPHY
In an antero-posterior view it is seen as a large irregular bony mass,
Antero-posterior. Lateral.
Fig. 114. — Diagrams to illustrate the appearances of the epiphyses at the knee-joint,
traced from radiographs.
forming the entire lower end of the femur.
Bpiphyspal line
i^ss^m/fi^mKm
I Patella
Tubercle
of Tibia
Fig. 115. — Lateral view of knee-joint, showing epiphyses.
Note prolongation of tibial epiphysis on anterior aspect
of tibia. Age, 14 years.
The epiphyseal line is seen at
the level of the
adductor tubercle
on the inner side.
It is wavy in out-
line, rises sharply
towards the centre,
and has a slightly
lower level at the
outer side of the
bone.
The epiphyses
of the tibia and
fibula will be seen
in the picture. The
epiphyseal line of
the tibia resembles
that of the line of
the lower end of
the femur. The
upper epiphysis of
the fibula is a small
mass, appearing to
rest on the top of
the shaft.
PLATE IX. — Showing Epiphyses of Hip, Knee, and Ankle Joints.
a, Pelvis and hip-joints in a child of 5-6 years.
Knee-joint in a child 10-12 years, b, Lateral view, c, Antero-posterior view.
Ankle-joint in a child 10-12 years, d, Lateral aspect, e, Antero-posterior aspect.
THE KNEE-JOINT 147
In a lateral view the epiphyseal lines of the femur aad fibula are nearly
Lines of
Iracture
Head of
Fibula
Fig.
116. — Antero-posterior view of knee-joint showing
epiphyses. Plate on posterior aspect of joint.
Fig. 117. — Fracture of tibia and
fibula. Practically no displace-
ment. The appearances of the
epiphyses at both ends of the
bones indicate the age of the
patient to be about 3 years.
The fibula has a convexity to-
wards the tibia.
horizontal. The epiphysis of the upper end of the tibia is seen to have a
tongue - like projec-
tion extending down
the front of the bone
to the tubercle of
the tibia. In some
instances this projec-
tion does not reach
so far as the tubercle,
and the latter is
seen arising from a
separate centre of
ossification. It is fre-
quently the seat of in-
jury and inflammation
(see Plates VIII. Fig.
h, and XVIII. Fig. a).
The Hip -joint, pjq
— The epiphysis of
the upper end of the
femur includes merely
the articular head of
Symphy,,.
118. — Diagram to show the epiphyses
and bones entering into the hip-joint.
148 KADIOGRAPHY
the bone and forms no part of the neck. In an X-ray picture it
resembles somewhat the appearance of the epiphysis of the upper end of
the humerus. The greater and lesser trochanters arise from separate centres
of ossification, but these are less frequently seen in radiographs than is the
larger epiphysis (see Plate IX. a).
Upper end of
shaft of femur
Epiphyses for
head have not
yet appeared
Epiphysis for
lower end of
femur
Fig. 119. — Pelvis and femora of a child two days old, showing ossification of bones of pelvis,
hip and knee j oints. Note lower epiphyses of femur present at birth.
The Wrist-joint. — -The epiphysis of the lower end of the radius is
seen in an antero-posterior view of the joint as a wedge-shaped shadow, and
is thicker on the outer than on the inner side of the wrist. The epiphyseal
line, though irregular and wavy, is never rough and jagged as in a
fracture. This epiphysis has a great share in the increase in length of the
shaft.
The epiphysis of the lower end of the ulna is seen at a higher level than
that of the radius and shows the prominence of the styloid process on its
inner side.
The centres of ossification for the carpal bones show according to the
age at which the joint is examined (see " Ossification ").
THE WRIST-JOINT
149
Table of Ossification for Carpal Bones
The carpus is entirely cartilaginous at birth,
at the following times :
Centres appear for these carpal bones
Os magnum
Unciform
Cuneiform
Semilunar
first year,
second year,
third year,
fifth year.
Trapezium
Scaphoid
Trapezoid
Pisiform
fifth year,
seventh year,
eighth year,
twelfth year.
The " OS central," lying between the bones of the first and second rows, is present in
man as a small cartilage situated between the " trapezoid," trapezium, os magnum,
and " scaphoid," at the second month, and disappears about the fourth month of
foetal hfe. In rare cases it persists as a separate bone in the adult.
^ ' Appears 3':?^r.
Appears 3-4'-''yr
Urates l8-20«^>r
^
lj£;^Appe3re 4.-5'-"yr.
■ es IS-ZO'Iyr.
IS-ZO'^'^r
('Appeal
Fig. 120. — Diagram showing ossification
of the bones of the hand and the
wrist-joint witli the times of union of
epiphyses with diaphyses.
Fig. 121. — Hand of a child over five years old.
Shows development of bones of lower ends of
radius and ulna, carpal bonts, metacarpals, and
phalanges. The epiphysis for lower end of radius
well developed. The ulnar epiphysis has not yet
appeared. The os magnum and unciform, semi-
lunar and cuneiform bones are also shown. The
pisiform is not shown. Note also the centre for
the proximal end of the metacarpal bone of the
thumb.
The epiphyses of the four inner metacarpal bones are seen at the distal
ends of the shafts, but in the phalanges and in the metacarpal bone of the
thumb the epiphyses are found at the proximal ends of the respective
bones.
150
EADIOGRAPHY
Fig. 122. — Shows stage of ossification in a young
adult under twenty years.
The Elbow-joint. — The lower epiphysis of the humerus at the age of
five or six years merely shows the centre for the capitulum as a small round
mass. In an antero-posterior picture of the joint it is seen as a wedge-
FlG. 123. — Diagram showing epi- ■-" ------
physes of the bones forming the Fig. 124. — Elbow-joint, antero-posterior view, shows epiphyses,
elbow-joint. Age 14.
shaped mass, its lower surface being convex, and lying below the external
condyle. At twelve the centres for the trochlea and the external epicon-
THE ELBOW AND SHOULDER JOINTS
151
Olecranon
Shaft of
Ulna
Fig. ]25. — Lateral view of elbow-joint,
to show epiphyses. Age 14.
dyle have appeared, and have united with the centre for the capitulum,
forming the lower epiphysis. The lower end of the humerus Ls one of the
bones most frequently involved in injuries and disease, but the other
bones entering into the joint should also be remembered in relation
to the times at which
their epiphyses join the
diaphyses. The internal
epicondyle is not a part
of the lower epiphysis
of the humerus, but is
formed from a separate
centre of ossification.
In an X-ray picture it is
seen as a small, oval
mass, higher up on the
inner side of the humerus,
and intimately connected
with the internal condyle.
The epiphysis of the
head of the radius is
seen as a small disc, just
above the upper end of
the bone. In a lateral
view of the joint at about five years the lower epiphysis of the humerus
appears to be semilunar in shape, fitting closely to the lower end of the
shaft. At a later age the parts become accentuated, and great care must
be exercised in dis-
tinguishing the normal
appearances when ex-
amining the joint for
suspected injuries. A
normal radiograph
should always be com-
pared with the sus-
pected one if mistakes
are to be avoided.
The Shoulder -
joint. — The upper epi-
physis of the humerus
is found as a dome-
shaped mass, which
appears to rest on the
top of the shaft. It
is composed of the
, , centres for the head
Fig. 126. — Diagram to show bones entering into the shoulder- i <■ i n
joint. The clavicle has not been included. and for the greater and
Humerus
Head of
Radius
.^2 for coracoid
process.
Epiphyses of head / <'>y
Situbercles blend
at Sthyr and unite
with bodyat20l')yf
152 KADIOGKAPHY
lesser tuberosities, which unite to form the epiphysis. The epiphyseal line
lies a little way above the surgical neck, and is not horizontal, but is higher
in the middle of the shaft than at the outer and inner sides. The increase
Fig. 127. — Normal shoulder-joint showing condition of epiphyses
at the head of humerus.
in length of the humerus takes place principally at this epiphysis, and
hence its great importance.
Certain anatomical facts are worthy of note when we are considering
inflammatory conditions and
injuries of the bones iti the
neighbourhood of joints, more
especially in children and
young adults. It is important
to keep in mind the chief
centres of ossification and the
periods at which the epiphyses
join the diaphyses in the joints
most liable to injury ; but as
it is obvious that one cannot
readily recall the whole of
them it is hoped that a refer-
ence to the foregoing pages
j^^j^, , \ . / , .'" . , , ,. will be helpful. The marked
Fig. 128. — Shoulder-joint, .showing epiphyseal line. _ ^
Centres for head and great tuberosity have joined. There differences between the appcar-
is evidence of a partial fracture at the surgical neck. ^^^^^ ^^ .^.^^^ -^ ^^^j^ ^^^^-^
and in adult life must be noted to avoid errors in diagnosis. Fractures
are relatively more frequent in adults, while greenstick fracture and
separation of epiphyses are more prevalent in injuries occurring before the
epiphyses have joined up with the diaphyses.
SESAMOID BONES 153
The after history of an injury is greatly influenced in its results when the
injury occurs in the neighbourhood of the epiphyseal line. Arrested develop-
ment is a frequent result of such an injury. There are, therefore, certain
points which should be remembered in relation to the principal joints of the
body which will be briefly mentioned, reference to figures illustrating these
points being made as occasion arises.
Sesamoid Bones. — These are small rounded masses, cartilaginous in
early life, osseous in the adult, which are developed in tendons which
exert a great amount of pressure upon those parts over which they glide.
It is said that they are more commonly found in the male than in the
female, and in persons of an active muscular habit than in those who
are weak and debilitated. They have a free articular facet.
The sesamoid bones of the joints in the lower extremity are : the
patella, in the tendon of the quadriceps extensor ; two small sesamoid bones
in the tendon of the flexor brevis pollicis, opposite the metatarso-phalangeal
joint of the great toe ; and occasionally one at the metatarso-phalangeal
joint of the second toe, of the little toe, and, still more rarely, of the third and
fourth toes. In the knee-joint posteriorly there may also be one.
In the upper extremity they are found on the palmar aspect of the
metacarpo- phalangeal joint in the thumb, developed in the tendon of the
flexor brevis pollicis, occasionally one or two opposite the metacarpo-
phalangeal articulations of the fore and little fingers, and still more rarely
one opposite the corresponding joints of the third and fourth fingers.
Those found in the tendons, which glide over certain bones, occupy the
following positions: one in the tendon of the peroneus longus, where it
glides through the groove in the cuboid bone ; one which appears later in
the tendon of the tibiahs anticus, opposite the smooth facet on the internal
cuneiform bone ; one is found in the tendon of the tibialis posticus, opposite
the inner side of the astragalus ; one in the outer head of the gastroc-
nemius behind the outer condyle of the femur, and one in the psoas
and iliacus, where they glide over the body of the pubes.
Sesamoid bones are found occasionally in the tendon of the biceps,
opposite the tuberosity of the radius ; in the tendon of the glutseus maximus,
as it passes over the great trochanter, and in the tendons which wind round
the inner and outer malleoli.
INJURIES OF BONES AND JOINTS
The methods which are employed for the determination of injuries of
bones and joints are (1) fluoroscopy, (2) radiography. Both should be
employed, the former for the determination of the presence of an injury
and for the purpose of centering the tube under the injured part. In regard
to diagnosis by screening only a few words of caution are necessary. While
in a number of gross lesions with a degree of displacement and dislocations
it is possible to make a positive diagnosis at once, it must be pointed out
that a negative diagnosis of injury to bone should never be made on the
screen examination alone. A plate should always be exposed after the
screen examination has been made if the operator has not been able to
detect an injury. If this procedure is followed it is possible to avoid making
many serious errors in diagnosis. Fractures of the phalanges when there is
no displacement are frequently unrecognisable under the screen. Crushing
of the bones in the neighbourhood of a joint, sprain, fractures, and many so-
called trivial injuries to bones and joints will be overlooked if the radio-
graphic method is not employed.
The examination of the bones and joints in the normal individual is
comparatively easy, in the injured patient it is often a matter of extreme
diflS.culty to adjust the tube and plate. Great ingenuity may have to be
displayed in certain cases. The best method to employ is to place the patient
upon a radiographic couch. It is convenient to have a good supply of
cushions, air-bags, and sand-bags in order to get a position of comparative
ease for the patient. Many patients complain of the hardness of the X-ray
couch.
The tube should be accurately centred in the tube-box, and its focus
point should be capable of ready adjustment by movements in two directions
under the couch. With a plumb line it is possible to quickly centre the tube
under the central point of a joint or bone.
Injuries of the Skull and Spine
The skull is frequently examined for evidence of fracture. Fractures
may occur at the base, when they can be recognised by departures from the
normal on a lateral or antero-posterior radiograph. Both positions should
be taken. In children, when the sutures are very evident, care must be
exercised to distinguish between these and a fracture. In the region of the
temporal bone this is most important.
154
FRACTURES OF THE SKULL
155
Fracture of the Vault of the Skull.— A depressed fracture can
readily be detected when a lateral view of the skull ls taken. The extent of
the injury and the
degree of depression
should be noted.
Fracture at the
base of the skull is
difficult to determine.
It may occur at any
part of the base and
may be represented
as a fine fissure in the
bone. When this
occurs in the neigh-
bourhood of the
sutures it is often
impossible to make a
positive statement as
to the nature of an
injury. In children
where the sutures have
not closed it is still
Fig. 129. — (Jommiuutbd fracture of augle of lower jaw.
This skiagrani shows the teeth, particularly the roots in the lower
jaw. The inferior dental canal is seen running along the jaw.
tooth shows extensive caries.
One
more difficult. In doubtful cases stereoscopic radio-
FiG. 130. — Fracture through ramus of lower jaw. The soft parts show well.
graphs should be taken. CHnical signs should always be taken into
account.
156
EADIOaRAPHY
Fractures in the Orbital Region are very difficult to distinguish.
Fine detail must be obtained, and care should be exercised to obtain radio-
graphs which show no evidence of movement on the part of the patient.
This is often a matter of difficulty, because patients suffering from injury to
the skull and brain are not likely to keep the head steady long enough
to allow of a sufficient exposure; hence in these cases very rapid expo-
sures are indicated, and intensifying screens should be used to cut
down the exposure to the minimum. The orbital margins should be
carefully examined to detect slight departures from the normal, which
may be the only evidence of fracture.
The Zygfomatic Arch is occasionally broken. There may be
a depression of the bone,
this being readily de-
tected when an antero-
posterior radiograph is
obtained.
Fracture of the
Superior Maxilla. —
This may occur in head
injuries, or a tooth may
be driven into the an-
trum of Highmore.
The palatine arch may
be disturbed. Careful
examination of the
radiograph is necessary
when injuries in this
region are suspected.
Fracture of the
Inferior Maxilla (Man-
dible).— This bone is
frequently injured. Three positions are available: (1) antero-posterior ; (2)
lateral ; (3) film in the mouth. The condyle may be injured when the bone
is subjected to direct violence. The coronoid process may be fractured
either by direct or indirect violence.
It is somewhat difficult to get a goodradiographof one side of the lower jaw,
because of the superimposing of the shadows. Probably the best method to em-
ploy is to centre the tube behind and a little below the angle of the jaw. With
the plate on the injured side, the tube is centred over a spot behind and below
the angle of the uninjured jaw, thus avoiding the overlapping of the latter.
By using the above method it is possible to obtain a picture of the side
required, showing the whole of the lower jaw in profile, the temporo-maxillary
articulation being well shown. This is also a useful method when it is neces-
sary to examine the jaw for tumour or dental disease.
Fractures of the Nasal Bones. — These are occasionally fractured on
one or both sides. A plate on the injured side is generally sufficient to show
Fig. 131. — Fracture dislocation of cervical vertebrae.
PLATE X. — Fractures in Region of the Shoulder-joint.
a, Fracture through great tuberosity.
h, Exostosis of angle of scapula.
c, Fracture (stellate) of body of scapula ; the detail has been lost in reproduction.
d. Fracture at upper end of shaft of humerus, there is no displacement. Note the epiphyseal line of head
of humerus.
FRACTURES OF THE VERTEBRAE
157
the injury. An antero-posterior view is also useful. Stereoscopic pictures
may be necessary. A small piece of X-ray film placed in contact with the
side of the nose will give a sharp picture.
Injuries of the Cervical Vertebrae. — Two positions have already
been described. The lateral is the most useful, for it shows readily very
slight departures from the normal.
Fracture dislocation of the cervical vertebrae is a not uncommon in-
jury. Any part of the cervical region may be the seat of a dislocation.
The appearances are unmistakable when well marked, but the doubt-
ful cases give rise to
considerable difficulty in
diagnosis. Fig. 131
illustrates a partial frac-
ture dislocation of the
upper cervical vertebrae,
which was not definitely
diagnosed for several
weeks after the injury
occurred.
Injuries of the
Dorsal Vertebrae. —
The dorsal spine may be
involved in injuries of
the thorax. Ribs may
be fractured and the ver-
tebral column crushed,
or partial dislocation
may be present. Two
positions are useful : (1)
a postero-anterior, that
is, the plate on the back
and the tube in front ;
(2) a lateral, to show
the bodies of the verte-
brae. It is often ex-
tremely difficult to show fractures of the posterior parts of the spinal column.
Crushing and displacement of the bodies may be clearly indicated. Fracture
of the transverse process sometimes occurs. When there is considerable
displacement it is possible to demonstrate the position of the lesion.
Fig. 132.-
Fractures of vertebral border of scapula and three ribs
(gunshot wound).
Fracture of the Ribs
The demonstration of fracture of the ribs is often a matter of great
difiiculty. This is particularly so when the bone is broken through and no
displacement takes place. When there is considerable displacement the
fracture shows up readily. The best positions for showing fractures of these
158 KADIOGRAPHY
bones are antero-posterior and lateral. The latter is often a difficult position
in which to show a fracture, especially in stout patients.
Fracture of the Clavicle
(1) At the acromial end external to the trapezoid ligament, usually pro-
duced by direct violence. The inner fragment retains its position unaltered,
but the outer fragment is dragged down by the weight of the arm, and for-
wards by the action of the muscles, so that it lies at right angles to the rest
of the bones.
(2) Between the coraco-clavicular ligaments. There is little displace-
ment. It may be shown radiographically as a fissured fracture of the bone.
(3) Through the greater convexity of the bone. There is frequently
considerable displacement. (See Plate XL Fig. d.)
(4) At the sternal end. This may be complicated by a partial dis-
placement.
(5) Greenstick fracture of the clavicle, a common injury in children.
Frequently only a decided bend on the bone is seen, but occasionally a
minute crack may be detected.
Fracture of the Scapula
The Body of the scapula may be broken in cases of injury due to direct
violence, the fracture being usually of the fissured or stellate variety when
the flat surface of the bone is damaged. The vertebral border is occasionally
involved in these injuries.
The Spine of the scapula may also be fractured, generally as the result
of direct violence.
The Acromion Process may be broken by direct violence applied to
the point of the shoulder. The arm hangs powerless by the side, and the
shoulder is flattened. The irregularity of the bone can be readily detected.
and crepitus can be elicited by raising the elbow and rotating the arm.
Occasionally merely the tip is detached, and then the above signs will
not be present.
The Coracoid Process is rarely fractured, and only from direct violence.
There is but little displacement, on account of the many powerful ligaments
attached to it. In spite of the attachment of such powerful muscles
as the pectoralis minor, biceps, and coraco-brachialis, the displacement is
not great, as the process is kept' in position by the coraco-clavicular ligament.
The Neck of the scapula may be fractured immediately behind the
glenoid cavity, but this is a rare injury. Its existence has been doubted.
Astley Cooper and South have stated that cases so described are in reality
fractures of the upper end of the humerus. There is, according to South,
no specimen in any of the London museums illustrating fracture of the neck
of the scapula (Erichsen). Walsham describes one case of this variety of
fracture which is in Guy's Hospital museum, and Rose and Carless figure an
instance of this variety. It is usually due to direct violence ; a portion of the
PLATE XL — Fractures in Kegion of Shoulder-joint.
a, Fracture at upper end of humerus, a longitudinal splitting of the shaft with head displaced
forwards and downwards (dislocation of the head).
h, Separation of the great tuberosity of the humerus.
c, Fracture through lower aspect of glenoid cavity.
d, Fracture of the clavicle (nnddle third), the base of the acromion process is irregular and appears
to be fractured.
FRACTURES OF THE SCAPULA AND HUMERUS 159
articular surface is broken off and displaced downwards. Plate XI. Fig. c
illustrates a case of this rare variety of fracture through the lower segment of
the glenoid cavity, with displacement downwards of the fragment. The
patient was admitted to the Great Northern Central Hospital suffering from
an injury to the shoulder, which was taken to be a dislocation of the head
downwards. The skiagram shows the fracture and the typical displacement.
A case recorded by Spence is the first authentic instance of this fracture.
A patient who had fallen upon the shoulder whiLst in a state of intoxication
was brought into the Edinburgh Royal Infirmary. The man died some days
afterwards from meningitis. " The fracture was found to pass obliquely
from below upwards and forwards, commencing about half an inch behind the
origin of the long head of the triceps, and separating the neck and four-fifths
of the lower part of the glenoid cavity from the scapula. The long head of
the triceps and the whole of the glenoid ligament had also been torn from the
upper fragment of the glenoid cavity, and carried along with the displaced
portion." In fractures through the neck of the scapula, the coracoid process
would necessarily follow the glenoid cavity, being detached along with it.
Mobility of the coracoid would, therefore, be a valuable sign of this rare
fracture.
Fractures of the Humerus
The fractures to which this bone is liable may be conveniently divided
into three groups :
(1) Those afiecting the upper extremity, or that part which is situated
above the surgical neck.
(2) Those of the shaft, and
(3) Those of the lower articular
extremity.
Fractures at the Upper End of the
Humerus. — (a) Of the anatomical neck,
the so-called intracapsular fracture. This
Fig. 134. — Fracture of lower end of
Fig. 133. — Fracture of shaft of humerus humerus, with backward displacement
and upper end of radius (shrapnel wound). of the lower fragment.
160
EADIOGKAPHY
Fig.
135. — Fracture of .shaft of humerus
lower fragment and elbow-joint.
rotation of
Fig. 136. — Fracture through external condyle with for-
ward and upward displacement of the fragment of
bone. The presence of chronic arthritic changes in
the joint indicates that the injury is one of some
standing. The radiograjih was taken many months
after the primary injury.
is always due to blows upon
the shoulder, never to direct
violence. It is evidenced by
signs of a severe local trauma,
with loss of mobility of the
arm. The head of the humerus
is found to be irregular in shape
on examination from the axilla,
and the fragment, if detached,
may be felt. Crepitus is ob-
tained on moving the arm, and
therefis slight shortening.
(6) Fracture through the
surgical neck. This is a common
injury. There may or may not
be a considerable degree of
displacement, or the lower
point of the bone may be im-
pacted into the upper ; the
latter may be partially split.
(c) The great tuberosity of
the humerus is frequently de-
tached and displaced.
{d) The epiphysis of the
head may be detached from the
shaft, and there may be a
considerable degree of displace-
ment.
Fracture of the Shaft
of the Humerus.— This bone
is frequently fractured, and
the injury may occur at any
part of its length. The most
common injury is about the
junction of the upper with the
middle third. The displace-
ment may be considerable.
An unusual displacement is
shown in Fig. 135, a trans-
verse fracture with marked
rotation of the elbow -joint
inwards ; the lower fragment
of the humerus is nearly at
right angles to the upper.
The head of the radius appears
to have been injured.
PLATE XII. — Fractures in Region of Elbow-joint.
a, Vertical fracture of head of radius.
b, Fracture through head of radius, displacement forwards of fragment.
c, Fracture through lower end of humerus above epiphyseal line, displacement backwards.
d, Fracture dislocation at elbow-joint.
INJURIES IN REGION OF ELBOW-JOINT
101
Injuries in the Region of the Elbow-joint
Fracture of the Lower End of the Humerus.— The humerus is
frequently involved in injuries of the elbow-joint in adults and in children.
It gives rise to a typical displacement, which is clearly revealed upon
examination of the radiographs obtained. The displacement varies with
the direction of the injury. The lower end, along with the elbow-joint,
may be displaced backwards, while there may also be some lateral displace-
ment and rotation. Stereoscopic radiographs are extremely useful in these
cases.
Fig. 138. — Fractures through shafts
of radius and ulna. The position
of both iDones is faulty. There is
also a fracture through the lower
end of the radius.
Fig. 137. — Dislocation of elbow-joint.
Separation of the Epiphysis of the
lower end of the humerus is a common
injury in this region. It is very difl&cult to
show in children, and requires more careful
examination than any other injury.
Dislocations of the Elbow-joint are
common, and frequently combined with
fracture in the region.
Fracture of the Olecranon may be complete or incomplete. It is
commonly a transverse fracture, though it may be oblique or vertical, or the
upper portion may be shattered. The displacement varies with the extent
of the fracture.
Fracture of the Coronoid is a rare injury. It is generally associated
with a dislocation of the forearm backwards. When the fracture is reduced,
the bones tend to slip out again readily.
Fracture of the Head of the Radius is by no means an uncommon
injury ; it may be complete or incomplete.
11
162 EADIOGRAPHY
Fracture of the Shaft of the Radius and Ulna
One or other of the bones may be broken. The usual seat of injury is
near the middle of the shaft, in which case both bones are frequently broken,
Autero-posterior. Lateral.
Fig. 139. — Fracture of shaft of ulna (the result of a gunshot wound).
and the displacement may be considerable. One or other bone may be
involved in injuries at the elbow- joint or wrist- joint.
Injuries at the Wrist-joint
Fracture of the lower end of the radius and ulna is included in the
description of the common Colles fracture. The results of the analysis of a
large number of cases of fracture at the wrist- joint investigated by Dr.
R. W. A. Salmond and the author may be quoted {Lancet, Nov. 2, 1912).
(a) The Radius. — This shows injury in 93 per cent, of the total number of
cases. The large percentage is without doubt due to the important part the
lower end of this bone takes in the mechanism of the wrist-joint. Most injuries
at the wrist are carried up from the hand and are transmitted through the radius^
hence the great frequency of damage to the lower end of the bone. The radius
alone is injured in 41 per cent, of the total number of cases^ showing that, while
PLATE XIII. — Fractures in Forearm, Wrist, and Hand.
a, Fracture of terminal phalanx of tliunib, backward displacement. Lateral and antero -posterior views.
b, Fracture of trapezium.
c, Fracture through lower end of shaft of radius, very little displacement.
d, Non-union fracture of radius and ulna, formation of false joints.
PLATE XIV. — Fractdres at Wrist-joint.
Fracture of lower end of radius, a, Lateral view showing displacement, b, Antero-posterior view
showing nature of fracture.
c, Antero-posterior view of separated epiphysis of lower end of radius, d, Lateral view to show
displacement.
e. Fracture through lower end of radius. /, Colles fracture, antero-posterior view.
INJURIES AT THE WRLST- JOINT 103
it is injured in nearly every case'/ the injury is more often distributed to some of
the other bones than confined to itself.
The radius is injured along with the styloid process of tlie ulna in 12 per
cent, of the total number of cases.
The radius is damaged, together with the shaft and the styloid of the ulna,
in 3 per cent, of cases. This is therefore infrequent, and the more so as the
majority of the instances are due to a fracture carried up from the damaged
styloid process into the shaft of the ulna. The frequency of injuries to the radius
and the shaft of the ulna is also low — namely, 3 per cent. It will be noticed how
much more frequently the radius is injured with the styloid of the ulna than with
the shaft, and it is interesting to compare this with the corresponding injury in
the un-united epiphyses series. Injury is confined to the radius and carpus in
4 per cent, of cases.
Direction of Injury. — The great majority are transverse, 67 per cent. ; T-
shaped in 16 per cent. ; fracture from the centre of the lower end across the styloid
process, 8 per cent. ; V-shaped, 4 per cent. ; fracture of styloid process, 3 per
cent. ; oblique, 2 per cent. ; longitudinal, 2 per cent. ; and injury at the inferior
radio-ulnar articulation, about 1 per cent. Where the shafts of both fore-
arm bones are injured the direction in the radius is transverse in all the cases
examined.
Position of Injury. — -By far the commonest is half an inch above the lower
end of the bone. It is striking that 99 per cent, of the injuries recorded are three-
quarters of an inch or less from the lower end.
Displacement of Fragment. — This is backward in 74 per cent., forward in
2 per cent., and there is none in 24 per cent., but most of the cases examined
had been manipulated by the surgeon, so displacement is more or less mislead-
ing. Outward and inward rotation and displacements are not recorded, as
many of the cases showed rotation, chiefly outwards, but it was often difficult
to decide which to include and which not.
(6) The Ulna. — Some part of this is injured in 49 per cent, of the total number
of cases, about one-half the frequency of the radius. Injury to the styloid process
occurs in 46 per cent, of the total number of cases, so that by far the commonest
injury to this bone in this series is here. It is interesting to contrast the frequen-
cies with which the styloid processes of the ulna and radius are damaged. In the
former 46 per cent, and in the latter 3 per cent, show fracture of these processes,
and we think the explanation is due partly to the styloid of the radius being
structurally stronger than that of the ulna, partly because, the fragment of the
radius being most commonly displaced backwards and rotated outwards, the
internal lateral ligament attached to the apex of the ulnar styloid is put on the
stretch, and must either rupture or exert tension on that process, while at the
same time, with the fragment of the radius rotated outwards, the interarticular
fibro-cartilage attached to the base of the ulnar styloid pulls on that base and
helps to damage it.
Direction of Injury. — There is no tendency towards any one type, nor is
there any predominant type in this bone when the shafts of both forearm bones
are damaged. That no tendency has been noted is perhaps because the injury
is relatively rare and a sufficient number of cases has not been examined.
Position of Injury. — All are within 2 inches of the lower end, and so, on the
whole, extend further up the shaft than in the radius. As would be expected,
the majority are at the styloid process, 94 per cent.
Displacement of Fragment of the Shaft. — This is chiefly backwards, as in the
radius, though, owing to a fracture in some cases being continued up from the
styloid process, the frequency with no displacement is also high.
164 RADIOGEAPHY
(c) The Carpal Bones. — Injury is present in one or more of these in 13 per
cent, of the total number of cases. This proves how frequently these are damaged
in wrist injuries, and probably the frequency is even greater, as only undoubted
cases of injury are included. The carpus without either of the forearm bones is
injured in 5 per cent, of cases, the carpus and radius in 4 per cent., and in none is
the carpus injured with the ulna only, showing that the ulna does not directly
take part in the mechanism of the wrist-joint. The carpus, radius, and ulna are
together injured in 3 per cent, of cases. The scaphoid is the one most frequently
damaged, no less than thirteen times out of nineteen. Next in order is the
trapezium, while the carpal bones towards the ulnar side are less frequently
involved.
Fractures of the Bones of the Hand
Fractupe of the Carpal Bones.— Any of these may be fractured,
examples being met with in routine examination.
Fractures of the Metacarpal Bones are common. Perhaps the most
frequently met with is that of the base of the first metacarpal, Bennet's
fracture. Plate XV., fig. d illustrates the nature of the fracture and the
displacement commonly met with.
Fractures of the Phalangres are also common. There may be no
displacement in some fractures. The diagnosis can be made by a screen
examination, but even with these small bones it is always well to confirm
the diagnosis by taking a radiograph. A negative diagnosis should never
be made on the screen examination alone.
Fractures of the Pelvis
The pelvis is often injured by direct or indirect violence. A radiograph
should be taken of the whole pelvis in one picture, or several smaller ones
may be taken to discover the nature of the injury.
The iliac bones may be fractured, when it is sometimes difficult to show
the seat of the lesion. When the sacrum is damaged, there may be a fracture
at the sacro-iliac synchondrosis, and the body of the sacrum may also be
involved in these injuries. The pelvis is often damaged when the violence is
of a crushing type, or it may be broken by direct violence. The ischium
may also participate in the injury. The coccyx is frequently fractured.
In all doubtful cases both sides of the pelvis should be examined, and
the hip-joints should also receive attention. The common injuries are easily
distinguished, but there are many grades of fracture, where the injury may
not be demonstrable if only one radiograph be taken.
Injuries near the Hip-joint
In some cases of injury at the hip-joint a widening of the interarticular
space may indicate an effusion of blood into the joint, which later on may
lead to inflammatory changes and abscess formation.
Q 2
^is
FRACTURES OF THE FEMUR
165
An uncommon injury to the hip-joint has been recorded, where the head
of the bone was driven through the acetabulum into the pelvic cavity. Or
the acetabulum may be fractured to a lesser degree. This may be shown
on examination.
The Neck of the Femur is frequently broken when, especially in old
people, there may be impaction. Traumatic coxa vara is a fairly common
occurrence.
Fracture through the Great Trochanter is also common. It may
be localised to the trochanter or may extend downwards obliquely into the
shaft.
Fractures of the Femur
Fracture throug'h the Shaft below the lesser trochanter is an injury
often met with.
Fractures of the Lower End.
— (1) Transverse supra - condyloid
fracture is practically identical with
that involving the lower third of the
femur.
(2) T- or Y-shaped fracture of the
condyles. In this a transverse frac-
ture is complicated by a fissure
which runs into the joint, separating
the two condyles.
(3) Separatio?i of either condyle
always results from direct violence,
the line of fracture being oblique.
(4) The lower epiphysis of the
femur is separated from the shaft in
young people.
(5) Longitudinal and spiral frac-
tures running down to the knee-
joint are met with in the femur.
Fig. 140. — Fracture through shafts of both femora.
The fracture is comminuted ou the left side.
Fractures of the Patella
These may vary from mere fissures to complete fracture with wide
separation at the line of fracture. The partial fracture is the one which it is
most important to recognise. A lateral view of the knee-joint is the most
useful position in which to radiograph the joint for its recognition.
Fractures of the Bones of the Leg
The tibia and fibula may be involved when there is a fracture of the
lower end of the femur ; they may be broken together or either bone by
166
KADIOGRAPHY
itself. Fractures of the shaft of the tibia and fibula may vary from a fine
crack to a marked degree of fracture, with displacement of the fragments.
The tibia is frequently the seat of a spiral fracture. The fibula only may be
fractured, when there is no marked displacement or external sign of fracture.
Fractures in the Neighbourhood of the Ankle-joint
These are usually produced by indirect violence. There may be marked
displacement of the foot.
Pott's Fracture. — The fibula is generally broken, three inches above
the tip of the external
malleolus, and the foot is
displaced outwards. The
internal malleolus may
also be broken, with frac-
ture of the lower end of
the fibula, or it alone
may be broken.
Fracture of the Os
Calcis is a comparatively
common injury, the re-
sult of direct violence.
The degree of damage to
the bone varies from a
crack to a severe crushing
of the bone.
Fracture of the
Astragalus. — The lesion
is often a severe, ' com-
minuted one . Both bones
may be broken when a
patient lands heavily on
both feet ; and these
fractures are often associated with fracture of other bones of the foot. Any
of the tarsal bones may be fractured. The extent of the injury is often
difficult to determine. It may be merely a crushing of the bone, in which
case it is not easy to distinguish the injury from changes which are the result
of disease, or there may be a distinct line of separation.
The metatarsal bones are frequently involved in injuries to the foot.
Fractures may be transverse or longitudinal. Fissured fracture of the bone
is not uncommon.
The phalanges are also frequently injured. Two positions of the foot
should always be taken when looking for fractures. Stereoscopic pictures
are very helpful in doubtful cases.
Fig. 141. — Fracture of os calcis (gunshot wound).
iL.
PLATE XVI.— NoiiMAi. Hji', Dislocation, and Fracture at Hip-joint.
a, Normal liip-joint, showing the head of the femur ; the acetabulum is seen surrounding part of the head.
h, Dislocation at hip-joint,
c, Fracture through neck of femur (intracapsular).
PLATE XVIf. — Injuries and Disease of Pelvis and Hip-joint.
a, Fracture of pelvis in a child ; the injury has occurred at both pubic bones, and on one side
through the ischium.
b, Fracture of neck of femur, impaction into great trochanter.
c, Displacement of upper end of femur in a child. The acetabulum is eroded and the head of femur
is absent. This is probably the result of tuberculosis. The appearances are similar to those of con-
genital dislocation.
DISEASES OF BONE
All varieties of bone disease are met with in the radiographic examination
of the bones, it being possible to trace the progress of disease from the slightest
beginnings to the most advanced stages. A thorough appreciation of the
normal appearance of bone is necessary before we can make out departures
from it. Good negatives are essential, that is, the negative must show the
finer detail as well as the outline of the bone. Soft tubes give better plates
for this purpose than hard ones, but the exposures require to be longer,
and this is in some cases a disadvantage, as movement on the part of
the patient is apt to spoil the picture. When a long exposure is necessary
the limb may be kept quite still by laying sand-bags around it and upon the
parts not required in the picture, or soft pads may be placed on the limb,
and a compression apparatus fixed lightly down upon them. The use of a
cylindrical diaphragm seems to give sharper radiographs by cutting off the
secondary radiations. When practicable it is better to place the X-ray tube
as far away from the plate as possible, a distance of three feet (or more)
giving the parts with less distortion. When a particular bone has to be
examined it is a good plan to get the corresponding one on the healthy side for
comparison, taking care that both bones are radiographed under the same
conditions of tube and distance.
A brief consideration of the pathology of bone is necessary in order to
understand clearly the various conditions met with in the course of examina-
tion of bone disease. Many different terms are applied more or less loosely
to the pathological processes, and much confusion is introduced thereby.
Necrosis. — Necrosis or death of bone may occur in a variety of forms,
and from many different causes :
(1) Acute localised suppurative periostitis, the sequestrum or dead mass
being then simply a superficial plate or flake of the compact interior.
(2) Acute infective osteomyelitis, the sequestrum then often involving
the whole thickness of the bone, and invading more or less of the diaphysis.
(3) Acute septic osteomyelitis, usually traumatic in origin, the seques-
trum being annular in shape, and involving more of the interior of the bone
than the exterior.
(4) Acute or subacute septic osteitis of cancellous bone, the sequestrum
consisting of small spiculated fragments of the bony cancelli which have
escaped absorption by the granulation tissue which always forms in such a
process.
167
168 EADIOGEAPHY
(5) Tuberculous disease of cancellous tissue, the sequestrum being
light and porous, often infiltrated with curdy material, and rarely separated
completely from the surrounding parts.
(6) Syphilitic disease of cancellous or compact bone, usually resulting
from excessive sclerosis, or gummatous disease of the periosteum, which
has become septic.
(7) The action of local irritants, e.g. mercury and phosphorus.
Caries. — (1) Osteoporosis, or rarefaction of bone, a clinical condition
resulting from inflammation, and consisting of a soft and spongy condition
of the bone.
(2) Caries sicca, when the process occurs without suppuration.
(3) Caries suppurativa, when pus is always present.
(4) Caries fungosa, when granulation tissue is always in excess, especi-
ally in tuberculous disease of the articular ends of bones.
(5) Caries necrotica. — Necrosis is associated with caries, the sequestra
consisting of spiculated fragments, or in tuberculous disease of larger masses.
Sclerosis of Bone is usually the result of some chronic inflammatory
infection :
(a) Chronic periostitis, whether simple or syphilitic.
(6) Chronic osteomyelitis, simple, tuberculous, or syphilitic.
(c) Chronic osteitis of the compact bone, which is always secondary to
a case of the former.
Classification of Inflammatory Affections of Bone
(1) Periostitis. — (a) Acute localised, with or without suppuration.
(6) Acute diffuse, always associated with, or secondary to, acute in-
fective osteomyelitis.
(c) Chronic simple, or hyperplastic.
{d) Chronic tuberculous,
(e) Chronic syphilitic.
(2) Osteitis of Compact Bone, which is always associated with, and
secondary to, either periostitis or osteomyelitis, and so will not be described
separately. The acute form results in necrosis, the subacute in osteoporosis,
and the chronic in sclerosis, except in tuberculous disease.
(3) Osteomyelitis, or inflammation of the medulla of long bones,
(a) Acute septic (traumatic).
(6) Acute infective (idiopathic), acute panostitis.
(c) Subacute simple or infective, e.g. after fractures, or during the
separation of sequestra, resulting primarily in rarefaction, but finally in
sclerosis.
{d) Chronic simple, tuberculous or syphilitic, usually causing general
enlargement and sclerosis of the bone, even if locally some rarefaction is
present.
(4) Osteitis of the Cancellous Tissue may similarly be :
(a) Acute septic, or traumatic.
cS to
3
cS D
>
X
So t
w
" o
Ph
o S
5 =3
2 sB
5 '^ r2
3 ■" o
3 o
=^ op D
^ =c-s
s:3 .2
go 33
&p_o "
PLATE XX.— Fractures at the Ankle-joint.
a. Oblique fracture through lower end of fibula, (a) Lateral, {b) Antero-posterior views.
b, Fracture of internal and external malleoli, displacement of foot outwards at ankle-joint.
c, Fracture of astragalus. d, Fracture dislocation at ankle-joint.
e. Fracture lower end of fibula.
PLA.TE XXI. — Fractokes of Leg, Ankle, and Foot.
«, Oblique fracture of shaft of tibia, lateral view, shows epiphj'ses of lower end of tibia and also of
OS calcis.
b, Antero-posterior view of tibia and fibula, showing an oblique fracture of shaft of tibia ; and also
epiphyses at lower end of tibia and fibula.
c, Fracture through shaft of femur ; the bone is rai'efied and is probably the seat of secondary carcinoma.
d, Fracture of lower end of tibia and fibula, forward dislocation of tibia.
e, Fractures of tibia and fibula.
/; Fractui'e of base of second and third metatarsal bone.
DISEASES OF BONE 169
(6) Acute infective.
(c) Subacute simple or septic.
(d) Chronic simple, syphilitic, or tuberculous.
When limited to the articular end of a bone in a young person, this is
sometimes termed epiphysitis.
Acute Localised Periostitis is usually the result of traumatism. It
may end in an inflammatory swelling of the surface of the bone, which later
may cause a superficial abscess. A thickening of the soft parts over the bone
may be shown. Resolution may follow this, and a localised thickening at
the seat of inflammation may remain for some time. If suppuration occurs
and pus forms, it maybe possible to demonstrate its presence radiographically.
Superficial Necrosis. — This is characterised by the separation of small
particles of dead bone. New bone may be thrown out around the inflamed
area, and leave evidence in the form of layers of more or less dense bone.
Acute Infective Osteomyelitis. — Acute necrosis occurs generally in
children of low vitality, often of tubercular inheritance. The early manifesta-
tions of this disease are often extremely slight. A hardly perceptible in-
flammatory process in the neighbourhood of the epiphyseal line or near a
joint rapidly spreads, involving the whole diaphysis of the bone. A sub-
periosteal abscess may form, while the central portion of the bone escapes
almost entirely. Should the process commence in the vicinity of the epi-
physeal line it may spread in several directions, may involve the medullary
cavity, and give rise to the most typical form of osteomyelitis. Necrosis
follows, usually implicating the whole thickness of the medullary cavity and
diaphysis, and sometimes extending its whole length. Occasionally the
neighbouring joint becomes involved. The pictures presented by this disease
show all stages, from a preliminary inflammatory process, to advanced
necrosis, formation of sequestra, and new bone formation. If radiographs
are taken at regular intervals, the whole process of inflammation, suppuration,
necrosis of bone, sequestra formation, deposit of new bone around the dead
bone, and the gradual building up of new bone after operation to remove
the sequestra may be followed up.
The pathology of this form of disease of bone may be watched by means
of radiography. The demonstration of the presence of free bone in a cavity
surrounded by new bone is a guide to the surgeon in the operation as to when
and where to operate, and indicates clearly the progress the bone is making
in the direction of recovery.
Acute Septic Osteomyelitis. — This arises as a result of infection from
without, in cases of compound fracture, and after amputation or excision of
bone ; the shafts of long bones are affected, and the disease generally runs a
rapid course.
Typhoid Osteitis. — The typhoid bacillus may lie dormant for years
without causing any abscess formation. The appearance is typical, and
is shown in Fig. 142.
Chronic Inflammation of Bone. — Chronic osteo - periostitis, a
chronic inflammatory process, results in overgrowth, thickening, and con-
170
RADIOGRAPHY
densation, (1) as a localised chronic periostitis, traumatic, rheumatic, or
syphilitic in origin ; or (2) as a diffuse form, usually tubercular or syphilitic,
which tends to involve the whole bone. It may result in a small abscess or
central necrosis. Around this focus the bone becomes thick and indented.
Examples of this are shown in Plate XXII., figs, d and e.
Fro. 142. — Typhoid osteitis and periostitis resulting in an
abscess.
Fig. 143. — Elbow-joint showing
disease. Formation of new
bone along shaft of iilna and
humerus. Chronic osteitis and
periostitis, probably tuber-
culous iu origin.
Tuberculous Disease of Bone. — This form of disease of bone is
frequently met with in X-ray examinations. Bones may be affected in two
ways by tuberculosis. The periosteum or the cancellous tissue may be
primarily involved.
Tuberculous Periostitis, or specific inflammation of the periosteum,, is
met with. Caseation and suppuration are likely to follow, frequently leading
to the formation of abscesses, and, later, of discharging sinuses. The
inflammation may result in a thickening of the layers of bone and a shutting
in of the products of suppuration, hence, if situated near a joint, the pus
may burrow under the dense bone and invade the joint.
Tuberculous Osteitis always arises in cancellous tissue, and it affects the
short bones or the shafts or ends of the long bones. The short bones of
the hands and feet are liable to this condition, especially in children. When
the phalanges are involved the condition is known as tuberculous dactylitis.
The typical appearance of this condition is shown in Plate XXVII., fig. c.
Several bones may be simultaneously affected. Some slight injury may
determine the onset of tuberculous periostitis or osteitis.
Tuberculous Epiphysitis. — An inflammation affecting primarily the
epiphyseal line and adjacent bone. The tendency is for it to spread and
involve the joints by the invasion of the synovial membranes. Separation of
the epiphysis may result. The adjacent bones show a condition of osteitis and
o
'3
>
s
«
^
H
o -t: g
o o S
^ o a
"o '"'
^ to
CO +^
03 >
•So
^3
<| c3
g a H
SYPHILITIC DISEASES OF BONE 171
periostitis. Abscess of bone, more common in adults than in cliildren, may-
result. Chronic abscess in the head of the tibia is somewhat frequent. The
characteristic symptom of deep aching pain calls attention to the possibility
of bone abscess. The bone around the abscess cavity is frequently very
dense, though it varies in this respect in parts of its circumference. Radio-
graphically, the condition may be recognised by an increase in shading and
loss of detail in the bone structure on the surface. The periosteal outline
is blurred, and may show patches of caries or collections of pus. The soft
parts are frequently involved in the inflammatory process, and a soft puffy
swelling may be seen over the affected portion of bone. When the disease
has advanced, the original focus of disease shows up as a lighter area, with
patches of rarefaction of bone leading from it. The fine detail of the bone
is lost, and a general haziness is left in its place. Later, when pus has formed,
an irregular abscess cavity can be seen, there being as a rule very little con-
densation of bone round the abscess. Should the cancellous tissue in the
neighbourhood of an epiphyseal line be involved, the disease extends through
the line, and affects the epiphysis, which shows as a spongy rarefaction with
irregular edges. The inflammatory process spreads into the joint itself, and
sets up a synovitis, which is characterised by a general distension of the joint
and an obscuring of detail.
Syphilitic Diseases of Bone. — The osseous tissue may be involved in
acquired syphilis in either the secondary or tertiary form. Syphilis of the
bone is frequently met with, and it is often difficult to differentiate it from
a simple inflammatory process. Chronic thickenings in the form of nodes are
diagnostic of syphilis. When a considerable extent of bone is involved, it
may be difficult to distinguish between this condition and an early stage of
malignant disease. In the latter the disease spreads more rapidly, and the
characteristic appearances of malignancy manifest themselves. In the
tertiary period the bones may participate in the changes which involve any
and every tissue of the body. These consist of an infiltration and overgrowth
of the connective tissue, which, if diffused through the organs, produce scler-
osis, or, if localised to one spot, lead to the formation of a gumma. The
subperiosteal gumma may be met with. It probably results from caries of the
adjacent bone, and if it extends widely an extensive area of bone may become
eroded and irregular. The skull is the part most frequently involved in these
changes, and may show a curious worm-eaten appearance. The formation of
gummata, several of which may break down, gives a curiously uneven appear-
ance to the radiograph of the skull, thickening and enlargement, alternating
with broken-down tissue, leading to marked thinning of the bone in places.
Congenital Syphilis. — Nodes, known as Parrot's nodes, form on or
around the anterior fontanelle. The newly formed bony tissue becomes
sclerosed and dense, and deformity may then persist through life. A
similar condition is met with in the shafts of the long bones, due to the
alternating deposition of lamellae of soft and hard bone outside the ordinary
compact bone.
Syphilitic Epiphysitis. — This condition is characterised by enlargement
172 EADIOGEAPHY
of the ends of the bones. It is met with in infants, and somewhat resembles
rickets, but comes on at an earlier date. The enlargement is situated mainly
in the epiphyses, but not uncommonly extends some way along the shaft,
thus contrasting forcibly with rickets. The change commences at the zone
of calcified cartilage nearest the diaphysis, which becomes friable, thick, and
irregular, and may become transformed into granulation tissue as the disease
progresses. Later, reparation of the epiphysis may follow. The disease is
usually symmetrical and often multiple. A symmetrical overgrowth of the
tibia, combined with an anterior curvature, often occurs in syphilitic children,
resulting in permanent deformity of the legs.
Craniotahes. — A condition characterised by localised absorption of the
osseous tissue of the cranium, leaving small areas where the bone is thinned
or absent. Radiographically, these are often met with.
Rickets. — The chief changes are found in the neighbourhood of the
epiphyses ; the epiphyseal car-
tilage is enlarged, thickened, and
irregular ; there is an increase in
the cartilaginous elements of the
., bone, and a delayed ossification ;
,i> * , the bones are weaker and less
A 1> * rigid, and become deformed m
^^ \- \ ' . consequence. The ossifying pro-
cess is delayed. Changes in the
shape of the bones of the head
may be detected, and the spine
may be affected by kyphosis ;
the teeth do not erupt till late,
and are stunted. Changes in
the ribs are produced by en-
largement of the costochondrial
junctions (beaded ribs), which
when present on both sides of
the sternum produce what is
known as the rickety rosary.
The principal changes met with
Fig. 144.— Wrist and hand of child, showing changes radiographically are at the
in lower end of radius and ulna due to rickets. • ^ it p ,i t
epiphyseal lines of the long
bones and the adjacent joint.
Aehrondroplasia. — A curious congenital condition, resembling rickets,
in which the growth of the osseous tissue on the shaft side of epiphysis of the
long bones of the arm and of the leg is affected, so that the limbs are short
and stunted, and the stature correspondingly diminished, although the
epiphyses are normal.
Simple Atrophy of Bone.— This results from a variety of conditions,
quite independent of rarefying inflammation, in which it is a marked feature.
It may be congenital, or may be due to :
PLATE XXIV. — Tubercular Disease of the Hip-joint.
a, Tubercular disease of hip-joint affecting chiefly the upper part of acetabulum.
h. Tubercular disease of hip, absorption of head and greater part of neck, upward displacement of femur.
(Radiograph by Dr. Salmond. )
c, Later stage of tubercular disease of hip-joint, disorganisation and displacement of head, large abscess
on outer side of shaft of femur.
CONDITIONS PREDISPOSING TO FRACTURE 173
(a) Interference with the' epiphysis, as in rickets, or injuries, or as a
sequence to tuberculosis or other inflammation, involving the function of the
cartilage.
(6) Injury or disease of the nervous system or of peripheral nerves, as
tabes dorsalis, syringomyelia, leprosy, etc.
(c) Want of use as in a paralysed or ankylosed limb.
(d) Local pressure, as of a tumour growing within or outside the bone.
(e) A senile change.
These conditions are illustrated in many of the skiagrams showing
disease of bone and joints, and attention is called to them as they occur.
MoUites Ossium or Osteomalacia. — A condition characterised by the
absorption of the osseous substance of the bones, as a result of which softening
and rarefaction are produced, followed by bending or spontaneous fracture.
Pathologically there is a replacement of the medullary substance by a soft,
fibro-cellular tissue, which is exceedingly vascular, and into which haemor-
rhage may occur. Attention may be called to this condition when a spon-
taneous fracture, or fracture from slight violence occurs. The changes in
the bone can be shown radiographically.
Morbid Conditions of Bone which predispose to Fracture.— It is
important to bear well in mind several conditions of bone which predispose
to fracture. When fracture from slight violence occurs, suspicion should at
once be aroused, and the examination should be conducted on lines which
will enable the radiographer to show not only the fracture, but also the con-
dition which has predisposed to it. For this, good negatives are essential.
A picture which will show a fracture is often not full of fine detail, without
which no opinion on bone disease can be formed. In the same way a screen
exam.ination will show a fracture, but an opinion of the bone condition can-
not be formed from it. The most usual conditions predisposing to fracture
are :
(1) Atrophy of bone. This may be senile, or due to disease, e.g. anky-
losis of a joint or certain nervous afiections.
(2) Fragilitas ossium. This consists in an inherited tendency to spon-
taneous fracture, occurring in children and adults.
(3) Bone disease, such as tuberculosis, rickets, syphilis, osteo-malacia.
(4) Local bone disease or tumours, such as sarcoma, secondary car-
cinoma.
A condition which frequently leads to fracture is a cystic condition of
bone. Many examples have been shown of late years occurring in the long
bones, the humerus being a common seat of this tumour. It is frequently
a very slow form of myeloid sarcoma. Elmslie has drawn attention to this
cystic disease of bone, and shown several interesting examples.
DISEASES OF JOINTS
These are numerous, and have characteristics which may often be shown
by radiography. A great deal of light has been thrown upon the differential
diagnosis of such conditions as tuberculosis of joints, chronic arthritis, gout,
and other diseases by the systematic examination of joints at regular in-
tervals during the progress of the disease. The various forms of arthritis
may be distinguished one from the other. Acute inflammation of a joint
may be shown when the synovial sac is seen fully distended ; later the
shadows caused by the fluid will become denser when pus forms. The
changes in cartilage, especially when the disease is chronic, are seen, and
later the bone becomes affected. Radiographically the interspaces between
the cartilages are increased when the joint is full of fluid. The opposite limb
should also be taken in order to determine departures from the normal.
Tuberculous Disease of Joints
In this disease the departures from the normal are marked. The
synovial membrane is swollen and pulpy. The joint is very much enlarged,
this being shown when the joint is radiographed, variations in the density
of the shadows of the soft parts indicating an inflammatory change
in the synovial membrane. The cartilage becomes eroded, and later the
process extends to the bone itself, which may be shown to be eroded. In
places irregular thickenings of the bone also occur, and the bone in the vicinity
of a joint may be thickened for some distance up the shaft. In the later
stages the joint shows marked disintegration, with a synovial cavity filled
with caseous material, this showing in the radiograph as faintly marked
irregular shading within a greatly swollen joint.
The surrounding bones, especially those below the joint, show atrophic
changes. All the bones entering into the joint become affected. All stages in
the history of tuberculous disease of joints may be demonstrated by radio-
graphy. The very early stages are, however, the most difficult on which to
give an opinion, and clinical evidence should always be taken into account
when an opinion is required. It is of the utmost importance to be able to
determine the presence of early tuberculosis, for on that the future treatment
depends. In joints which have been the seat of recent injury, changes due to
the injury may be detected, and these may later become the centre of a
tuberculous infection. Consequently, when examining joints after injury it
is important to be able to distinguish fine changes in the parts.
174
PLATE XXV. — Tubercular Diseases of Joints.
a. Tubercular disease of lower end of femur, involving diaphysis and epiphysis, a considerable degree
ot sclerosis of bone around an abscess cavity.
h, Lateral view showing the same changes. (Radiographs by Dr. R. W. A. Salmond. )
c. Tubercular area in scaphoid. (Radiograph by Dr. R. W. A. Salmond.)
d, Tubercular disease at ankle-joint ; note rarefaction of bones of foot.
PLATE XXVI. — Tuberculosis of Bones and Joints.
a, Tubercular disease of bones of hand, characterised by new bone formation affecting metacarpal bones
and phalanges.
h, Tubercular disease at end of radius, localised abscess. (Radiograph by Dr. R. W. A. Salmond. )
c, Tubercular dactylitis affecting 2nd and 3rd metacarpal bones.
d, Tubercular disease at upper end of humerus (caries sicca). (Radiograph by Dr. R. W. A. Salmond.)
TUBERCULOSIS OF JOINTS
175
The later stages of tubercular disease are much easier to recognise ;
rarefaction, caseation, and formation of pus are readily distinguished. A
localised rarefaction of bone in the neighbourhood of a joint should arouse
suspicion of the presence of pus, particularly when the bone round the rarefied
area shows a tendency to condensation. The epiphysis may assume a worm-
eaten appearance, which is distinctive of early caries ; later this may
completely disappear.
It is important also to be able to distinguish between tuberculous and
non-tuberculous disease of bone. In acute and subacute osteomyelitis
Fig. 145. — Tuberculosis of left hip-joint, particularly atfecting the acetabuluni. Note the diiferencie
between the two joints and relative shortening of neck on attected side.
afiecting the neighbourhood of a joint, and particularly in the latter, the
tendency is towards the formation of new bone, and the destructive process
is not then so manifest. Irregular thickening of the periosteum with the
deposition of new bone favours a diagnosis of non-tubercular disease. In
some cases a degree of caries sicca preponderates iii the process, and then
there is not the same tendency to the formation of an abscess. The bone
shows rarefaction for a considerable distance up the shaft. An accompanying
degree of rarefaction of the bones entering into the joint results from the
restriction of movement, and need not necessarily be taken as an indication
of the extent of the disease. Ankylosis of the joint may follow the healing
176 RADIOGRAPHY
of the inflammatory process. Displacements of the bones may result from
destruction of the ends, in the hip-joint this being frequently shown as a
dislocation upwards.
Tuberculosis may be met with in practically any of the joints of the
body, those most frequently affected being the hip, the knee, the elbow, the
wrist, the ankle, and the shoulder. The appearances are characteristic.
The spine is frequently the seat of a tuberculous caries which ends in abscess
formation. In many instances the presence of an abscess can readily be
Fig. 146. — Arthritis following injury of knee-joint. Lateral view.
There is a breach in the continuity of the articular surface of the femur. The articular surface
of the patella shows slight irregularity. The interarticular space between the femur, head of the
tibia, and the patellar ligament is occupied by chronic inflammatory products indicated by a mottled
appearance on the print. There is a sesamoid bone in a tendon on the posterior aspect of the joint.
This print shows well the structure of the bones entering into the knee-joint, and the soft
parts are very well shown. This quality of negative should always be obtained, if possible, when
examining joints for it gives a good definition in all the parts.
shown on radiographic examination. In a later stage a considerable degree
of deformity occurs. These are more easily shown. The early stages of a
tuberculous inflammation of bone, particularly when the spine is affected, is
difficult to distinguish from a tumour involving the spine. A consideration of
the history, temperature chart, etc., will help. The tumour shadow is usually
more irregular, and generally involves the circumference of the bone, while an
abscess may be more localised at one part. In doubtful cases an exploratory
operation is to be recommended. Simple inflammatory changes in a joint
are commonly the result of traumatism. An acute attack quickly subsides
and recovery takes place, but it must be borne in mind that a simple injury
may end in chronic inflammation, which may later become the seat of tuber-
PLATE XXVII. — Chronic Arthritic Changes at the Knee-joint.
a. Rheumatoid changes in knee-joint, with large bony deposit in front of femur.
h, Chronic rheumatoid changes in knee-joint ; loose bodies have formed inside the synovial membrane.
c, Knee-joint, showing extensive changes in patella, probably the result of traumatism.
L008E BODIES IN JOINTS 177
culous invasion. In joints traumatism may lead to minute changes in bone
and cartilage which, though not definite enough to be recognised as actual
fractures, may yet be quite as serious in their after effects. Ligaments
may be torn ; this may occur in the knee-joint, when the crucial ligaments
are torn. There may even be a fracture of the spine or the tibia. These
minute changes should be carefully looked for in all cases of joint injury.
Atrophy of Bone may be found in the region of a joint, the result of
disease following upon tuberculosis or other inflammatory process.
Chronic Articular Rheumatism
This affects several of the large joints, especially the knee and shoulder.
The hip- joint is also affected. Eadiographically, the joints may present very
little change and show practically no rarefaction. In very chronic cases
there may be some irregularity of outline of the articular surfaces, indicating
partial absorption of the cartilage.
Chronic Articular Gout
The radiographic appearance of the joints may not show much change,
except that the articular surfaces may be unusually close together, and lack
the rounded appearance they possess when covered with sound cartilage.
Deposits of uric acid are occasionally clearly seen in the radiograph, forming
a mass denser than the soft parts but not nearly so dense as the bone itself.
Fringes of the sjmovial membrane may become detached and form loose
bodies in the joint.
Loose Bodies in Joints
These are occasionally met with. The following description, which, gives
the most usual varieties, will be found useful when a consideration of these
bodies is called for :
1. Synovial fringes in which proliferation of cartilage cells has occurred,
leading to the formation of a nodular mass, which is at first pedunculated,
and is then cast off into the cavity of the joint by rupture of the pedicle.
These bodies are usually composed mainly of hyaline cartilage, with bony
material in the centre of the larger ones. They may become ossified through-
out. They vary in size from about J-inch diameter up to 1 inch ; the larger
ones are usually longer than they are broad. There may be only one loose
body in the joint, or there may be several hundreds. It is not uncommon to
find one body quite loose, and one or more still attached to the synovial
membrane of the same joint.
2. Osteophytic outgrowths from the edge of the articular cartilage may
become detached, and so form a loose body in the joint. These bodies
are irregular in shape, and usually consist of a layer of cartilage covering
an osseous centre.
12
178 EADIOGRAPHY
Varieties 1 and 2 usually occur in cases of osteoarthritis.
3. A portion of articular cartilage with a thin layer of bone may become
separated from the femoral condyle, and form a loose body in the joint
cavity. This occurs probably as a result of injury.
4. A blood-clot in the joint may become gradually smaller and firmer,
and so form a loose body. This occurs as a result of injury.
5. A portion of the synovial membrane may become thickened and
indurated as a result of injury. This is nipped by the articular surfaces
during the movements of the joint, and finally, as a result of the rupture
of the pedicle, the body becomes loose.
6. In tuberculous disease of a joint one or several loose bodies may be
found. These are composed of tuberculous material in the thickened synovial
membrane.
7. Around a foreign body, such as the end of a needle, fibrous tissue may
be formed. This and the preceding type of loose body are rare.
8. Partial detachment of a semilunar cartilage gives rise to a body which
hangs into the joint. As this is usually still attached to the bone it cannot
be said that it is a true loose body. It, however, gives rise to symptoms
of a loose body in the joint.
9. An innocent tumour, such as a Hpoma, may form in the synovial
membrane, become pedunculated, and so hang into the joint cavity. This
is very rare.
10. A foreign body, such as a nail, bullet, or needle, may in rare instances
form a variety of loose body in the joint. These, however, are usually spoken
of as " foreign " bodies.
Rheumatoid Arthritis or Rheumatic Gout
This is characterised by marked deformity in a typical case. Eadio-
graphically, the articular ends of the bones present the normal degree of
translucency, or they may be more translucent, but there are irregular,
knob-like projections, some of which appear more transparent. The joints
may become ankylosed, and there is then continuous bony structure right
through the joint.
Hypertrophic Arthritis or Osteoarthritis
This is a condition described separately, but it is probably a variety
of the preceding types, characterised by a tendency to the formation of new
tissue between bone and articular cartilage, which becomes calcified. There
may be marked disorganisation of the bones.
Charcot's Joints
This is characterised by marked enlargement of the joint. The car-
tilages are eroded, and osseous deposits occur in the ligaments, with irregular
outgrowths of bone around the joint.
PLATE XXVIII. — Diseases and Curvature of the Spine.
a, Caries of cervical vertebrae, lateral view.
6, Curvature of upper dorsal spine (scoliosis).
Curvature of spine, involving lower dorsal and lumbar vertebrae.
d, Caries of lumbar vertebrae and sacrum.
DIFFERENTIAL X-RAY DIAGNOSIS IN DISEASES
OF BONES AND JOINTS
It is important to be able to suggest, if only tentatively, a differential
diagnosis in morbid conditions of bone, and, when the disease is near a joint,
also of the condition of the joint. The tumours of bone most likely to com-
plicate a diagnosis are (1) sarcoma, (2) cancer. The latter is generally
accompanied by a primary lesion elsewhere, but the former frequently arises
primarily in the periosteum (periosteal sarcoma) or in the substance of the
bone (endosteal sarcoma).
It is necessary to consider the appearances presented by tumours of
bone when dealing with what appears to be an inflammatory condition.
The subject will be dealt with more fully later. Tumour of bone may be
complicated by superadded inflammatory changes which lead to still greater
difE.culties in diagnosis.
Sarcoma usually attacks the shaft of the bone, and produces changes
similar to those caused by certain degrees of osteomyelitis, diflering, however,
in that the latter show a more pronounced degree of periosteal reaction, as
indicated by the deposition of new bone and the tendency to formation of
sequestra. In medullary sarcoma certain areas of increased density appear
which resemble spiculee or islands of osseous material, and show actual
absorption of the bone, with very few or no normal portions of bone
remaining about this point. In osteomyelitis, in addition to the more
definite thickening of the periosteal shadow, there is a more definite
formation of new bone about the necrosed area.
Appearance of Joints in Tuberculosis
When examining joints for evidence of tuberculosis the following
symptoms should be looked for. They are met with in the course of
many examinations of these cases. The earliest changes are naturally the
most difficult to recognise.
(1) Marked porosity of the bones forming the affected joint.
(2) Actual loss of substance in the head, e.g. of the femur.
(3) Actual loss of substance in the hollow bone, e.g. the acetabulum.
(4) Extreme atrophy of the shaft of the bone.
(5) Abscess formation, characterised by an increase of the normal
179
180 KADIOGKAPHY
shadow of soft parts around the joint, accentuation and bulging of the
joint outline.
(6) Necrosis of portions of the bones, with formation of sequestra.
(7) Arrested development of epiphysis, and changes at epiphyseal
line.
(8) Displacement of bones, particularly at hip-joint. Where the head
or neck of the femur is displaced upwards this indicates that there is a marked
change in the acetabulum.
(9) Ankylosis of the bones forming the joint.
Tubercular Dactylitis
This is characterised by enlargement of the affected bones, deformity,
and destruction of bone tissue. Enlargement of the bone is often accom-
panied by rearrangement of the structure of the bone. Variations in density
give the appearance of cysts in bone, the bone surrounding a rarefied area
becoming sclerosed in parts ; hence the cystic appearance.
Syphilis of Bone
(1) Periosteal proliferation leads to considerable thickening, irregular in
character.
(2) Areas of increased rarefaction due to marked absorption of the lime
salts, with an effort towards new bone formation.
(3) Periostitis leads to many layers of new bone being laid down along
the whole length of the bone. Generally multiple, it therefore affects many
of the long bones.
In other cases the thickening may be localised, causing areas of dense
new bone formation.
Syphilitic Dactylitis
This is characterised by periosteal overgrowth, with little or no apparent
disturbance of the bone, the appearance presented by this condition afford-
ing a fairly reliable diagnostic point in favour of syphilis.
Chronic infective Osteomyelitis
(1) General infiltration causes a deeper shadow about the bone and joint
when the disease appears in the vicinity of the latter.
(2) Periosteal infiltration and overgrowth lead to marked increase of the
adjacent bone, and this sclerosed bone appears to be much denser than normal
bone, and the shadow is greatly increased in area.
S Iz;
hI a
w ^
^^
XI
^ - ?r1
><^
fl^'^l
w
5 o
H
"o !l; s
,
O X fl
■""S o
=t? 5,r^
O
r-;
o
.&
bD
"&I
O)
^
O
•--•
r^
»
^
bo
gT
C
.2
03
'?
c3
OSTEOMYELITIS 181
Acute Osteomyelitis
The earliest X-ray appearance of an osteomyelitis, which may run
through all the stages of the disease in a few weeks, may be an area of rare-
faction at the epiphyseal line, commencing in the diaphysis, and later in some
cases extending into and involving the epiphysis. This ls followed by
periosteal thickening, necrosis of bone, evidenced by areas of varying density,
indicating sequestra. The disease may become localised, when radiographic-
ally it is shown by an area of lighter shading surrounded by a periphery of
denser bone. The condition may arise near the epiphyseal line. Abscess
of bone may be the result of the inflammatory process, a typical instance
being the well-lmown abscess in the upper end of the tibia or lower end of
the femur.
In the hip-joint a mixed infective process may give rise to appearances
which have to be differentiated from tuberculous cases. Though the appear-
ances may indicate a preponderance of evidence in favour of one or other of
these diseases, it is not always possible to distinguish between them. A condi-
tion where there is a tendency to proliferation of periosteum, thickening of bone
and osteophytic outgrowth is more in favour of a non-tuberculous condition.
It must not be overlooked, however, that a condition which commenced as a
tuberculous one may become the seat of a mixed infection or vice versa. An
infective area of inflammation may become the seat of a subsequent tuber-
culous lesion. Marked evidence of bone disease in the vicinity of, but not
involving, a joint, is rather an indication for a diagnosis of a non-tuberculous
origin for the disease. A typical case may occur in the upper end of the
femur, when an area of lessened shadow {i.e. a condition which allows of
the readier passage of the rays through the bone substance) is due to a
destructive process in the bone, with absorption of the bony salts. This is
accompanied by a greatly thickened periosteum. The bone, therefore, appears
on examination to be denser in the surrounding areas, in contradistinction
to the general rarefaction which is so frequently seen in chronic cases of
tuberculosis.
The typical X-ray picture of a case of chronic osteomyelitis in an
advanced condition, when the whole of the shaft of a bone has become
involved, shows :
(1) Areas of suppuration indicated by patches of varying density, rare-
faction of bone, and small collections of debris and pus.
(2) Newly formed periosteal bone, shown by the deposition of successive
layers of bone outside the shadows of the original bone or what remains of it.
(3) Necrosis of the cortical bone, indicated by irregular patches of
denser shadow, with a well-defined periphery, beyond this being lighter
shadows, where the living bone still remains.
Generally these conditions are confined to the shaft of the bone involved,
the epiphyses and joints escaping. The earliest X-ray manifestation is
shown by a slight increase in the periosteal shadow at one or more spots,
a definite swelling of the soft parts, and possibly abscess formation.
182
EADIOGRAPHY
Acute infective Periostitis
The diagnosis by X-rays of an early infection of the periosteum is attained
by noting changes, such as thickening and bulging of the periosteum. The
outline of the periosteum in normal bone is sharply defined, while in acute
inflammatory conditions there is a general haziness of its outline in the
affected part, or it may be broken and irregular, exposing the cortex of the
bone.
The formation of an abscess is shown by an increased depth of shadow in
the neighbouring soft parts. In less acute cases this swelling may be due
to inflammatory changes commencing in the periosteum.
Tumours of Bone
The simple forms of tumour are often diagnosed with ease, but the
malignant tumours are frequently the subject of great doubt, both clinically
and radiographically. The latter method of examination is often called upon,
to decide, if possible, the nature of a doubtful swelling. In all such cases
great care must be exercised, and all methods of examination should be
employed. To make a positive diagnosis on the radiographic appearance
alone is often misleading. The most malignant type of sarcoma, for instance,
is, in the early stages
at least, indistinguish-
able from a simple in-
flammatory process.
Later, more decided
features may be made
out, but it must be
insisted upon that
radiographically it is
often impossible to
decide. The clinical
history, the radio-
graphic evidence, and
in most of the early
cases, at least, a fresh
radiograph of the
section at the time of
operation should all
be employed. The
latter method puts
the nature of the case
beyond all doubt, and decides at once the extent of the operation.
The clinical and radiographical features of cases of tumour will be dealt
Pig. 147. — Sarcoma of lower end of femur.
The bone has been sawu longitudinally in order to show the
tumour in its interior. The appearance of this tumour in
the amputated limb and in the living subject are shown in
Plate XXX., Figs, c, e, and/.
PLATE XXX.— Tumours of Bone.
a, Periosteal sarcoma of shaft of humerus. Plate XXXII fig. a, shows recurrence in lung two years after
amputation of arm. h, Myeloid sarcoma of shaft of humerus confirmed by microscopic examination. There
have been several fractures at the seat of growth.
c, Sarcomaof lower end of femur (after removal), d, Sarcoma of head of fibula. (Eadiograph by Dr. Reid.)
e, Lateral view of c, from living subject. ^, Antero-posterior view of c.
TUMOURS OF BONE
183
with later, but, in passing, -it may be observed that a knowledge of the
macroscopic and microscopic appearances of tumours will aid the radio-
grapher to grasp points in the progress of a case, which will often help to
decide his opinion in a particular instance.
Sarcoma is the most important primary tumour of bone, and almost
any form of this may occur. Endosteal, or central, sarcoma generally com-
mences in the medullary cavity or cancellous tissue, and results in the so-
called " expansion " of bone, which consists of an absorption of bone from
within, whilst at the same time new osseous tissue is being deposited from the
Fig. 148.
-Choudro-sarcoma of lower end
of tibia.
under surface of the periosteum. Fig. 149.— Sarcoma at upper end of humerus. This
rrii T 1 • -ii is a form of periosteal sarcoma which rapidly
The radiographic appearances will involved the soft parts. Radiographically, the
correspond with the pathological humerus showed very faint irregularity at the
-, T^ . J- , 1 T. periphery with thickening of the bone.
changes. Expansion of the bone ^
with debris in the centre or sarcomatous new tissue, will be shown
in the plate. The new bone forming from the periosteum is de-
posited in more or less definite layers. When considerable expansion
of bone occurs, it can readily be distinguished from inflammatory
change processes, or cysts of bone, by the somewhat sharp nature of the
expansion. The shaft above and below the growth is normal, and
suddenly expands at the site of the tumour. The growth usually com-
mences at the end of a long bone. It seldom encroaches on the articular
cartilage, so that the joint escapes, although it may be distended with fluid.
Dr. Emery, of King's College Hospital, has been good enough to report on the
tumour shown in Fig. 148. It consists of a cellular matrix, composed for
184 EADIOGRAPHY
the most part of large, round, or oval cells, having large nuclei, sometimes
multiple. There are also a few myeloplaxes. This part of the tumour is
sarcomatous in type. Set in this tissue are numerous masses of cartilage,
fairly well formed, but with tumour cells (like those of the matrix) instead
of ordmary cartilage cells. The tumour is a chondro-sarcoma.
Spontaneous fracture is a not uncommon comphcation, and owing to the
expansion of the bony framework, " egg-shell crackling " may be met with.
Later, the growth may expand beyond the bony limits of the growth, and
secondary deposits occur, the substances in which these are found depending
upon the type of the primary tumour. The lungs and mediastinum are
frequently the seat of secondary growths.
The periosteal type of sarcoma is not at all easy to distinguish. It may
Fig. 150. — Tumour of clavicle (Radiograph by Dr. R. W. A. Salmoud).
Sarcoma of acromial eud of clavicle. This has the appearance of a cystic condition
of the bone. It developed rapidly.
appear as a decided shadow of about the density of the soft parts, arising
from the surface of the bone. It involves the soft structures, extending into
them in some instances. The periosteum may show thickening, which will
be revealed radiographically.
Myeloid sarcoma in its least malignant form may simulate a cyst of the
bone. It is of slow growth, and occurs at the ends of long bones. Spon-
taneous fracture may occur in this as in cystic disease.
Hydatid cyst may also be met with. It is more chronic in its progress,
and shows a well-defined, fairly regular outline.
Carcinoma of Bone. — This is usually secondary to a primary focus
elsewhere — in the breast, genito -urinary tract, etc. It is generally a late
secondary manifestation, the bones most frequently afiected being the ster-
num, ribs, and spine. The disease may also invade a large joint, or the shafts
of the long bones become involved. The sacrum or iliac bones may also be
DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS OF TUMOURS OF BONE 185
invaded. The presence of these secondary deposits is shown radiographically
by rounded irregular
shadows of varying
density, generally lighter
than the normal bone.
In other cases the disease
takes the form of cario-
necrosis, when cavities
filled with necrosed tissue
are produced, and ap-
pear on the screen or
plate as lighter areas.
Exostoses. — These
show as projections,
sometimes of normal
bone tissue, and some-
times of rarefied or
unusually dense bone ;
the situations in which
they are met with are
numerous, as in the ends
of the long bones, bones
of the feet, the pubis, etc.
Chondromata. — -These may occur in any bone, but particularly in the
long bones, and also in the bones of the fingers and toes.
Fig. 151. — Exostosis of lower end of femur. Shows signs of
inflammatory changes at end of exostosis, probably secondary
to trauma.
Differential Diagnosis of Tumours of Bone
A brief summary of the commoner forms of tumour of bone and of the
points which are most useful in diagnosis is necessary. It is also well to
remember that there are no positively definite signs of any particular tumour.
Clinical data and radiographic records should be taken together if the
examination is expected to be of value.
The appearance of a shadow of doubtful nature in one of the long bones
raises most important questions of diagnosis. The benign cyst has recently
been shown to be a comparatively common tumour of bone. The term
benign is used in relation to the degree of malignancy and growth rather than
as a pathological classification. Many of these so-called benign growths are
myeloid sarcomata, which are peculiarly slow in the rate of growth. The
tumours most likely to lead to difl6.culty in diagnosis are those which are
found in the interior of the shaft of a long bone, or at its epiphyseal ends, and
which have rarefied or replaced the osseous or medullary tissue, with or
without expanding the bone, and which are situated within the osseous
tissue of the bone. Such tumours may prove to be (1) central abscess,
tuberculous or septic ; (2) gumma ; (3) hydatid cyst ; (4) benign cyst ;
186
RADIOGEAPHY
(5) fibrous osteitis ; (6) enchondroma ; (7) endothelioma ; (8) secondary
carcinoma ; (9) myeloma ; (10) sarcoma.
The points to be considered are: (1) history; (2) physical signs; (3)
evidence of disease or tumour in other parts of the body ; (4) radiographic
appearances, and a correct interpretation of these. The chief of these, so
far as our purpose is concerned, is the radiographic appearances, though all
should receive attention.
The points of importance radiographically are the site of the tumour
in the bone, its density and consistence, whether subdivided by trabeculse,
its outline, whether sharply defined and surrounded by a well-defined shell
Fig. 152. — Traumatic myositis ossificans.
Note the unchanged aspect of the bone. The ossification in the
muscle bundles is quite distinct from the periosteum.
of bone, whether the bone around is normal or rarefied, presence of deposits
of new periosteal bone or sclerosed bone, the presence of a fracture, the
evidence of erosion of the bone.
Traumatic Myositis Ossificans. — A condition which arises in the sub-
stance of a muscle secondary to trauma. It occurs most frequently in the
arm or the thigh. The appearances are characteristic and must not be
mistaken for sarcoma arising from the periosteum. Fig. 152 illustrates
the typical appearances in this condition.
Central abscess is generally accompanied by symptoms, however sHght,
namely, pain and loss of power, indicating an inflammatory process, and
occasionally by fluctuations in temperature. Eadiographically, the cavity
is not as a rule strictly central, and the surrounding dense bone is unequal
in its thickness. The outline is often indefinite, the cavity is not very clear,
PLATE XXXI.— Tumours of Bone.
«, Secondary sarcoma affecting upper end of femur, fracture through neck. The primary lesion was
a periosteal sarcoma of humerus.
h, Same case at an earlier stage. (Radiograph by Dr. N. S. Finzi.)
c, Sarcoma of upper end of femur. The diagnosis in this case is doubtful ; it is most probably a myeloid
sarcoma of very slow growtli.
d, Sarcoma of upper end of humerus (inset is a photograph of the joint after removal). The humerus
has Vjeen fractured probably as a result of manipulation, at or after the operation.
DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS OF TUMOURS OF BONE 187
and there is an absence of trabeculae. The bone around is denser, and there
is generally a deposit of new bone.
Hydatid Cy.sL— This is very rare in this country, though it should always
be kept in mind when considering obscure conditions. It shows as a sharply-
rounded area less dense than bone.
Benign Cyst is a much more common occurrence than was formerly
thought. The fiist sign may be a so-called spontaneous fracture of the bone,
this occurring as the result of violence of a mild kind. The appearances
are characteristic. The cavity or cavities are situated centrally ; they fill
the bone uniformly, the space indicating the cyst being clear and not sub-
divided by trabeculae. There is little or no sclerosis of bone, and no periosteal
thickening, though this may occur as a result of fracture.
Fibrous Osteitis. — Probably always originates in early life. It is char-
acterised by swelling and deformity, the latter being due to bending of the
softened bone. The disease may be localised to one bone, the upper end of
the femur being the most frequent site, when the bone is expanded. Skia-
grams show expansion of nearly the whole shaft. There are great variations
in density, and an appearance of subdivisions by trabeculse. These appear-
ances lead in the diagnosis to confusion between this condition and
myeloma.
Secondary Carcinoma. — Radiographically, there may be seen a clear area
in the middle of the shaft of a long bone or a rib, giving the appearance of
a rarefied patch in the bone, covered by a thin shell of compact bone, and
fading gradually up and down the shaft into normal bone.
Myelo7na. — -They are most likely to be confused with benign cyst or with
fibrous osteitis. They are generally found at the ends of the bones. Radio-
graphically, the distinguishing features are the expansion of the bone and the
subdivision by trabeculae.
Sarcomata of Bone. — These are periosteal and endosteal. The former
are often difficult to distinguish from inflammatory thickening or myositis
ossificans traumatica.
Medullary Sarcoma is probably the rarest of the endosteal tumours
of bone. The bone is expanded with great rapidity, and the bony shell is
'often eroded. Erosion seen in a skiagram should always excite suspicion of
the true nature of the disease. The appearance in a skiagram of a clear space
in the shaft of a bone, expanding the bone unequally, and showing erosion
of the bone substance, should lead to the suspicion of sarcoma.
THE X-RAY EXAMINATION OF THE THORAX AND
ITS CONTENTS
The complete routine examination of tlie thorax includes an investigation
of the bony walls, the heart and aorta, the lungs, the mediastinum, and the
oesophagus. The bony walls have been dealt with in the chapter on injuries
of bones, and the oesophagus in that on the alimentary system. For our
present purposes, therefore, the routine examination of the chest consists of
a scrutiny of the heart, the lungs, and the mediastinum by the methods of
Radioscopy and Radiography.
Radioscopy
Radioscopy, or the examination of a patient with the fluorescent screen,
is a method of great value, as a diagnosis can often be made from it alone,
to be subsequently confirmed by radiographic exposures. To obtain
reliable results it is essential that the technique should be complete.
Technique of Examination. — Several methods are employed :
1. The Recumbent Position. — The patient may be placed on the X-ray
couch, the tube working from below and the operator manipulating the screen.
The position of the tube and of the diaphragm aperture are adjusted to
suit the requirements of the case. It is essential to have a good X-ray tube
of the proper degree of hardness, and an evenly-spread fluorescent screen.
2. The Upright Position, with the patient standing in front of the
X-ray tube, is undoubtedly the best. For this method, a well-protected
screening stand, all the parts of which work with ease and smoothness, is
necessary. The particular form of stand varies with the desires of the
operator, but in order that good results may be obtained a good stand is
essential. A convenient form is illustrated opposite. A few minutes' con-
sideration of the mechanism will familiarise the operator with its move-
ments, and it need not therefore be described. A rectangular diaphragm is
better than one of the iris shape, as with the rectangular form it is possible
to examine in detail the roots of the lungs in their entirety.
The room should be completely darkened, not even a glimmer of light
being permissible when the tube is working. An open fireplace for heating
purposes is not advisable, but if such is used, then efiicient steps must be
taken to exclude light from it during the examination. It is also necessary
to enclose completely the X-ray tube and valve tubes in a box or in black
188
PLATE XXXII. — Malignant Diseases of the Chest.
a, Secondary deposits of sarcoma iu mediastinum and lungs.
h, Lynipho sarcoma of mediastinum, extending outwards from root of lung towards the periphery,
c, Secondary deposits of cancer involving mediastinal glands, lung substance, and pleura ; the
diaphragmatic surfaces of the right lung and the liver are also involved.
EXAMINATION OF THE THORAX
189
cloth, and even the front of the X-ray box must be covered with an opaque
cloth, if reliable observations are to be made.
These precautions taken, the operator should allow a few minutes to
elapse in the darkened room before the current is allowed to pass through
the tube, in order that the retina may become sensitive to the fluorescent
appearance of the screen when the tube is working:.
Fig. 153. — Upright screening stand, witli automatic stereoscopic movements of tube- and plate-
holder controlled from the switch-board. Suitable for taking radiographs of the thorax.
(Butt and Co.)
The Routine Examination. — This should always be carried out in a
definite order. The tube should be first centred over the heart, with the
diaphragm opened to its widest limit. This enables a view of the whole of
the thorax to be obtained. Then the tube should be carried well down,
and the movements of the diaphragm examined for limitations on either
side, and the presence of dullness at either base looked for.
Next the heart and aorta are carefully scrutinised for abnormalities of
size, shape, or position, or for the presence of pulsation in abnormal situations.
190
EADIOGKAPHY
The tube should then be moved over to the right side of the chest, and
the diaphragm of the apparatus closed laterally until a long slit aperture is
obtained. This is carefully adjusted over the hilus of the lung for the
detection of enlarged or cancerous glands. The appearance of the shadows
at the root of the lung should be noted. Repeat the observation on the left
side.
Great care should be exercised in the examination of the apices of the
lungs, both as regards the quantity of current passing through the tube
and the observation
of the apices them-
selves. After one
apex has been ex-
amined a mental
note should be made
of the degree of the
illumination present,
and the tube then
passed over to the
other side. Differ-
ences between the
two apices should be
carefully noted.
The current pass-
ing through the
tube should be regu-
lated by the operator,
and this is best done
by an adjustable
rheostat close to his
hand. With a soft
tube and a small
primary current, very
fine detail in the lung
substance can be
made out. This is
most important, for
it is often by the
examination of this detail that a diagnosis of early tubercular disease may
have to be determined.
Diagrams may be made on the lead glass in front of the fluorescent screen
of any particularly striking departure from the normal, alterations in the
diaphragm can be sketched in, and the amplitude of movement on inspiration
and expiration noted. A permanent record of the amplitude of respiratory
movements of the diaphragm can be obtained by getting the patient to inhale
fully and hold the breath. An exposure is made. Then the patient exhales
forcibly, and holds the breath while another exposure is made. The two
Fig. 154. — Thorax of an adult, showing practically a normal condition
except at the root of right lung where there is a slight increase of
shadow. (ExposLire y-J-jj sec.)
PLATE XXXIII. — Chest showing Pleural Effusion and its Absorption.
Three plates from the same patient at intervals of several months.
a, Plate on anterior asjiect of thorax, shows practically a normal condition. Note level of diaphragm
on Ijoth sides.
h, Effusion at left base. The level of the diaphragm on left side is much higher than in above plate.
c, The eft'usion has been absorbed but the level of the diaphragm remains higher, indicating the
presence of adhesions fixing the dome of the diaphragm on the left side.
EXAMINATION OF THE THORAX
191
shadows on one plate show the degree of diaphragmatic excursion. All
observations of this kind should be immediately transferred to paper on
completion of the examination, and entered in the notes of the case.
These observations are of the greatest value in all cases ; but if they are
to be useful a note must be made at once, otherwise the personal element
will enter largely into the case. Even mider the most favourable conditions
this factor must be considered, since it is the great objection to all screen
examinations. In no other region of the body are we so absolutely dependent
upon screen examination of a patient. The trained eye of the observer may
detect changes in movement in lungs or heart which it is impossible to record
upon a plate. But radiographs which are taken instantaneously are of
great value as confirmatory evidence of changes in the organs, and should
always be taken to complete the examination. The importance of having
a thoroughly reliable fluorescent
screen must be borne in mind.
It is also essential that the screen
be smooth on the surface, and
kept scrupulously clean. The
lead glass protection should also
be kept well polished, for even a
trace of dirt or pencil mark on its
surface may lead to trouble, the
importance of this point being
readily understood where fine
detail is being dealt with.
It is also of importance to
have the patient perfectly still,
especially when radiography is
employed, since the slightest
movement during the exposure
may ruin the value of a plate.
The screening stand should be connected to earth by a wire, in order to
avoid giving the patient a shock from the electrical discharges which are
given off from the tube and metal fittings when the former gets hard.
Fig. 155. — Normal lower cervical aud upper dorsal
vertebrfe, showing the position for demonstration
of cervical ribs. The apical part of both lungs is
also well shown.
Radiography
In radiography of the lungs for diagnostic purposes it is necessary to
use a soft tube in order to obtain the best results. It is detail in lungs and
not in bone that we look for. A soft tube of about 3-inch spark-gap will
allow a large quantity of current to pass through it, and will give very good
detail in the soft parts.
Time exposures of any length are of no great value for diagnosis ; if
we are to get plates which will to any extent reproduce what we have seen
on the screen, the exposure must be exceedingly short ; in fact, the shortest
obtainable is the best. With a powerful modern installation the exposure
192 KADIOGEAPHY
may be cut down to t^ of a second. The resulting picture is of great
value, because everything is absolutely sharp, the heart being represented
in outline by the sharpest possible line. The diaphragm is also sharp, and
may be caught in a stage of contraction. This is well shown in a print from
a case of early phthisis (see Plate XXXV., Fig. b).
The hilus of the lung is also well shown. The branching of the bronchi
and larger vessels can be followed to the periphery, and if the tube has been
in the proper condition a faint mottling all over the surface represents the
lung substance.
From a comparison of such pictures obtained from normal subjects it
is quite easy to detect changes which occur in diseased conditions, especially
in the very early stages of tuberculosis of the lung. Even with the most
up-to-date apparatus it is still necessary to use an intensifying screen, if
the exposure is to be of the shortest possible duration. With a screen of
this kind quite good pictures may be obtained with much less powerful
installations, but their diagnostic value in very early cases is not nearly
so great.
The important point in these very rapid exposures is that they reproduce
one phase of what one sees when a screen examination of the chest is made,
with all the movements of the parts eliminated, so that when compared with
the result of a prolonged screening they afford valuable confirmatory aid to
the making of a diagnosis. Plates taken "svith time exposures can only be
of value when a gross lesion is present. Another point in favour of these
rapid exposures is that involuntary movements on the part of the patient
are not so likely to spoil the result.
In radiography of the thorax and bones of young children there is always
difficulty on account of movements during the exposures. The child has
often to be held on the plate. The rapid exposure is of great value in such
cases, for even when the child is moving a sharp radiograph may be obtained,
with an exposure of t^ of a second. The exposure is so short that move-
ment is practically eliminated and good detail is obtained. Short exposures
are, therefore, particularly useful in radiography of the thorax.
Attention to Detail. — In this branch of the work, and indeed in all
branches, only the most careful attention to detail in all directions will aid
us in the production of reliable pictures, and a good routine is essential.
Mechanical contrivances which facilitate movements of apparatus, and enable
us to reproduce at subsequent examinations the same relative positions of
tube, patient, and plate, will be found of the greatest service. The fluor-
escent screen should be adaptable for the ready insertion of the plate when
an exposure has to be made. Since the work is conducted in the dark,
all metal points should be insulated or the whole apparatus earthed, and all
the controlling factors must be at hand. Nothing is more trying than work
of this exacting nature with the factors out of order. Consequently, great
care should be exercised in the selection of all apparatus, with all the features
of which the operator must be perfectly familiar.
It is important for the operator to have control of the X-ray tube when
TECHNIQUE OF THORACIC EXAMINATION 193
screening. A convenient form of regulator is the Bauer air- valve, a most
ingenious method of admitting a small quantity of air into the bulb, the
pressure of a small hand-pump forcing it through a mercury valve. By
this contrivance the operator can regulate the hardness to the requisite
degree without stopping the examination.
Experience in the use of the Bauer air-valve for regulation of the
vacuum of the X-ray tube leads to the conclusion that unless great care is
exercised in its manipulation the tube soon becomes hard, and requires to be
constantly regulated when in action. Other forms of regulator may there-
fore be useful, such as the Osmosis regulator, where a small gas flame can
be used to soften the tube. The control pump for the gas supply may be
placed at a point convenient for the operator. When neither of these regu-
lators is available the operator must regulate the tube by the usual method
of sparking until it is at the proper degree of hardness for the particular
case he is examining. The vacuum can then be kept more or less constant
by regulating the quantity of current passing through the tube by means
of the regulating rheostat. It is a good practice to commence the screen
examination with the tube slightly on the hard side. A prolonged screening
will reduce the vacuum, and when a radiograph requires to be taken, it
will be found that the tube has attained the requisite degree of hardness.
It is an advantage to keep one tube for radiography and another for screening.
The Bauer air- valve is figured in the chapter on apparatus (see page 46).
The Bauer regulator is also attached to the valve tubes when these are
used. The two hand-pumps controlling the valve and X-ray tubes can be
placed within the reach of the operator. The control table may also be
within easy reach. A foot switch to control the lighting of the room is
also useful. Then the operator has all the factors under his personal control
during the screen examination of the patient.
A point to be insisted on is that in every case examined a consideration
of all the factors in the case is essential, and a diagnosis should never be
made on the X-ray appearances alone. The physical signs are most im-
portant, and some guide should be given by the physician to the radiographer
if the best value is to be obtained. The findings by X-rays are frequently
only a confirmation of an opinion already formed. It is true that in some
cases the extent of the disease may be greater than the physical signs in-
dicated, or an area of disease may be shown to exist in unsuspected regions,
but on the other hand radiography may fail to show a definite lesion when all
the signs and symptoms strongly indicate its presence. The type of case
which most frequently calls for a radiographic investigation is that of
incipient phthisis. Tuberculosis of the lung in all its varieties and stages
will fall to be examined, but it is the doubtful case which proves the value
of radiography. Here the rapid exposures will help greatly in settling
the diagnosis. The expert clinician can foretell changes which radiography
may fail to demonstrate, but the fact of its failure does not negative their
presence.
The expert radiographer may be more accurate than the inexpert
13
194 KADIOGRAPHY
clinician. The combination of the expert radiographer and the expert
clinician cannot fail to enhance the value of the observations of each. Cases
will occur when both may be wrong. Repeated examinations at intervals
by both may show the changes at a later date, and the record furnished by
radiography of the progressive stages of a disease must lead to the accumula-
tion of knowledge valuable for both.
The value of repeated examinations of the thorax in some diseases is
shown by the results obtained at the Cancer Hospital, London. All cases of
cancer of the breast and other parts are systematically examined at intervals,
valuable evidence being thus obtained of the condition of the pleura, the
roots of the lungs, and the mediastinum. The progressive changes caused
by secondary deposits in the pleura, the lungs, and the mediastinum are
frequently shown.
Diseases of the Thorax
A brief consideration of the pathology of conditions affecting the
thorax and its contents is necessary before discussing the radiographic
appearances and the differential diagnosis. This review must necessarily
be brief, for it is not within the scope of this work to do more than
mention the various forms, with a short reference to the macroscopic
appearances of such diseases, their common situations, and some points
of difference in their origin and spread which have a bearing on the radio-
graphic interpretation. The conditions that will be referred to are :
(1) Diseases of the lungs.
(2) Diseases of the pleura.
(3) Diseases of the heart.
(4) Diseases of the mediastinum.
(5) Malignant disease of the thorax, including tumours of the heart
and pericardium, the lungs and pleura, the mediastinum, the oesophagus,
the spine, and the chest walls.
(6) Foreign bodies in the thorax.
Diseases of the Lung's. — As these are classified and described in text-
books on pathology and medicine, it will be sufficient to recall briefly the
chief points which will be likely to aid the radiographer. Many of them are
referred to in the section dealing with the differential diagnosis.
Circulatory Disturbances in the Lungs. — (1) Congestion. — Two forms of
congestion are recognised, the mechanical and the hypostatic, the latter
being the one most likely to show signs on radiographic examination. All
grades of change may be seen passing into consolidation.
(2) Broncho-Pneumo7iia. — The lung is fuller and firmer than usual, on
section, and the general surface has a dark-reddish colour. Projecting above
the level of the section are lighter-red or greyish-red areas, representing the
patches of broncho-pneumonia. These may either be isolated and separated
from each other by uninflamed tissue, or they may be in groups, or the greater
part of a lobe may be involved. The disease may pass on to the stage to
PLATE XXXIV. — Chests showing Pui,.m').\ai{y Tuberculosis.
a, Right apex showing advanced consolidation ; left apex involved but disease not so ad-
vanced ; roots of lung both involved but more so on right.
b, Left side of chest extensively involved ; both apices are involved ; heart small and
""vertical." These two cases are both affected by active tuberculosis.
c, Healed tuberculosis of long standing ; both apices show signs of involvement ; roots of
lungs show evidence of calcified glands. Patient had no active symptoms.
DISEASES OF THE LUNG AND PLEURA 105
which the term splenisation has been given, when it may be accompanied
by a condition of collapse of parts of the lung.
(3) Chronic Interstitial Pneumonia {Cirrhosis of the Lung, Fibroid
Phthisis). — There are two chief forms, the massive or lobar and the insular
or broncho-pneumonic form. In the massive type the disease is unilateral,
the chest of the affected side is sunken and deformed, and the shoulder much
depressed. The heart is drawn over to the affected side, the unaffected
lung being emphysematous, and covering the greater portion of the media-
stinum. There may be dense adhesions, and the pleural membranes may be
greatly thickened. In the broncho-pneumonic form the areas are smaller,
often central in position, and are found most frequently in the lower lobes.
(4) Lobar Pneumonia is classified by physicians amongst the specific
infectious diseases, but for radiographic purposes it may be described
together with the more chronic forms of pneumonia. Three stages of the
process of inflammation are recognised : (a) engorgement, (6) red hepatisation,
(c) grey hepatisation. In red hepatisation the lung tissue is solid, firm, and
airless, it may be friable, and the surface has a granular appearance. Grey
hepatisation is a further stage in the inflammatory process, and it may,
though rarely, go on to abscess formation. The disease is usually confined
to a single lobe of the lung, but the adjoining lobes may, however, be con-
gested, and in some instances the whole lung or both lungs may become
involved.
(5) Tuberculosis of the Lungs. — All forms may be met with.
Diseases of the Pleura. — These require to be briefly considered,
because the occurrence of one or other of them may give rise to a difficulty in
diagnosis ; and also in the course of a malignant tumour of the lung, pleurisy
and effusion are common sequelae. The simple form of pleurisy is easily
recognised. Heemorrhagic pleurisy may occur when carcinoma of the lung
is present. Diaphragmatic pleurisy may be limited partly or chiefly to the
diaphragmatic surface. It is often dry, but may be accompanied by effusion,
either serofibrinous or purulent, which is circumscribed to the diaphragmatic
surface. Serous or purulent effusions of any size confined to the diaphragm-
atic surface are very rare. Encysted pleurisy may lead to a loculation of
the resulting empyema, which will give a shadow that may be quite indis-
tinguishable from that caused by a new gro\^i:h or a primary abscess of the
lung. Interlobar pleurisy is another condition which must be borne in mind
when considering a doubtful negative.
Diseases of the Heart. — Tumours of the heart are rare, but there
are conditions which may simulate tumour, and which must, therefore, be
mentioned. These are tuberculosis and syphilis.
Tuberculosis of the Heart.— This occurs as : (a) scattered miliary tuber-
culosis ; {b) large caseous tuberculosis, extremely rare ; (c) sclerotic
tuberculous myocarditis. The disease generally proceeds from a mediastinal
gland, this fact being important from a radiographic point of view.
Syphilis. — Gummata are the only manifestations of this disease likely
to attract the attention of the radiographer in the cardiac region.
196 KADIOGEAPHY
Diseases of the Mediastinum. — In simple lymphadenitis and suppura-
tive lymphadenitis, the glands are large and infiltrated, but are not usually
dense enough to cast shadows sufficient to complicate a diagnosis. Suppura-
tive lymphadenitis may, however, lead to abscess formation, and then a
large shadow may be found due to the presence of pus. Both these conditions
may simulate tumour. Abscess of the mediastinum is not at all uncommon,
.and may be of considerable size. It is secondary to an infective process,
e.g. erysipelas, eruptive fevers, and tuberculosis. Indurative mediastino-
pericarditis is a condition in which the pericardium may be greatly thickened
by a great increase of the fibrous tissue. This may give rise to changes in
the mediastinal shadows.
Malignant Diseases of the Thorax. — The tumours most commonly
met with will be considered first, then the rarer conditions, and finally
tumours involving the bony structures composing the walls of the thoracic
cavity, namely, the vertebrae, ribs, sternum, and costal cartilages, will be
briefly considered.
Tumours of the Heart are very rare. An enlarged, hypertrophied, or
dilated heart may, however, complicate a diagnosis when a malignant
process is situated in the near vicinity. Primary cancer and sarcoma are
extremely rare. Secondary tumours — sarcomata and carcinomata — may
occur, either directly or by extension from the pleura and pericardium.
Calcareous patches occurring in a greatly dilated aorta may, where viewed
laterally, simulate the appearance of secondary growths in the mediastinal
glands. When these occur the outline of the dilated aorta is seen as a rule,
particularly if there is an associated condition of arteriosclerosis, and these
shadows should, therefore, be capable of differentiation from the more serious
condition of growth. A hydropericardium may lead to difficulty when the
pleura also contains fluid, both of these structures becoming involved when
there are secondary deposits of mahgnant disease in the pleura.
Tumours of the Lungs and Pleura. — Primary tumours are rare, and primr
ary cancer or sarcoma as a rule involves only one lung. Secondary growths
are not uncommon, and may be of various forms, generally following tumours
of the digestive tract, the genito-urinary organs, or the bones, and, most
frequently of all, cancer of the breast. The types most usually met with are
in order of frequency : (1) scirrhus cancer ; (2) epithelioma, which may be
primary in the bronchial tract ; (3) sarcoma ; (4) fibroma ; (5) enchondroma ;
(6) osteoma (very rare). The lungs may also be involved in Hodgkin's
disease. The primary growth generally forms a large mass, which may
occupy the greater part of the lung. It may by extension outwards involve
the parietal and visceral pleura. The tumour mass may necrose, and a
cavity result. The diffuse cancerous growth may resemble a tuberculous
pneumonia. The metastatic growths are nearly always disseminated ; they
may vary from a mihary type to quite a large growth, and all variations in
size may be met with in the same patient. The symptoms may be slight
or marked according to the accessory lesions which accompany the new
growth, such as pleurisy ; this may be dry or accompanied by effusion.
PLATE XXXV. — Chests showing Pulmonary Tuberculosis.
a, Post-mortem subject. Note fine shading iu lung substance. Tuberculous bronclio-pneumonia.
h, Early tuberculosis of lungs, iDeribroncliial thickening, irregularity of diaiDhragmatic shadow on right
side, with sharpness of all detail. Exposure -^^jj second, intensifying screen used.
c, Acute general tuberculosis of both lungs (miliary tubercle).
TUMOURS OF THE THORAX 197
Tumours of the Mediaslinum. — Cancer is the most common form of
tumour in the mediastinum. There are three chief points of origin : the
thymus, the lymph glands, and the pleura and lungs. Primary sarcoma
is more frequent than primary cancer. Lympho-sarcoma and lymphadenoma
frequently give rise to large tumours.
Tumours of the (Esophagus. — The most common tumour is epithelioma,
and it occurs more frequently in males than females. The middle or the
lower third of the oesophagus is the most usual situation in which the growth
is found. It is at first confined to the mucous membrane, but soon breaks
through and extends into the mediastinal tissue, stricture occurring in the
lumen of the tube. Later on, w^hen ulceration of the mucous surface occurs,
the stricture may be less marked than in the earlier stages. In the course
of the disease the oesophagus above the growth becomes dilated, and a degree
of hypertrophy follows. The ulcer may perforate the trachea, the lung, the
pleura, the mediastinum, the aorta or one of its branches, or it may erode
the vertebral column.
Tumours of the Spine. — Tumours, simple or malignant, may arise in
connection with the spine, the ribs, the intercostal spaces, and the costal
cartilages. These may by extension involve the adjacent organs, and when
the lungs and pleura become implicated shadows are obtained which are
indistinguishable from new growths of primary origin in those structures.
Conditions involving the spine which may lead to error are : (1) Tubercular
caries. In the early stages an inflammatory process leads to thickening and
abscess formation which simulate new growths of the spine ; rise of tempera-
ture and other signs of tuberculosis should be looked for. (2) Abscess
following caries is a frequent cause of difficulty in diagnosis. (3) Sarcoma
arising from the costal cartilages and sternum may lead to the formation
of a definite cystic condition indistinguishable from hydatid cyst. A
hgemorrhagic condition in the tumour may simulate the appearance presented
by a cyst.
Tumours of the Chest Walls. — Sarcomata in these positions are occasion-
ally met with. They may be solid, or, when growing rapidly, may become
cystic or hsemorrhagic, and when examined show shadows which may be
mistaken for new growths of the lungs or pleura.
Foreig'n Bodies in the Thorax. — Various forms of these may be met
with, particularly in children. A foreign body should first be located by
means of the screen, and stereoscopic radiographs taken for exact localisation.
If an operation is contemplated, then the examination should be repeated
just prior to the time of operation, in order to obviate the risk of change of
position of the foreign body. The thorax and cervical region require to be
carefully examined when a foreign body is suspected to be present. Lateral
pictures are useful, particularly when the foreign body is located in the upper
air passages.
198 EADIOGRAPHY
Differential Diagnosis in Diseases of the Lungs
The differential diagnosis of these conditions is always difficult, particu-
larly from a purely radiographic point of view. The X-ray findings are
usually shadows of abnormal growths, invading shadows representing the
normal structures, and it is often on slight variations of these normal shadows
that a diagnosis may be made. A fine departure from the normal may be
the earliest manifestation of a commencing new growth, and its presence
may be detected before physical signs or symptoms call attention to the
presence of serious mischief. On the other hand, however, it is occasionally
found that persistent symptoms, such as pain, slight cough, dyspnoea,
may be present for months before the presence of a neoplasm can be detected
by radiographic examination. This is particularly evident in the recurrent
forms of carcinoma after operation, where pain at a fixed point may for a
very long time be the only sign of recurrence. Later this may be followed
by the demonstration of a gradually increasing shadow, or a slowly accumu-
lating pleural effusion, indicating that the pleura has become involved.
The occurrence of these infiltrating secondary carcinomata of the pleura is
interesting. The extension is usually by direct continuity from the chest
wall, the growth developing through the intercostal spaces, slowly involving
the pleura on the parietal aspect, spreading along the internal aspect of the
ribs, and forming fiat plaques which do not penetrate to any degree. These
plaques are shown as fine shadows along the lines of the ribs. Fluid is slowly
exuded into the pleural sac, and, later, the visceral layer of the pleura becomes
involved, at a still later stage the lung itself becoming invaded by masses
of slowly increasing size. In contradistinction to this it must be borne in
mind that the secondary invasion of carcinoma may begin in the mediastinal
glands or those at the roots of the lungs. It then spreads along the bronchial
glands, and at a late stage of the disease we may find the pleura studded with
plaques on its parietal and visceral aspects, with an accumulation of fluid
in the pleural sac, the mediastinal glands enlarged, and the whole of the lung
riddled mth growtns of various sizes. Radiographically, all these stages of
secondary carcinoma may be shown in the same case if examinations are
made during the progress of the disease. The various progressive stages of
this form of malignant disease are well worthy of careful study, for all these
forms are sure to require investigation. In the earlier stages it is extremely
difficult to establish a diagnosis on radiographic evidence alone ; all the facts
of the case require careful consideration, and other methods are helpful,
particularly in some cases where tuberculosis may be the alternative diag-
nosis, or where it may be an accompanying condition. The combination of
the two diseases is rare, but they may occur in the same patient. Haemo-
ptysis may be a determining factor in the diagnosis, especially if it occur to
any extent. Haemorrhage to a marked extent from a secondary carcinoma is
comparatively rare, whereas in tuberculosis it is often the first symptom to
call attention to the disease.
Simple Tumours of the Lung*. — These are very rare. Tumours of
? O bD
002 g
c3 (^
W cS
S o s:^ 'S
o S g o
■
.1
W"'"
'~'~^i&^ .._
^
1^
PLATE XLIX.— Urinary Calculi.
a, Calculi in kidney.
Calculi in kidney. (Radiograph by C. Thurston Holland.)
c, FiKcal mass in kidney area simulating calculus.
CALCULUS IN THE KIDNEY
241
This knowledge can only be acquired by regular practice, though it is possible
to demonstrate the essential points by means of a series of radiographs. A
good radiograph of the kidney area should show the outline of the organ,
and should cover the whole of the kidney. In order to get the whole of the
area, it is necessary to get the two lower ribs in the picture.
Bearing in mind the normal appearances of the urinary tract, we now
proceed to a consideration of the abnormalities which may be met with in
the investigation of diseases of the urinary organs. Before considering those
diseases in order, it is necessary to consider some of the conditions which,
when met with, are apt to mislead the observer and cause errors of diagnosis.
Those are numerous and ever increasing in number as fresh cases are recorded.
(1) Faecal matter in the intestines. This is a common cause of mistake
in diagnosis, but if the necessary preparatory measures recommended are
carefully carried out this cause should never occur.
Plate XLIX., Fig. c, illustrates an instance of this kind, where a large
shadow is seen in the pelvis of the kidney, which might easily have been
diagnosed as a large stone. A second radiograph, taken tw^o days later after
free purgation, shows the mass lower down in the colon. The point which led
to a diagnosis of faecal
matter was the loaded
condition of the colon
over the opposite kid-
ney region.
(2) Foreign bodies
in the intestine may
be mistaken for cal-
culus.
(3) Enlarged and
calcified mesenteric
glands are another
element leading to
error in urinary
diagnosis.
(4) The case of
foreign bodies in the
kidneys, introduced
at the time of a pre-
vious operation, must
not be overlooked.
(5) Concretions
in the appendix have been mistaken for ureteral calculi.
(6) Phleboliths are another common cause of mistaken diagnosis.
These are found low down in the pelvis, and may be mistaken for stones
in the ureter.
Urinary Calculi. — 1. In the Kidney. — Stones may be found in any
part of the kidney. The most frequent position is in the pelvis or calices.
16
Fig. 182. — Kidney area, showing stone in right kidney.
(a) inner edge of kidney ; (b) stone ; (c) edge of psoas muscle.
The tube has been centred over the middle line. Both kidney areas
are in the picture.
242
KADIOGKAPHY
They vary in size and composition. The commoner stones are the oxalates
and the uric-acid and phosphatic varieties, the uric-acid calculi being the
most frequently met with. A rarer variety is composed of cystin. The
great majority of kidney stones, however, are of mixed composition. It is
very rare to get a pure uric-acid calculus. The shadows thrown by stones
vary in density, the oxalic variety giving the densest shadow, the phos-
phatic next, and lastly the uric-acid variety. Stones may vary in shape.
Large stones have been found to occlude the pelvis, and to have branched
ramifications, filling up the calices. Small calculi may be found in the sub-
stance of the kidney, and vary in size from minute bodies to the size of a
hazel nut. When many calculi are present they are usually faceted.
Urinary Calculi. — 2. In the Ureter. — A small stone wiU find its way
down the ureter into the bladder. The passage of a stone is usually accom-
Patient aged 27 years. At age of 4 an attack of acute
pain ill the left renal region followed by hsematuria. Many
similar attacks followed, but were not always accompanied
by hfematuria. At age of 12 a skiagram was taken and
calculus in the left kidney was diagnosed but no operation
advised. Between that time and the date I saw her attacks
of pain had recurred with considerable frequency, and after
leaving school she followed no occupation till the age of 22,
when she became a barmaid. Had often to return home on
account of pain. During 1910 several severe attacks of
hsematuria.
On Examination. — Left kidney not palpable ; in the region
of the left ureter a long, hard, sausage-shaped tumour can he
felt extending from the lower pole of the kidney to the pelvic
brim ; per rectum a similar mass can be felt in the region of
the termination of the left ureter. Its lower extremity is
pointed and can be moved slightly from side to side.
Skiagram showed no shadow in left kidney ; in region of
left ureter a continuous shadow extending from the pelvis of
the kidney to the brim of the true pelvis, and below this a
second shadow extending to the entrance of the ureter into
the vesical wall. The calculi appear to be articulated with
one another at the pelvic brim.
Ci/stoscopic Ezaminaiion. — Twenty minutes after injection
of imligo carmine. Right ureteral orifice normal and excreting
jets of blue urine vigorously. Left orifice situated on a mound-
like elevation. No blue urine issuing, but an occasional feeble
jet of blood-stained fluid. Ureteral catheter enters orifice
easily, but is arrested at a point ^ inch from the opening.
Operation, 17th March 1911. — Kidney exposed and found
to be hydronephrotic. No calculi in kidney. Ureter much
dilated and containing a calculous cast which extended from
renal pelvis to below the brim of true pelvis. Below this a second
calculus articulating with the first and reaching as far as lower
end of ureter. The lower calculus was removed with some
difficulty owing to the ufiper end hitching below the pelvic
brim. Ureter considerably torn owing to its friability, neph-
rectomy and ureterectomy. Recovery uneventful,
shows that its apex is formed by a small renal calculus, and
us has been formed by the deposit of successive layers of
Fig. 183. — Stone in ureter.
(By kind permission of Mr.
Collinson. Radiograph by Dr.
Rowden. ) The calculi shown in the
radiograph are remarkable. The
notes of the case are here given.
A section of the lower calculus
that the remainder of the calcul
phosphates.
panied by symptoms, the chief of which is renal colic. This may be severe
in character, and does not bear an exact relationship to the size of the stone.
A small irregular stone may give rise to very severe renal colic ; a larger
smooth stone may pass more readily down the ureter, and not give rise to
marked symptoms. The stone in its passage down the ureter may be
PLATE L.— TuBEECULOSis of Kidney and Mesenteric Glands.
a, Calcareous, caseous mass in kidney region, the result of tuberculosis, confirmed at operation.
h, Calcareous patches in left kidney area, probably due to healed tubercle of the kidney ; the larger shadow
might easily be a calculus.
c, Calcified mesenteric glands. The appearance of these shadows might lead to a mistaken diagnosis of
stones in the kidney.
CALCULI IN THE URETERS AND BLADDER
243
arrested at any part of its course, the commonest seat of arrest being in the
pelvis, close to the entrance to the bladder. The symptoms may be marked
according to the degree of occlusion caused by the stone. A stone which
completely blocks the ureter leads to an accumulation of urine in the portion
of ureter above the seat of occlusion and in the kidney. When the occlusion
is not complete, the passage of urine is not completely arrested, and the more
distressing symptoms may be absent. It is interesting to note that a stone
may remain in the ureter for many months, and only occasionally give rise
to symptoms of pain, hsematuria, etc. An examination of the urine for pus
and epithelial cells may help to determine the presence of a stone in the
ureter. In several cases we have watched the passage of a small ureteric
calculus down the ureter, and in one instance repeated examinations showed
that the stone was slowly travelling down to the bladder ; the symptoms
were not severe, attacks of colic at intervals of months indicating the progress
of the stone. Ultimately it was passed into the bladder and voided in the
urine. This is by no means an uncommon occurrence, and should be kept
well in mind when we have to consider the question of operative interference
in a case where the presence of a stone has been demonstrated in the course
of the ureter. If the
symptoms are not
acute, all small
ureteric calculi should
be given every facility
to pass into the
bladder before a
serious operation is
contemplated.
What might be
termed a migratory
stone in the ureter
is well illustrated
by a case occurring
in the practice of Dr.
Thurston Holland of
Liverpool, where a
large. stone was found
to occupy a position
in the lower ureter
and pelvis of the
kidney alternately.
At the operation it was found that the ureter was dilated to an enormous
extent.
Urinary Calculi. — 3. In the Bladder. — A vesical calculus may be
formed of almost any of the urinary deposits met with, and each has its own
characteristics.
(a) The uric-acid calculus is usually oval in shape and flattened, and of
Fig. 184. — Large stone iu the bladder.
The variations in the density of the stone are well shown.
244 EADIOGEAPHY
variable density. On section it is distinctly laminated with a smooth,
or slightly undular surface of a brownish colour. It may be crusted with
phosphatic material. A pure uric-acid calculus gives a faint shadow radio-
graphically.
(6) The urate of ammonium calculus is of a similar structure, but of
lighter colour.
(c) Oxalate of lime calculus is a rough irregular body, not infrequently
tuberculated or even spiculated. It is extremely hard and dense, of a
reddish-brown colour, or sometimes black, owing to admixture with blood.
It is rarely of great size, on account of the irritation caused by its presence
and its slowness of growth.
(d) A pure phosphatic calculus is somewhat rare, but any stone or foreign
body is certain to become coated with a phosphatic deposit when chronic
cystitis has resulted in alkaline decomposition of the urine.
(e) Cystin forms the base of a rare calculus.
(/) Xanthine or xanthic oxide is occasionally met with, but is very rare.
The presence of a calculus in the bladder is readily shown by X-ray examina-
tion. Such an examination is most helpful to the surgeon, for it demonstrates
the presence of stone or stones, the number of the calculi present, and to
some extent the position.
In all cases of urinary calculi several examinations should be made,
unless very definite evidence is obtained on the first occasion. No opinion
negative or positive should be given without at least one confirmatory
examination, and where an operation is contemplated a final radiograph
should be taken immediately prior to the operation. In some cases, indeed,
this should be done even while the patient is imder the anaesthetic. In im-
portant cases this may be done and the plate developed ; the surgeon will
then have a very definite guide for reference during the actual operation.
Tuberculous Disease of the Kidney is of comparatively frequent
occurrence, and is one of the first conditions to be suspected when radiographic
examination has failed to show the presence of a stone. It may occur in
one of three forms : — (a) Acute general tuberculosis, when miliary tubercles
are found studding the organs. Kadiography is rarely of much service in
this variety. (6) Ascending tuberculosis may arise from a similar affection of
the bladder. The mucous membrane of the ureter becomes thickened and
the pelvis and calices also become affected. On clinical examination enlarge-
ment of the kidney is the next manifestation. Radiography may be helpful
in demonstrating the enlarged kidneys ; and when caseous matter is present
or abscesses form, the negative may show these affections, (c) Primary
tuberculosis of the kidney is generally unilateral, and commences as a deposit
of tubercle in the cortex or at the base of one of the pyramids ; a caseous
mass forms, which may extend widely, causing disintegration of the kidney
substance.
Enlarged. Movable Kidney. — This may be {a) simple, or (6) compli-
cated by calculi. The kidney may be found to be freely movable, and may
be palpable. Screen examination will reveal its position and the amount of
PLATE LI. — Ukinary Calculi and Gallstones.
a, Small calculus in bladder. Phlebollths on right and left sides of pelvis.
h, Gallstones in gall bladder. Plate on anterior aspect of abdomen.
Two gallstones ; note position below the kidney shadow. (Radiograph by C. Thurston Holland.)
PLATE LII. — Kidneys, Ureter, and Bladder.
a, Collargol in pelvis of kidney and ureter. (Radiograph, by C. Thurston Holland.)
b, Calculus in ureter.
c, Barium injection of bladder to show diverticulum, opaque bougie in ureter.
TUMOURS OF THE KIDNEYS 245
mobility. A stone, if present, is readily demonstrabJc.-. 1'he following illus-
trates a case of this kind : A lady about thirty-five years of age complained
of a constant pain in the right side. Examination revealed a freely mov-
able kidney on the right side, the lower pole being very tender and hard.
Radiographic examination showed the enlarged organ displaced downwards.
Two definite shadows in the cortex indicated the presence of two small stones.
A large irregular shadow in the lower pole led to some discussion as to its
nature. It was evidently in the kidney or attached to it, because it moved
with the kidney. A diagnosis of stones in the kidney was made. At the
operation two small calculi were removed. The appendix was found to be
distended, and in all probability this may have accounted for the larger
shadow. The patient has not been examined since the operation, but it vnW
be interesting to note the appearance of the parts when an opportunity
occurs. Thickened capsule of the kidney may give shadows suggestive of
stone, especially when the pelvis is thickened.
Tumours of the Kidney. — These are numerous and worthy of notice,
the tumour being either simple or malignant. The general characteristics
are as follows : A swelling is noticed in the loin, shaped more or less like
the kidney, a notch being occasionally felt on the inner border, and the
outer margin being rounded. The flank is dull on percussion, the passage of
the colon in front of the kidney occasionally giving a note of resonance over
its anterior surface. The mass moves slightly on respiration.
Simple Tumours. — Cystic disease, which may be congenital or acquired,
is the usual form of simple tumour. It is not infrequently bilateral when
congenital. Especially when congenital, the kidney is enlarged and occupied
by cysts of various size, but rarely exceeding that of a cherry. They are
lined with epithelium, which is generally flattened, and fiUed with a limpid
fluid containing urea and perhaps cholesterine. The pelvis remains im-
afTected until the later stages of the disease. Generally the whole kidney is
affected, and may attain enormous dimensions. But occasionally the growth
is limited to one part of the organ. The early symptoms are simply those of
pressure, but at a later stage the secretion of urine is interfered with to such
an extent as to produce uraemia. The radiographic examination of this
condition is unsatisfactory. In the majority of cases the enlargement of the
organ may be shown, and occasionally variations in the density of the kidney
shadow may lead one to suggest the presence of fluid in the organ. One
generally excludes the presence of stone in such cases, and when the symp-
toms are not such as to suggest acute hydronephrosis or tuberculosis then the
presence of fluid showing in the radiograph may enable one to give a diagnosis
of cystic kidney. We have examined a number of cases of enlarged kidney
with no active symptoms, and in several a diagnosis of cystic disease of the
kidney has been arrived at, and confirmed on operation. One case under
observation at the present time in an adult shows shadows of considerable
size in both loins. The patient has had active hsematuria, presumably the
result of traumatism.
Malignant Disease of the kidney may be divided into :
246 RADIOGRAPHY
(1) The sarcomata of infants, which is often congenital, but may be
acquired within the first few years of life. They grow to a great size, and may
affect both organs. Pain and hsematuria are absent.
(2) The sarcomata of adults occur most commonly between the
thirtieth and fiftieth years of life, and are of the spindle-celled variety.
(3) Carcinoma of the kidney is an uncommon form of tumour. It is
frequently associated with the presence of a varicocele, the results of pressure
from carcinomatous glands.
(4) Hypernephroma arising from suprarenal tissue is not uncommon.
Various Cystic Conditions of the kidney may be noted in addition to the
general cystic disease already mentioned :
(a) Hydatid disease afiects the kidney, as any other organ of the body.
(6) Dermoid cysts have also been found.
(c) Serous cysts are occasionally met with.
One point is worthy of note in connection with the systematic examina-
tion of the kidneys. The attention directed to the suspected kidney should
not lead the observer to ignore the other and presumably sound organ. When
it is definitely settled that one organ is diseased and an operation is decided
upon, the radiographer should proceed to demonstrate the presence of the
other organ and should satisfy himself that its condition is normal. It
occasionally happens that a patient comes up for examination who has been
operated upon before. The presence of a scar in the loin suggests an opera-
tion, but the majority of patients have no actual knowledge of what has been
done. The radiographer has then to demonstrate the presence or absence of
the kidney on the side which has been operated upon. If he finds the kidney
has been removed, then he proceeds to examine the other kidney. Should
the patient have symptoms of disease on this side, the knowledge that one
kidney has been already removed will be of great service to the surgeon.
Occlusion of the Ureter. — The ureter may be occluded as a result of
cicatricial changes in its walls following laceration from the passage of a
calculus. A simple stricture of the ureter may result. A calculus may
completely block the ureter, and lead to acute symptoms of obstruction.
The ureter may be obstructed by pressure in any part of its course ;
tumours of neighbouring organs occasionally lead to an obstruction. Tumours
in the pelvis may gradually occlude both ureters and lead to suppression of
urine. All these conditions may be met with in the examination of the
urinary tract, and should be well borne in mind. A negative diagnosis of
stone may be made, and in some cases the cause of the obstruction may be
determined by a careful examination.
In doubtful cases of kidney disease there are other methods of examina-
tion which may be regarded as supplementary to the methods described. The
examination may be rendered more valuable and absolutely diagnostic
in suspected stone in the ureters, or when shadows are shown in the line of
the ureters, by the passage of opaque bougies into the bladder and ureter. A
radiograph taken should show the bougie in the canal, and the relationship
of the shadows to it. A second method in doubtful cases is to inject into
PLATE LIU. — Dermoid Cyst in Pelvis.
a and h, Eadiograph of pelvis showing cyst.
c and d, Radiograph of cyst after removal by operation. Note the teeth in the cyst.
f, Photograph of cyst after removal.
/, Pi,adiograph of a heart showing atheroma of coronary arteries.
TECHNIQUE OF COLLARGOL INFECTION 247
the ureter and pelvis of the kidney a solution of collargol, it being possible
to demonstrate dilatation of the ureter and calices of the kidney by this
method. The existence of hydronephrosis of the kidney is rendered visible
when the kidney has been injected, while kinks and contractions of the ureter
may also be shown by this method.
Technique of the Examination of the Urinary System
with Collargol Solution
Position of the Patient. — The recumbent position is the best, the
patient lying on a hard couch ; anaesthetics are not employed as a rule.
Demonstration of the Ureter. — There are several ways in which
the ureter can be demonstrated :
(1) By the use of a silver stylet enclosed in an ordinary catheter.
(2) By the use of catheters or bougies impregnated with bismuth.
(3) By the use of specially prepared ureteral bougies.
(4) By the use of collargol solution.
Nos. (3) and (4) are those usually employed, and of these two the collargol
method is the more certain. An ordinary catheter in situ is filled with col-
largol, and radiographed, or the radiogram is taken while the collargol is
trickling down the ureter from the pelvis of the kidney.
Strength of the Solution employed. — Solutions of from 3 to 20 per
cent are employed, but 10 per cent is the most usual strength. The strength
employed should be selected according to (1) the stoutness of the patient ;
(2) the degree of hydronephrosis, if this be present. A weak solution should
be employed if an abnormal shadow has been detected in the renal pelvis,
for should there be a stone in the pelvis or calix, and too strong a solution be
used, it is probable that the collargol shadow may obliterate the one of the
calculus.
Dangers arising from the Use of Collargol. — (1) Cases of sepsis have been
reported ; (2) areas of necrosis, infarct, and cast formation have been known
after the distension of the pelvis under high pressure. Strassmann has
carefully investigated these points, and has come to the conclusion that the
injection of collargol in proper quantity and under moderate and careful
pressure causes no harmful results.
Sacculi of the Bladder. — These may be shown radiographically, but
solutions of barium sulphate are used instead of collargol on account of the
cost. Two parts of barium sulphate are suspended in ten parts of oleum
amygdalae dulcis, and this suspension corresponds well with collargol solution
in density of shadow produced.
248 KADIOGEAPHY
Congenital Malformations
All varieties are met with in the routine examination by X-rays.
Valuable information may be obtained as to the presence of these abnor-
mahties, their form and extent, and hght is thrown upon them from the
operative point of view.
It is impossible to give a complete account of the departures from the
normal which occur in all parts of the body, but a few of the commoner
instances may be mentioned ; several are illustrated in Plate LIV. The skull
frequently presents departures from the normal, in ossification, and absence
of sinuses, notably the frontal, where there may be practically no air-cells,
or a very small one may represent the frontal sinuses. The sinuses may be
abnormally large, and extend over the greater part of the frontal bone ; one
side may be quite normal or greatly enlarged, while the other is absent.
Similarly the mastoid air sinuses may vary to a hke degree. Abnormahties
in the eruption of the teeth are often seen. In the thorax the viscera may
be transposed, the heart being on the right instead of the left side, the aorta
being similarly displaced. The stomach is occasionally foimd on the right
side, the hver being then on the left. The caecum and appendix may also
be found on the opposite side. The kidneys may be represented by a single
horse-shoe-hke structure, or a kidney is found on the one side, the other
being absent. It is important in connection wth kidney operations to
bear this fact in mind.
Many deformities of the bony skeleton are met mth. One arm may
be represented by a small atrophied structure which may have the bones
complete or may show remarkable variations from the normal. The fore-
arm may show a variety of departm-es. Congenital absence of a bone is
not uncommon. The wrist and hand may be represented by a small fleshy
mass with a number of partially ossified bones in its interior, or the fingers
may be webbed or joined by bone to each other. The value of a radiographic
examination in these cases is great, for by its means it is often possible to
determine if the condition can be remedied by operative measures.
PLATE LIV. — Congenital Deformities.
a, Meningocele in an infant.
h. Congenital deformity of foot (Talipes valgus).
c, Photograph of congenital deformities of hands.
d, Radiograph of above.
PART II
RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
INTRODUCTORY
The treatment of disease by radiation naturally divides itself into :
(1) Treatment by X-rays ;
(2) Treatment by Radinm.
The physics of radium is briefly described in a separate section, and the
production of X-rays is dealt with in the section on radiography. A separate
section of the book is devoted to the consideration of practical points
in the use of X-rays and radium, but it will be well here to give a brief
summary of the general effects of radiations on tissues.
It is assumed that the action is being produced by the radiations from
v/hichever agent is being used, and that the particular effect is dependent
upon the quality of the radiation, so that it is immaterial from which source
it is derived.
The work of Wickham in the early days of radium therapy, particularly
in the treatment of superficial lesions, indicated a large field of usefulness.
Dominici, working almost exclusively with the Gamma ray, demonstrated
that far-reaching effects could be produced by filtering the radiations, so
as to exclude all but the Gamma ray, and for a time this method was largely
employed in the treatment of mahgnant disease. It has been found, however,
that excellent therapeutic results can be obtained when the filtration is not
nearly so great. These effects must be due to Beta and Gamma radiations.
A filter of -3 mm. of platinum cuts off a fairly large proportion of Beta rays,
but allows 25 to 30 per cent, of these rays to pass through, and exercise an
effect upon the tissues. There is therefore a tendency now to cut down the
filtration in order that the therapeutic action of both rays may be employed.
This is particularly so when radium tubes are buried in the substance of
tumours.
The biological reaction of tissues to radiations is another factor which
must always be taken into consideration, and one which will always remain
the deciding factor in the choice of the quality and quantity of rays to be
employed. That is, it will decide the question of filtration and time of
exposure. It is this factor which makes radiation therapy so difficult, and
largely explains the diversity of results obtained by many workers. It is,
for instance, a common experience to find two growths of apparently similar
nature responding differently to, as far as can be judged, precisely similar
conditions of ray and dosage.
251
252 KADIATION THEEAPEUTICS
The employment of the hardest X-ray it is possible to produce at the
present time is sometimes followed by marked results in the treatment of
various forms of carcinoma. This hard X-ray has not nearly the penetrating
power of the Gamma ray of radium, yet in some cases its therapeutic action
is quite as marked. It would appear, therefore, that a wide range of choice
in radiation exists in the field of practical therapeutics. It is sound policy,
in the present state of our knowledge, to combine the two agents whenever
possible. For example, a carcinoma of the breast may receive thorough
X-ray treatment as a preliminary to the introduction of radium tubes into
the substance of the growth. The advantage of using X-rays lies in the fact
that treatment may be quickly administered over a wide area, including the
growth and its lymphatic distribution. The resulting reaction may lead to
a limitation of the growth, and in some instances to a rapid diminution in size.
The radium tubes may be introduced into the substance of the growth,
and continue the action of the X-rays at a deeper level. Subsequently the
X-rays may be applied at regular intervals as long as is necessary. Patients
so treated undoubtedly receive great benefit, both locally and constitution-
ally.
Action of Radiations upon Tissues
The action of radium and X-rays upon the normal tissues and on morbid
growths is not as simple as it appears. It is not purely a caustic action,
though caustic effects can readily be produced if the exposure is overdone,
or the filtration not sufficient. In some growths this action is deliberately
made use of in order to produce necrosis of the mass, in the hope that when
the slough separates normal tissues will fill in the resulting ulcer. On the
other hand, enlarged glands sometimes disappear with hardly any skin re-
action. One case of recurrent sarcoma of the neck completely cleared up,
with merely a slight reaction of the skin surface, and no permanent damage.
A case of epithelioma of the tonsil, involving the uvula and soft palate,
practically disappeared, leaving a healthy soft palate and uvula.
In addition to the direct evidence of a local action of radiations upon
the cell of a new growth and its surrounding tissues, there is reason to believe
that a general effect is produced upon the whole body. This is indicated by
the fact that patients undergoing treatment by X-rays or radium occasion-
ally improve markedly in general health. They gain weight, improve in
colour, and when the blood is examined an improvement is seen. As an
illustration of this beneficial effect, a case may be mentioned where treatment
of an ulcerated carcinoma of the breast was followed by a marked improve-
ment in a foul vaginal discharge from which the patient suffered. While
growths of the breast are being treated it is not uncommon to find glands in
the axilla and other parts diminish in size. This is also observed when cases
of sarcoma, lymphadenoma, and other diseases are treated. Whether this
is the result of a general stimulation or an auto-vaccination is a point which
has yet to be determined. Experimental evidence is forthcoming which goes
ACTION OF RADIATIONS UPON TISSUES 253
to show that cancer which .has been treated with X-rays or radium does
not grow so rapidly when injected into mice as growth which has not had
such treatment. It is extremely probable that radiations of X-rays, radium,
and similar agents, do exercise a general as well as a local effect upon living
organisms. The general effect may be quite as useful as the local, and if it
has any value at all, it would be extremely useful to bear in mind, because one
need not then limit the area of exposure. After local treatment has been
pushed to its limit the treatment may be continued in other parts of the
body.
The following observations made on patients undergoing treatment for
malignant disease may throw some light on the problem which has been
engaging our attention for so long. In the course of treatment of cases of
leukaemia the fact has been observed that marked changes, e.g. a diminution
in the number of white blood corpuscles, relative and absolute, can be induced
in the blood by radiations. These changes are obtained when the splenic
area is irradiated, as has most generally been the method of treating this
disease. The same changes may be brought about when other parts of the
body are subjected to treatment ; thus the irradiation of the ends of the long
bones or areas of the abdomen results in a change in the percentage of blood
cells and a reduction in the size of the spleen. Observations such as these
lead us to infer that the beneficial effects of X-rays on certain cases of this
disease may be due to a general as well as to a local action. Further, it has
been observed during the local treatment of carcinoma of the breast, that
glands at a distance which have not received any direct treatment have
slowly diminished in size. It has also been noticed during the treatment of
such diseases as tuberculosis, lymphadenoma, and sarcoma, that, while the
local condition has improved as a result of direct treatment, the more distant
glands have also diminished.
The writer has for several years been making observations on blood
changes induced in patients undergoing treatment by radiations. At the
commencement of these observations the whole attention was directed to
the white blood cells, which were observed to vary considerably at different
stages of the disease according to the accompanying infection, and also as a
result of destructive changes occurring in the tumour and surrounding tissues.
More recently attention has been directed to the behaviour of the red
blood corpuscles under similar conditions. As an outcome of these obser-
vations it can be stated that in the cases where the percentage of red blood
cells is normal or over and the haemoglobin is 100 per cent, or almost so, the
response to treatment is more rapid and lasting than when, as is so fre-
quently the case in advanced stages of malignant disease, the percentage of
red cells is much below the normal. In several patients whose response to
X-ray and radium treatment has been rapid and marked, the percentage of
red cells has been well over the normal. One case recorded well over
8,000,000, and the haemoglobin colour iiidex stood at 100 per cent. Nearly
every case which showed a normal or plus normal condition of the red cells
responded well to X-ray treatment.
254 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
In view of the excellent work done on secondary radiations of metals
by Barkla, Sadler, and others, and the valuable work done by Hernemann
Johnson in the appHcation of metals to produce the secondary radia-
tions in the tissues of patients treated by X-rays, the most likely explana-
tion of this remarkable response in these cases is that in the blood stream
there exist materials which, when bombarded by the radiations of X-rays or
radium, throw off secondary radiations which in some way act on the normal
and abnormal tissue, stimulating the former, and in some instances damaging
the latter, and leading to a diminution in the size of the tumour. The most
likely material to give off secondary rays is the hemoglobin of the red cells,
which is a compound of iron. The latter metal is known to give off secondary
radiations when exposed to X-rays. It is interesting to note that iron
stands high in the list of metals which give off radiations when struck by
X-rays. These radiations are independent of the chemical combination of
the metals, and only depend on the quantity of the metal present. It must
be borne in mind that metals require a particular hardness of X-ray to enable
them to emit the characteristic secondary radiations peculiar to them. This
may in part account for the marked degree of action produced in cases which
have a high percentage of haemoglobin. It also throws some light on the
cases which have failed to respond ; possibly the particular quality of X-ray
employed has not been the right one, or the exposure has not been
long enough. In the writer's own experience the best results have been
obtained when using the hardest X-ray possible, combined with aluminium
filters.
The hard Beta rays and the Gamma rays from radium appear to exercise
a marked influence upon some cases of cancer. The duration and frequency
of the exposures also play an important part in the results. At present
experience alone can show us how and when to repeat the radiations. When
the necessary secondary radiation values of the constituents of a malignant
growth and of the blood and lymph and the substances they contain are
known, and when improvements in X-ray tubes and control apparatus
enable us to select the ray which will cause it to emit its secondary radiation
when it strikes upon, say, the iron in the blood, we may hope to produce a
reaction in and around the growth which should materially help us in treat-
ment. Then we may hope for marked improvement in results. It is prob-
able that we have here also an explanation of the changes which may be
induced in the more distant parts ; the blood which receives local treatment
in its passage through the growth and surrounding tissues is acted upon by
these radiations, and the effects produced on the cells in the local growth are
carried on to the other parts of the body, and exercise a stimulating effect on
tissue metabolism, which may result in changes in these parts. The sugges-
tion is, I think, one well worth careful consideration and investigation, for
here we possess an excellent vehicle by means of which we can obtain second-
ary radiations from direct radiations upon particular parts.
The obvious inference is that in all cases of malignant disease we should
endeavour to keep the red blood corpuscles up to or above normal and
■ K '•\
r
ftf^^r^
i:.-:?^-^:-
i.-.'^
1^ *^
..I
»'•*'*'
^,"^^ ^
* u
*»
«r -i- -3(5 *
.4P *.
*» ,
4 J
-i I
PLATE LV. — Changes produced in Normal Tissues bt Eadiations.
A, High-XDOwer magnification. Leucocytes in corneal layer of epithelium, squamous cells degener-
ated, changes in nuclei.
B, High-i^ower magnification. Leucocyte infiltration of an ulcei-ated surface, obliterated blood-
vessel in a mass of degenerated squamous cells.
C, Section showing changes in bundles of muscle fibres, partial destruction of two small bundles (a),
small round-celled invasion (J), increase of fibrous tissue between the muscle fibres (c), and atro^Dhy of
fibres {d).
D, Muscle fibres in longitudinal section, (a) Small round-cell infiltration ; (&) loss of striation of
muscle fibres ; (c) replacement of muscle fibres by fibrous tissue.
E, High-power view, showing two small nerves and a blood-vessel surrounded by well-formed fibrous
tissue ; also many young connective-tissue cells. There are a few fibro-blasts in the large nerve trunk.
F, High-power magiufication. Squamous epithelioma with patches of round-celled inflammatory
exudation on surface. The squamous cells next to this are large and irregular and a few leucocytes
have penetrated between the cells.
ACTION OF KADIATIONS 255
increase the colour value by-giving the patient iron and other drugs which
are known to exercise a tonic effect while we bombard the local condition
with regular doses of radiations. Recently some cases undergoing radiation
treatment have also received injections of salvarsan ; the response to this
combined treatment has been very marked, the improvement being greater
and more rapid than when either is used separately. It is necessary,
however, to watch carefully the action of both treatments, and especially
that of the radiations, care being taken not to press the dosage too rapidly,
in order to avoid the danger of too sudden and far-reaching changes in
the blood and tissues. The radiation employed should be of a quality
which is known to produce the secondary effects upon the iron and other
substances capable of producing secondary radiations in the blood. The
treatment of malignant growths must therefore be general as well as local.
The general treatment consists of a suitable diet, plenty of fresh air, and
iron tonics — the latter in excess if the patient is tolerant.
Rest in bed during treatment should in some cases be insisted upon.
The local treatment should consist of such measures as will induce a liberal
flow of blood to the part, e.g. :
(a) Brush high-frequency discharges, which are very useful for this
purpose, and which should be given just before or at the same time as the
X-ray treatment.
(6) The mercury vapour lamp, which also induces an increased super-
ficial blood flow.
(c) Diathermy. This form of high-frequency current is said to increase
the sensibility of tissues to the action of radiation. Pre\aous to radiation
treatment the parts may be thoroughly exposed between two electrodes, and
radiation treatment then applied. Also, the X-ray or radium exposures
should be of sufficient duration to induce and keep up in the tissues a
moderate degree of reaction.
It has been observed in treating superficial carcinoma that improve-
ment hardly ever takes place until this degree of action is produced.
In severe cases the reaction may require to be marked. Under treat-
ment of this kind recurrent nodules and primary growths of considerable
size frequently diminish considerably, and larger tumours become smaller,
and in some cases are rendered operable. Recurrent nodules and small
primary growths sometimes entirely disappear. It is also possible that
the blood serum may contain substances which give off secondary radia-
tions which alter the composition of the serum. A great deal of work has
been done in this direction. Future research in the investigation of
physical phenomena should be directed on lines which are likely to throw
light on the action of secondary radiations in the tissues themselves. By
a combined attack from the physical and clinical aspects, we may hope in
the near future to produce a marked improvement in our methods of treat-
ment by radiations, which should result in material benefit to patients
suffering from malignant disease.
256 EADIATION THERAPEUTICS
Action of Radiations on Normal Tissues and
Morbid Growths
That radium exercises a marked influence upon tissues and tissue meta-
bolism is an admitted fact, but the nature of this influence is still imperfectly
understood, and must necessarily remain so until we know more about the
biological effects of radium.
All the early work was carried out under conditions of partial know-
ledge. The results varied as a consequence, and hence conflicting opinions
were promulgated, in many cases hastily, on the value of radium in thera-
peutics.
It may be stated at the outset that all living tissues are affected by the
various rays from radium — Alpha, Beta, and Gamma — to an unequal extent,
varying with the particular rays which predominate in the exposure. The
predominance of any particular rays depends upon the quantity of radium
used, the filtration, the distance of the applicator from the tissues in question,
and the length of exposure.
Action on Normal Tissues. — Radium acts as a stimulant to normal
tissues, causing congestion of the areas exposed to its radiations, which con-
gestion is followed by an increased formation of fibrous tissue. If the
exposure is prolonged, or the filtration insufficient, the action of the rays
becomes a caustic one, and an acute inflammatory process is set up, which
may go on to necrosis and sloughing of the tissues exposed.
When the exposure has been accurately calculated, the inflammation
slowly subsides after a given time, the deeper tissues participating in the
reaction in a diminishing ratio, according to their depth from the surface.
There is in all the tissues an inflammatory condition, with a leucocyte migra-
tion and an invasion of small round cells. When this subsides fibrous tissue
formation begins, and the newly formed connective tissue with its capillary
blood-vessels may surround individual cells or areas of cells, and by subse-
quent contraction cut off the blood-supply of these areas, which then undergo
atrophic changes. Large areas of debris may be seen in the section examined.
Action on the Skin. — A section from a portion of skin adjacent to a new
growth which was treated with radium shows a well-marked leucocyte
infiltration in the cornual layer of the epidermis. The squamous cells are
degenerated and have lost their nuclei. These changes are noticed when the
skin has been subjected to prolonged exposures, the atrophy of the skin
bearing a direct relation to the duration of the exposure. Skin so treated
recovers its normal condition if the exposure has not been too great. The
atrophic changes will increase as the dose increases. The degenerative
changes occur in all the structures forming the cuticle, hair-bulbs being
damaged or destroyed.
Action on Hair. — Hair in the neighbourhood of an area treated by radia-
tion will lose its vitality and fall out ; a permanent alopecia may follow.
Nerve Tissue. — Nerve fibres may become influenced, and a condition of
. ^■'^.
^^^s
' " ■•■ .rlf.-"*'
" ■**>
Use ♦*■*> •*• • * ^ • " ■• ■ ■. V
6,,- ■•:■
^",^«|d^^^
V;
v^7^':^^>^:v>^Y^i^:^
•;%.v
PLATE LVI. — Changes observed in Tomouhs which have been treated by Radiations.
A, Low-power view, much fibrous tissue with many young connective-tissue cells and a large number
of black dots representing small round inflammatory cells. An interpapillary process of squamous cells
is seen on the upper right side. Below are seen numerous large cells in small clusters surrounded by
fibrous tissue.
B, Collection of large irregular cells embedded in hyaline tissue (fibrous), many of the cells are
of the typical squamous type. There are many small round inflammatory cells scattered throiighout
the section in the connective-tissue stroma. The iipper part represents the ulcerated surface of the
tumour and is composed of a layer of fibrin and leucocytes.
C, Low-power view from a case of carcinoma of the breast, treated with X-rays and radium, showing
groups of cancer cells undergoing degenerative changes, (a) Fairly active group, (&) more advanced
degeneration, (c) hyaline degeneration, (d) a mass of fibrous tissue.
D, High-power view of several groups of cancer cells showing various stages of degeneration.
E, High-power view of portion marked c in C ; the mass is filled up by granular debris a ; h, round-
celled infiltration.
F, A section from a case of carcinoma treated with radium, showing excessive fibrous-tissue forma-
tion ; {c) groups of cancer cells undergoing degeneration.
HLSTOLOGICAL CHANGES INDUCED BY RADIATIONS 257
neuritis or perineuritis be set up. • This may give rise to a considerable degree
of pain.
Action on Sweat Glands. — These are readily affected by radium rays.
The preliminary change will be a stage of engorgement of the surrounding
vessels and the atrophy may be marked. Complete destruction of the gland
will be the result of over-exposm'e, the gland becoming involved in fibrous
tissue. This action on sweat glands may be employed in therapeutics,
wben radium may be used instead of X-rays.
Muscle Fibres undergo a degree of degeneration. A loss of stria tion is
seen, and a form of hyaline degeneration follows. The muscle bundles are
invaded by small round cells, and fibrosis of the bundle can often be observed
in sections. These changes are seen in Figs. C and D, Plate LV. Fig. C
shows a transverse section of bundles of muscle fibres which were removed
from a patient who was treated Avith radium. The section shows bundles
of muscle surrounded by well-formed fibrous tissue which has invaded and
partly destroyed two of the smaller bundles. There are many small round
inflammatory cells occupying the fibrous tissue and in parts lying between
the muscle fibres. The general appearance is suggestive of the changes
seen in cirrhosis of the liver. The longitudinal section seen in Fig. D
shows at (a) the small round cell infiltration, at (6) muscle fibre
which has lost its striated appearance, and at (c) the dense fibrous
tissue.
Blood Vessels. — The vessels are involved in the general inflammatory
process. There is a proliferation of the endothelium of the small capillaries,
which leads to occlusion of the lumen, and consequent arrest of the circula-
tion. The large vessels show a proliferation of the intima, and occasionally
a vessel may be seen with the lumen occluded.
Fig. B, Plate LV. illustrates a blood-vessel in a section which shows
leucocyte infiltration of an ulcerated surface. An oval patch to the left of
the section represents a blood-vessel which has become occluded and is
situated in a mass of degenerated squamous cells. Fig. E of same Plate is a
high-power view of a section showing two small nerves and a blood-vessel
surrounded by well-formed fibrous tissue.
Action of Radium on Vascular Connective Tissues. — The dis-
appearance of inflammatory conditions and tumours on which radium exer-
cises an action eventually depend upon two phenomena, which are as follows :
(1) The destruction by radiations of the anatomical elements modified
by inflammation and by the progress of the tumour.
(2) The absorption of degenerated tissue by the phagocytes, and its
replacement by sclerotic tissue.
Wickham and Degrais admit that these phenomena may account for
changes which occur in some afiections treated by radium, but point out that
this is not the only result of the process when radium is employed on in-
flammatory conditions, on tumours of the connective tissue, and on
epithelioid tumours. Instead of hastening the degeneration of connective
tissue cells injured by inflammation or by the progress of the tumour, the
17
258 KADIATION THERAPEUTICS
radium rays revive the vitality of these elements, and subject them to an
evolution differing from that which the pathogenic influences were producing.
The special action of the Becquerel ray is then substituted for that of the
pathogenic process. Their effects are manifested either by the arrest of the
inflammatory process or by the resolution of the tumour, and by a change of
structure in the connective tissue. The above argument is open to criticism
in that it presupposes a selective action of radiations upon pathogenic pro-
cesses and connective tissue elements. The question is fully dealt with later
on, but it may be said here that the difficulty can be as well solved by the
theory that as radium acts on all tissues in varying degree according to the
susceptibility of the cell, different results are obtained when the tissues are
more resistant than when they are less so. If the tumour elements were
stimulated as well as the connective tissue cells, their increase in growth
would lead to an increase in the size of the tumour, and thus the pathogenic
processes referred to above would predominate and lead to a further destruc-
tion of the anatomical elements. On the other hand, should the connective
tissue cells receive the more powerful stimulation, their increase would be the
dominant factor. It is thus possible to explain all the changes induced in
the tissues without claiming a selective action for radium. Wickham
and Degrais, however, further argue : " This change consists (a) in a
metamorphosis of the vascular connective tissue into angiomatous
embryonic tissue ; (6) in transformation of this embryonic tissue into
connective fibrous tissue of regular texture. In such a case the healing
of inflammatory conditions or of tumours is the function of a special
cellular evolution produced by the Becquerel rays. The healthy connective
tissue itself undergoes this evolution."
Action of Radiations upon Tumour Cells. — Occasionally enlarged
glands are reduced in size with hardly any skin reaction ; nothing more
than a slight erythema may be produced even after repeated exposures to
the same area of skin, yet the enlarged glands situated at a much deeper
level slowly diminish in size.
Malignant indurated ulcers will rapidly break down and heal under the
action of radium.
The degree of action induced is dependent upon the method of applica-
tion. The various degrees of tissue change depend upon the filtration em-
ployed and the length of the exposure. Thus, if necrosis of the growth is
necessary, a thin filter would be used and a long exposure given. Here we
are making use of the Beta ray almost entirely. Should it be necessary to act
on a deeper structure and at the same time protect the skin from such action,
a thick filter of platinum or lead is used. Two millimetres of platinum or
four of lead are sufiicient to cut off all but the hardest of the beta rays, while
the gamma ray is unaltered. The filters containing the radium are enclosed
in a rubber tube to prevent the secondary radiation induced in the platinum
by the radium rays from damaging the superficial structures. If the exposure
be long, further protection can be secured by using an inch or more of lint or
gamgee tissue. In this way we can control the exposure so that we get
-•^.^•;.? ><*,
^-?'- ,^1?*-
t ^* ♦
#-
. % - • A-
/ . f
•©J
>^ f. '^/j; j-y'
y
• 'Jr^^-
PLATE LVII.— Changes observeb in Tumours which have been treated by Radiations.
A, High-power magnification from portion of Plate LVI, F, marked c.
B, High maguification of groups of cancer cells. Cells large and very irregular in shape, exudation
is marked in one group of cells, other cells show division of nuclei.
C, High magnification of groups of cancer cells embedded in fibrous matrix, leucocyte infiltration.
D, High magnification. Another field from same section showing somewhat more advanced changes
of a like nature.
E, High magnification, showing a mass of cellular growth, with very little fibrous tissue, cells large
and elongated, nuclei irregular and nucleoli well shown.
F, High magnification showing fibrous tissue and leucocytes at surface with hyaline changes ; large
irregular cells lie in loose tissue, they are pale and suggest degenerative changes.
ACTION OF RADIATIONS UPON TUMOUR CELLS 259
nearly the pure gamma-ray effect. This enables us to get an action upon
the deep-seated parts.
It has been claimed that radium possesses a " selective action " on
cancer cells. While admitting that it undoubtedly appears to act on such
cells, the word " selective " is badly used. Radium exercises an action on
all living cells in a varying degree according to the resistance of the particular
cell in question. Thus, young actively growing cells are more readily in-
fluenced than mature cells. The cells of a new growth approximate in struc-
ture and power of resistance to the actively growing cells of a tissue. In
this way it is conceivable that the cancer cell is influenced should it at
the time of exposure be comparatively early in its life-cycle. Should the
cancer cells be of a stronger or more vigorous type, it is conceivable that the
action of the radium may be stimulating, and instead of a decrease in vigour
of a particular cell we may find an increase in activity, and a consequent
increase in the size of a tumour. It is a fact that some cases of cancer increase
in size at a quicker rate after radium has been applied. Some types of cancer
are more amenable to radium treatment than others.
The action of radiations upon tumour cells can be seen from a number
of photomicrographs from sections obtained during the treatment with
radium of cases of growth. These sections are from a number of cases,
but some are from the same case at different periods of treatment. They
show in some parts marked retrogressive changes.
Fig. F, Plate LV. — A section of tissue adjacent to a carcinoma of the
arm which received prolonged radium treatment. There is a marked degree
of exudation on the surface. The squamous cells adjoining this are large
and irregular, and a few leucocytes have penetrated between the cells.
Fig. A, Plate LVI. — A low-power view of another section from the same
patient. There is a considerable increase of fibrous tissue cells, and a large
number of black specks represent small round inflammatory cells. An
interpapillary process of squamous cells is seen on the upper left side. To
the right below are seen numerous large cells in small clusters separated
by fibrous tissue. These cells represent all the new growth present in the
field.
Fig. B, Plate LVI. shows a small collection of large irregular- shaped cells
embedded in hyaline tissue (fibrous). Many of the cells are of the typical
squanious type, and are separated by clear intervals, there being an absence
of intercellular substance. The upper part represents the ulcerated surface
of the tumour, and is composed of a layer of fibrin and leucocytes.
Fig. C, Plate LVI. — A low-power view of a portion of tumour removed
from an atrophic cancer of the breast after repeated X-ray exposures, followed
by one exposure to radium, applied directly over the portion of growth
removed for examination. It shows groups of cancer cells undergoing
degenerative changes, (a) A group of cells which are fairly active. The
group is well defined at its edge, and is surrounded by fibrous tissue. (6)
A group of cells which have undergone marked degeneration. There are a
number of small round cells in the group, (c) A mass of cancer tissue which
260 EADIATION THEKAPEUTICS
shows more marked degenerative changes, (d) Area showing excessive
fibrous tissue formation.
Fig. E, Plate LVI. — A high-power view from section C shows a
large mass of cancer cells which have undergone degeneration, the place
of the cells being filled by granular debris. At the edges, small round-cell
infiltration is seen.
Fig. D. — A high-power view of a portion of tissue from the same case,
showing stages of degenerative process.
Fig. F. — A section from a case of carcinoma of the breast, showing (1)
excessive fibrous tissue formation ; (2) malignant cells in various stages of
degeneration.
Fig. A, Plate LVII. is a higher magnification of a portion of Fig. F in
Plate LVL, a group of cells which still retain their activity. Several
of the cells appear to have degenerated, and there is evidence of nuclear
changes.
Fig. B. — A more advanced stage of change in cells than in preceding
figure. The cells are large and very irregular in shape. Vacuolation is
marked in one group. Other cells show division of nuclei.
Fig. C. — A group of cells embedded in a fibrous matrix. There is
marked leucocyte infiltration.
Fig. D shows a similar condition and a more advanced stage of de-
generation in several of the cells.
Fig. E. — A mass of cellular growth with practically no fibrous tissue.
The cells are large and generally elongated in shape. The space between
the nuclei is irregular and the nucleoh are well marked. This is a condition
of the cells frequently seen in these cases. Presumably an active group of
cells has been stimulated to increased growth, and some of the cells have
been damaged by the radiations.
Fig. F. — ^A high-power view from a section of growth showing leucocytes
at surface with fibrous tissue formation. Large irregular cells he in a loose
cellular tissue. They are pale, and suggest an early stage of degeneration.
Fig. A, Plate LVIII. — A section similar to the last, showing leucocytes
in long narrow vessels running between the cells of the growth.
Fig. B. — Another section near the surface of a growth, showing much
round-cell infiltration between the cells of the growth.
Fig. C. — A group of large cancer cells in the midst of loose fibrous
tissue, with a few round cells interspersed.
Fig. D. — A high -power view from a section showing the surface
of the growth. A group of large* irregular cells in alveoH separated by
loose connective tissue. These cells stain well and have large nuclei,
and there are many leucocytes in the stroma. The tissue is denser towards
the surface, and certain concentric bodies, the remains of cells of the new
growth, are present. The fibrous tissue of the walls of the alveoh of growth
collapse as the growth cells are destroyed. The blood-vessels have been
obliterated. The surface layers of the tissue are denser than those at a
deeper level, probably the results of the action of the radiations.
.^* '* .
.<»
>«;/
« «f
^«»»-J. ,
PLATE LVIII. — -A TO D, Changes observed in Tumoues which have been treated bt Eadiations.
A, Another view from same section of tissue as F in preceding plate. Leucocytes in long narrow
vessels running between the cells of a growth.
B, Another section near the surface of a growth showing considerable round-cell infiltration between
the cells.
C, Group of large cells in the midst of loose fibrous tissue ; there are very few round cells in the
fibrous tissue.
D, High-power view of surface and underlying growth ; group of large irregular cells in alveoli
separated by loose connective tissue ; nuclei are large ; tissue denser towards the surface ; and con-
nective bodies are seen (remains of tumour cells ?) blood-vessels obliterated.
E AND F, Sections from a Tumour before Treatment.
E, A section from a squamous-celled carcinoma before treatment with radium, showing irregular masses
of squamous cells divided by scanty stroma of fibrous tissue, many round infiammatory cells ; cell nests.
F, Another section from the same patient ; tumour cells irregular in shape with a tendency to
cornification towards the centre.
ACTION OF RADIATIONS UPON TUMOUR CELLS 201
Fig. E, Plate LVIII. — A -section from a squamous- celled carcinoma
removed from a tonsil before treatment by radium. This patient completely
recovered after thorough treatment. The section shows irregular masses
of squamous cells divided by scanty stroma of fibrous tissue, in which there
are many small round inflammatory cells. A few of these inflammatory
cells also invade the groups of cancer cells. The central cells of several of
the masses are large, cornified, and form typical cell nests.
Fig. F. — Another section from the same case. A large mass of growth
on right, with several of?shoots towards the centre. The cells are irre-
gular in shape with a tendency to cornification in the centre. Smaller
masses of cells on the left also show a tendency to cornification towards the
centre. These are thickly studded \\nth small round inflammatory cells.
A few of these round cells are also seen among the squamous cells of the
growth.
In addition to the action upon the cancer cell itself, radium acts upon
all the tissues composing the growth and surroimding structures unequally.
There is a general stimulation of the healthy tissues as a result of radium
treatment so long as the exposure is not excessive. If it should be excessive
the action is apt to produce a caustic and ulcerative effect, which leads to
local death of the tumour and a portion of the tissues around it. This may
sometimes be desirable.
When the effect upon the healthy tissues is confined to stimulation,
we expect to find an increase of fibrous tissue formation, which shuts off the
cancer tissue from its blood-supply and causes the atrophy of such cells.
The reparative power of the normal tissues is strengthened, enabhng them
to cope with the invading cells and lead to their destruction. These changes
can be seen in sections removed from cases undergoing treatment.
The changes induced in malignant growths by the action of radium and
similar agents are, so far as we can see, indistinguishable from the degenera-
tive changes seen in cases of growth which have received no treatment ; but
this important point must be insisted upon, that the percentage of cases
in which we see these changes is much larger in the group of cases treated by
radiations than in the group which has received no treatment.
It must be admitted that occasionally we see a case of untreated can-
cer diminish in size and, in a very small percentage, ultimately disappear.
During the treatment of cancer by radiations it is by no means uncommon
in a fairly large percentage of our cases to see a marked diminution in size
produced. In a smaller percentage we do see the growth disappear — at
all events for a time.
The local disappearance of a growth is not a cure. The disease may
have, and in the majority of cases undoubtedly has, extended to other parts
of the body. Consequently no case can be said to have been cured until we
have given the deeper ramifications of the growth sufficient time to develop
and manifest their presence. It is, therefore, important that before we treat
the local condition a search be made for secondary deposits. From the
point of view of prognosis, this is a most important matter.
262 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
Factors influencing' the Result of Treatment. — In routine treatment
by radium, the following factors should always be kept in mind, as a full
consideration of all in each case will help us to foretell the degree of action
and the result likely to follow from treatment :
(a) Type of growth and condition of patient.
(6) Situation of the tumour, size, etc.
(c) The quantity of radium used.
(d) The filtration employed.
(e) The duration of the exposure.
An improvement in the results at present obtainable by radium in the
treatment of malignant disease may be obtained :
(a) Larger quantities of radium may be used. Up to the present the
largest quantity used has been about 1 gram of pure radium salt. Far-
reaching effects may be produced by such treatment, especially if the filtra-
tion is great and the exposure prolonged ; yet, even with such a dose, the
result in several cases has been temporary benefit only. The type of case
so treated has been a deep-seated growth, which could only be acted on by
the very penetrating rays. For surface lesions the increased dosage may
have a speedier effect, which should help to prevent the spread of the growth
to deeper structures if it can be efficiently checked.
(6) A more thorough knowledge of the physical properties of radium
may enable us to select for particular cases the quality of radiations likely
to influence the cell metabolism.
(c) It must be admitted that the technique has hitherto been more or
less faulty. A fuller knowledge of the influence of the various thicknesses of
filters may help us to get speedier results. It may be that the use of the
Beta rays in some cases would lead to better results. Similarly the Alpha
rays, which up to the present have been little used, may in the future be
found to exercise an inhibitory effect upon morbid processes when they are
brought into contact with the cells of a growth. The difficulty has been
to apply them at all. The radio-active waters at present in use do not
appear to have any influence on cancer cells.
It may be possible to deposit the active principles of the radium emana-
tions in such a way that we can utilise them either by direct application or
by ionisation with the aid of a galvanic current, or a combination of radia-
tions may be helpful. In several cases radium and X-rays together appear
to have hastened reparative processes. It is possible that some of the effects
noticed may be due to secondary radiations, produced in the structures
composing the growth, which exercise a physiological action. Some such
general action appears to take place, because it is quite a common occurrence
for patients so treated to improve in general health.
The employment of radiations in any form leads to a constitutional
disturbance which we designate as reaction. This varies in time of onset
according to the dosage. After a time a period of depression sets in, most
probably due to a change set up in the growth which leads to the liberation
DANGERS OF X-RAYS AND RADIUM 263
of toxins into the circulation, - If they are excessive, the condition of the
patient may be rendered serious. This form of toxaemia is met with when
large rectal growths are treated. It is possible to make the condition of the
patient much worse if care is not taken to regulate the dose.
Up to the present the treatment of malignant disease by radium and
other radio-active bodies has been purely local. Consequently it cannot be
regarded as a specific method of treatment. The conditions under which
it may become so are being investigated. The endeavour must be to procure
a substance, radio-active or not, which, when introduced into the general
circulation, will influence morbid processes in the tissues. It may be possible
to use a substance, which when treated locally by radium, X-rays, or other
agents capable of exciting the secondary radiations of such substances, will
benefit the tissues.
The best we have yet been able to do has been by local stimulation to
produce secondary radiations from the tissues, blood, and lymph in the
deposits of cancer. When the secondary radiation value of these tissues is
better known, and when we know which particular radiation acting upon
them will give us their maximum value, then we may hope to improve our
results.
Dangers attendant on the use of X-Rays and Radium
In the routine treatment of disease by radiations, even when the greatest
care is exercised as to dosage and frequency of application, it is inevitable
that cases should occur in which in spite of all precautions serious damage
is done. It is therefore necessary to consider briefly the ill-effects which
may accompany the use of radiations. These are :
(1) Acute Dermatitis.
(2) Chronic Dermatitis.
(3) Late Manifestations, appearing a long time after cessation of
treatment.
Acute Dermatitis. — A properly judged dose of X-rays or radium,
when applied to the skin surface after a given time, produces a definite
erythema, which causes a slight reddening of the surface. This lasts a few
days and then slowly subsides. When such a dose has been applied to a
surface covered with hair, complete epilation follows ; the follicles, however,
are not destroyed, and the hair reappears later. Should the reaction be ex-
cessive, and the skin surface ulcerate, more or less permanent alopecia may
result. All degrees of reaction, from a slight erythema to deep ulceration,
may follow a single exposure to either X-rays or radium. Acute dermatitis
is frequently met with in the treatment of malignant disease where the dosage
has been energetically pushed. This may lead to large superficial ulcers,
which are extremely painful and very difficult to heal. Deep sloughs may
form and separate, leaving large ulcers.
Chronic Dermatitis. — The acute dermatitis may only partially subside,
and give rise to a subacute or chronic condition which may be very intractable,
264 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
persist for years, and finally take on a malignant character. This form is
commonly met with among X-ray operators who were injured in the early
days of X-ray work. The degree of damage caused to the tissues may be
reckoned by the period of incubation, i.e. the time between the exposure and
the first appearance of redness. Irritation is more marked in the subacute
and chronic forms than in the acute, desquamation being more marked in
the acute. X-ray warts are a late manifestation of chronic dermatitis,
and may become malignant.
Late Manifestations. — A frequent sequel to X-ray and radium
treatment is the occurrence of telangiectasis many months after the cessation
of treatment. The length of time which may elapse between the cessation
of treatment and the appearance of telangiectasis is much greater than was
formerly supposed. A case was seen recently occurring in the hands
where the treatment with filtered rays had been carried out for hyper-
hidrosis. Three years afterwards the palms of both hands were covered with
patches of telangiectasis, with, in addition, a certain degree of pain and
irritation. They are somewhat unsightly and difficult to treat. They are
more likely to appear when mifiltered rays have been used. Late ulceration
is a condition which has been described by several writers as coming on many
months, or even a year or two, after the cessation of treatment. It is
extremely painful and intractable.
Cases treated by radiations sometimes show evidence of neuritis. This
is especially liable to occur in the treatment of cases of carcinoma of the breast
in the axillary and supraclavicular regions, owing to the presence of large
nerve trunks in these parts. The condition is often very painful, but gener-
ally subsides on the cessation of treatment. When very painful, relief may
be obtained by the use of the galvanic current along the course of the nerves.
It is quite possible that, where deep-seated organs are subjected to heavy
dosage in the intensive treatment by X-rays, organs other than those treated
may be seriously damaged. A considerable time must elapse before we can
definitely state that this intensive treatment cannot produce effects other
than those aimed at. In estimating the value of X-ray treatment in myoma
uteri, the above possibility must be borne in mind before we can admit the
successes claimed for it by enthusiastic advocates. The occurrence of late
manifestations on the skin surface after prolonged radiation treatment leads
to the inference that deep-seated changes may also occur.
A. X-RAY THERAPEUTICS
Special Points in Instrumentation
Before we proceed to a detailed description of the methods of treatment,
apparatus, dosage, etc., there are several factors of a preliminary nature
which must be discussed at some length.
The general principle of radio-therapeutics is as yet imperfectly mider-
stood. The action of X-rays on tissues has been too well demonstrated by
the unfortunate effects upon many of the early workers. An agent so
capable of harmful effect must necessarily be treated with a considerable
amount of respect when used for therapeutic purposes.
There is still a large field for experimental work in the perfection of
apparatus, the standardisation of tubes and dosage and therapeutic tech-
nique. The early work was chiefly confined to superficial areas of the body,
and it was the observation of the effect upon these structures and diseases
which encouraged workers to develop and elaborate the technique of the
present day. Great improvements in superficial lesions of the skin through
the use of X-rays led to the employment of the rays in the treatment of deep-
seated diseases. The employment of filters for the protection of the super-
ficial structures from the action of the soft X-rays enabled the experimenters
to evolve a technique for the treatment of such diseases as uterine myomata
and cancer. The action of the Gamma-ray of radium upon cancer led X-ray
therapeutists to use harder tubes and increased filtration with larger
exposures. More accurate measures for estimation of dosage increased the
value of these experiments, while the improvement in apparatus, particularly
in the focus tube, ensured the administration of larger doses of more
penetrating rays.
Methods of Protection
The first care of all workers should be to ensure the complete protection
of the operator and attendants in an X-ray department, and there can be no
doubt that at present too little attention is paid in most electrical cliniques
in this country to the important question of X-ray protection.
It is not sufficient to enclose the X-ray tube in a lead-glass shield, closed
only on one-half of its diameter. X-rays escape from behind the tube,
and in addition there are the rays of which we yet know little, which may
have an injurious effect upon the workers ; also high-tension currents are
allowed to escape through the room, and there is at present no accurate
knowledge of the ill-effects which may be produced by frequent and pro-
longed exposure to their influence.
265
266
KADIATION THERAPEUTICS
Complete protection can be obtained by enclosing tbe X-ray tube,
together with the patient and the auxiliary apparatus, within a lead-lined
cubicle. Lead of the thickness of 1 mm. or more should be let in between
the layers of wood, the wood covering serving to absorb secondary radiations
given off from the lead
when struck by X - rays.
The upper portion of the
cubicle may have lead-glass
windows in order that the
operator may see the work
being done inside. These
cubicles should have an
efficient system of ventila-
tion. Indeed, too great
stress cannot be laid upon
this point. All X-ray rooms,
cubicles, and dark rooms
should be efficiently venti-
lated, and in hospitals they
should also be easy to
disinfect. The control
apparatus should be on the
outside of the cubicle. In
some institutions an arrange-
ment is added whereby the
current can be automatically
cut off when the door of the
cubicle is opened.
When such elaborate
precautions are not avail-
able, it should be the duty
of those responsible for the X-ray department to see that efficient pro-
tection is provided.
The X-ray tube should be completely enclosed in a lead-lined box, or
a lead-glass shield of sufficient size should be provided, so that no stray
X-rays are allowed to fall outside the area it is desired to treat. Gloves
should be used whenever the operator comes within the range of the rays.
A large lead-lined screen should be placed between the active tube and the
worker. This should have a lead-glass window for purposes of observa-
tion on patient and tube. The control apparatus should be kept at a
considerable distance from the tube stand so that the operator need not
come near the active ray.
Protection of the patient must be carefully attended to, especially when
administering the heavy doses of more recent days. Thick lead -rubber
shields should cover the parts of the body in close proximity to the tube box.
A window is cut in the middle of the lead rubber to allow of the rays passing
Fig. 185. — X-ray treatment cubicle. {Archives of Rontgen
Ray. ) Control apparatus arranged outside the cubicle.
AERANGEMENT OF APPARATUS 267
to tlie part under treatment. ..^ The efficiency of the protective measures
employed may be tested by means of an electroscope. This, when placed
in the vicinity of an active X-ray tube, quickly becomes discharged, thus
enabling the ionisation effect to be estimated. All protective devices
should be tested in this manner before it is assumed that they are efficient.
Arrangement of Apparatus
In the early days it was sufficient to have a coil, control apparatus, and
a tube, the dose being calculated in minutes, in many instances quite irre-
spective of the condition of the tube. Even with this crude technique results
were obtained which served to call attention to the great potentiality behind
the new remedy. Increasing complexity of apparatus accompanied each
succeeding development, so that the equipment for an X-ray therapeutic
department has now become exceedingly complicated.
The control of the X-ray tube is a matter of ease when precautions are
taken and sufficient auxiliary apparatus is provided.
A Switchboard on the wall or on a trolley table is essential. It should
have an ammeter to measure the primary current, a resistance to control
the current in the primary, a resistance for the control of the break, and
switches to control these parts.
Valve Tubes should be provided wherever there is a suspicion of reverse
current. It is a good plan to have valve tubes and oscilloscope tubes
arranged so that they may be cut off from the current when not required.
They may be introduced occasionally to see if there is any reverse current
present. This is all that is necessary when ..-^^^^s^fci^
small currents are used. >^^^^^^^Sv^^
A milliamperemeter measuring approxi- .^fl^^^^^^B^V^k
mately the quantity of current passing through /jy^^^^^^^^^^^^^B
the tube, is an essential if reliable work is to fffll^^^^^lHH ■■
be expected. It should be of the very best \l^v/^^H^^!^f Mm
D'Arsonval moving'-coil dead-beat precision ^^^2 'i^l}^\y'S'l^ ^m
type, which is provided with two readings, ^^^^tU^^^^J^r
viz., 0-5 and 0-50 m.a. On the lower reading ^-^^rfl^^^
each one-fifth part of a milliampere is clearly « l ^^|
registered, while on the higher reading each W^^m
division of the scale represents two milliamperes. JlflH
In all ordinary work only one or two milh- m
amperes are utilised through the focus tube, so
that the lower reading serves admirably, while ^'''•^^*^7s-™en"r''"'*'^
for very heavy discharges the higher reading is
called into use. The miUiamperemeter enables the operator to estimate
approximately the hardness of the tube, as the variations may be detected
by the fluctuations of the recording needle. As the tube hardens the
amount of current passing through diminishes and mce versa. In treatment
it may be used as a guide to the length of the exposure if care has been
268
EADIATION THERAPEUTICS
taken to note the condition of the tube as to hardness and quantity of
current when a particular dose is being given.
The Qualimeter of Bauer is a useful adjunct to a treatment outfit,
enabling one at a glance to estimate approxi-
mately the degree of hardness of the tube.
Bauer's Qualimeter. — The instrument is sus-
pended from the wall of the protective house
or protective screen, and indicates the hard-
ness of the focus tube on a scale. It does not
depend; as in other scales, on the comparison of
different tints.
This instrument is connected by a wire to
the negative terminal of the coil or the cathode
of the tube. It is a static electrometer and
condenser which indicates automatically the
potential of the cathode, and hence the quality
of the X-rays. The apparatus consists of two
wings, which swing between two fixed plates.
Both wings and plates are equally charged so
that a repulsion takes place between them. The
intensity of this repulsion is in exact proportion
to the electrical tension in the secondary circuit,
and is indicated by the deviation of a pointer
over a suitably divided scale.
As is well known, the penetration of the
X-rays is a function of the electrical potential in
the secondary circuit, so that a simple measure-
ment of this potential between the anode and
cathode will give us an indication of the hardness of the tube. The scale is
gauged according to the absorption of the X-rays by sheets of lead of different
thickness, increasing regularly from yV of a millimetre to 1 millimetre.
No. 1 on the scale denotes X-rays of such a hardness as to be totally absorbed
by yV milhmetre of lead. When the index is at No. 10 we know that the tube
is giving out rays which will penetrate 0*9 millimetres of lead, but will be totally
absorbed by 1 millimetre of lead.
As already explained, the instrument is unipolar, being joined up by a single
wire to some point in electrical connection with the cathode. The instrument is
contained in an ebonite case, which swings freely from a bracket on the wall or a
stand, so as to be always in a vertical position. It should be within view of
the operator, to enable him to estimate the hardness of his tube throughout the
whole of the exposure, without danger to himself.
Pig. 187. — Bauer qualimeter.
(Favre.)
Comparative Scale of the usual Instruments foe Measuring
THE Hardness of Tubes
soft
medium
hard
Bauer ....
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Wehnelt .
1-5
3
4-5
6
7-5
9
10-5
12
13-5
15
Walter ....
1
1-2
2-3
3-4
4-5
5-6
6-7
7-8
Benoist
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
THE THERAPEUTIC COIL
269
It is well to have all these instruments — valve tubes, miUiamperemeter,
qualimeter, and oscilloscope tube — in the circuit, especially when a great
deal of work has to be done, as they facilitate speed in working, and enable
the operator to see that the conditions under which his work is being carried
out are correct.
The Therapeutic Coil should be at least twelve inches spark-gap, and
where more than one is possible a 16-inch coil should be installed. Any
modern coil is adequate, but the type likely to give the best results is one of
spark-gap
MiUianippremetftr
Coil enclosed
Interrupter
Rhythmeur
Fig. 188. — Therapeutic oiitflt suitable for deep therapy. (Schall. )
The interrupter is arranged for the passage of heavy currents. At the top of the motor
a small fan is arranged to drive a current of air through the primary of the coil for cooling
purposes. A rhythmeur is arranged below the mercury interrupter.
the so-called intensive coils ; that is, one giving a high secondary output
with a moderate primary current. When possible, the coil should be mounted
well away from the control apparatus, and the terminals, high-tension cables,
etc., should be separated as widely as possible to prevent a leak to earth or
sparking between the terminals. With the larger coil it should be possible
to pass heavy discharges through the hardest X-ray tube. The Coolidge
tube requires, when very hard rays are used, a heavy discharge from the
secondary. This may be obtained from the larger coils now in use. When
these very hard tubes are used the high tension transformer, such as the
270
KADIATION THEKAPEUTICS
Snook machine, will be found extremely useful. The control of the tubes
when using the unidirectional current obtained from this type of transformer
is a matter of comparative ease.
The Interrupter. — A con-
denser is necessary when the
interrupter is of the mercury- jet
type, as is also a condenser
battery when the apparatus is
used for many hours daily. The
battery should be arranged so
that it is convenient to quickly
change from one set of con-
densers to another.
The mercury jet interrupter
has already been described, see
page 17, and little more need be
added here. The best di-electric
to employ is coal gas ; a supply
pipe with a tap being run from
the main to the apparatus,
to which a length of rubber
tubing is attached, and this is
carried to the inlet tap on the
interrupter. Before turning on
the main switch to the appar-
atus, the gas should be allowed
to flow freely through the interrupter. It is a good practice to apply a
light to the outlet tap, and allow the gas to burn for a few minutes in
order to expel all air from the interior. It is important to see that the
Fig. 189. — -Mercury iuterrupter with gas di-electric.
(Schall.)
Fig. 190. — Mercury interrupter showing details.
interior of the interrupter is kept clean, and when a considerable amount
of work has to be done it is well to thoroughly inspect the break at least
twice a week and clean the jets out.
DIPPER INTERRUPTER
271
Some makers claim for their interrupter that cleanhig is only necessary
once in six months, but this is quite a mistake. Careful cleaning at short
intervals facilitates harmonious working of apparatus.
Other forms of interrupters may be used, of these the best being the
electrolytic. This break, if properly adjusted, will be found useful. It is
the easiest of all interrupters to work with, requires very little cleaning, and
hardly any attention beyond an occasional adjustment ; it has the further
advantage that the variations are greater. With an adjustable primary and
two or more points in the interrupter, it gives a wide range of usefulness.
When using very hard tubes it is necessary to get a relatively large current
in the primary. This it is possible to obtain by using a thick platinum
point. A tachymeter may also be used when desired, see Fig. 191.
Fig, 191. — Dipping interrupter with revolution counter or tachymeter.
Dipping- Interrupter with Counter, for Reg-ulating- Therapeutic
Doses. — The interrupter illustrated above is designed chiefly for ringworm,
but may be used for other therapeutic purposes of X-rays ; it is arranged
to give a dosage measured by a definite number of interruptions in the
prijnary circuit. For this purpose a dipper mercury interrupter is employed,
the turbine forms not being sufficiently definite, it being difficult to
accurately register every interruption on the counter. The axle of the
motor is directly connected with the counter, which is provided with an
indicator and dial. The indicator is set to the number of interruptions
the exposure is to consist of, and the interrupter switched on. When the
indicator reaches zero the exposure is automatically terminated by the
current being cut ofi by a relay switch. There is a timepiece on the circuit,
and the exposures can be calculated by time, allowing for so many inter-
ruptions per minute.
The important thing in the management of all interrupters is to obtain
272
EADIATION THERAPEUTICS
the maximum of current through a tube at a particular spark gap with the
minimum of primary current. A little practice will soon enable the worker
to adjust the points and primary to suit the particular tube in use.
Valve Tubes. — The employment of an electrolytic interrupter involves
the use of valve tubes to cut out the inverse current, which is always present
with this interrupter. Dr. Reginald Morton has called attention to an in-
genious method of checking inverse current, described below.
The Morton Rectifier.
— This apparatus enables
the operator to dispense
with valve tubes. It may
be used with currents up to
5 milliamperes. It should
prove to be extremely use-
ful in therapeutic work.
The aim of the appar-
atus is to provide a satis-
factory means of eliminat-
ing inverse current without
the use of valve tubes.
The essential feature of
the apparatus is a switch,
which is mounted upon
the shaft of the inter-
rupter. It is in this con-
nection similar to the mica
disc valve designed by Mr.
Leslie Miller, but in the
Morton apparatus a rotary
conductor is made use of
on the same principle as
the rectifier on a Snook
machine. The amount of
current which can be
passed through the high-
tension switch is practi-
cally unlimited, the only
factor at present limiting the output being the amount of energy which
can be dealt with efficiently by a mercury break. The arrangement of
the high-tension switch in relation to the mercury break is shown in
Fig. 193, the respective parts by similar letters on the three figures.
P P are the contacts through which the primary current passes to
the coil when they are connected together by the revolving mercury jet.
S S are the high-tension contacts connected in series with the X-ray tube
circuit, the conductor C being so set, in relation to the interrupter, that the
whole of the high-tension current passes through it, which is produced by the
Fig. 192. — -Morton rectifier fitted to a coil outfit, with control
table.
THE MORTON RECTIFIER
273
break of the primary current. .,.When the primary current is made, a long air-
gap is interposed in the secondary circuit, which prevents the passage of the
inverse discharge. The apparatus can be arranged to give quick or slow
interruptions, the latter being particularly efficacious when used in thera-
peutic work, adjustments being provided to facilitate the use of either type
of interruption. This arrangement appears to render the apparatus particu-
larly applicable to
-^ IS
SI
NtWTON Si WRIGHT C-"
1.0ND0M
"4"'-
D-
Fig. 193. — Diasfram of connections for Morton rectifier.
therapeutic work of
the intensive form,
and the absence of
all inverse current
makes it possible
to work without
valve tubes. If
this is borne out in
practice the appar-
atus should prove
itself to be of the
greatest possible
value to the radio-
therapist. With
most mercury
breaks this inverse
current is also pre-
sent ; so, whichever type of break is used it is well to have two or more
valve tubes attached to the apparatus. An osmosis regulator attached to
the valve tube, with a gas jet
which can be regulated from a
distance, is very useful.
A triple valve tube will be
sufficient to check a moderate
amount of inverse current. This
should have a regulating device
attached to it. A good one, which
is now being attached to a great
many X-ray bulbs and valve tubes,
is that introduced by Bauer (see
Fig. 41, page 46). These tubes are
capable of regulation from a dis-
tance, a length of rubber tubing
being attached to the air valve,
while at the other end is a small hand-pump. By compressing the latter,
a small quantity of air is allowed to pass into the interior of the tube. This
lowers the vacuum. This is a good method for the regulation of X-ray and
valve tubes, but requires careful manipulation to ensure efficient working.
The construction of a valve tube and the method of arranging one or
18
Fig. 191. ^Triple valve tube (C. Andrews).
274 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
more in the circuit has been described in the section on radiography. What
has been said there appHes equally to the therapeutic outfit. With this
as with all forms of regulators it is important that it should not be used too
frequently or too vigorously. The vacuum is easily disturbed and the valve
tube becomes too variable for easy control.
The most convenient mercury interrupter is probably a mercury jet
interrupter. There are several which are aU equally good. It should be
possible to control the speed ; a resistance should, therefore, be added for
the control of the interrupter. Another resistance is necessary to regulate
the amount of current passing through the primary.
Figs. 198 and 199 represent convenient arrangements for treatment
outfit. The coil, spintermeter, valve tube, and milliamperemeter are placed
on the top of an upright cabinet.
The leads from the secondary may be carried to a pair of insulated high-
tension steel cables, from which the current is carried by means of spring
cables to the tube holder.
On a suitable switchboard, the regulating devices are conveniently
arranged. A mercury jet break is mounted on the base of the cabinet, while
above it, if desired, a dipper break with an automatic tachymeter may be
added to the outfit, this latter instrument being useful when it is necessary
to record accurately the number of interruptions in a given exposure. It
cannot, however, be relied on as an absolute measure of the dose ; other
methods must always be used as well, in order to get a check observation.
The Rhythmeur Interrupter. — This is a useful addition to the thera-
peutic outfit ; it is very valuable for the deep treatment of tumours, when
heavy currents require to be passed through hard tubes. It is a mechanical
device by means of which the current is cut off for a fixed period of time,
varying from one to four or more seconds. This allows the tube time to
cool between the periods of activity.
On the Use of Valve Tubes. — This has been fully entered into in the
radiographic section, but a brief reminder of the methods of connecting up
the valve tubes will be useful here. The diagrams on p. 275 illustrate two
methods of connecting the tubes. Sometimes, when a considerable amount
of reverse current is present it may be necessary to put two or more valve
tubes in a circuit. They can then be arranged on both negative and positive
poles.
The tube used in X-ray therapy should be under the complete control
of the operator. Any type of tube may be used, but it is important to have
such control of it that the type of ray best suited to a particular case may
be produced. It is not sufficient simply to turn on a switch with any tube
and give a few minutes' exposure to the rays. That method sufficed in
the days when little was known of the technique of X-ray treatment,
but now we must be able so to manipulate the apparatus that results may
be obtained with a degree of certainty.
The elaboration of the installation has been the necessary outcome of
the experience of individual workers. Consequently, at the present time
THE THERAPEUTIC TUBE STAND
275
we are still far removed from a standardisation of apparatus, tubes, and
dosage. Before uniform results can be turned out this standardisation must
become an established fact. It has been the aim of the writer to reduce,
so far as is possible, all the installations under his care to a uniform standard.
Fig. 195. — Method of connecting coil to valve
tube and X-ray tube. Valve tube on positive
pole (Siemens).
Fig. 196. — Method of connecting coil to tube.
Valve tube on negative pole.
Fig. 197. — Tube stand for deep therapeutic work.
(Schall.)
The Therapeutic Tube Stand.— Any simple stand will suffice for
therapeutic work, but it must have good mechanical movements. One of
the best is made by GaifEe of Paris. The tube may be adjusted readily
to any angle, and the movements are as perfect as mechanical ingenuity can
make them. The only drawback to the stand is that only half of the tube is
enclosed, and the lead glass is frequently not thick enough to ensure complete
protection. The stand should have a number of extension tubes of various
sizes, and should have also a tripod applicator for ringworm treatment.
276
RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
The under aspect of the tube box should have a slot into which the filters can
easily be placed, and a complete set of filters should go with each stand.
The aluminium filters should range from -^ up to 3 mm. in thickness. In
hospitals, especially, these parts should be easily sterilisable. The tube
stand should also have a holder for the pastille.
Dr. Gauss of Freiburg has introduced a stand (Fig. 197) designed for
tubes which are to be used with a very heavy current. It is so arranged that
the distance of the tube from the surface of the body can readily be regulated
and measured. In addition to this it has a number of good mechanical
movements, which render its use a great acquisition to the operator. The
tube box is protected by thick lead glass and lead rubber. This is necessary
on account of the very hard tubes required for the treatment of deep-seated
organs.
A treatment couch should move easily, and the top should be covered
with leather or some sterilisable material. A hinged top on the couch is
GAIFFE ROCHEFORT TRANSFORMER
VALVE TUBE
SPINTER METER
RECULATED FROM INSIDE OF CABIN
MILUI AMPERE METER
CREVILLE - READ PROTECTIVE SHIELD
AMPERE METER
PILOT LAMP
MINUTE METER
-AUTOMATIC TIME SWITCH
LECTRIC SIGNAL BELL
RHEOSTAT FOR COIL REGULATION
RHEOSTAT FOR MOTOR REGULATION
GREVILLE GAIFfE MERCURY & CAS
INTERRUPTER
Fig. 198. — A convenient arrangement of apparatus for therapeutic work.
an advantage. A treatment chair is a valuable addition to the thera-
peutic department, and should have a movable head-rest, with side-clips
ARRANGEMENT OF APPARATUS
277
for fixing the liead. It will' be found most useful where children are being
treated, as the head may be fixed without discomfort to the patient.
Further Points on the Arrang-ement of Apparatus.— It will be
found to be a convenience to have all the parts of the apparatus which are
likely to get out of order in an accessible position in the room ; and all parts
Fig. 199.-
-Apparatus arranged ou an iipright cabinet.
(Watson & Sons.)
Fig. 200. — Diagram to show arrangement of
apj)aratus on an upriglit cabinet.
subject to variations should be readily controlled. It should be possible to
darken the room if desired. This is not essential for therapeutic work,
though it is a distinct advantage to be able to darken the room so as to
observe how the tube is running.
The leads from the terminals of the coil may be connected to the tube by
means of insulated or spring cables. It is convenient to have two steel wires
carried across the room at a convenient height. These should be insulated
at the points of insertion into the walls. Two spring cables on trolley wheels
carry the current to the X-ray tube. The leads from the terminals of the coil
278 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
are connected to the overhead wires. This arrangement facilitates the
adjustments of the tube stand and allows of a rapid change from one ap-
paratus to another. Most of the newer tube stands are provided with an
efficiently protected tube box. The tube is placed in the tube box or holder,
and connected up to the coil and valve tubes. The anode of the coil is
connected to the anode of the tube, and cathode to cathode (see Fig. 195).
Valve tubes should be provided in all installations when a coil is used, and
it will be an advantage to have an oscilloscope tube in the circuit. This
should be placed at some distance from the coil if reliable observations are
to be made. An oscilloscope in the near vicinity of a large coil often acts
inefficiently owing to its proximity to the magnetic field of the coil.
Testing" the Apparatus before using- for Treatment. — The maui
switch should be turned on with a minimum current at first, and the tube
observed as to style of running, colour, etc. ; then the current may be gradu-
ally increased. The penetration of the tube is tested by a radiometer, or by
the alternative spark-gap — a rough but very useful indication of the hard-
ness of a tube. The qualimeter of Bauer may also be used for this purpose,
and is to be preferred when many observations require to be made.
A note of the amperage in the primary should be made and of the current
passing through the miUiamperemeter. These are most important points on
which the calculation of the exposure is based. There are, however, other
factors which must be considered in detail.
Methods used in Estimation of Dosage
At the very outset we are met with the difficulty of estimating even
approximately the dosage. Many methods are employed, none of them
perfect. Tubes vary from day to day in spite of the great improvements
which have taken place of recent years. The various systems of measuring
the X-ray dosage will be described in detail. At present there is no standard-
isation of dosage, and until this is obtained, it is best for an operator to
understand thoroughly one good method and to work steadily with it. A
knowledge of the others is useful, but it is hopeless to try to combine several
different methods.
An erythema dose is one which causes slight erythema to appear within
fifteen to twenty-one days. Four-fifths of an erythema dose will, in the
majority of cases, cause the hair to fall out. This dose has been found to
cause a change in the colour of certain chemical substances.
Two methods may be described : (1) The indirect, and (2) the direct.
These two should always be used together, the indirect being a good check
on the direct.
In the Indirect Method the miUiamperemeter is used to measure, not
the rays, but the quantity of current passing through the tube ; and the
number of milliamperes multiplied by the volts used gives the quantity of
X-rays generated in the tube.
METHODS USED TO ESTIMATE DOSAGE 279
The quantity of X-raysteceived by the object depends on (a) the quan-
tity of X-rays generated ; (6) the distance between the tube and the object ;
(c) the time of the exposure ; (d) the sensitiveness of the object.
The reading of the milhamperemeter must therefore be supplemented
by those other factors before we can estimate the dose received.
The distance has a great influence, because the intensity of the X-rays
diminishes, like that of ordinary light, as the square of the distance increases.
A strip exposed 40 cms. from the anticathode requires four times as many
milliampere seconds to assume tint 5 x as a strip exposed at a distance
of 20 cm.
Reverse Currents. — The presence of reverse currents may cause an
under-exposure, because milliamperemeters of the d'Arsonval type do not
indicate alternating currents if both phases are of equal strength.
If one phase preponderates, as will be the case if the reverse current
from the spark-coil becomes so strong that it can discharge through the
tubes, the milhamperemeter indicates only the difierence between the break-
ing and the closing current ; the stronger the reverse current the greater
will be the error. With good modern coils there should be practically no
reverse current with the weak or moderate currents, say up to 6 milliamperes,
which are employed in the majority of exposures, but when currents of 10
milliamperes and more are employed, some reverse current begins to appear
even with the best of coils.
If the coils are old or badly constructed, or if interrupters with high-
frequencies are used, reverse currents may be present even when 1 milhampere
only is used. The oscilloscope tubes, which indicate the presence and
intensity of reverse currents, are not expensive, and can easily be inserted
in the circuit with a milliamperemeter. They should be used if there is
any doubt about the presence of reverse current, and if it exists it should
be suppressed by means of a spark-gap, or by means of a valve tube, as
otherwise the milliampere method will give wrong results.
Another error may arise if the glass of the tube is unusually thick. It
is not likely that this will cause much difference, because the glass bulb
absorbs the softest ray only. Another error may arise if the penetrating
power of the tube changes during the exposure. The milHamperemeters
are, however, the best and most convenient indicators of any such changes.
The Bauer qualimeter also indicates these variations.
The Direct Method.— The total quantity of X-rays received by an
object can be measured by various methods introduced by Holzknecht,
Sabouraud, Kienbock, Bordier, Hampson, and others. The method most
used in this country is that introduced by Sabouraud and Noire. The
principle is the same as that of several others, and depends upon the action
of X-rays and similar agents upon a disc of barium platino cyanide, the
same material that is used for the fluorescent screen. These discs and
similar agents are known as chromo-radiometers, because of the change of
colour which occurs when they are exposed to the action of rays.
The discs should be exposed on a thin sheet of metal at a distance from
280 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
tlie anticathode equal to half the distance between the anticathode and the
skin of the patient ; and they should be protected from the action of day-
light. The change of colour takes place gradually under the action of X-rays,
the green colour changing to a brown. The discs discolour in the same way
whether exposed to an X-ray tube, an incandescent electric lamp, or to sun-
shine, or when heated in a flame from a spirit lamp.
When the pastilles are exposed to the X-rays, the apple-green colour
changes gradually to red and red-brown, and by experiment the exact tint
was found which the pastilles assumed after exposure to a dose which caused
the hair to fall out. This is called tint B, and a tablet showing this
colour is supplied with every booklet of Sabouraud pastilles. If an ex-
posure of eight minutes caused the pastille to assume tint B, another two
minutes' exposure will cause an erythema to appear after an interval.
Where the dose is judged by the pastille alone the tint B in the booklet
should always be used for pastilles used from the particular booklet.
This is not necessary when Hampson's or Lovibond's radiometers are
used.
These pastilles are not very sensitive, and to obtain a sufficiently great
change in colour they have to be exposed at half the distance existing
between the anticathode and the object, so that they receive four times the
quantity of X-rays which the object receives. Nevertheless, quite large
errors are often made by different observers in. comparing these small shades
of colour. The pastilles are sensitive to heat, so there should be a distance
of at least 2 cm. between the tube and the pastille, or the heat of the glass
tube may prematurely discolour the pastille. Daylight restores the colour
to the pastilles. They must, therefore, be protected from bright light during
the exposure, and compared with the standard tint in a light weak in actinic
rays, e.g. the light of an incandescent lamp.
Great care must be exercised in estimating the degree of change in the
colour, and it must be noted that a marked difference exists between the
shade of colour of the disc when it is examined in daylight and when it is
examined m. artificial light. A serious error in dosage may easily be made if
this difference is overlooked.
These pastilles have proved very useful in the estimation of dosage in
the treatment of ringworm and superficial skua lesions, and they are almost
universally used in the treatment of this first disease. A large measure
of the success of the treatment of ringworm by X-rays depends upon the
after treatment, and where the children cannot be under constant super-
vision it is very necessary to issue concise and definite instructions to the
parents.
The several precautions which should be taken are dealt with later on.
When using Sabouraud pastilles, a weak dayUght is recommended, and for
Holzknecht and Bordier pastilles the light of an incandescent lamp. When
using these pastilles to measure dosage, a definite system of examination
should be carried out in all cases. The time taken to change a pastille
from the A to the B tint by the tube in use should be ascertained. Then
THE USE OF THE SABOURAUD PASTILLE 281
during an exposure of, say, teh minutes, the pastille should be examined at
least three times.
The first examination should be at the end of four minutes. This
will show whether the rays from the tube are acting on the pastille. If
by any chance the tube is acting too quickly, a full dose may be given
in less than half the time usually required, but this early examination
makes it possible to avoid serious damage to the patient. Tow^ards the
end of the exposure the inspections should be more frequently made.
Stress is laid upon this point here because recently in the experience
of several workers vagaries of the tube undetected at the time have
led to the administration of excessive doses in less than half the time
usually taken by the tube to colour the pastille. These untoward results
have also been obtained when to all appearances the tube was working
properly and the pastille was under- rather than over-done. No system of
measuring X-ray dosage is perfect, and whichever one is employed should
always be checked by the indirect method. A Bauer qualimeter on the
negative pole gives an approximate idea of the hardness of the tube. It is
not absolute, but as a guide to the steadiness of the tube it is very valuable.
The milliamperemeter records the current in the secondary circuit and
approximately the amount of current passing through or around the tube.
The alternate spark-gap also gives an indication of the hardness of the tube,
and should be tested from time to time. Lastly, there is the tube itself. A
careful watch kept upon it should enable the operator to judge of its condi-
tion. Experienced workers can tell the variations in hardness by the sound
a tube makes when running. Some can tell approximately the exposure by
the same means, i.e. appearances of the tube, sound, etc., but for an X-ray
dosage, strict attention to detail and the carefid watching of all the
conditions should be insisted upon.
The pastilles should be compared immediately the exposure has been
terminated, as the colour should settle the time of the exposure ; if left for
comparison till some time after, the pastille will be found to have faded.
The same pastille should not be used more frequently than three or four times.
Sabouraud pastilles show correctly when used with medium tubes, but with
hard tubes there is a tendency to under-exposure, tint B being reached a
little too early, and with soft tubes there is a tendency to over-expose, as
tint B is reached a little too late.
In the booklet supplied by Messrs, Sabouraud and Noire with the
pastilles tint A represents the pastille before it is exposed to the X-rays.
Tint B represents the same pastille after it has received exposure to the
X-rays, corresponding to the maximum dosage which the human skin is
able to receive without producing erythema, radiodermatitis, or a permanent
alopecia.
Holzknecht's Quantimeter. — For this instrument, barium platino
cyanide pastilles are also used, but they are compared with unexposed
pastilles of the same material arranged under a celluloid film of red-brown
colour, increasing gradually in intensity. By moving the exposed pastilles
282 KADIATION THERAPEUTICS
along this film, the discoloration caused by |, |, etc., of an erythema dose
can be measured.
Dp. Bordier's Chromo-radiometer. — This chromo-radiometer depends,
like Sabouraud's, on the discoloration of pastilles of barium platino cyanide,
but the scale shows five different tints for comparison, instead of the single
one of Sabouraud's instrument. Bordier's pastilles have to be attached to
the skin of the patient. The pastilles should be compared with the scale or
" Teinte B " by the light of a match, a candle, a benzine lamp, or other
artificial light of slight actinic power. The distance between the pastilles
and the glass wall of the tube should never be less than 2 cm., to prevent
their being discoloured by the heat of the tube. The pastilles are most
accurate when used with tubes of medium penetrating power. With soft
tubes they tend to indicate a smaller dose, with hard tubes a larger dose
than actually given.
Fig. 201. — Complete Kienbock quantimeter. (Schall. )
The Kienbock Quantimeter, — This method is based on the discolora-
tion of bromide of silver under the influence of X-rays. Compared with the
chromo-radiometer of Holzknecht or Sabouraud, it has the advantage that
it is more sensitive, gives more subdivisions, leaves a permanent record,
and is cheaper. Its only disadvantage is that the results can only be read
ofi after a strip of sensitive paper has been developed, a process which
occupies one minute. There is no need to resort to a dark room, as with the
help of a small light-tight box the development can be done in daylight in
the consulting room.
The apparatus consists of :
1. Strips of bromide of silver paper measuring | inch by 2^ inches,
enclosed in small light-tight envelopes. The envelopes bear a label to be
filled up with the name of the patient, date, and duration of the exposure.
Envelope and strip bear identical numbers.
2. A standard scale in wooden case, containing eight different tints of
the colours which the bromide of silver will assume gradually under prolonged
KIENBOCK QUANTIMETER
28J
influence of the X-rays. A runner with glass window slides along the scale,
and the developed strips are placed into this frame.
3. A set of four test tubes of 2 inches diameter and 2 inches length, in
small metal stands.
A convenient addition, when a dark room is not available, is a dark box,
which enables the operator to develop the strips in the consulting room.
This box has room for the stand holding the test tubes, in which develop-
ment, washing, and fixing take place. It is, however, much better to develop
the strips in a dark room.
Arrangements for Exposure. — One or several strips of the sensitive paper
are placed on the part to be treated ; they absorb practically no X-rays.
The side of the envelope bear-
ing the label must face the
patient's skin. If the total dose
is to be administered in several
sittings, the same strip is always
exposed again, so that the sum
total of the rays reaching the
patient will also reach the strip.
If many sittings with short ex-
posures are to be given, it is
convenient to use more than one
strip ; one is left to record the
total sum, and of the other,
parts are cut off from time to
time to make test developments.
The number of the strip,
and other remarks, are immedi-
ately entered into the case book, where also the strip is stuck when it has
been washed and dried.
Development. — In order to find out the quantity of X-rays which has
been administered, the strip has to be developed.
The developer consists of two stock solutions, A and B, mixed in proper
proportions with distilled water, and made up as follows :
A B
Fig. 202. — Arrangement of apparatus and paper when
rising Kienbcick's method of estimating dosage.
Distilled water . . 1000 c.c. Distilled w
-ater
1000 c.c.
Sulphite of soda . . 150 grammes Potassium
carbonate .
110 grammes
Metol (Hauff) ... 15 „
FIXING SOLUTION
Distilled water ....
1000 c.c.
Sulphite of soda
20 grammes
Tartaric acid ....
10
Hyposulphite of soda .
200
Great care must be taken in preparing the solutions ; it is essential
that the bottles shall be absolutely clean, and that distilled water shall be
284
RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
used throughout. The developer should never be used when it has become
stale.
An alternative developer consists of a stock solution, made up as follows :
Metol
Hydro quinone ....
Sodii sulphite ....
Carbonate .....
10 per cent solution of potassium bromide
Distilled water ....
1 gramme
4 grammes
50
50
4 CO.
500 CO.
The fixing solution is made up as follows
Hypo
Water ......
Potassium meta-bisulphite
400 grammes
1000 c.c.
25 grammes
Each box of strips is furnished with a set of instructions regarding the
duration of development, and these must be carefully observed.
It is not always possible to make succeeding batches of strips of exactly
the same degree of sensitiveness ; therefore each new batch is carefully
tested, and if necessary a new scale of tints is prepared. Each strip is marked
with a letter, and must only be compared with a scale bearing the same
letter.
The first of the four test tubes is filled with the developer mentioned
above, the second is filled with water, the third with fixing solution, and the
fourth again with water. The strips are taken out of the envelope either in
the dark room or in the
dark box mentioned
above, and are immersed
in the developer for a
certain time, as stated
on the instructions with
the strips. The strip
must be kept in motion
while in the developer.
The same developer can
be used for several strips,
but it deteriorates gradu-
ally in contact with air.
As in photography, great
care must be taken that
Fig. 203.— Developing the strips.
the developer is not contaminated with hypo, and it must be at the
temperature stated on the instructions (18° C), because too cold a developer
produces far too light a tint. After development, the strip is washed for a
few seconds in the second glass, and transferred into the third glass contain-
ing the fixing solution. It ought to remain in this not less than a minute,
but if it remains longer no harm is done. Then it is rinsed in the fourth
glass, and is ready for comparison with the standard scale. (It need not be
KIENBOCK QUANTIMETER
285
dry for this purpose.) To lesive a permanent record, the strip has to be
washed like any print for about half an hour in several changes of water.
Several strips may be developed or fixed simultaneously by using a large
enough vessel.
The Standard Scale consists of nine different tints, marked 0, \, 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 7, 10. The tint marked 1 is to be considered the unit, and is denoted
by 1 X. It is half the value of the dose required to produce one unit in
the Holzknecht Chromo-radiometer, and one-tenth of the Sabouraud-Noire
Tint B dose.
We therefore have :
10 X (Kienbock) = 5 H (Holzknecht) = 1 B (Sabouraud-Noire).
If it is intended to administer the maximum dose in one sitting, it will
be a convenience to expose two strips of paper simultaneously. When,
measuring the current passing through the tubes with a suitable milliampere-
meter or judging the degree of fluorescence by experience, it is found that
the maximum dose desired has been nearly reached, the exposure is inter-
rupted for a few minutes to develop
one strip and compare it with the
Fig. 204. — Comjjarmg the wet strip with the
standard scale, wsma, the slide.
Fig. 205. — Comparison of the dry strip
without the slide.
standard scale. If it took ten minutes to produce tint No. 5, then it will
require another two minutes to bring it to tint No. 6 ; or if it took nine
minutes to impart to the strip the colour of tint No. 6, it will take another
six minutes' exposure to bring it to a colour similar to tint No. 10 (provided
that the condition of the tube has not altered materially).
As it is not possible to read the value of the dose directly from the quanti-
meter strip during the irradiation, it is advisable to measure the dose at the
same time by observing the milliamperemeter, and timing the duration with
a watch, or it may be checked by using at the half-distance a Sabouraud
pastille. A second pastille may be placed on the skin and checked by means
of a Hampson or Lovibond radiometer.
286
KADIATION THERAPEUTICS
If it is desired to ascertain tlie quantity of X-rays which have reached
a certain depth, a piece of aluminium 1 mm. thick is laid on part of the
strip. It has been found that this absorbs as much of the X-rays as a layer
1 cm. thick of skin, fat, and muscles will absorb. In such a case the de-
veloped strip will show two different tints : the darker one indicates the
quantity of rays received by the surface of the skin ; the lighter tint records
the quantity of rays which have penetrated to a depth of 1 cm. below the
skin. Strips of aluminium are supplied also which help to find the effect
produced at 1, 2, or 3 cm. depth. If the effect is desired on the skin only,
it is advisable to use medium tubes, No. 8 Wehnelt ; if deeper lying parts
have to be treated, it is necessary to take tubes No. 10 or 11 Wehnelt. It
is an advantage to bring the tubes rather close to the skin (distance 8 to
18 cm.) : for treating ringworm, 15 cm. ; for treating ovaries, 18 to 25 cm.
It is, however, often necessary nowadays to give doses far larger than
10 a? in a single sitting for the treatment of fibroids or malignant disease. As
the strips would become
far too dark for com-
parative readings to be
made under these circum-
stances, a second scale
has been prepared, in
which tints are shown
which are obtained on
strips exposed under a
block of aluminium 10
mm. thick. In this way
the action on the strip is
lessened and the latter
does not become so dark,
although large doses are
given. Quantities up to
Fig. 206. — Plain strips, exposed and developed.
Fig. 207. — Strips exposed with 1
aluminium a ad develojDed.
30 or 40 X can be con-
veniently estimated. The
comparison, develop-
ment, etc., of the strips
is exactly the same as if
the 10 mm. aluminium
were not used. The dose
which the strip then
shows is that which has
been applied at the sur-
face, and not, as is some-
times assumed, that which
has reached 10 cm. depth.
The strips should be compared with the standard scale and a
record kept of all exposures given, with the total dose for each complete
Dose at
Dose at 1
cm. depth
Dose at 3
cm. depth
Envelopes
containing
strip and
arranged
with
aluminium
step
1 mm.,
2 mm. ,
and 3 mm.
Fig. 208. — Strips exposed -with
minium ladder and developea.
alu
EECORDING OF X-RAY EXPOSURES
287
treatment. The method of recording these data will vary with each opera-
tion. A record sheet should be reserved for each patient, and all particulars
of treatment entered on it. A portion of the developed paper may be
Medical Aitend»ni
Name M .. 0.^.13*4^^ _
Addresi ^ifcl^L^.'taacrJxa.lvat.
Record of X Ray Exposures
ilk-mejcLLca.
^
.3. Ilf
11.3 114-
11.3 IW
19.3.114.
35.3. lif
30. 3. \k
(t. k. \W
16. If. llf
(..5. IW
iq. 6. Ik
of
Tube
Exposure
Mm Sec
s
s
s
7
Amp
5
5
1+'
W
b'
S
5
5
u-
%
5
5
3
^1
CU«x9
wnarrv;OTTi
3
3
3
3
iW,
'.l»n«.1><^
10
int»ft/Tj!t wj*-iwnj -ur^it.
Vff-*-iyvvTii-.
Fig. 209. — Chart of X-ray exposures, to show method used in recording dosage by Kienbock's
method.
Chamois is used as a secondary filter, and the figures in that
column refer to the thickness of aluminium used.
arranged opposite each dose, and its numerical value placed alongside. This
enables the operator to calculate rapidly the total of the exposures. All the
other data of exposure should also be recorded. Fig. 209 illustrates a good
method used for recording the dosage.
The lonto Quantimeter. — This instrument has been designed by Dr.
Szillard of Paris. An electrometer and a small static machine to charge it
are enclosed in a small case, and a needle moving over a scale indicates the
degree of the charge. A flexible rubber tube, which encloses a conductor.
288
RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
leads from the electrometer to a small ionising chamber, which contains one
electrode connected with the electrometer, and a second one connected to
earth.
It is necessary that the insulation should be perfect, so that surface
leakage owing to dampness cannot take place. When the X-rays reach this
ionising chamber the electrometer begins to discharge, and the index of the
needle moves from towards 10.
The division of the scale has been calibrated to agree with the Kienbock
quantimeter. When the needle reaches 10, the ionising chamber, which
can be exposed on the skin of the patient, has received a full erythema
dose. The instrument is so sensitive that half an x, i.e. the twentieth part
of an erythema dose, can be measured. The degree of ionisation varies with
the penetrating power, and the instrument can be calibrated for various
degrees of it by placing diaphragms of lead over the ionisation chamber, so
that the area exposed to the influence of the X-rays can be made larger or
smaller. The instrument is new, and its practical value has yet to be proved.
In theory it is certainly good.
Lovibond's Tintometer (perfected by Dr. Dudley Corbett) provides a
very accurate method of estimating the degree of coloration of the Sabouraud-
FiG. 210. — Lovibond's tintometer, adapted and standardised for the accurate measurement of
the colour-changes in the Sabourand- Noire pastille by Dr. Dudley Corbett. (The Tinto-
meter, Ltd.)
Noire pastille. The apparatus consists of a tube or oblong viewing box,
divided into two by a vertical partition, so that on looking through the
eye-piece against the background two small white circles are seen. At the
distant end of the box are frames provided for the insertion of the glass
standards ; on the right for the colour tints, and on the left for a neutral tint
if required. The use of the latter will be explained below. The background
is composed of pure white standard paper. In the background support is
LOVIBOND'S TINTOMETER 289
cut a shallow groove or a hole for the pastille holder, depending on the
type used, so that the pastille can be examined without removal from its
holder. The tint of the pastille is thus compared with the standard inserted.
It is possible to get such an exact match in tint that it is impossible to say
on which side the pastille was situated. The advantages of this radiometer
over others, where the Sabouraud pastille is employed, are :
(1) The colour standards are kept constant and invariable in tint, are
easily kept clean, and do not fade. The smaller differences between the
fractional doses are readily appreciated.
(2) They have all been verified experimentally in tinea work, and any
fractional or multiple dose can be standardised.
(3) There is provision of a separate series for daylight and standard
artificial light. A series could be worked out for any constant source of
light if required.
The standards are composed of tinted glass and can be suppHed for any
fractional dose, from the unexposed pastille, or Tint A of Sabouraud, up
to 2 B ; in other words, the standard for any dose up to 10 H, or 20 X, can
be suppHed in an absolutely accurate and permanent form. It has been
thought desirable to retain the symbol B to represent the erythema dose,
for doses in therapeutic work are usually spoken of in terms of " B " in
this country.
The doses in common use are those for :
A
^B
HB
iB
tB
2 B
4B
+ B
But standards for any intermediate dose can be made to order.
There are also neutral-tint glasses for use when measuring the un-
exposed pastille and the ^ and | B in daylight. Parts of a set can be obtained
if desired.
This instrument is the result of an enquiry into the colour changes
occurring in the Sabouraud-Noire pastille when exposed to X-rays. The
standards are invariable and do not fade. Equal accuracy can be obtained
by white daylight or by electric light. The standard electric light is
that from an 8 c.p. carbon filament lamp, with frosted glass and in good
condition. Failing a carbon filament lamp, a low-power metal filament lamp
with frosted glass may be used, but the results are better and more accurate
with the carbon filament lamp which was used for the experimental work.
The pastille should be about 6 inches away from the lamp ; care should be
taken that no shadows are thrown upon it. The pastille should be examined
in its holder. The exact dimensions of the holder, as well as that of the
pastille in use, should be given, or preferably a specimen submitted to be
fitted to the instrument. The area of pastille exposed to the action of the
rays should be of such a size that on looking down the instrument none of the
unchanged green colour should be visible. Therefore those holders that only
expose half of the pastille should not be used. The actual aperture which
19
290
RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
controls the amount of pastille exposed to view can be varied to suit
requirements.
The examination should be made rapidly, as the pastille fades even in
electric light.
The Epilation Dose. — When new pastilles are used, the standard for 1 B
allows a 20 per cent margin of error on either side, i.e. -| nearly always epilates
and 11 B is nearly the absolute limit of safety for unfiltered rays. For quite
accurate work new pastilles should always be used. The tint of a used and
bleached pastille can always be compared with the standard ; if it is definitely
more yellow than this it should be discarded in any case. The daylight
n
^/j
'^^i-^^
'"■^ i.!^
"^"■^
jQf^^
X
"~~~-^
^^
^
— t
^
s
X
J <
1
\
'
° <
%
\
X
o^>^
fj-'i
,, U9Kt_
----
-—-~"~
^
'
^^^c-^
T T
^-*^'^^
^_2t^
^-^^
c
. I I .
J
i 1
1
1
\ 1
o
3 Z
Time t>« Interruptions
m
mm
Fig. 211. — Curves showing colour developed by Sabouraud's pastille when exposed
to unfiltered X-rays in measured doses.
standards for the unexposed pastille and for J and ^ B require the additional
use of neutral-tint glasses if the coloms are to be matched exactly, otherwise
they are brighter than standard, due to the white light reflected. This
brightness is dulled by the interposition of a standard neutral-tint glass.
The grade of neutral-tint varies very slightly with the amount of varnish
on the pastille. On an average the neutral-tints required are 1-5 for
the unexposed pastille, 0-4 for | B, and 0-2 for | B. For higher doses
no neutral tints are necessary. When measuring by electric light a neutral
tint is only required for the unexposed pastille standard, and this is usually
about "50.
Hampson's RadiometeP. — This is a new radiometer designed for the
purpose of reducing the length of time which is necessary before the full dose
may be given when employing the Sabouraud-Noire pastilles.
It consists of a series of twenty-five very carefully graded tints, which
HAMPSON RADIOMETER
291
represent the colour assumed by a pastille of barium platino cyanide under
the action of X-rays.
The initial or zero tint is the
colour of the unexposed salt, and
the sixteenth change represents the
brown shade of colour equivalent
to the maximum or B tint of a
pastille as employed by Dr. Sabou-
raud.
The radiometer consists of these
tints arranged upon a circular card,
the latter being enclosed in an outer
case. This has a small aperture cut
in it, through which the tints can be
successively viewed one at a time,
and the aperture is so shaped that
the sensitive pastille can be placed
in close proximity to the tint, the
latter being rotated by the thumb
until an exact match in colour has
been obtained.
Another small opening exposes
to view a series of numbers, ranging
from to 24, whereby the tints can be identified,
in black cloth.
Tints are so arranged that for exact matching they shall be viewed
by artificial light as obtained from an ordinary incandescent carbon lamp.
In hospital practice this is found to be the most convenient, as artificial
hght is frequently employed, and there is nearly always a pilot lamp on
the switchboard by which the tints may be accurately gauged.
The radiometer is so sensitive that it is possible to measure with accuracy
the pastille tint when it has not become nearly such a dark colour as in the
case of the Sabouraud method, and Dr. Hampson reduces by half the
exposure time for an epilation dose, by bringing his patients nearer to the
X-ray tube than was hitherto permissible in view of the danger which might
accrue from inaccurate judgment of the colours.
When employing this method it is necessary to place the pastille
on the patient's skin, and a full epilation dose is obtained when
the pastille has turned four divisions of the scale. When the sensi-
tive pastilles are exposed to daylight, it is known that they return
to a great extent (although not absolutely) to their initial colour, and
this appliance provides a means of using a pastille safely in this con-
dition, as it is only necessary to place it in the radiometer before use
and find the number which indicates its colour, and the full dose will
then be obtained when the pastille has turned to another tint nearly four
stages darker.
Fifi. 212. — Haiiipsou radiometer.
(Xewton and W^right.)
The whole is covered
292 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
It should be noted that, since the darker shades are not so readily
distinguishable as the lighter ones, it is not advisable to use the same pastille
more than four times in succession. Also that the colour-change of the
pastille is not exactly even, the earlier stages being slower in proportion to
the X-rays received ; in each exposure of a fresh pastille therefore it is better
to stop a little short of the fOTir-stage tint.
Further, the delicate gradations of tint available in this instrument have
made manifest the widely difierent interpretations put by different observers
on the same shade of colour. It is, therefore, wise for operators who have not
worked long enough with the new instrument to be sure of their own inter-
pretation of the finer shades, to stop short of what appear to be the four
complete grades in giving the epilation dose.
The Use of Filters
The question of filtration is an important one, and a diversity of opinion
exists as to the value of filters. So important is this question that a great
deal of discussion has taken place on the matter, but as yet no standard
filter has been agreed to. Some authorities are content to filter through
boiler felt, tungstate of calcium on lint, etc. Others use aluminium or leather.
The valuable work done on this question by Gauss and Lembeke of Freiburg
has seemed to prove that aluminium, when properly used, is undoubtedly
the best of all the filters. Felt, if used of sufficient thickness, is an excellent
filter, and in the hands of some may be sufficient.
The position of the filter in relation to the patient and the X-ray tube
is a point of the greatest importance. If it is close to the skin it must be
earthed. A layer of some material, such as lint, leather, or paper, must be
placed between the filter and the skin in order to absorb the secondary
radiations which are largely given ofi when aluminium is struck by X-rays.
It is a better plan to place the filter at the half distance between the anti-
cathode and the surface of the body, and even at this distance the skin should
be protected by felt or wash leather. A number of filters of varying thick-
nesses should be provided — from ^ mm. to 2 or 3 mm. form a good set.
These are used according to the object aimed at and the frequency of the
exposures.
After an extensive use of these filters the opinion has been arrived at
that no ill effects directly attributable to the secondary radiations from
aluminium have ever been obtained. Reactions have occurred, but they
have readily been traced to the frequency and length of the exposures,
and not to secondary radiations.
In the treatment of cancer by X-rays the writer is convinced that the
results obtained when using aluminium filters have been better than when
boiler felt or other materials were used. By gradually increasing the
thickness of the filter, it has been possible to give larger doses, and those
more frequently, than would have been possible without their use. He
THE USE OF FILTERS
293
attributes this improvemeut in results unreservedly to the help afforded by
these filters, and to the employment of very hard tubes, which are so generally
used when filters are employed.
It is remarkable to note how often the same area may be treated without
producing any marked reaction. When the reaction is not very great,
treatment can be steadily continued with an increasing thickness of filters,
whereas without their use it would have to be suspended for weeks and
valuable time would be lost.
The treatment may be continued even in the presence of marked re-
action if the healthy skin can be protected by thick layers of lead or lead
rubber, leaving only the diseased areas exposed to the treatment.
Filter Equivalents.— Dr. R. W. A. Salmond, working in the Research
Laboratory of the Cancer Hospital, conducted an exhaustive investigation
into the value of the various substances used for filtration of X-rays. His
results show a remarkable uniformity, and will be of the greatest use to
the radiotherapist. A tabulated list of his conclusions is given below :
Filtration Equivalents for Hard Therapeutic X-Ray Tubes
Aluminium.
Pure Com-
pressed Paper.i
Tanned
Leatlier.2
Chamois
Leather.
Boiler Felt. ^"Ss""
Lead Acetate
Lint.4
•5 mm.
1
2
3
3 mm.
7 „
13 „
17 „
3 mm.
7 „
13 „
16 „
10 mm.
18 „
35 „
59 „
13 mm. 2 layers
30 „ 4 „
67 „ 8 „
97 „ 12 „
1 layer
2 layers
4 „
6 „
The Selection of the Filter. — This largely depends upon the object
of the treatment. In superficial lesions a ^ mm. filter of aluminium will
suffice. When treatment has to be contmued over a long period, at frequent
intervals, then it is well to use a filter 1 mm. thick for several weeks, and
gradually increase up to 3 mm. The choice of filter in malignant disease is
fully discussed in the chapter on the treatment of mahgnant disease. In the
treatment of myoma uteri by the Freiburg technique the filter is 3 mm. thick.
This was found by Gauss to be the most useful one, and it afiords ample
protection when many ports of entry are employed. In these cases great
care must be exercised to prevent overlapping of the areas.
Additional Filters. — In addition to the metal filters, a number of
thick felt pads and a good supply of chamois leather will be found useful,
A supply of thick lead sheets should be at hand. Lead rubber is also very
useful for protecting the skin surrounding the area to be treated ; pieces
can be cut to the desired shape and size, and as they are easily sterilised
they may be used again for the same patient.
1 Known as London board. ^ As used for repairing boots.
3 Average hospital quality of lint thoroughly soaked in a saturated solution of sodium
tungstate, and allowed to dry in the air.
* Same similarly treated with lead acetate.
294
RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
The Choice of the X-Ray Therapeutic Tube
This is a most important matter. A great variety of tubes are in use, and
eacli type of tube has its enthusiastic advocates. The earlier therapeutic tubes
were of small diameter, and were exhausted to work with a small amount
of current in the secondary,
the resistance of the tube being
kept low in order to ensure a
large percentage of soft rays
discharging from the tube. The
bulb of the tube was made very
thin with the intention of
allowing as many of the soft
rays to pass as possible. Special
glass windows were introduced
opposite the anti -cathode to
allow still further the softest
rays to pass.
A gradual tendency has
asserted itself of late to use the
larger tubes, and a harder
quality of ray has taken the
place of the very soft one. The
latter was found to produce a
considerable degree of reaction
and even dermatitis without in
any way increasing the thera-
peutic action on the deeper
tissues. Even in the treatment
of ringworm it has been found
that satisfactory results are
obtained when a hard tube is
used, and the reaction obtained
is much less than
that from a soft
tube. And in
this disease the
use
filter
of I mm.
of alu-
FiG. 213. — Diagram to illustrate a method of circulating water to the anti
cathode of a tube. (Schall. )
The tube is shown unprotected. This would not occur in actual practice.
mmium gives
quite good re-
sults, with hardly
any reaction, and only slight delay in the epilation. So that even for
the most superficial conditions we may have to treat, a hard ray can
be employed and a filter used. The Coohdge tube promises to be
of great value in therapeutics. With its ready adjustment of quality
THERAPEUTIC TUBES
295
of ray emitted from the tuBe it should be possible to select the proper
degree of hardness at will, and arrange the tube to produce it for
Fk;. 214. — Macalaster Wiggiii X-ray tube.
an unlimited time. The new tube makes the reproduction of precisely
similar rays at a subsequent exposure possible. Many of the difficulties
at present existent in the control of X-ray tubes should disappear if this
Fig. 215. — Penetrans tube. (C. Andrews.)
tube answers to its expectations. For superficial work, such as treatment of
skin diseases and particularly ringworm, a small tube will do excellent work.
296 KADIATION THERAPEUTICS
It must be kept for sucli work, and should never be allowed to pass more than
1 milliampere of current. When carefully used it is possible to get a great
deal of work from these small tubes. For all deep work, where great pene-
tration is required, the larger tubes are absolutely necessary. These may be
of any type so long as they meet the requirements of the cases treated.
The water-cooled is a good example of the tube suitable for deep therapy.
There are two varieties of this tube :
(1) The Penetrans, a tube with a small bulb. Attached to it is a larger
accessory bulb, which favours the maintenance of the vacuum (see Fig. 215).
This tube makes it possible to get closer to the skin surface with the anti-
cathode. The tube is fitted with an osmosis regulator.
(2) The ordinary water-cooled tube is also very useful. Both of these
tubes may be fitted with a circulating flow of cold water by means of a
special apparatus.
Of the later types of tubes which are made to stand heavy currents for
long periods, the radiator tube of Cossar or Gundelach and the Macalaster
Wiggin are most useful (Fig. 214). Dessaeur (Fig. 216) has recently manu-
Air supply
Fig. 216. — Dessaeur therapeutic tube.
factured a tube which emits a particularly hard ray, and which he claims
to be approximately as good as the Gamma-ray of radium. The tube is
fitted with a spray which impinges a stream of water vapour upon the back
of the anti-cathode. If this tube possesses a fraction of the power which is
claimed for it, it should be a good tube for deep therapeutic work. But
in all probability the Coohdge tube will be the main stand-by of the radio-
therapist in the future.
The routine practice of the writer is to employ large tubes for practically
all therapeutic purposes. The advantages claimed for these tubes of greater
diameter are :
(1) The tube maintains its vacuum much longer than the smaller one,
and is not so easily thrown out of adjustment.
COOLING OF THE X-EAY TUBE 297
(2) It may be used witfr mucli heavier currents and for a longer time.
When thoroughly seasoned, a large tube may be run for hours without
showing any appreciable variation in hardness. This is most important
when large areas require treatment or when deep-seated tissues have to be
radiated.
Methods used for cooling the X-ray Tube. — In view of the increasing
importance of X-ray therapeutics, and the increased calls that are con-
sequently made upon the X-ray tube, all accessory methods of regulation and
cooling must be carefully considered. Of the cooling devices the two methods
most likely to be employed are :
(1) The water-cooled tube, with a constant circulation of water to the
anti-cathode.
(2) The air-cooled tube, where both the cathode and the anti-cathode
are cooled by a supply of air obtained from a motor-driven pump.
By means of these cooling devices and the use of a rhythmic interrupter,
it is possible to get therapeutic effects upon deep-seated tissues by means
of greatly increased dosage, both of time and hardness of ray. Five and
six milliamperes may be passed through a hard tube for a considerable
period.
The water-cooled tube is the most useful. With care in usage, this
tube will answer to all the requirements of present-day therapeutics. It
is very important that the tube should be gradually seasoned before it is
subjected to a severe test. If this is done, large currents may be passed
through it for long periods and the hardness of the tube be maintained.
Air-cooled tubes are useful in places where a large amount of work has to be
done. These, again, must be seasoned before they are severely tested. Of
radiator tubes, the Cyclops is one of the best for therapeutic work ; it
answers all the tests which can be applied to it.
Sometimes a new tube is hopelessly reduced in its first few runs with
the apparatus. Such a tube, if re-exhausted, frequently recovers and works
well for long periods. The chief point to remember when using an X-ray
tube is to work it carefully up to its highest degree of stability, this being
its best possible condition for heavy and prolonged work.
The appearance presented by the tube in action has been described in
the text and illustrated in the coloured frontispiece ; the pictures shown were
coloured from tubes made of glass prepared in Germany. Tubes made in
England showa different picture, the colour being blue instead of apple-green.
The difference in the fluorescence is due to the composition of the glass. It
is therefore necessary, when using tubes, made of English glass, to remember
the difference in the appearance of the active tube.
THE TREATMENT OF DISEASES OF THE SKIN
No greater testimony to the value of X-rays in the treatment of diseases
of the skin could be given than the fact that all skin hospitals have an X-ray
department, and that nearly every specialist includes a more or less perfect
installation in his armamentarium.
To get uniformly good results the technique must be thorough, and the
operator able to reproduce at will definite conditions of the X-ray tube.
Careful data must be kept in order to facilitate the reproduction of conditions
known to have been useful in previous similar cases.
It may be laid down as an axiom that it is the chronic conditions of skin
disease which receive most benefit from X-ray treatment, and that no case
of acute disease should be treated by radiation before time has been allowed
for the inflammatory processes to subside. An exception may be made if
malignant disease is present, as there the inflammatory processes, if carefully
helped by treatment, may lead to improvement.
Further, all previous treatment must be considered before X-ray treat-
ment is commenced, and preliminary treatment by iodine, mercurials, and
ointments containing metallic bases must be discontinued. The X-ray
treatment should not be started at once in these cases ; time must be allowed
for these substances to be removed from the skin. Internal treatment by
drugs need not necessarily be discontinued, though if it is desired to deter-
mine the value of X-rays unaided by these remedies they should also be dis-
continued. In some cases the iron and arsenic of tonics may, by circulating
in the blood, aid in the curative effects by their secondary radiations. This
point has been discussed elsewhere.
Subsequent to X-ray treatment, soothing lotions and ointments may be
employed, but care must be exercised in their selection and use. In some
cases the judicious use of a stimulating lotion or ointment may be necessary,
but as a general rule all that is required is the dusting of the part with a
powder containing starch and a little zinc oxide.
All crusts must, if possible, be gently removed from the surface to be
treated ; if a discharge is present the surface should be gently rubbed over
with a pad of cotton wool. The exposures necessary are purely a question of
experience, and the degree of filtration to be employed is determined in the
same way.
The important point is to obtain the maximum of benefit with the
minimum of harm, and it is well to bear in mind that serious harm may
be done by the injudicious use of X-rays.
298
TREATMENT OF DI8EA8E>S OF THE SKIN 299
Eczemata.— Subacute and chronic eczema will often clear up under
X-rays when all other methods fail. The first dose should be unfiltered
with the tube fairly soft and a 3- to 4-inch spark-gap. A Sabouraud pastille
should be coloured to the B tint, its distance from the skin being the half
distance of the skin from the anti-cathode. It should be noted that derma-
tologists who use X-rays in treatment advise | PD or less in some cases.
These minimum doses can be administered at frequent intervals. In this
connection it may be observed that Hampson, Batten, and others employ the
method by which the tube is brought nearer to the skin, and the pastille used
on the skin instead of at the half distance ; when using this method the
dose should be estimated by Hampson's radiometer. But beginners are
advised to adhere to the preceding method. Should the distance be greater
than usual the dose requires to be longer. It is important that the pastille
should always be at the half distance. Later doses should be given through
an aluminium screen of -5 mm. thickness.
This allows of more frequent exposures, and also of a harder ray being
used when deeper than superficial eiiects are necessary. When the cure
begins to progress the action may be continued by a dose once in three
weeks. After the disease has disappeared it is well to give a few
exposures at longer intervals to keep up the effect and prevent the
recurrence.
Psoriasis.— This very persistent disease will frequently clear up under
X-ray treatment. The technique is the same as that for eczema, except that
in most cases -5 mm. filter may be used from commencement of treatment.
The effect of the filter appears to be that the superficial reaction is avoided,
and the doses may be given more frequently. Large areas of psoriasis may
be treated once a week for three or four weeks ; later, once in three weeks
is sufficient. A general efiect as well as a local is often observed, patches
at a distance from the area treated slowly clearing up. From his experience
of X-ray treatment of psoriasis, the writer has arrived at the conclusion that
cases thoroughly treated by X-rays clear up fairly rapidly, and do not show
such a marked tendency to recur as they do when treated by other methods.
Prurig-O. — Some forms of prurigo benefit by X-ray treatment. The
technique employed should be similar to that for eczema.
Lichen.— Chronic forms are likely to improve under similar treatment.
' Leueoplakia.— Many cases of this disease have been treated by X-rays.
The writer is inclined to favour radium in these conditions, but good results
may be obtained by X-ray treatment. A filter should be employed. It is
well to remember that in many of these cases there is a syphilitic taint, and
that in others the condition is complicated by a cancerous tendency. When
the latter is present the case is likely to be very obstinate in its resistance to
treatment. Cases which show no evidence of improvement are probably
cancerous. The employment of hard tubes and adequate filtration, com-
bined with frequent dosage, may lead to a rapid improvement in cases where
no improvement had taken place under the lighter doses.
Trichophytia or Ringworm.— A number of diseases are due to the
300 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
presence in the horny structure of the skin of hypomycetes. The treatment,
where the scalp is involved, is specially dealt with. When situated in other
parts of the body characteristic chronic lesions are found. When situated
in hairy parts of the body X-rays are useful. The action of the rays consists
in epilation, and the removal of the parasite along with the hair. When the
condition involves the nails and other parts, a few X-ray exposures should
be tried, filtration and a hard tube being likely to prove useful.
The X-ray treatment of ringworm has been in general use since 1904.
A very large number of cases have been treated since that time, and it is
now generally recognised to be the most satisfactory treatment yet used for
this very intractable disease.
The technique employed has been carefully elaborated by Kienbock.
Dr. Adamson, who drew attention to this method in an article published in
the Lancet in 1909, has simplified the technique, and in this country his is
the one generally employed. It aims at the complete epilation of the scalp
in all cases treated. There are exceptions to this, however. When the area
of disease is localised to a small patch, it is well in some cases to treat the
patch, and trust to preventive measures so far as the rest of the scalp is
concerned. If the whole scalp is shaved at regular and short intervals
until all the affected hairs have fallen out, the disease may be effectually
checked. This is a good method to employ in young and dehcate children,
or in subjects who are suspected of being very susceptible to the action of
X-rays. That such a susceptibility does exist in a very small percentage of
individuals the writer is absolutely convinced. Every now and then, in
spite of the most careful technique, a case is noticed which gives a violent
reaction to minimum doses. Permanent alopecia may result in these cases.
This exceptional sensibility to rays has been met with in adults, where there
could have been no question of an overdose of X-rays, yet where a most
violent dermatitis was set up by a single dose, which was much less than
usual, the pastille being barely turned to the half tint, and the other factors,
i.e. spark-gap constant and the time well under what was known to turn a
pastille with the particular tube. Attention has been called lately to a
variation in the X-ray tube, which could not be recognised by the ordinary
methods, where the pastille was changed in normal time to the B tint, but
where, nevertheless, the reaction which followed was very great. In spite of
such evidence the writer has not the shghtest doubt that very rarely will a
case of extreme susceptibiHty be met with, and, so far as Ave know, there is no
method by which we can determine beforehand the existence of such a sus-
ceptibility. Such individuals may be known to respond to other forms of
skin stimulation. Thus there may be a history of reaction to sunlight or
to counter-irritants or to antiseptic lotions, etc. Cases which show these
characteristics should either be treated with extreme care or left alone.
Recognising that such cases must be met with in the practice of all
operators, and taking all possible care to exclude them from active treatment,
it must be admitted that X-rays are the best method we have for dealing
with ringworm.
TECHNIQUE OF RINGWORM TREATMENT 301
There are other points wiiich must be taken note of before we treat a
case with X-rays.
A careful enquiry must be made as to all previous treatment par-
ticularly in cases of long standing. Such cases have been frequently
treated with counter irritants, as mentioned on page 298. No patient
should be treated until all reaction from such treatment has subsided.
The existence of a septic condition of the scalp must be treated with
caution, otherwise violent dermatitis may result.
It must be borne in mind that the tendency of the disease, if of long
standing, is to produce a degree of alopecia which may be more or less
permanent. Such cases will often give rise to trouble and anxiety in the
after treatment.
Children who possess fair hair respond more readily to X-ray treatment
than those with dark hair, consequently the dosage must in the former case
be rather less than in the latter. Tuberculous conditions of the scalp are
met with in children suffering from ringworm. These local patches may
be stimulated and a degree of dermatitis set up quite independently of the
X-ray treatment. Such conditions, however, generally subside and heal
naturally.
The technique modified by Dr. H. G. Adamson is so complete and
practical that we quote it as a guide for the treatment of aU cases, with the
exceptions mentioned above :
Epilation by means of the X-rays is now fully estabhshed as the most
satisfactory method of treatment for ringworm of the scalp. By the introduc-
tion of Sabouraud's pastilles as a means of measurement of dosage, in trained
hands the dangers of the treatment have disappeared. By Sabouraud and
Noire's method, with circular locaHsers, ten to twelve exposures are necessary in
order to X-ray the whole scalp, and reckoning fifteen minutes for each exposure,
the time occupied in X-raying the whole scalp is from 3| to 4 hours. By the
method to be described the number of exposm^es necessary to epilate the whole
scalp is reduced to five, so that it is possible to irradiate the whole scalp in IJ
hours.
The essential featm-es are that no cyfindrical nor lead foil locaHsers are
used, but that adjacent X-ray applications are made in such a manner that
at those parts where overlapping does occur, the incidence of the rays is
so oblique, and so much further from the source, that no excessive dose is
given.
' I have used this 5-exposure method with perfect results, eVery part of the
scalp has received an even radiation, and the hair has fallen out completely,
without any sign of overlapping margins or areas with non-faUen hairs as evidence
of insufiicient exposure. There is no sign of erythema ; the regrowth of the hair
has been normal over the whole scalp.
The details of the method, as Dr. Adamson employed it, are as
follows :
1. The hair is clipped short over the whole head to facilitate operations.
2. Five points are marked out on the scalp with a blue skin pencil, as follows
(see Figs. 217, 218) :
302
RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
In the
middle line.
At the sides
of the scalp.
' Point A^ 1| to 2 inches behind the frontal margin of the hairy
scalp.
Point B, 1 to 1| inches above the centre of the flat area which
forms the upper part of the occiput.
Point C, just above the lower border of the scalp at the lower
part of the occiput.
( Point D, on the left side^ just above and in front of the ear.
{ Point E, on the right side, just above and in front of the ear.
Measured with a tape measure, the distance between any two of the five
points should be exactly 5 inches.
3. The five points are joined up by lines made with a skin pencil. These lines
should meet one another at right
angles. The mapping out of these
points and lines need not occupy
more than one or two minutes.
Fig. 217. — Diagram illustrating Dr.
Adamson's method. (Schall. )
Fig. 218. — Diagram showing centres of areas to be rayed.
(Schall.)
4. A Sabouraud pastille dose, with the anticathode at 6| inches from the
nearest point of the scalp, is given to the vertex, occiput, lower occiput, right
side, and left side in succession, taking the points A, B, C, D, and E as the centre
of each area to be rayed, and placing the tube so that the line joining the anti-
cathode and the nearest part on the scalp is at right angles to a similar line
joining the anticathode with each of the central points of the adjacent areas.
The lines which have been drawn on the scalp connecting the five points give
an indication of the direction in which the dose is to be aimed, i.e. of the position
of the tube in relation to the head. The applications to the vertex, upper
occiput, and the two sides are best made with the patient lying on a couch.
The forehead and eyes must be shielded by a piece of lead or protective rubber
during the exposure to the front of the vertex, and the ears and sides of the
face when the sides of the head are exposed. The fifth application, that to the
lower occiput, is best given with the patient sitting down and resting the fore-
head on a low table. A shield must be used to protect the neck.
In order to ensure fixing the anticathode at the correct distance from the
scalp during the exposure, three slender wooden pegs are fitted to the box which
encloses the tube. The pegs converge at their extremities to within ^ inch of
each other, and are of such a length that the part of the scalp which rests
against them is just 6|- inches from the anticathode of the tube. The pegs
TREATMENT OF RINGWORM 303
are made of soft wood, so as not to obstruct the passage of the rays
through tliem. The pegs rest against the sralp just over the blue marks A, B,
C, D, and E, according to the area to be rayed. The aperture in the box through
which the rays pass is 3 inches in diameter and 3^ inches from the anticathode,
so that at the level of the points of the pegs the rays diverge to a circle of 6
inches diameter, and in this way one avoids the escape of rays into the room or
towards the operator or on to the patient's shoulders, for a circle of this diameter
is blocked by the patient's head. At the same time this circle of irradiation allows
a sufficient margin for the necessary overlapping of the doses.
The essential points in this method are to direct each irradiation at right
angles to the direction of the irradiation of adjacent areas, and to aim, not at a
point in the centre of the vertex, of the lower occiput, or of the sides of the
scalp, but towards the outer margin of these areas, so that half the dose goes
on to the scalp and half on to the shield protecting the face and neck. If these
precautions be taken there is no risk of over-exposure at the overlapping margins
of the rayed areas. In practice the dosage works out so nicely that every part
receives an equal amount, and epilation is total and complete, without any-
where a sign of over- or under-exposure. In theory, according to the well-
known laws that the quantity of rays received at any point exposed varies (1)
inversely with the square of the distance from the source ; and (2) directly
with the size of the angle of incidence, the dose received by any part of the scalp
is found to be, with mathematical accuracy, one pastille dose.
In a case which has received a sufficient irradiation the hair begins to
fall out about the fourteenth day, and epilation should be complete in from
three to four weeks, a shght general erythema of the scalp, which soon sub-
sides, being frequently noticed.
The regrowth of the hair is a matter of time, and varies in different
subjects. It commences soon after the hair has fallen, and may be seen in
the form of a fine down all over the scalp, the complete regrowth being
generally well under way in three months from the time of treatment.
The variations may, however, be very great, e.g. the growth may be
unequal, this depending upon the vitality of the hair follicles. The previous
treatment may have devitahsed the follicles to a more or less marked degree.
Careful attention must be paid to the foUowing points ia all cases :
(1) The scalp must be shaved before the treatment is undertaken. This
enables the extent of the mischief to be determined, and facihtates the
marking of the scalp. It also allows the rays to penetrate freely, thick hair
acting as a filter, and preventing the thorough treatment.
(2) The scalp must be kept clean after the exposures ; the head should
be washed with soap and warm water two or three times a week. Until
all the hair has fallen out the case is still infectious ; it is, therefore, well
to use a simple ointment, such as boracic acid (weak), or even vaseline,
to prevent the spores from spreading, and possibly infecting other children.
A skull cap of Hnen is useful for this purpose and also serves to keep the
head warm. In some cases stronger antiseptic ointments may be used.
Folliculitis Barbae. — Satisfactory results maybe expected if the proper
technique is carried out. Care must be taken to regulate the dose, so that
no permanent damage to the hair folHcles results. It must be insisted upon
304 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
that no active local treatment be carried on simultaneously with the
X-ray treatment. A full erythema dose should be given unfiltered, and
three weeks allowed to elapse before a repetition is given. The affected
hairs fall out, and the condition rapidly improves. Subsequent treatments
should be given at three or four weeks' intervals. Generally one thorough
dose is sufficient to cure the condition.
Lupus Vulg'aris. — This condition readily responds to X-ray treatment.
Sometimes in remote situations of the body it will be necessary to resort to
radium because of the greater facihty this remedy offers in application.
When the disease is situated on an accessible part of the body, X-rays should
be the remedy employed.
Finsen light has been extensively used for the treatment of lupus, but
X-rays will do all that the light can do, and they are more easily employed.
The treatment is much shorter, and not nearly so tedious, and the results
are obtained in shorter time and are quite as good and lasting. Several cases
which did not respond to Finsen light treatment have cleared up after a
short course of X-rays. To select the proper degree of hardness of the ray
is the essential point, and filters should be used. After the lesion has healed,
several thorough doses should be given at intervals of several weeks, and
the patient should be kept under observation for a considerable length of
time in order that any recurrence may be detected at the earliest possible
date, and promptly treated. The results obtained by X-ray treatment are
excellent, and the degree of reparative change which the tissues show is
often remarkable.
Lupus Erythematosus is another condition which responds to ray
treatment. It is, however, a very chronic condition, and tends to spread
after treatment has ceased. The occurrence of telangiectasis is not un-
common after prolonged X-ray treatment in a percentage of cases treated.
Acne Vulg'aris. — When widely spread this condition is difficult to
treat, but several exposures given at intervals, covering the whole of the
affected area, will tend to a considerable improvement in the condition.
The technique is similar to that for eczema.
Verrucae Vulg'ari or Warts. — This condition is particularly amen-
able to X-rays, but there are other remedies which are quite as efficacious.
Carbonic acid snow and radium act well. Two or three exposures to X-rays
lead to a rapid disappearance of the warts.
Cheloid. — This condition is rapidly and permanently influenced by
X-ray treatment. As it occurs so frequently after operations for cancer and
other conditions, the radiotherapist has many opportunities of observing
its progress after treatment. The transformation of a thick fleshy cheloid
condition into a soft flexible scar is one of the most remarkable instances
of the reparative change which can be induced by ray therapeutics. The
relief obtained is also great, the scar becoming flexible, and the movements
of the limb rapidly improving The treatment requires to be thorough, and
the whole of the cheloid must be treated equally and regularly. A full
pastifle dose may be given without a filter, and at the end of fourteen days a
TREATMENT OF HYPERIDR08LS 305
second dose, with -5 mm. of aluminium as a filter, will induce the necessary
degree of reaction. This must be kept up by subsequent doses at regular
intervals, until the whole scar approximates to the normal. The results
obtained in extensive cheloid after burns are highly satisfactory, the irrita-
tion which is so common a symptom in these cases being quickly relieved,
often permanently. A soft pliable scar takes the place of the thickened and
unsightly one found before treatment.
Chronic Syphilitic Lesions of the Skin are often sent for X-ray
treatment, either with or without an established diagnosis. When very
obstinate, a few X-ray exposures will serve to stimulate the tissue changes
and tend to improvement, especially if antisyphilitic remedies are employed
at the same time. It should be noted that these cases frequently respond
actively to minimum doses, so care must be taken not to push the treatment
too far or too rapidly. Time must be allowed to observe how the condition
is likely to react before further doses are administered.
Simple Ulcers. — These readily respond to X-ray treatment. Un-
healthy sores will assume under treatment a healthy granulating appearance,
and in time will heal completely. The resulting cicatrix is generally a
■good one, and will in all probability give no further trouble.
Fissures in the skin and mucous membrane and fissured ulcers of the
tongue are frequently greatly improved by adequate treatment.
Chronic Ulcers which fail to improve under other remedies will show
a marked improvement when treated by a few pastille doses ; where granula-
tions are present, but flabby, the stimulating effect of the rays greatly helps
to an improvement in the general condition of the ulcer. Many cases heal
slowly with prolonged treatment.
Malig-nant Invasions of the Skin will be dealt with in the section on
the Treatment of Malignant Diseases.
Hyperidrosis. — Excessive sweating in various situations of the body is
a condition which up to the time of treatment by X-rays was the despair of
the skin specialist. Whatever its situation, it is a most unpleasant condition
to deal with, and a source of great annoyance to the patient. The common
situations are the axillae, the hands, the feet, and the head. Wherever it
occurs, it may be readily and permanently cured by X-ray treatment.
Howard Pirie drew attention to this method of treatment, and published a
number of cases which demonstrated the great value of X-rays in this dis-
ease. No more striking testimony to the efficacy of X-rays in therapeutics
could be obtained than the results of treatment of this condition.
The writer has treated a number of cases with invariably excellent
results. The marked improvement in the condition after a few exposures
is very gratifying.
Technique in the Axillce. — The arm is extended and placed over the head,
the axilla being fully exposed. A circular aperture is made in a piece of
lead rubber protective, and then a piece of lint is laid over the axilla, exposing
the whole of the apex and the axillary hair. The tube-box with the tripod
already described is brought close down to the skin, the apex of the tripod
20
306
RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
being on a level with the apex of the axilla. A full pastille dose is given, and
at the end of fourteen days another exposure is given, a -5 mm. filter being
employed for this and subsequent exposures. No improvement is noticed
until after the second or third administration, when a slight reddening of the
Fig. 219.
-Chronic ulcer of hand of several years' duration, showing improvemeut under
X-ray treatment.
skin results, there being also slight irritation at this stage. The sweating
slowly diminishes from this stage until a complete cure is obtained, four
applications being usually sufficient to cure the condition. It is better to
obtain the result gradually by the above method, though occasionally, when
the dose has been heavier, a marked improvement may follow the first
exposure. It is also well to aim at a partial effect only ; a slight degree of
sweating is practically a normal condition, and is what should be attained.
If the sweating is completely stopped, a dry condition of the skin may follow,
THE TREATMENT OF ENLARGED LYMPHATIC GLANDS 307
which may be troublesome. . It is frequently noticed that the axillary hair
is not completely epilated, which rather suggests that less than a full ery-
thema dose is sufficient to destroy a large percentage of the sweat glands.
The hands and feet may be treated in exactly the same way. The head
requires to be dealt with carefully, otherwise a troublesome alopecia may
result.
THE TREATMENT OF ENLARGED LYMPHATIC
GLANDS
Enlargred. Glands may be described as (a) simple inflammatory ;
(b) tuberculous ; (c) lymphadenomatous ; (d) lympho-sarcomatous ; (e)
carcinomatous ; the two latter being generally secondary to a lesion else-
where.
Inflammatory Glands which come for treatment are generally chronic ;
they readily respond to the X-ray, and diminish rapidly in size.
As these glands are frequently secondary to septic conditions elsewhere,
a search should be made for the primary lesion, and this should be treated
as well as the glands. If treated early, before suppuration has occurred,
these glands will sometimes subside. If suppuration is present, the abscess
should be opened, and afterwards a number of X-ray exposures will greatly
facilitate the repair of the parts. This is particularly appreciable where an
intractable sinus exists. It may be injected with bismuth emulsion, and a
thorough irradiation given.
The treatment of Tuberculous Glands by X-rays offers a good alterna-
tive to that of removal by operation, and when operation is recommended a
few preliminary exposures should be given in order to induce inflammatory
changes around the glands.
Glands, which on account of the extensive nature of the condition
renders operation a serious matter, either because of the wide distribution
of the swelling, or on account of suppuration already well advanced, may
be treated vigorously by weekly doses. In the absence of more operative
treatment suppuration should not be a contra-indication to X-ray treatment;
such treatment should rather be pushed vigorously. When pus has formed
it should be evacuated and the treatment continued. It is remarkable how
some of the cases improve from the commencement of X-ray treatment.
The action is undoubtedly a general and local one, the former appearing to
exert a tonic effect upon the tissue metabolism.
Lymphadenomatous Glands are frequently treated by X-rays, and
l)ehave in much the same manner as tuberculous glands, sometimes disappear-
ing rapidly or diminishing to a very small size. Their peculiar characteristic
is that they tend to reappear, or rather, a group of glands will diminish in
size, and after treatment is discontinued for a time the lumps become
evident again, but whether they are the same glands or others which have
become involved is a matter of conjecture. The practical point is that this
308 EADIATION THEEAPEUTICS
type of gland is particularly amenable to X-ray treatment, but tbe treatment
cannot be definitely described as a curative one untU months or years bave
elapsed without recurrence. The experience of most workers is that ulti-
mately recurrence takes place, and the patient dies from the disease. The
probability is that a percentage of the cases which are cured may have been
of the simple inflammatory type.
The treatment must be thorough ; areas in which glands are evident
should be treated. It is a good plan to treat all the areas involved in rota-
tion, taking care to cover as wide an area as possible at each treatment.
In this way it is possible to secure a rapid response to treatment. The
irradiation should be continued long after the patient appears to have
recovered. It is possible that in a number of the cases where there has been
recurrence, efficient after-treatment has not been carried out. A dose once
a month for many months will not harm the patient, and it may possibly
keep up the beneficial action of radiations.
Eecently, by using hard rays and aluminium filters, 1 mm. to 2 mm.
thick, it has been possible to give more frequent doses, and a marked improve-
ment in results has been obtained.
Enlarged Sarcomatous Glands may be a manifestation of lympho-
sarcoma or secondary to a primary sarcoma in an adjacent part of the body.
In the former, the treatment of the local condition must be pursued as well
as of the deposits in the mediastinum. Frequent dosage with hard rays is
indicated. The glands slowly diminish in size, but never quite return to
the normal condition ; sooner or later the glandular enlargement increases,
and in spite of treatment the patient succumbs to the disease.
Secondary deposits of sarcoma in the glands yield to treatment for a
time. Several cases which have been treated by X-rays and radium have
remained well for several years. The latter agent appears to have a decidedly
beneficial action upon sarcoma.
Enlarged Carcinomatous Glands are generally secondary to a
primary lesion in another part of the body, and may occur in any part of
the lymphatic system. The primary lesion will be found in some adjacent part
or organ. They differ from the preceding types of gland by slow growth,
are generally not numerous, and may be confined to one particular chain of
lymphatic distribution, corresponding to the site of the primary lesion. They
do not tend to suppurate. The skin may at a later stage become involved,
and ulceration follow. The response to treatment is slow, marked inflam-
matory surface reaction being often necessary before an appreciable effect
is noticed upon the size of the glands. In these cases it must be recognised
that if benefit is to be received the possibility of damage to the skin must
be partially disregarded, though all precautions must be taken to avoid it or
reduce it to a minimum.
But several cases have remained stationary until a degree of ulceration
of the skin surface has been brought about. This will gradually heal, and
at the same time the glands slowly subside. They seldom disappear entirely,
but appear to become quiescent. In several patients, where such a change
PLATE LIX. — Rodent Ulcers treated with Radium, X-Rats, and CO.,.
a, Rodent ulcers on left side of face ; these rapidly healed after radium exposures and remained healed.
6, Small rodent ulcer of right side of nose, healed all but a small area at the lower edge of the ulcer ; this
has been most intractable to X-rays, radium, and COg.
KODENT ULCER 309
has been induced, it has been possible to remove the glands surgically, and
continue the X-ray treatment afterwards.
The condition of a patient so treated is infinitely better than when the
glands are allowed to enlarge slowly, involve the skin, and ulcerate. Once
a carcinomatous gland arrives at the stage where it breaks down all barriers
and reaches the surface, no amount of X-ray or other treatment has any
effect. The technique is somewhat similar to that for tuberculous glands.
Weekly doses with filtered rays may be employed, taking care to cover a wide
area, and changing the area as frequently as possible. In advanced cases,
with groups of greatly enlarged glands, it will be necessary to administer
heavy doses rapidly. This may be safely done when the rays are filtered
through three or more millimetres of aluminium. Doses of 20 or 30 X
Kienbock may be given to numerous small areas of skin covering the en-
larged glands. In this way large aggregate doses of 200 to 400 X may be
given to a group of glands at one sitting. After a suitable interval, depending
upon the degree of reaction and the urgency of the symptoms, the dose may
be repeated.
THE TREATMENT OF RODENT ULCERS
The treatment of rodent ulcer by X-rays has yielded many good results.
When the disease is superficial a marked improvement is quickly obtained.
The tendency in all cases is for recurrence to show itself, and adequate steps
must be taken to endeavour to prevent this recurrence. This can best be
done by thorough prophylactic treatment after the ulcer has disappeared,
though even then disappointment will occasionally be met with. In some
cases, in spite of most thorough prophylactic treatment, the scar breaks
down and the resulting ulcer spreads.
When bone or cartilage becomes involved the di£B.culty of healing the
condition is, great. Sometimes the ulcer heals and remains well for long
periods. This indicates that in the particular case adequate treatment has
been carried out. The exact rationale of the treatment is somewhat difficult
to follow. Why some cases do well and others do not is not yet understood.
Two cases may be quoted to illustrate this point.
Rodent Ulcer on Left Side of Face. — Mrs. E.^ 57 years of age. From December
1908 to March 1910 she received about fifty radiations. The condition gradually
improved^ but as soon as treatment was stopped the growth resumed an active
form. On March 11, 1910, she had a short exposure with radium. The part
treated improved greatly for a time. The ulcer was ultimately excised. This
is a type of slow-growing rodent ulcer which does not respond readily to any form
of treatment.
A Small Rodent Ulcer on the Right Side of the Face in line with the Orhit. —
R.M., 41 years of age. The growth had been noticed for twelve months prior to
treatment. It had been cauterised on three occasions without any apparent
benefit. From September to December, 1909, sixteen radiations. The surface
310 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
healed over and had a depressed appearance in the centre of the cicatrix. The
edges remained smooth. It remained well until April 1910^ when the anterior
edge resumed activity ^ and slowly spread. Several radiations resulted in a cure
for a time at least. The last treatment given resulted in a fairly active derma-
titis, which seemed to have the effect of healing the active portion of the growth.
This case responded remarkably well to X-rays, and affords a great contrast to
the preceding one. It illustrates the point that the earlier these ulcers are sub-
jected to X-ray treatment, the better is the prospect of a cure.
Very superficial iilcers heal readily and remain healed for long periods.
The position of the ulcer appears to determine the result in some cases ;
when situated on the cheek, away from the orbit and clear of mucous
membrane, the ulcer will readily yield to treatment ; when situated near
an angle at the junction of skin and mucous membrane, such as the angle of
the mouth or orbit, the difficulty of equal and adequate treatment becomes
greater. It is often impossible to get the rays equally spread over the whole
of the ulcer, and if there is inequality of the surface the same appears to
apply. It is also possible that many of the cases which do not heal under
treatment have been treated with the wrong quality of ray. We must
remember that the X-ray beam is heterogenous. Consisting as it does
of a bundle of rays of unequal penetration, the beam from any given tube
may contain rays in the discharge of from, say, 1 to 12 Bauer. The pre-
ponderance of value 4 may be sufficient for the stimulation of the tissues
of a particular ulcer while it would have no effect upon another. It appears
reasonable to assume that in some instances we accidentally use the ray of
the greatest value for the case under treatment, while on another occasion,
using the same tube in the same condition on another case, the result will
be quite different. It would appear that up to the present the bulk of the
therapeutic work done with X-rays has been more or less haphazard. This
no doubt explains the varied results obtained. An effort must be constantly
made by each operator to standardise his apparatus in such a way that he
may be able to produce at a given time, approximately at least, a particular
quality of ray for a special purpose.
The frequency of the applications must also have a direct influence on
the result, some operators preferring to wait three or four weeks before
repeating an exposure, while others do so at the end of a week. The obvious
course to pursue is to observe carefully the condition requiring the treat-
ment. If the ulcer is growing rapidly extreme measures must be adopted.
The dose should be the maximum possible and should be repeated at the
earliest convenient date. The edges of the ulcer may be given an excessive
dose by protecting the less active part with lead rubber ; the healthy skin,
all but that close to the edge of the growth, must also be guarded. The
degree of reaction induced will depend upon several factors, (a) the duration
of the exposure, (6) the hardness of the X-ray bulb, (c) the filtration employed ;
each of these factors must receive special consideration.
In superficial conditions the first dose should be given unfiltered, and
a full pastille dose given. If possible, it is well to wait for fourteen days
PLATE LX. — Cases of Rodent Ulcers Treated with Radium.
a, b, Illustrates a case which has resisted all forms of treatment, including X-rays, radium, COo, and
mercury vajjour lamp ; several intensive doses of X-rays appeared to induce healing of the ulcer for a time.
Recurrence took place at the lower edge, this ra^jidly extended until the lower half became ulcerated.
c, d, A case which yielded to treatment, c, Before treatment, d, Towards the end of treatment the
ulcer completely healed ; recurrence after many months quickly responded to further treatment. The patient
has had several recurrences, each of which quickly heals after radium has been applied.
RODENT ULCER 311
before repeating the exposure. This allows the operator to determine the
degree of reaction the tissues possess. If, however, the growth threatens
to spread more rapidly, a further exposure must be given at once, and this
one should be filtered. It is well to bear in mind that it is possible to
stimulate a growth by X-rays and to get a harmful rather than a beneficial
influence exerted upon it.
If, in spite of ordinary full doses of X-rays, the ulcer goes on steadily
increasing, what more can be done ? The obvious course is to increase
the dosage further. In special cases where time appears to be of value two
or more pastille doses may be given at once, the healthy parts being well
guarded. The case illustrated shows the value of this method (Plate LX.,
Fig. a). A rodent ulcer on the right side of the forehead resisted all forms of
treatment by X-ray, radium, carbonic acid, and high frequency. It gradually
extended, especially at its lower border. Two unfiltered doses were given,
and at the end of a week two more were administered, treatment being then
suspended for several weeks. The ulcer healed over the whole of its surface,
a thick crust forming at the lower angle. The patient imagined he was cured
and did not return for more than three months ; at that time the crust formed
at the lower edge of the ulcer had led to ulceration below its surface, which
was slowly spreading. Further treatment led to a marked improvement in
the condition, but completely failed to heal the ulcer.
After an ulcer has been healed it is necessary to continue treatment.
Repeated doses may be administered at intervals of several weeks, filters
being employed and a harder tube used. By these means it may be hoped
to obtain an efiect upon the deeper structures which may contain renmants
of growth. The fibrosis induced by treatment should arrest the growth
of these remnants.
In obstinate cases it is wise to vary the remedy employed. Thus
radium may be used or carbon dioxide apphed to parts of the ulcer. The
high-frequency current will sometimes give the necessary stimulus to parts
of the ulcer. A preHminary exposure to the mercury vapour fight, followed
by X-ray dosage, sometimes aids the process of healing. The fight appears
to increase the superficial circulation, by congesting the parts ; the secondary
radiations may be induced by the direct action of the X-rays on the fluids
circulating in the vessels of the growth.
■ The distinction drawn between rodent ulcer and epithefioma is more
or less an arbitrary one, many of the ulcers which we call rodents reaUy
being from the beginning epitheliomata, this difierence, no doubt, in part
accounting for the wide variations in the result of treatment, the epithefio-
mata being more resistant to treatment by radiations. The latter growths
tend to spread to the deeper parts and involve the tissues below the skin.
When cartilage and bone become affected the difficulty in inducing heafing
is greater. Much more penetrating rays should be employed, and longer
and more frequent exposures given. In some cases it is well to combme
surgical measures with the X-ray treatment. When possible, the more
or less complete eradication of the ulcer, followed by thorough X-ray
312 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
treatment, appears to be the most rational method that can be
employed.
The Treatment of Epitheliomata
These tumours, when seen early, and more especially when they involve
mucous membrane, should be promptly excised. After-treatment by X-rays
should be employed, and should cover a wide area to include the lymphatic
distribution of the affected part. Should the patient refuse operation,
radium should be the next choice, and faihng the possibiUty of treating by
this remedy, X-rays should be used, or radium and X-rays together or
alternately. It is important to keep the patient under observation for a
lengthy period.
Epithelioma involving the skin only is more amenable to X-rays and
radium. A few exposures should be given previous to operation, if this
be decided upon, and continued after the removal of the active growth.
THE TREATMENT OF SARCOMATA
Sarcomata, other than glandular, may require to be treated. Such,
particularly the round-celled variety, when situated in the soft parts of a
limb or in bone, respond readily to treatment, and diminish in size or may
to all outward observation disappear. The tendency is for recurrence
within a year or so, and often in the deeper structures, particularly in the
mediastinum or lungs. The after-history of these cases is very little, if any,
worse than in the operative cases, where recurrence is almost certain to take
place within two years.
The advantage of the operative method over treatment by radiations
is that the patient is saved from the local discomfort of a growth which
in the end breaks down and forms a sloughing ulcerated sore. Two cases
may be quoted to illustrate this point, one that of a girl who had a primary
sarcoma of the humerus which practically cleared up under X-ray treatment.
Recurrence took place in the left hip-joint, but before the patient died the
primary tumour reasserted itself and formed a large sloughing sore.
In the second case a primary sarcoma of the right humerus was removed
by operation, together with the shoulder girdle and upper limb. Recurrence
took place after two years in the mediastinum and lungs.
THE TREATMENT OF CARCINOMATA
The majority of the cases of malignant disease treated by X-rays
belong to this group. Marked improvements have taken place in results
in recent years. This has been largely due to two factors : (a) a better
technique, and (6) the earlier treatment of many of the patients.
The improvement in X-ray technique has been very great of late years,
the use of larger tubes of great penetrative power, together with an improve-
THE TREATMENT OF CARCINOMATA 313
ment in the construction of "coils, transformers, and accessory apparatus,
having made it possible to greatly increase the dose given. The use of
filters of a thickness of -| to 3 mm. of aluminium, or its equivalent in other
materials, led to the use of a penetrating ray which could be used to give
large doses with practically no effect upon the skin surface. These large
doses have been extensively used in the treatment of carcinoma, with very
marked improvement in the results obtained. The beneficial effects of
X-rays upon uterine myomata encouraged workers to try similar methods
in the treatment of all kinds of carcinoma, both superficial and deep. If
the skin surface is divided up into small areas, the dosage in a particular
case may be increased to a marked extent ; 1000 X Kienbock may be
administered in a short time to a tumour. In deep-seated carcinoma of
the uterus the treatment employed should be administered by two routes —
the perineal and the abdominal.
The methods of treatment may be divided for practical purposes into
four main groups :
(a) Prophylactic, before and after operation ;
(6) Curative efforts in primary growths, which should consist of thorough
irradiation of the gro^wth, enlarged glands and the adjacent lymphatic area ;
(c) Treatment of recurrences of all degree ;
(d) Palliative treatment of cases where all hope of cure has gone.
These groups require lengthy discussion.
Before Operation. — In all cases where time permits a number of
X-ray exposures should be given. The first exposure may be given un-
filtered and later ones should be passed through -5 mm. of aluminium.
There should be no delay in performing the operation, but, usually,
a few days elapse between diagnosis and operation, and during these one
dose at least may be administered. The whole area of the growth should
be well irradiated and then the area of lymphatic distribution spreading
from the growth should be fully exposed. Thus in carcinoma of the breast
the whole breast may be treated with one dose, or, if the tumour is large,
the breast may be divided into four areas and four exposures given. This
method will be described later. The axilla should get a full dose. This
exposure will have the efiect of epilating the axillary hair and will exert
an action upon the sweat glands, causing a diminution of the secretion of
sweat, an effect advantageous in keeping the axilla clean after the operation.
When time permits a second filtered dose may be given over the whole of
the areas previously treated.
Post-Operative Treatment. — In cases which have had the preliminary
exposures this should be continued as soon after operation as possible. In
cases which have not had the preliminary treatment, the same routine should
be employed. The following description therefore applies to both cases.
As soon as possible after the operation the patient should be irradiated
over the whole of the areas already described. It is of extreme importance
that a thorough routine method should be employed. The difiiculty hes
in the fact that unless great care is exercised to irradiate the whole area
314 KADIATION THEEAPEUTICS
equally, portions of the surface may not get a full dose. In the experience
of the writer recurrence has taken place in areas which have escaped treat-
ment. An attempt must be made to elaborate a technique which will give
an equally distributed dose all over the breast area, axilla, supra-clavicular
region, and well down below the costal margin. A method similar to
that used in the treatment of the scalp for ringworm might be employed.
The whole of the area to be treated should be mapped out and central
points selected which will get the maximum dose. Spreading from these
points to the periphery of the area the rays diminish in a definite pro-
portion. The peripheral areas of each exposure should overlap so that that
part of the skin receives a half dose from each adjoining exposure.
Points should be selected at equal distances in the mid-mammary
line, extending from the costal margin to the clavicle and upwards, to take
in the supra-clavicular region. A number of corresponding points should
be marked out in the mid-axillary line, and, each point being taken as the
centre of the exposure, it is possible to give an equally distributed dose over
the whole area. The axilla should in addition have a dose from its posterior
aspect.
The first series of doses may be given unfiltered. At the end of a week a
second dose is given, using a -5 mm. aluminium filter. Later doses should
be administered according to the degree of reaction which results. In all,
twelve exposures to the whole area should be given, the later irradiations
being given at longer intervals. Towards the end of the series the interval
should be about three weeks, and for the later doses thicker filters and hard
tubes should be employed.
At the end of the dozen exposures the patient should be allowed to
cease coming for treatment, but should be kept under observation for
several months in order that the earliest appearance of recurrence may be
promptly dealt with.
A useful routine for the use of filters is to give the first dose unfiltered,
the second, third, and fourth with -5 mm. filter, and then to proceed to
1 mm. for three or four doses, and 2 mm. for the later exposures, the object
of the filter being to protect the skin as much as possible, and to exercise
an action on the deeper structures by penetrating to the deeper layers of
the sldn and the deep tissues.
The results of prophylactic treatment by X-rays are encouraging. The
effect is marked from the first. The patient has less pain, the movements of
the parts are facilitated, and the scars are more pliable at an earlier date than
when no treatment is carried out. The general tonic action of X-rays upon
the metabolic processes is noticed, patients feel well and the general health is
improved by the treatment. That recurrence may be prevented is fairly
well established, especially in view of what we know to occur when early
recurrences are treated. These undoubtedly disappear after treatment,
and it is logical to assume that remnants of cancer left in the wound may
disappear in the reparative changes set up in the surrounding tissues by
X-ray treatment when the treatment has been efficiently carried out.
"^-^^
PLATE LXI. — Caecixomata treated by X-bats.
a. Primary growth, a large ulcerated carcinoma of right breast wliich iniijroved after being treated by a
prolonged series of X-ray exijosures.
h, Kecurrent growth in scar after operation for removal of carcinoma of right breast. Successful treat-
ment by X-rays.
This is one of the very early cases treated at the Cancer Hospital, when small unmeasured doses were
given at frequent intervals over a long period of time.
INOPERABLE CARCINOMA 315
Treatment of Inoperable Carcinoma. — The technique in the treat-
ment of primary grovvtlis, unsuitable for operation, being similar, the descrip-
tion under (a) applies to both groups. A classification is necessary in order
to describe fully the methods employed.
(a) Large inoperable cancer of the breast without ulceration is fairly
common. An attempt should be made to reduce the tumour by treatment
to an operable condition. When the breast is very large a system of treat-
ment may be used which will give the dosage on a limited area. The breast is
divided into four or more areas by means of a lead-rubber screen marked out
as follows : A square of thin material is cut to cover the whole breast and a
margin of tissue beyond; this is divided into four equal parts, and one segment
is cut out. Two points are marked on the skin at the upper aspect, and
the upper limits of the screen are placed on these points. An exposure is
given through the segment which has been removed. The screen is then
moved round one segment and the exposure repeated. This is done until
the four areas have been treated, the tube in each instance being directed
towards the centre of the breast. This method has been successful in several
cases, the tumour rapidly diminishing in size.
The gratifying results obtained in the treatment of uterine fibromyomata
by the intensive method of dosage have led to marked improvements in the
technique of the treatment of carcinomata. A filter of 3 mm. is used, a
secondary filter consisting of two or more layers of loofah sponge enclosed in
several layers of lint being used to protect the skin. The area to be treated
is marked out into a number of small squares. Lead is used to protect the
adjacent areas during the exposure. As many as twenty areas may be
mapped out to cover the region requiring treatment, each area receiving from
10 to 20 X on the Kienbock scale. In this way a relatively large dose is
administered to the afiected area. The tube used is of the hardest possible
penetration, 10-12 Wehnelt. The patient should be kept at rest for a day
or two after the administration of the rays. The dosage may be repeated in
from two to three weeks, or at shorter intervals if there are no untoward
symptoms shown. These large doses of X-rays appear to exercise a marked
influence over the diseased tissues. Continental workers claim marked
improvement in cases treated by the intensive method. It is possible that
mth further improvement in X-ray tubes, the results produced may be
still greater.
Exposures through thick filters may be given twice a week in serious
cases. Several layers of chamois leather should be laid upon the skin in
order to prevent secondary radiations damaging the skin.
(6) Ulcerated growths should be treated by a modified method. An ulcer-
ated surface will stand more treatment than the unbroken skin, and there
is no need to attempt to protect it. The healthy skin around the ulcerated
surfaces, all but a narrow margin surrounding the ulcer, should be protected.
Frequent irradiations are given to this area until it shows signs of
breaking down. In the end the cancer mass sloughs and leaves healthy
tissue behind, this closing up and occasionally healing.
316 KADIATION THERAPEUTICS
The illustrations shown are from two cases treated in this manner.
Figs, a, b, c, and d in Plate LXII. are from a case treated on the lines
indicated above. They show the progressive changes induced, viz. sloughing
and gradual repair of the resulting ulcer. At one stage this tumour received
radium treatment.
Fig. a in Plate LXI. is from another case which is showing marked
improvement under X-ray treatment of the intensive type.
The treatment of recurrent cancer when the growth has reached a large
size may be carried out on precisely the same lines as that for primary
cancer. Many cases could be quoted where undoubted benefit has resulted
from thorough X-ray treatment.
(c) Recurrent Cancer. — These cases form a large percentage of the
patients one is called upon to treat. The condition varies from the
melon-seed variety to large nodules of cancer. All cases do not respond
equally to treatment, a number going steadily from bad to worse. As a
general rule, the instances which occur in young women under 35 years of
age do not respond well to treatment ; after that age, if treated early, the
chance of a good result is much greater.
In this class of case the treatment should be pushed vigorously until
a marked reaction is obtained all over the affected surface and well beyond
it. When the reaction shows itself the seed-like bodies slowly subside.
Repeated crops may require to be treated in the same patient. Several
cases of this type have been undergoing X-ray treatment for two or three
years at regular intervals.
THE TREATMENT OF ENLARGEMENT OF THE
PROSTATE GLAND
Of late years this condition has been treated by X-rays and radium.
The enlargement, if simple, is an hyperplasia of the glandular elements,
a condition which should be amenable to therapeutics. It must not be
overlooked, however, that in some of these cases there is a large fibrous
element in the growth, and this may be fairly dense in structure. Further,
these conditions may be complicated by the presence of stones or calcified
matter in the substance of the gland. The presence of a commencing new
growth has also been shown in what was otherwise to all appearances a
simple enlargement of the gland. Cases for X-ray treatment must therefore
be carefully selected in order to avoid bringing discredit upon the method
of treatment. No doubt can exist as to the brilliant results obtained in
this condition by operative measures, and the writer is convinced that
X-ray or any other palliative form of treatment will never take the place
of early operation.
With the reservation indicated, good results have been obtained
by both X-rays and radium. It is a matter of general observation that
when so treated the condition of patients is ameliorated, the control of
micturition is re-established in some cases, and prolonged treatment results
PLATE LXIL— Stages in the Treatment of an Atrophic Scirrhous Cancer of the Breast.
a, Before treatment. 6, Growth commencing to ulcerate, c, Growth nearly all gone. d, Healed.
Recurrence took place at the lower end of the scar, and the patient is still nnder treatment.
EXOPHTHALMIC GOITRE 317
in a marked diminution in the. size of the gland. Large prostates may by
this line of treatment be reduced to an operable size. Even in the cases
which are operable, circumstances may exist which indicate a palliative line
of treatment rather than the radical one of removal. The patient may
refuse to take the risk of an operation, or his condition may be such that an
operation would be extremely hazardous.
The technique is similar to that for other deeply-seated structures ;
two routes are available, both of which may be employed in the one case.
The perineal route is preferable. Hard tubes should be employed and
filters used from the commencement of treatment. It is important to prevent
dermatitis as long as possible in order to get a sufficient dosage into the deep
structures.
Commencing with a 2 mm. filter, a pastille dose at the half distance
may be given weekly. The pastiUe is used on the distal side of the filter,
and the patient, therefore, receives a full dose at each sitting. After three
or four doses with this thickness of filter it will be found necessary to increase
the thickness to 3 mm. and later to 4 or more.
The skin must be carefully watched for reaction. Should this be
excessive the treatment must be suspended for a time by that route, and
the suprapubic route may then be utilised. A compressor should be
employed and the tube brought well down towards the pubis, a
cyhnder compressor being a good one to use. The gland can thus be
irradiated from above for several doses, and then the perineal route can be
tried again. In this way it is possible to keep on with treatment for a
considerable length of time. Improvements generally begin to show after
three or four doses, and as a result of the increase of comfort the general
health of the patient improves greatly.
An alternative method of treatment, and one likely to take its place,
is the following : a large amount of current, 4 to 5 miUiamperes, is passed
through a hard tube, 10 Bauer, a 3 mm. aluminium filter being employed,
and the dose measured by Eaenbock paper. At least 10 X on the skin surface
is given, the perineal and suprapubic routes being employed with as many
ports of entry as possible, so as to get in the maximum dose to the gland.
THE TREATMENT OF EXOPHTHALMIC GOITRE
The routine medical treatment by drugs has proved to be merely
palliative, and operative treatment has not been marked by any striking
successes. X-rays appear to offer a chance of better results than either
of the two older methods. The rationale of the treatment by X-rays is
difficult to understand. A purely local effect can easily be produced, but
there must be a deeper and further-reaching influence induced by the ray to
explain the undoubted improvement which takes place in these cases. In
a disease which, grave in itself, is frequently accompanied by other conditions,
such as rheumatoid changes in the joints and conditions associated with
rheumatism, it is unwise to claim too much for X-ray treatment, yet in
318 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
suitably selected cases good results may be confidently expected. The
technique employed must be thorough. The gland when greatly enlarged
offers a good field for the preliminary exposures, which should be given once
a week and continued steadily until marked improvement results. Should
reaction lead to a suspension of the local treatment, the radiations may be
continued on the surrounding areas, particularly on the region of the cervical
sympathetic. The action is apparently a general one rather than a local,
and therefore the area of exposure need not be limited. An occasional
dose may be applied to each axilla alternately.
Does treatment by radiations lead to changes in the gland secretion
or in the blood serum, thus producing an amelioration of the distressing
symptoms, or does the treatment restore the function of the gland to a
normal condition ? Whatever happens there is no doubt that many of
the cases treated by X-rays are restored to a normal state of health.
The aim of treatment should be to slowly induce a return to the normal,
consequently it will be found advantageous to proceed slowly with the treat-
ment ; in cases which are not very acute a dose once a week to one side of
the neck will suffice. Alternate doses should be given to either side of the
neck. It will be an advantage to employ filters, commencing at 1 mm. thick
and increasing as the occasion indicates. Should the symptoms be very acute
the dosage may be increased both in frequency and strength. A hard ray is
employed, and this should be filtered through 3 mm. of aluminium. Three
areas may be marked out over the enlarged gland, and each is given 10 X
Kienbock. This may be followed in a week or ten days by another applica-
tion. In more severe cases, which are confined to bed, it is a good plan to
use radium rather than X-rays,
From experience of X-ray treatment in other diseases it would appear
that, in order to maintain the improvement, it will be necessary to give
regular doses of X-rays at intervals for a long period of time. Dr. Florence
Stoney in an interesting paper quotes results which are encouraging. She
advocates X-ray treatment in preference to operation. In 47 cases, 7 gave
up treatment too soon, 14 were completely cured, and 22 derived great
benefit. Under treatment which is pushed to the point of dermatitis, the
pulse comes down to normal, the goitre in many cases, and the exophthalmos
nearly always, disappearing. Tremor and perspiration are slow to yield
but do so eventually.
The writer is strongly of opinion that this form of treatment should
have a trial in all cases, even when operation is contemplated.
THE TREATMENT OF UTERINE FIBROMATA
The value of radio -therapeutic measures in diseased conditions is clearly
demonstrated by the success which has been achieved in the treatment of
uterine fibroids. These conditions would appear to offer an ideal field for
the action of radiations, as from our knowledge of their action on superficial
structures we find that haemorrhage may be checked and fibrous and cellular
UTERINE FIBROMATA 310
structures readily reduced in, size. The difficulty up to recent times has
been to act on deep-seated structures in such a way that reduction in size
of tumoui's may be induced without causing permanent damage to the skin
which has to be traversed by the rays before the underlying organs can be
reached. The credit of having successfully worked out a technique which
enables us to attain that end is wholly due to continental operators. Albers
Schonberg, Haenisch, Bordier, the members of the Freiburg school, and
others have elaborated techniques which may be safely ased.
Whichever method we employ, and this point is so important that the
principal of these will be described in detail, it is essential that the work
should be done by a skilled radiologist in conjunction with a gynaecologist,
and not entrusted to inexperienced workers. Routine detail work must
be done in every case if success is to be attained. All cases must not be
treated indiscriminately, but a careful selection should always be the rule.
Indications for Treatment in Fibroma Uteri. — The indications
for radio-therapeutic treatment depend upon the following factors :
(1) Age of the Patient. — All authorities agree that patients under 40
years of age should not be treated by X-rays, because before that age the
treatment for obtaining an artificial menopause would be too long and tedious.
Other factors to be considered at that age are obvious. The upward age-
limit is difficult to fix. The patient should be of such an age that her monthly
periods still persist, or at all events these should not have ceased longer than
a year. It is therefore between the ages of 40 and 52, or at most 55, that
radio-therapeutic measures are indicated, though it must be noted that
patients beyond this limit have been successfully treated.
(2) Nature of the Fibroma. — The interstitial form is the one most
amenable to radio-therapeutic treatment, the pediculated or sub-peritoneal
variety being better treated by operation.
(3) HcBmorrhage. — According to Bordier the most suitable are the
fibromata with marked hsemorrhage, i.e. cases where the periods have been
very copious, with abundant clots, or replaced by veritable haemorrhage.
As a rule after the second cycle of irradiation, the discharges have completely
and permanently disappeared.
(4) Size of the Fibroma. — Fibroma of moderate volume are more easily
influenced than those of larger size, but larger tumours, reaching even to
the umbilicus, may be considerably reduced in size. Very large tumours
are, however, better suited for operation.
(5) Hcemorrhage at Menopause with or without fibroids is easily cured
or relieved by radio-therapy.
Contra Indications.^ — ^Bordier is of opinion that radio-therapeutic
treatment is not applicable :
(1) When the fibroma is calcified or presents necrobiotic degeneration.
(2) When myomata are malignant, infected, or gangrenous.
(3) When complications exist such as suppurating salpingitis or pelvic
peritonitis.
He also quotes the following results :
320 EADIATION THERAPEUTICS
After the second or third cycle of irradiation the fibromatous patient
entirely loses all discharge, the hsemorrhage as well as any colourless dis-
charge from which she may have suffered. In the same time the volume
of the fibroma will have begun to be reduced as early as the commencement
of the second cycle. This diminution of volume steadily continues, and
after the third and fourth cycle it is often found that the uterus has regained
its normal size. It is not at all rare to see a fibromatous uterus, of the size
of a fist, atrophy after three or four cycles of irradiation to such an extent
that it can no longer be palpated through the abdominal wall.
A large number of cases have been treated on the Continent and in
America, and a more limited number have received treatment in this country.
From a consideration of the results it would appear that a large percentage
of cases received marked benefit, symptoms being relieved, and in many
cases the tumour was so reduced that the uterus appeared to return nearly
to the normal. How lasting the benefit may be has yet to be determined.
At present the patient may be assured that she will receive no damage of
the skin, at all events of a serious nature. Superficial reaction may
occur in spite of all the care that may be taken. When using the large doses
of the Freiburg school, it is possible that deep-seated changes may be induced
over which we can have no control. Care must therefore be exercised not
only in the choice of case for treatment but in the choice of technique we
employ. It is well for the operator to master thoroughly one technique and
confine his attention to it.
Technique for Uterine Myomata and Climacteric Troubles {Albers
Schdnberg). — (1) The tube must be maintained at a hardness of 6 to 8 Walter,
or 8 to 9 Bauer, with a current of 2 to 3 milHamperes.
(2) The focus skin distance should be not less than 38 cm., and a com-
pression diaphragm should always be used.
(3) A cycle of irradiations should be given consisting of a separate
exposure on three areas — the centre and each side of the lower abdomen.
This is best carried out by giving an irradiation, each of about six minutes, on
three consecutive days. The whole cycle of irradiation must never exceed
eighteen minutes.
(4) There should be an interval of at least fourteen days between each
cycle of irradiation.
(5) A subsequent irradiation must be given only if the skin is quite pale
and shows no sign of reaction.
(6) The skin of the abdomen should always be guarded by a thick
leather filter.
Six minutes' exposure under the above condition is equivalent to 2 to
2-5 X. This would give 6 to 7-5 X for the three days' cycle, an amount
well under the erythema dose of 10 X Kienbock.
Technique for Uterine Fibroids {Haenisch).—'Weh.nelt break.
Penetration of tube 6 to 8 Walter or 7 to 9 Bauer, and a current of 1-| to
2 milhamperes. Filter of thick 'sole -leather or 1 mm. aluminium, with an
addition of one to two layers of chamois leather.
UTERINE FIBROMATA 321
Each series comprises four .sittings, which are given on four consecutive
days, preferably beginning just after the menses, a sitting lasting for five to
six minutes. The skin focus distance is 36 cm. Slight compression is used
by means of the compression cylinder and a loofah pad.
During each series a total dose of 5 to 10 X Kienbock is reached. In the
latter stages of the treatment the series often consist of three instead of
four sittings. Between the series from fourteen to twenty-one days elapse.
When the tumours are very large, or in special cases when rapid effect
is necessary, treat in several directions, i.e. on both sides, the centre, and
also through the back.
Comparison of various units of measurement : —
X=unit of Kienbock Quantimeter.
10 X=Sabouraud tint "B " or 5 H.
Technique for Uterine Fibroids (Bordier). — The X-ray irradiation
is carried out in a series of cycles, each cycle comprising nine separate irradia-
tions of the median region of the abdomen and the iliac regions. There
are thus three ports of entry for the X-rays, one median and two lateral,
the cycle of nine irradiations being given each month in the interval between
the menstrual periods.
The two most important factors are, firstly, the dose of X-rays, and
secondly, the filtration of the rays. Bordier' s technique has at last been
perfected so that the incident dose — that is the dose falling on the aluminium
filter — shall be always the same, and easily measurable. All that remains,
then, is to choose the appropriate filter according to the order of series and
the precise number of the cycle.
As regards the median area, or port of entry, Bordier adds, always
employ the same thickness for the aluminium filter, viz. 3-5 milHmetres.
This region should always be carefully protected, so that the skin may not
be injured in case a subsequent operation should be required.
As regards the lateral ports of entry at the flanks, the thickness of the
filter will vary from | millimetre to 3 millimetres. The aluminium filter,
placed on the abdomen, is connected to the earth by means of a flexible
metallic wire. The dose of the incident rays may be measured with great
facility by means of Bordier's radiometer. The pastille is stuck on to the
filter itself, and the dose to be given corresponds to tint 3 of Bordier's scale,
which is exactly equivalent to 5 H. The pastille should be compared with
the scale by the light of a match, a candle, a benzine lamp, or other artificial
light of slight actinic power.
The Rontgen bulb should always be placed at the same distance from
the filter ; a convenient distance is the breadth of the hand, the four fingers
being interposed between the bulb and the filter. Bordier employs a
water-cooled Mliller tube 16 centimetres in diameter, regulated so as to
emit rays of penetration 8° to 10° Benoist.
Filtration. — The following table shows Bordier's formula of filtration
for each lateral port of entry of the X-rays on their way to the ovary :
21
322
RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
Incident Dose on the Flank 5 H
Irradiation.
First
Second
Third
First cycle
Second cycle .
Third cycle
Fourth cycle
Fifth cycle
mm.
0-5
0-5
1-0
2-0
2-5
mm.
0-5
1-0
1-5
2-5
3-0
mm.
1-0
1-5
2-0
3-0
3-5
The dose incident on the filter being 5 H, and the absorbent power of
the filter being known, it is easy to calculate the total quantities received,
by the right and left fianks respectively during each cycle. The time required
to obtain the dose 5 H should not exceed five or six minutes.
During the irradiation of the lateral regions the median region of the
abdomen is protected by a strip of lead, the edges of which should extend
at least two fingerbreadths to either side of the middle line.
The seances are to be given one each day. There should be an interval
of at least three weeks between each cycle. As regards injury to the skin,
even at the end of the fourth cycle of irradiations there is only a slight brown
coloration ; Bordier has in no case seen the slightest sign of radio-dermatitis.
Freiburg" Technique for Uterine Fibroids. — Gauss and Lembcke
of Freiburg employ a different technique ; a summary of this is quoted
below.
The methods employed consists briefly of a series of exposures given
at one sitting, which lasts from two to three hours. These are repeated at
intervals of three weeks. Three or four seances are sufficient to end in a
complete cure (it is claimed) in a large percentage of cases treated. The
chief points are :
(1) The treatment of the abdominal wall. Great care must be exercised
so as not to damage the skin.
(2) Many points of entrance are considered necessary. These are
arranged so that a maximum effect is obtained on the deeper structures
while the skin is not damaged.
The points taken are the umbilicus and the brim of the pelvis. A line
drawn across the abdomen at the level of the umbilicus forms the upper
limit of irradiation. Thus :
9
5
6
7
10
4
3
8
11
1
2
12
The mid-areas are treated with the tube at right angles to the body,
DISEASES OF THE BLOOD 323
the lateral areas with the patient turned on the side, and the tube pointed
obliquely inwards.
Six areas are marked out on the back and the patient placed on the
abdomen, the tube operating from above.
The skin is protected by means of T-shaped pieces of lead 2 mm. thick.
These should be covered with lint to prevent secondary radiation effects
upon the skin.
Several layers of satrap paper are arranged on the surface of two or
more layers of loofah sponge, and the whole is embedded in lint or paper.
The Kienbock slip is placed on the skin underneath the above filters. The
filter is laid over the area of exposure, and the tube is placed in a specially
constructed efficiently protected tube box, fitted with good mechanical
movements. The distance between the anticathode and the skin should
be 20 cm.
Ten to twelve areas may be treated from the front and six from the
posterior aspect. An aluminium filter of 3 mm. thickness is used. The
dose to each area should be 10 to 20 X. Taking 18 areas at say 15 X this
gives 270 X at one sitting. After-effects must be looked for when using
these large doses. The patient should be kept in bed for a day or two
after the treatment.
The time taken to obtain 10 to 20 X on the sldn will depend upon the
hardness of the tube used and the quantity of current passing through it.
At Freiburg the usual method employed is to give five minutes to each
area, 5 to 6 milliamperes being passed through a tube of a hardness of 7 to 9
Bauer.
It is not necessary to develop the paper for each dose. The total
number exposed should be developed at the end of the sitting, and the total
dose can be easily ascertained at a later period. The method of Kienbock
gives us a means of obtaining a permanent record of the total dose given.
Specially selected tubes are necessary, and a good supply of tubes must
be at hand. These may require to be changed frequently, especially in the
early stages of their life. Later on one tube may give several doses in
succession. A thorough system of cooling must be employed.
THE TREATMENT OF DISEASES OF THE BLOOD
Badiations either of X-rays or radium are used in the treatment of
diseases of the blood, with in some cases a marked improvement in the
condition. It is impossible to deal at any length with all the conditions of
alteration in the blood and the associated changes in the spleen and bone
marrow. A short resume of some of the conditions calling for radiation
treatment will suffice for the present, particular attention being paid to
those which are known to respond to these radiations. The technique used
will vary in individual cases. Hard tubes should be employed, and if
repeated radiations are necessary, filters should be used.
324 EADIATION THERAPEUTICS
In the treatment of a condition whicli is general in its effects and of
wliicli the pathology is obscure, or where the morbid changes originate in
the spleen, glands, and bone marrow, the rational plan is to treat large
areas of the body rather than to centre upon one particular organ such as
the spleen.
This plan allows of much larger doses being administered and prevents
the occurrence of any local damage, which may easily be caused when one
organ or area alone receives the irradiations. In these cases the skin is
apt to be seriously damaged and treatment has to be suspended.
On general principles, therefore, it is well to give the splenic area a
thorough irradiation and then proceed to deal with other regions. When
the spleen is greatly enlarged the skin area over it may be divided into
several sections, and each receive a dose in turn. The ends of the long
bones may be treated through the surface by using hard tubes and filters.
The glands of the axilla, groin, and neck may also be thoroughly irradiated.
Duration of Treatment. — At the commencement of treatment a dose
may be given twice a week for about six weeks. Care should be taken to
change the areas as frequently as possible. Treatment is then suspended
for two or three weeks. At the end of that time one or several doses may
be given, and the patient kept under observation for another three weeks.
In treating leukaemia, etc., a careful watch should be kept upon the
blood, counts being made at regular intervals. A differential count should
always be made. Cases which respond well to treatment should be carefully
watched over long periods of time, and on no account should treatment be
entirely suspended for any length of time. These cases relapse even when
regular treatment is carried out, but are less likely to do so when the action
is kept up by giving regular doses at intervals of a month or six weeks.
It would appear that when the tissues have received benefit from radiation
treatment, they require a regular repetition to maintain the improvement.
Patients appear to miss the stimulating efiects when treatment is suspended.
Pernicious Anaemia. — In this disease the effects of X-rays upon the
blood-forming organs, i.e. the spleen and the marrow of the long bones, may
sometimes be of great benefit. Great care must, however, be exercised in
these cases. Stimulating doses are required. Small doses of a penetrating
ray at frequent intervals may be beneficial by acting as a stimulant to the
blood-forming organs.
Careful and frequent blood counts must be the rule, and if no marked
improvement results from a few exposures treatment must be suspended.
The fact must be well borne in mind that large doses may precipitate a
fatal termination by inducing a toxsemia.
Hodgrkin's Disease. — This is an affection characterised by a pro-
gressive enlargement of the lymphatic glands (beginning usually on one
side of the neck) and spleen, with the formation in the liver, spleen, lungs, and
other organs of nodular growths associated with a secondary ansemia without
leukaemia.
This disease is very responsive to X-ray treatment, and if radiated
DISEASES OF THE BLOOD 325
sufficiently early in the course' of the disease, marked improvement, arrest
of progress for a lengthy period, and, in a percentage of cases, cure may result.
The beneficial efiect of the X-rays is due to a direct action upon lym-
phatic tissue and to an effect upon tissue- ferments. The action upon tissue-
ferments may be directly a result of the ray action upon the blood cells ;
consequently in this disease it is well to treat large areas of the body surface
as well as the particular group of enlarged glands. A marked diminution
in the size of enlarged glands may be induced when only remote regions of
the body are treated.
In all these cases it is well to begin treatment by giving frequent small
doses, in order to ascertain the degree of response to the radiations before
proceeding to give large filtered doses. Should the response be favourable,
the more penetrating ray may then be employed in various situations.
A dose once a week should be sufficient, several large areas being treated at
one time. In most cases a filter should be employed, | mm. to 1 mm. thick.
After a sufficient number of doses have been administered, treatment
should be suspended for a time (two or three weeks). After this, treatment
should be continuous, a dose being given once a fortnight for several months
so long as the disease appears to be quiescent. Should a relapse occur it
will be necessary to resume the same or more frequent and larger dosage.
Leukaemia. — An affection characterised by a persistent increase in
the number of white blood corpuscles, associated with changes, either alone
or together, in the spleen, lymphatic glands, or bone marrow. There are
two main types, though combinations and variations may occur :
(1) Spleno-Medullary Leukcemia. — In this form the changes are
specially localised in the spleen and the bone marrow, while the blood shows
a great increase in elements which are derived especially from the latter
tissue, a condition which Miiller has termed " myelsemia." Ehrlich calls
this type of the disease myelogenous leukaemia,
(2) Lymphatic Leukaemia. — Here the changes are chiefly localised in
the lymphatic apparatus, the blood showing an increase in those elements
derived from the lymph glands.
In the spleno-medullary form the spleen is greatly enlarged, the organ
being in a condition of chronic hyperplasia. There is also marked hyperplasia
of the bone marrow.
In the lymphatic form there is a general lymphatic enlargement,
which is usually associated with a certain amount of enlargement of the
spleen.
It is necessary to describe the blood changes in this disease, but it must
be clearly understood that remarkable fluctuations occur both in the relative
percentage of cells in the blood, and in the size of the spleen, in cases which
receive no treatment. Caution must therefore be exercised in attributing
improvements to radiation treatment which may represent only the normal
fluctuations of the disease. When thorough radiation treatment is carried
out, marked improvements may sometimes be induced, and the spleen
often diminishes in size. Bearing in mind the analogy between this disease
326 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
and sarcoma, it would appear tliat leuksemia is really a malignant disease
of ttie blood.
This fact, no doubt, accounts for the ultimate failure to cure in nearly
all the cases treated. Relapses occur from time to time which may respond
again and again to further treatment, but in the end the disease baffles the
remedy.
During the course of treatment by radiations, differential blood counts
should always be made, and a rapid fall to normal should be an indication
for the suspension of treatment.
The Nature of the Action of X-rays in Blood Diseases. — Krauss and
Zeigler explain the action as being a destruction by the radiations of the
pathological lymphoid tissue. Edouel attributes the effect to an action
upon the tissue ferments.
The analogy between this action upon blood cells and that upon the
cells of a new growth is striking. In both instances the new cells are being
produced at an abnormally rapid rate, and presumably their power of
resistance to radiations is much lower than it is when cells are produced
at a lower rate, and therefore they are more easily destroyed. Melchener
and Wolff found that a spleen, which, after removal from the living body,
was exposed to radiations, yielded a leukotoxin, which, injected into a
healthy animal, produced a marked reduction in the number of leucocytes,
while a similar injection from a spleen which had not been irradiated produced
a leucocytosis, increasing the number of white blood cells.
Beclere emphasises the necessity for the continuance of treatment
over long periods of time, in spite of an early apparent disappearance of
symptoms. He found that under X-ray treatment the blood condition
improved, the general health markedly improved, colour was regained, there
was a rise in the number of the red cells, and the nucleated red cells dis-
appeared.
Megaloblasts and young cells disappear early, the normoblasts being
a little more tenacious. The presence of the solitary myelocytes should
correct the hasty impression that the disease has been vanquished, but
he has seen cases which had been treated for six years and remained well.
Although there are relapses these are frequently ameliorated by further
treatment.
Panton and Tidy have made some observations on the results of treat-
ment which are of great value. Treatment by arsenic and X-rays produced
in some cases : (1) no alteration in the condition ; (2) a remarkable though
temporary improvement. The treatment occasionally precipitated the
fata] issue. The most interesting blood change observed was the replace-
ment of the typical granular cells by non-granular myeloblasts shortly
before death.
In those cases in which marked effects were produced by treatment it is
open to doubt whether that effect was beneficial. In some cases treatment
was followed by effects the reverse of beneficial. Panton and Tidy emphasise
the point that a diminution in the number of leucocytes and size of the
DISEASES OF THE LUNGS AND MEDIASTINUM 327
spleen is not necessarily evidence of improvement but may be the
reverse.
A drop in the total number of leucocytes with a relative increase in the
myeloblasts suggests a fatal termination in the near future, and such an event
may result from treatment in a case apparently progressing favourably.
The blood change aimed at is a reduction in the number of leucocytes
to a number approximately equal to but not less than the normal, the
relative percentage of cells being unaltered. A rapid diminution in
the number of white cells, with an increase in the percentage of non-
granular, and particularly in the percentage of myeloblasts is an indica-
tion that treatment must be suspended. This need only be temporary,
for after a time the white cells increase again. Treatment repeated
at intervals will help to keep the disease under control. Patients
may go on having regular doses at long intervals and maintain fairly good
health for years. In all cases the dosage should be controlled by the chnical
condition, and blood counts should be made at regular intervals during the
course of treatment. This enables a check to be kept on the radiation dose,
and indicates whether a long or short exposure is advisable. It may suggest
that treatment be suspended for a time. Patients who are taking arsenic
internally, or who have recently had salvarsan, should be carefully watched
while undergoing radiation treatment. Rapid changes may be induced in
the blood of these patients.
THE TREATMENT OF DISEASES OF THE LUNGS
AND MEDIASTINUM
Up to recent times the radiation treatment of diseases of the thoracic
and abdominal cavities has received little attention, but a recognition of the
marked improvement in the general condition of patients receiving X-ray
treatment for deep-seated cancer, fibromata, and other conditions has led
to the systematic treatment of all deep-seated disease by X-rays.
The Enlarg-ement of the Mediastinal Glands met with in lymph-
adenoma and primary and secondary sarcoma yields, at all events to a partial
degree, to deep radiations.
All conditions of tumour should be treated for a time with X-rays, a
thorough technique being used and large doses with hard tubes being given.
Marked relief may often be obtained, and the patient's condition much
improved.
The thoracic area should be mapped out into divisions of a convenient
size, and lead screens employed to protect the surrounding skin. A filter
of 3 mm. of aluminium is used, and the tube brought as near as possible to
the skin surface. It is best to employ a hard tube, a 10 Bauer if possible,
through which a current of 4 to 5 milliamperes is run. Kienbock paper
should always be used, and a careful record kept of all exposures for future use.
Ten or twelve exposures may be given at one sitting on one day, followed
328 EADIATION THERAPEUTICS
up on the succeeding days with as many exposures as it is possible to fit into
the thoracic area.
When the front of the chest is treated, the areas are marked out so as to
include the intercostal spaces in the longitudinal aspect of the aperture.
By this method a percentage of the rays get in through the intercostal
spaces. The supra-clavicular areas, anteriorly and posteriorly, may be
treated in the same way, and the axillae should also be irradiated. The
posterior thoracic wall should be mapped out and treated in a similar manner.
By using this technique it is possible to get in a comparatively large
dose up to or exceeding 100 X on the skin surface in one or two days. The
patient should be confined to bed for a day or two after each series of radia-
tions, and a watch kept on the pulse and temperature. A marked reaction
may follow, and haemorrhage may even occur as the result of the reaction
to the stimulation, but this slowly subsides.
In the intervals of treatment the patient should, if possible, be in the
country, living an open-air life, and tonics and a generous diet should be
insisted upon. The result of treatment on these lines is frequently a marked
improvement in general health, with a sense of well-being and an improve-
ment in spirits ; often there is also relief of pain, and in some cases a gain
in weight, and a reduction in the size of the tumour.
Sub-acute or Chronic Tuberculosis may benefit from a course of
radiation treatment combined with open-air treatment.
Lymphadenoma often responds to this treatment to a marked extent,
and sarcomata are occasionally arrested in their progress for a time at least.
Endotheliomata of the lung or pleura are the most likely tumours
to benefit from radiations, and secondary carcinoma of a slow growth also
appear to improve.
In the future, when it may be possible to use still harder tubes and give
longer exposures with a more penetrating ray than has hitherto been done,
it may be hoped that greatly improved results may be obtained. This
belief is supported by the great improvement which has recently taken
place in the treatment of malignant disease generally. It is now possible
to influence favourably by X-rays the progress of many cases of carcinomata
which a few years ago did not seem to improve at all. This improve-
ment in results is undoubtedly due to the following improved factors in
therapy : (1) The employment of very hard X-ray tubes ; (2) the employ-
ment of fairly thick filters ; (3) a considerable increase in the dose of radia-
tions ; (4) the employment of many ports of entry ; (5) the increased
frequency of treatment.
In many cases the results obtained are quite as good as those obtained
by the use of radium.
B. RADIUM THERAPY
PHYSICS OF RADIUM
By C. E. S. Phillips, F.R.S.E.
When a radium atom has become unstable, most probably through the
gradual radiation of undetectable energy by the electrons which it contains,
the new condition requires a rearrangement of its constituent parts, accom-
panied by the sudden expulsion of an electrified atom of heham.
The spintharoscope of Crookes, as well as the more recent methods of
Rutherford and Geiger, enable these individual atoms of electrified helium
to be counted ; they may even be caused to make a record upon a moving
photographic film. In this way it is seen that they are not expelled by the
radium atoms with perfect regularity. During any given interval of time,
however, their number is very nearly constant.
Thus, from a definite quantity of radium there come streams of electrified
matter, the particles of which move at about 12,000 miles per second, carry-
ing a positive charge, and constituting the well-kno^\^l positive or Alpha rays.
It may be pointed out at once that it is the writer's intention to include
in this section only data which seems essential for the purpose of describing
the broad principles underlying the appHcation of radium to medical work.
For greater detail, reference should be made to standard works on radio-
activity. It is, therefore, thought unnecessary to dwell at length upon the
behaviour of the products of radioactive change which give no rays of
therapeutic use, nor has it been considered advisable to attempt any elaborate
summary of the various physical properties and actions of radioactive bodies
generally.
There is every probability, however, that some better way will be found
in the future for utilising medically the great kinetic energy of the Alpha
particle, and in view of that possibility, it is proposed to refer more in detail
to the properties of this radiation than would otherwise have been necessary.
In any mass of radium some of the atoms are extremely stable, while
others are approaching in various degrees the condition which ends in their
disruption. The " average life," therefore, of a radium atom means the
average of a number of different values, ranging from seconds to thousands
of years. It is curious to notice that, in spite of violent atomic disturbances
taking place around them, some of the radium atoms should remain so stable,
and especially that always the same fraction of them disintegrates at any
given period. Experiment has shown this proportion to be characteristic
for each radioactive substance, and holds independently of whether the
atoms are compact (as m a solid) or \\Tidely distributed throughout a solution.
329
330 EADIATION THEKAPEUTICS
Further, no means has yet been found whereby the rate of disintegration
can be modified in the least degree. Eeference will again be made to this
question when the meaning of the " half -period " and other radioactive
constants is considered.
The atoms of all forms of matter may be regarded as minute clusters of
still more minute bodies which carry electric charges, some being negatively
and others positively electrified.
It is one of the most striking facts in science that the mass of these
negatively electrified bodies, as well as the charge they carry, is the same
wherever they occur, for they can be driven out of the atoms of many sub-
stances and their properties studied. On the other hand, since the residue
of an atom which has lost a negative body or electron is no longer neutral,
but contains positive electricity in excess, the positive ions are associated
with groups of particles and have never been successfully isolated. In
general, therefore, their mass is far greater than that of the electrons, and
their movements under the same forces are proportionately slower. The
electron being only about xsW*^ *^® ^^^® ^^ ^^ atom of hydrogen, it can be
realised that since some atoms contain but a few electrons, there must be
plenty of room for the movements which modern atomic theory requires in
interpreting the results of experiments. When electrons escape from a radium
atom they move at a great speed — approaching the velocity of light (3 x 10^^
cm, per second) — and therefore penetrate not only the spaces between the
atoms of other substances, but even traverse the atoms themselves. Their
course may, however, be bent by a magnet, since they have magnetic fields
surrounding them in virtue of their motion and electric charge. And, in
addition, they can be coaxed to a greater or less extent from almost any
substance by heating or beating down upon it waves of short length, such
as those of ultra-violet hght or X-rays. It therefore appears from many
experiments of this character that all bodies contain electrons. We must
point out, however, that the term " radioactivity " does not apply to
those substances which require an external stimulus to bring forth a radiation
from them. Its use should be exclusively limited to cases where an atom
disintegrates spontaneously, whether accompanied by the emission of a
radiation or not.
It would therefore be inaccurate to describe as radioactive the pheno-
mena of tribo-luminescence, or thermo-luminescence, or the light given
out by materials which have previously been strongly illuminated ; nor can
it be strictly applied to the electrodes of a vacuum bulb in which X-rays
are generated.
The deviation of a ray by a magnetic or electric field forms a direct
experimental proof as to whether we are dealing with ether pulses or streams
of electrified matter. Radiations in the nature of light are unaffected by
these means so far as deviation is concerned. The path of Alpha particles,
however, is modified very slightly by a magnet, because, owing to the com-
paratively large mass, the velocity of the positive ions is far less than that of
the electrons.
lONISATION AND RECOMBINATION 331
A magnetic field of great strength is therefore necessary for the devia-
tion of Alpha rays. On the other hand, a small magnet will suffice to
appreciably affect a stream of Beta particles, and in addition, in the case of
Beta rays from Radium salts, owing to their heterogeneous nature (different
velocities), a stream of electrons may be sorted out into a kind of spectrum
by this means. It also follows that the Alpha and Beta rays are deflected
oppositely by a magnet, and tend always to travel in a direction at
right angles to the lines of magnetic force.
In virtue of their electric charges, both Alpha and Beta rays are also
deviated by an electric field. The methods by which a direct experimental
measurement of the velocity of the particles comprising both kinds of rays
is made depends, in fact, upon the foregoing reactions.
lonisation and Recombination
Now we have seen that the radium atom expels another atom (of
helium), and it is important to consider the effect of this positively electrified
particle when projected at a velocity of 12,000 miles per second amongst the
neutral clusters of other electrified bodies constituting a gas. A gas is
chosen because its atoms or molecules can so freely move relatively to one
another that if their constituents are split asunder by the inrush of the Alpha
particles their regrouping mil not occur too quickly to enable the new con-
dition to be in some way detected. As a crude analogy we may picture a
bullet fired into a space hung with bags of flour. After the passage of the
shot fine dust would fill the air. Some such commotion is certainly produced
when an Alpha particle strikes against the atoms of a gas ; the latter are spht
into numerous minute fragments — the electrified dust of atoms — and, in the
case of air at normal pressure and temperature, 153,000 electrified bodies,
electrons, and positive ions are liberated to move actively in all directions.
Many questions of great interest centre round the mechanism by which
bodies are detached from neutral atoms through the impact or close proxi-
mity of other changed particles. Above all, it has provided a direct
experimental method of attack upon the hitherto obscure problem of the
constitution of matter.
lonisation occurs similarly when the electrons or Beta particles traverse
a gas, and it may also be produced (only in less degree) by the passage of
short-wave ether pulses. But it only takes place then if the waves of
the radiation are so short that the electrons within the atom can gather
energy from them, and thus augment their movements to such an extent that
ultimately they become detached, and fly off at enormous velocities in all
directions.
The Alpha particles from radium are completely absorbed by 3-5 cm. of
air. In other words, beyond this range they are incapable of detection by
their electrical effects, since no ionisation of the gas occurs. The range of
the Alpha particles expelled by various products of the radium series depends
in each case upon the rate at which the product disintegrates.
332
RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
It must be kept in mind that, during the process of ionisation, the
numerous electrified particles set free are, in virtue of their mutual attrac-
tions and repulsions, continually recombining to form neutral groups again. It
is evident, however, that the action of a radiation may be to so disturb the
normal arrangement of the constituents of atoms that, while the influence
is operative, their usual properties are modified. If, in fact, the density of
the radiated substance is relatively great, as in the case of a solid, while
the number of atoms breaking up per second is also far more than with a gas,
the rate of recombination is also enormously increased owing to the much
closer proximity of the molecules. But, on the other hand, some of the
changes produced by the radiations are permanent, since the new groupings
that arise become comparatively fixed owing to limited molecular movement.
It is therefore interesting to notice, for instance, the change in colour
of glasses and other substances under the influence of certain radiations,
and to find that after a thorough shaking of the molecules, sufficient to
increase appreciably their mean free path, obtained by the application of
heat, the original grouping is regained and the colour disappears. Although
this refers chiefly to alterations in the physical nature of a substance,
many chemical changes are also produced, presumably by upsetting the
arrangements of the bonds which unite atoms into definite molecular groups.
It should now be clear from the nature of ionisation that an electrified
wire brought into a mass of ionised gas will be diselectrified by attracting
to it ions of the
^^^ opposite charge,
and will repel the
others. Thus,
negatively charged
initially the wire
will attract posi-
tive ions, an.d
gradually become
neutral. A strip
of gold or alu-
minium leaf at-
tached by one end
to such a wire will
stand out from it
when the wire is
electrified, and
therefore a very
simple method of
detecting the pres-
ence of ions in a
gas consists in ob-
serving the movement of the free end of the gold leaf when a radioactive body
approaches the wire. It is, in fact, the basis of all measurements of radio-
FiG, 220. — Special form of gold leaf electroscope.
(For description see p. 341.)
RADIUM EMANATION
333
activity, and the electroscope'shown in Fig. 220 is an instrument embodying
this principle. Its detailed description must, however, be deferred till later.
Radium Emanation
The residue that remains when a radium atom has expelled an Alpha
particle is no longer radium. It is an atom of a new substance. The pro-
perty whereby it clung originally to adjacent atoms and in the aggregate
Fig. 221. — Apparatus for pumping off and
collectina; radium emanation.
Fig. 222. — Combined pump and apparatus
for concentration of radium emanation
by liquid air.
constituted a solid substance is absent now, with the result that the new
atom wanders off and exhibits the characteristics of a gas. It is Hghter than
Ra, but still very heavy. The atomic weight of the lost hehum being four
units and that of radium 226-4, the new substance has an atomic weight of
226-4 - 4 or 222-4. It has been called " the emanation," and is itself radio-
active. Radium emanation can be collected, transferred, and generally
manipulated like any other gas, and the apparatus for this purpose is shown
in Figs. 221 and 222.
The most convenient way of liberating emanation from a radium salt
334
RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
is to dissolve it in water strongly acidulated with hydrochloric acid. The
solution placed in the bulb 1 (Fig. 221) gradually develops a supply of the gas,
which may be pumped ofi: from time to time, and collected by displacement in
the tube 2, before removal to the sparking apparatus represented in Fig. 223.
Here the mixed gases, hydrogen and oxygen, produced by the decomposing
action of the emanation upon the solution are recombined to water by the
passage of a small electric spark
between the platinum points
1, 1, and the volume of gas to
be dealt with thereby reduced
to about one-fifth its original
amount. The residue consists
mainly of hydrogen, which al-
ways occurs in excess, a little
water vapour, and the emana-
tion. If we wish, the three way
stop-cock can be turned, and
the gas driven up into the flat
glass tube 2, also shown in the
diagram, which has been pre-
viously exhausted by an air
pump.^
Another method of collect-
ing the emanation consists in
condensing it by liquid air upon
the inner surface of a small bulb,
(1 in Fig. 222). When the bulb
shows by its strong luminosity
that the emanation is condensed
(an operation that only takes, a
few moments), the pump can
be started, and the whole ap-
paratus evacuated. Tap 2
should then be turned off while
tap 3 is left open, and the bulb is withdrawn from the liquid air and held
vertically. The emanation will rapidly thaw off the glass, and it may be
driven by a rising mercury column into the very small glass tube above the
bulb 1, which is then sealed by a flame and removed for use.
The emanation expels Alpha particles, but they cannot penetrate the
glass of these tubes, except in very special cases. The expulsion of an Alpha
particle, however, causes the residue to coalesce into a further new body
called Radium A, which by further consecutive changes rapidly gives rise
to the series RaB, RaC^, and RaCg-
1 Always lower the reservoir when the mixture has passed over into the sparking tube,
so that the gas is rarefied before sparking. In this way all risk of dangerous explosion
is avoided.
Fig. 223. — Apparatus for charging glass or other
applicators withiradium emanation atter sparking.
RADIUM EMANATION
335
Now RaC {i.e. RaC^ and-^RaCg taken together) emits not only Alpha
particles but also electrons (/3 rays) and a highly-penetrating radiation (7
rays), consisting of ether pulses of extremely short length. On this account
Radium C is of the greatest importance therapeutically. The streams of
electrons from it can easily penetrate the thin glass of the tube, but they are
stopped by 1-6 cm. of aluminium or -4 cm. of lead. The 7 rays, on the
other hand, are about a hundred times more penetrating. The above
series of changes requires three hours for its completion, and at the
end of that time the quantity of RaC has reached its equilibrium
value. But from the moment of separation from the parent radium, the
emanation itself decays by a process of disintegration till in 3-8 days
only half of it is left. ,^
After a further 3-8 days
half of what remained is t
gone, and so forth. It
will be noticed that the '
actual amount which de-
cays is proportional to the
quantity present. For ^.^
instance, if we have two z
volumes of emanation, g«
one being twice the other, |
since both must become s'
UJ
reduced to half their
initial values by the end
of 3-8 days, the amount ,
of emanation which dis-
appears from the former
is twice what the other
loses in the same time.
The same fraction, how-
ever, of the initial quantity
decays in both cases. An exact analogy exists in the lending of money
at compoimd interest if we can imagine the capital decreased instead
of being added to in proportion to the amount at the moment. Thus,
£100 lent at 10 per cent interest payable yearly, on this plan, would
mean that at the end of the first year £10 must be deducted from
the capital, leaving £90 to pay interest on for the next year. At
the beginning of the third year the capital would be reduced to £81
after the deduction of 10 per cent on the £90, and so on, the amount
deducted being always proportional to the capital. If we plot a curve
showing the gradual dying away of the capital in this case, it would be
a curve similar in character to that in Fig. 224, which really represents the
decay of emanation with time, the quantity disappearing being always
proportional to the amount present. This relationship is of fundamental
importance in the study of radioactivity. It may be put in another way.
TIME IN DAYS
Fig. 224. — Curve showing decay of radium emanation with time.
336 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
The rate at which the emanation decays becomes less and less in the course
of time ; that is to say, the actual quantity of gas decajdng per unit time is
less after some hours than it was at the instant of separation from the parent
radium. In Fig. 224 this fact is represented by a curve, the slope of which,
though steep at first, gradually becomes flatter. The rate of change of the
slope must therefore represent the law governing the decay of emanation
with time. Now we know from experiment that the gas decays to half
value in 3-8 days, so that calling its initial quantity 100, we obtain a point
on the curve at 50. A further wait of 3-8 days gives another point on the
curve at 25, and so on. Then a line drawn through all the points forms a
diagram resembling the one in Fig. 224.
By taking the difference of any two consecutive ordinates representing
say an interval of twenty-four hours, we can measure approximately the
amount of emanation decaying during that time, and by trial over the whole
range of the curve we find that this value is always the same fraction of the
mean quantity of emanation present at the beginning of the interval chosen.
The accuracy of the result will clearly be greater if the time interval of an
hour or second is selected instead of a day. Thus by this graphic method we
can ascertain approximately the value of the constant factor (X), which
evidently enters into the expression of the law we are seeking, and see in
addition that the rate of change of the emanation (slope of curve) must
always be equal to A,Q, where Q is the amount of emanation present at any
instant. Conversely, if both the value of \ per unit time and also the initial
amount of emanation contained in a capsule are known, we can plot a curve
which represents the gradual decay of the gas, and thus ascertain how much
remains after any given interval.
But the exact law can be expressed mathematically, and the value of A,
calculated, provided we ascertain experimentally the time required for the
emanation to decay to some definite fraction (say one-half) of its initial
quantity. We have
dQ
Integrating, this gives
dt
■\t=\og^Q+C (1)
where C is a constant.
But if Q =Qo when ^ =0 then C = -log, Q„.
Substituting this value of C in (1) we get
-X^=log, Q-log, Q,
-X^=log,S.
Therefore, Q
/? — At
Qo" • ■
(2)
Suppose now we know that if t = 3-8 days, Q^ is reduced to one-half its initial
amount, the value of \ may be calculated thus :
DECAY OF RADIUM EMANATION 337
Inverting (2) and substituting values, we have :
.-. loge2=Xx3-8
or, •69=Xx3-8
\ = -18.
A, represents the fraction of the emanation decaying per day, and the above
result is of great importance because it is applicable to the whole range of
radioactive substances, each having a characteristic value of X by which
it may be identified.
The equation also represents the law governing the absorbtion of a
radiation in its passage through the tissues or other media, and forms in fact
the only criterion by which it can be determined whether a radiation is
strictly homogeneous or not. If, for example, by interposing a series of
layers of aluminium the rays are not cut down according to the above
law, the original beam must have contained a mixture of rays of different
penetrabilities.
So far we have only considered the emanation which has been collected
and separated from its parent radium. It is evident, however, from the
foregoing considerations that the quantity of emanation associated "uith a
given amount of radium mil for all practical purposes reach a maximum
value within a definite time.
Beginning with the case where all the emanation has been initially
driven from the salt by heat or solution, at first the gas will accumulate
rapidly, for we have seen that the rate at which it disintegrates is
dependent upon the quantity present. If a very small quantity is present
the number of atoms disintegrating mil be insignificant. Meanwhile the
radium is producing the gas at a rate which for all practical purposes may
be regarded as uniform ; and as it slowly accumulates, the quantity of it
which disintegrates in any given time also increases (the fraction of the
whole which thus breaks up remaining constant), until a point is reached
when a state of equilibrium is maintained, and the quantity of emanation
disintegrating per second is equal to the quantity formed by the radium
in the same time.
It does not matter of course whether the salt is confiiied in a large or a
small tube, in each case six weeks must elapse before the radium and emana-
tion are in " radioactive " equilibrium.
It is therefore usual to wait for that time before measuring the
contents of a tube of radium salt by means of the Gamma rays from the
product RaCg, which, by the way, only requires three hours to reach its
equilibrium value with the emanation producing it. We are in any case
dealing here with very small quantities of material. The quantity of radium
emanation in equilibrium with 1 gramme of radium dementis only -58 cubic
millimetre. But very few institutions can make use of so much radium as
this. An operator would be considered fortunate to possess 100 mgrs.
22
338
RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
of radium salt for emanation work, and the maximum quantity of radioactive
gas that could be obtained from that each month would be -033 cm^.
at normal pressure and temperature ; yet this incredibly small volume of
material, which would go into a pin's head, is equivalent for a short while
as regards Gamma radiation to 100 mgrs. RaBrg.
It is seen therefore, that where it is desired to irradiate diseased tissue
from within, the emanation may be confined in small glass tubes encased in
a thin pointed platinum cover buried in the growth. The radiation close to
such a tube is, however, very intense, and in cases where there is danger of
injuring normal tissue, and for external work generally, larger tubes are
found very effective. A set of suitable forms is shown in Fig. 229 (page
348). They can be rapidly made at the glass bench to suit special cases,
and have the additional advantage of being cleanly and light.
After the emanation has decayed to a value too low to serve any useful
purpose, the tubes may be opened and the remaining gas collected, so that
when added together sufficient may be obtained to charge a useful applicator.
If it is desired to prepare " radium water " {i.e. water which has
absorbed radium emanation) for administration in accurate doses, the
apparatus represented in Fig. 225 has been found
serviceable.
The bottle 1 is connected to a water-supply, the pres-
sure of which is sufficient to raise the mercury in the
vessel 2. The volume above the mercury in 2 must be
known, say 1-5 litres, and when filled with water
(rendered slightly alkaline by a trace of bicarbonate of
soda), taps 6 and 7 should be opened while all the
others are shut. Now owing to the tendency of the
mercury to run back into the Woulfe's bottle, air will
rush up into the liquid if tap 5 is sHghtly turned on.
If, however, instead of alloAving air to enter here, it is
arranged that radium emanation alone shall bubble up
through the mercury into the water, the taps may then
be closed, and
time allowed
for the gas to
be absorbed.
This process
can be greatly
facilitated by
means of a
spray of mer-
cury coming
from the fun-
nel on opening
taps 3, 6, and 7 with tap 8 closed. It will be noticed that during this very
perfect mixing the volume of water does not vary, nor is it exposed to the
Fig. 225.-
- Arrangement for the preparation of water impregnated with
radium emanation.
RADIUM SALTS
339
air. The only gas in contact with it is the small bubble of hydrogen
containing the emanation.
The solution is thus soon ready to be drawn off from the side tube i,
the water pressure from the main supply forcing up the mercury in 2
and by that means preventing all exposure of the contained liquid to the air,
except during the few seconds necessary for the process of botthng.
The bottles used to hold the prepared water are made in sets of graduat-
ing size, the volumes increasing in the same proportion as the rate at which
the emanation decays. The result of this is that a regular dose may be given
twice or so a day for perhaps a week with one set of bottles. (For strength
of radium water see p. 343.) The radium solution from which the emanation
was pumped is ever giving a fresh supply ; the curve showing the rate of
growth is the complement of the one just discussed. We can say, therefore,
that after 3-8 days half the maximum supply is available ; it is evidently
more economical to pump the gas off every four- days, provided that -will
give sufficient for our purpose, than to wait a month till the maximum is
reached.
In practice, only about 75 to 80 per cent of the emanation may be
obtained from a solution in the manner already described. By boihng the
liquid more would be obtained, but the risk is too great. The coefficient of
solution of emanation is about the same for water and for the blood ; salt
water takes up less than fresh water, but oils, paraffins, charcoal, and
colloid bodies absorb the emanation to a high degree.
It may be well to give here a brief account of the salts of radium now
in use, their mode of packing in tubes, and their relative advantages. The
element forms an insoluble sulphate. The carbonate is also practically
insoluble. To convert the sulphate into a soluble form it may be boiled
with carbonate of soda, dissolved in HCl, and crystallised. This gives the
very soluble salt RaCl22H20. Then there is the bromide, RaBrg, which
is difficult to obtain free from water of crystalhsation ; in calculations,
therefore, use the formula RaBr22H20.
The following are the values for the weight of radium element in 1 mgr.
of the various salts :
Name.
Formula.
Weight of Ra
element in Mgrs.
Radium bromide
Radium chloride
Radium carbonate
Radium sulphate
RaBr22H20
RaClo2HoO
RaCOg
RaSO^
•585
•679
•790
•702
The salts are generally prepared of 50 per cent purity. It is, however,
desirable to reduce the volume of the crystals as much as possible, and the
purification should, in the writer's opinion, be carried further. This practice
(rarely adopted) results in the radium preparation occupying the minimum
volume.
The platinum tubes used to contain the salt are generally -5 mm.
340
EADIATION THERAPEUTICS
thick in the wall, but -3 mm. will just carry a screw thread, and if made
from drawn tube, will be stifT enough for most purposes. The size of the
tube should be such that it is quite filled with the powder, the screw plug
being then inserted and gold-soldered in position. It is essential to " tin "
the thread with gold before screwing in the plug. If this sealing is not
perfectly made, emanation will escape ; this may be detected by leaving the
tube shut into a box for a few days, and then testing to see whether the
interior has become radioactive. When, however, for any reason it is required
to place a quantity of radium salt in a somewhat long narrow tube (metal),
it may be kept in position by a plug of gold leaf, such as that used by dentists
for tooth-stopping. Or, if a flat applicator is needed, Fig. 226 (A), it is a good
plan to mix the salt with coco-nut charcoal before filling, for by absorbing
the emanation this ensures a uniform radiation from the faces of the tube.
For insertion into deep-seated regions lengths of " fine " silver rod should be
screwed into the applicator or tubes. " Standard " silver is far too stiff.
A tube of platinum, whose wall is -5 mm., cuts off 75 per cent of the
Beta rays and 4 per cent of the Gamma. Four mm. of lead absorb all the
Beta, and 2 mm. are generally safe for a twenty-four hour exposure, where
little or no skin reaction is required. Two mm. of rubber, or five layers of
lint, seem sufficiently effective in suppressing the secondary rays from the
lead. One mm, of lead reduces the Gamma rays by 4-5 per cent.
Unlike X-rays, the Gamma radiation, being practically homogeneous,
follows the density law of absorption, so that lead and silver absorb very
nearly the same amounts for equal thicknesses. The coefficient of absorp-
tion of Gamma rays from RaCa by lead =-51, while that for the Beta rays
V_J
A
c
; Fig. 226. — Various forms of radium applicators.
varies in the case of aluminium between 13 and 53 (the Beta rays being
heterogeneous).
A filter and screen in use at King's College Hospital, and designed by
THE ELECTROSCOPE 341
the writer, is represented in Fig. 226 (B). It consists of a block of silver, cut
as shown, and bored out to take two fine tubes of radium salt. The thickness
behind the tubes is 1 cm., and each of ten platinum shutters (one is shown
dotted on the diagram) can be slid down to screen the radium effectively.
An oval section filter, Fig. 226 (C) to carry two tubes is also found to be
useful at the same Institution. In order to ascertain the quantity of radium
contained in tubes or applicators, it has become necessary to devise methods
which may be applied without in any way disturbing the radioactive salts
to be tested.
Measurement
The electroscope shown in Fig. 220 may now be described in detail. It
consists essentially of a lead barrel 1 cm. thick (1), pro\aded with lead
windows at each end, and glass windows at the sides. A fine rod stands
erect within, carr\dng a piece of glass fibre rendered electrically conducting
(or, of course, a gold leaf). This stem is supported by a plug of sulphur,
and projects downwards a little, so that the piston (2) can be moved up by
rotating the cam (3), and thus connect the leaf stem vnth. batteries. On
lowering the stem this connection is broken, the brass guard tube, however,
remaining charged.
It is seen that no electricity can leak away from the stem except by
ionisation taking place within the instrument, owing to radiation entering
by the lead windows. There will, of course, be a natural leak (N_), due to
slight radioactivity of the air and inner surface of the lead. But if old lead
be used, this leak may be reduced to a very small value. The cam is operated
by twisting the rod (4) between two stops. The movement of the leaf is
read by a microscope. Great care should be taken to see that the air of the
room is still when the electroscope is used, or otherwise differences of tem-
perature upon different sides of the instrument will set up air currents
within, which vitiate the results. And it is essential to leave the leaf
charged for a few hours before making a test. Owing to the curious tendency
of insulators to soak up electric charges, time must be allowed for the
sulphur to become saturated before beginning work.
The lead barrel being connected to earth, readings are taken when each
of the two quantities of radium to be compared stand at some definite
distance from one of the lead windows, and a comparison of these results, if
one of the radium tubes has been standardised against a known quantity of
pure radium salt, will enable the quantity in the other tube to be determined.
It would be scarcely appropriate to go into great detail here as to this matter,
but it must be pointed out that several precautions have to be taken. The
avoidance of air currents, the allowance for " soakage," the correction for
the N_ must all be attended to. The charge upon the " guard tube " should
remain constant, and for that purpose a set of 200 Leclanche batteries
answers well (No. 3 size).
The most important condition of all, however, is that we charge the
342 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
leaf stem to a suflB.cient potential to enable it to attract all the ions of opposite
sign as quickly as they form in the gas within the apparatus. A good way
to test this consists in measuring the ratio of the ionisation produced by
Gamma rays from two specimens of radium salt, one of which weighs about
twice as much as the other.
When brought close to the electroscope the ionisation due to the rays
from the larger quantity may be so great that all the ions are not caught
before appreciable recombination occurs, whereas the lesser tube will give
fewer ions, all of which may be attracted to the leaf stem.
It is obvious that the readings then will not give the true value for the
ratio of the quantities of radium present. At a greater distance, however,
the correct result is obtained, and beyond that point no further change in
the ratio should be observed.
By this means experience will show at what rate the leaf should fall to
ensure working within a safe margin. When all the ions are caught, the
current which traverses the gas in the electroscope is called the " saturation
current," and exactly what value it must have in each particular case depends
simply upon the potential gradient between the charged leaf stem and the
walls of the electroscope. If the stem is charged to 300 volts, the case being
always connected to earth and standing with its walls 3 cm. from the stem,
the potential gradient is 100 volts per cm., and sufficient for most purposes.
It is not always convenient to use a battery for charging the electro-
scope, and the device shown in Fig. 227 may often serve instead. It is a
Fig. 227. — Friction device for charging electroscopes.
miniature frictional machine, and produces its charge of electricity by the
action of depressing the plunger, 1, to which two small flannel rubbers, 2 2,
are attached. The close contact of these as they slide up the celluloid rod,
3, electrifies it negatively, the charge being taken off at the aluminium
point, 4, as the rubbers return to their initial position, and are auto-
matically connected to a metal block, 5, previously earthed by contact with
the spring, 6. An instrument of this kind is in very general use in a
radio-physics laboratory because of its compactness and rehability.
Units. — For the measurement of radium salts it is sufficient to express
the result in terms of units of weight. But in the case of emanation,
since the actual quantities are so small, it has been decided by international
agreement to estabhsh a new unit.
We have explained what is meant by the equilibrium value of the
emanation. The new unit is based on this principle and is appropriately
named after Professor and Madame Curie. The amount of radium emana-
tion in equilibrium with 1 gramme of radium element is called 1 curie. From
this the milli-curie and micro-curie follow naturally. But in the case of
certain natural " radioactive waters," where the quantities of emanation
PHYSIOLOGICAL ACTION 343
are extremely small, another plan is followed upon the continent. Pro-
fessor Mache has suggested that, if the saturation current produced by
the emanation from 1 litre of water amomits to 1 electrostatic unit of
electricity per second in a standardised apparatus, the quantity of emana-
tion present shall be called 1000 units. The initiation of a new unit in
science certainly calls for courage in these days, when such long hsts of
them already fill the books of reference. It is in any case desirable to be
able to express readily the value of one unit in terms of another, and to
adhere as far as possible to the C.G.S. system.
To base any system of measurement upon the arbitrary choice of a
special apparatus will appear to many to have its drawbacks, and it is still
questionable whether it would not be more advantageous on the whole
to adopt the curie and its fractions for the complete range of emanation
measurement.
Some confusion appears to have crept into the interpretation of the
relationship between the curie and the mache unit of emanation. One
authority tells us that 1 curie =3,000,000 mache units, while another gives
it as being equal to about 2,000,000 mache units. Taking Professor Mache's
own value of 3-7 x 10 ~^° curie, the correct relationship is 1 milU-curie=
2,702,702-7 M.Es. or 2-7 milHon mache units.
The usual strength to prepare radium emanation water for internal use
is 1 milli-curie per litre, but water containing 6 milli-curies per Htre has
been used in certain cases. The final products of radium, viz. KaD, KaE^,
RaEg, and RaP, are of little or no use therapeutically, and so they need not
be referred to here.
It will be remembered, however, that at the outset we expressed the
opinion that Alpha rays would be employed to a greater extent if only some
effective way of introducing them into a tissue could be devised. The
subcutaneous injection of substances holding the emanation, such as refined
petroleum, appears to be the most hopeful. Great care must, however,
be taken to employ it only in very small doses. A diffusion apphcator
has also been devised by which radium emanation is allowed to pass
into the tissue, either by absorption through the skin or by a process of
imbedding. But so far all methods of using Alpha rays are in a highly
experimental stage.
Physiological Action
We have already pointed out that the action of a radiation may so far
disturb the normal arrangement of the constituents of atoms that while the
influence lasts their usual properties are modified. Now there is no doubt
that those who have to do with the application of radiations for medical use
are beginning to feel more and more acutely the need of some working hypo-
thesis which will guide their efforts and lead to the accumulation of evidence
along definite lines. The practical utility of the far-reaching discovery of
radioactivity is certainly held in check at the moment for want of some
systematic attempt to Avork in accordance with a scheme. ,
344 EADIATION THERAPEUTICS
The cells of organic bodies consist of complex molecular aggregates,
whose ultimate constituents, as far as we know, are the electrified bodies that
build up their atoms. We know, further, that when a suitable radiation
falls upon these bodies there will be an absorption of energy and an exchange
of electrons.
It is, therefore, by action upon the atoms themselves that the radiation
primarily exerts its influence. By disturbing the bonds which hold together
the intramolecular groups however, chemical changes will also result. Many
physiological actions of the rays seem to be out of all proportion to the energy
conveyed to the tissues, and moreover, a change once begun appears to
continue for weeks after the cessation of the radiation. The action is more
pronounced, too, in the case of immature and rapidly-gromng cells than in
others. We suggest that the chief cause for these effects is the temporary
suspension of the normal function of the cells during the time of radiation,
and that if the radiation is not intense enough to bring this about, it may,
nevertheless, serve to produce, by physico-chemical change, a product which
stimulates the growth of the very cell we desire to kill (as well as possibly
that of normal tissue).
According to this view, then, there are two distinct actions, viz. the
suppression of the normal function of the cells, due possibly to the ionisation
of the nuclei, and the indirect effect of the secretion of a product, in
the nature of an anti-body, which tends to stimulate growth against the
irritating presence of the radiation. If, in the case of a malignant growth,
the former can be maintained for a sufficiently long time, the cells die from
want of their normal functions, and even the production of the anti-body in
excess is harmless, or even beneficial, if it stimulate the normal cells to
proliferate. The dead cells are then slowly absorbed, while the normal tissue
takes its place.
With the accumulation of careful observation at our disposal, the time
cannot be far distant when a broad generalisation will become possible,, and
the medical use of radiations thereby greatly extended. The comparison
of the action of rays upon nucleated and non-nucleated cells, the possibility
of producing immunisation by radiations, and many other experiments,
should ultimately give important results, and lead to still wider use for
radioactive substances in the cure or alleviation of disease.
C. E. S. P.
THE PRACTICAL APPLICATION OF RADIUM
TO DISEASE
In this section of the book it will be sufficient to mention the conditions
where radium has been found to possess advantages over X-rays or other
forms of treatment.
It should be stated at the outset that radium will produce effects in all
the conditions in which X-rays are used, the effect being due to the action
of radiations from whatever source they are produced. In the following
pages a number of conditions will be described where radium has undoubted
advantages over any other form of treatment. When this is not the case,
radium should not be employed as long as the price of this element is so
prohibitive as it now is. When the two agents are of equal therapeutic
value, another factor sometimes influences the choice, namely, the ease with
which one or the other may be applied.
The chief points which influence the choice of radium in therapeutics
are :
(1) The greater penetration of the Beta and Gamma rays, more particu-
larly the latter.
(2) The convenience with which radium may be applied to several of
the internal organs.
(3) The ease with which it can be appHed to the interior of a tumour
mass, in cases where it would be very difficult for X-rays to produce the same
therapeutic eflect without great destruction of tissue.
(4) The fact that when dealing with highly nervous patients the apphca-
tion is not nearly so alarming as that of X-rays.
(5) The fact that patients may not be in a condition to be moved to
an X-ray department.
Methods of using Radium
Radium therapy has been practised for several years, and during that
time the methods of application have been gradually improved. At first
its use was confined to external applications, and these still hold an
important place in treatment ; the radium was frequently of unknown
strength, and also often in percentages much under the stated activity.
345
346 KADIATION THEEAPEUTICS
More accurate measurements and a higher percentage of purity of the
radium salts have led to a great improvement in the technique of radium
therapy.
The equipment of a radium laboratory should first be briefly con-
sidered, as this is the centre from which all treatment must emanate if it is
expected to be on the right scientific lines.
Assuming that we have at our disposal a certain quantity of radium,
how is it going to be used to the best advantage ? The answer is largely
governed by the type of cases to be treated.
The chapter on physics will have acquainted the reader with the active
properties of radium. The agent is constantly giving off a gas, the emana-
tion, which possesses the active properties of radium, the only difference
being that the decay curve of the emanation is fairly rapid (see curve, p. 335,
in section on physics of radium).
Bearing in mind this decay and its time factor, it is possible to utilise
the emanation in therapeutics in a variety of ways which will be presently
described. For all practical purposes the emanation may take the place
of the radium in metal tubes now so frequently used. In order to obtain
the maximum value from the supply of radium, it is obvious that a portion
at least of the salt should be kept in solution in order that there may be a
constant supply of emanation at stated intervals.
The method of drawing off the emanation, already described, may be
utilised in therapeutics. The emanation may be used in the following
ways :
1. As an inhalation, alone or combined with oxygen. Great claims
are made in favour of this method, especially in Germany, where regular
inhalation institutes are in full work. It is most important when using
any of the complicated machines now employed, to ascertain that they
actually do contain radium in a proportion strong enough to exercise a
therapeutic effect. There can be no doubt that this means of using the
inhalation is valuable, but careful calculations must be made in order to get
a percentage of emanation of sufficient strength to be of use. The action
of radium emanation by inhalation is primarily upon the lungs, and if care
is not exercised an injurious effect may be produced. The emanation is
absorbed and finds its way into the blood, by which it is circulated freely
throughout the body. Its action may therefore be far-reaching, and possibly
a great field of usefulness exists in the future for this method.
It is claimed that the beneficial effects produced by radium water baths
are obtained through the respiratory organs, the emanation given off from
the radium in the bath being inhaled by the patient ; it is quite likely that
this explanation is a correct one, for it is difficult to imagine any action
taking place by way of the skin surface.
2. The emanation may be forced into water, and the patient be
given a stated dose of this at regular times.
Here, again, a large margin of error must be allowed for, because the
emanation slowly decays, so that if it is not at full strength when the water
METHODS OF USING RADIUM
347
is first dispensed it will be practically valueless in less than a week ; water
impregnated with emanation of radium must, therefore, be given at first
only in small quantities at stated times, and in gradually increasing
quantity in order to compensate for the gradual loss of activity, which is
the result of the decay of the emanation.
The emanation is absorbed by oil, water, and other hquids in definite
relative proportions, and any of these may be used as a means of getting the
emanations into the system, or it may be injected into the substance of or
around a growth.
3. The gas may be passed into glass or metal tubes, or flat g'as-tig'ht
ttk'.-
Fig. 228. — Apparatus for inhalation of radium emanation and oxygen. (Radium, Limited.)
applicators may be made to receive the emanation under pressure. These
may be employed in exactly the same way as the radium tube, bearing always
in mind the decay curve of the emanation. Tubes containing emanation
may be inserted into a tumour mass, and left for days if desirable.
4. By using a special electrical device the emanation can be deposited
upon metal points or flat surfaces of metal ; these deposits retain the same
activity as the purest radium, but the duration of the activity is much less
than that of the emanation itself. The deposit of radioactive bodies on
348
RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
flat applicators may be used in many ways, as, for instance, for ionisation,
a powerful galvanic current being employed to drive them into the tissue.
Haret reports a number of cases which have received great benefit by this
method of treatment.
Of the many methods of using radium emanation, the one which com-
mends itself most forcibly is that by which the emanation is placed in re-
ceptacles, which can be used in a
great variety of ways according to
the particular case requiring treat-
ment. The other methods will be re-
ferred to again in the section dealing
with the treatment of particular
diseases. By using a large quantity
of radium salt in solution and draw-
ing off the emanation, it is possible
to treat a large number of patients
by means of specially designed
tubes, which can be constructed to
suit each particular case. Patients
at a distance may receive treat-
ment by means of these applicators,
and patients at hospitals may be
allowed to go home with the radium
emanation applicator, an advan-
tage which is not possible when
using the actual radium, on account
of its financial value.
5. By means of a liquid-air
plant, the emanation can be forced
into small platinum tubes, which may be inserted into the substance of
a tumour.
The parent radium does not depreciate at all noticeably, and is ready to
yield up its growth of emanation at stated intervals, 200 to 500 mgrms. of
radium in solution yielding emanation in sufficient quantity to treat a large
number of patients.
The additional advantage of being able to make a special applicator for
the treatment of each case is of great importance. The applicator may be
of a suitable shape to allow of the maximum effect being obtained, and being
of glass or cheap metal may be destroyed after each apphcation.
It is in the treatment of out-patients that this method is found useful.
The apphcator is placed in position, and the patient given definite instruc-
tions as to the time at which he should remove it.
6. The Radium Salts. — This, up to the present, is the manner in
which radium has been most frequently or most generally employed. It
will be necessary to go into the preparation of these applicators at some
length, for it is on a correct assessment of the activity of these apphcators
Fig. 229.
-Glass applicators for radium
emanation.
RADIUM SALTS 349
and the quantity of the radium they contain that successful treatment is
based.
Bearing in mind the great value of radium at present market prices,
it is obvious that no clinique can afford to run great risks of loss of radium
by faulty apphcators. The French method of putting radium upon linen
to form toiles is useful and easy of application, but as these toiles cannot
be regarded as in any degree antiseptic or aseptic, they consequently
cannot be used in cases where care in this respect is necessary. The most
useful form of applicator for superficial conditions is the flat one, which may
be of any desired size and shape. Figures are shown to illustrate radium
applicators, the radium being incorporated in a varnish and spread over the
metal surface of the apphcator (see Figs. 238 and 239). The dimensions
most frequently employed for these forms of applicators are :
Square applicators : 2, 3, and 4 cm. square.
Oblong applicators : 2 cm. x 3 cm. ; 3 cm. x 4 cm.
The amount of radium salt used is generally 1 centigramme per square
centimetre. The activity of the radium salt must also be taken into account.
As the strength may vary from 10,000 to 2,000,000 activity, it is obvious that
mdely diversified effects will be obtained by using the apphcator charged
with salts at any of the gradations between these two Hmits.
A convenient form of flat applicator is illustrated in Fig. 231.
The special varnish employed in the manufacture of apphcators A^ith
fixed salts is made to resist various physical and chemical actions for periods
more or less long ; it may be subjected without damage to a temperature of
300° C. or thereabouts ; it resists the action of the following cold or hot
liquids and solutions for long or short periods : water, permanganate of
potassium of 1 per cent, oxygenised water of 12 volumes, bisulphate
of soda of 1 per cent, glycerine, vaseline, bichloride of mercury of 1 per cent.
The use of absolute or 90 per cent alcohol, or of ether, must be avoided ;
but a short application of cold alcohol does not appear to have any very
serious results.
Screens of nickel, aluminium, lead, silver, or platinum may be employed.
Tubes with Free Salts of Radium.— A salt of radium, by choice the
sulphate, is enclosed in a platinum tube, the walls of which are of a known
thickness, generally tV of a milhmetre, the external diameter of the tube
being at least 2 miUimetres. The length and the diameter vary in accordance
with the quantity of the salt contained in the tube. For instance, a tube
containing 1 centigramme of salts of radium may have an exterior diameter
of 2 millimetres and a total length of 18 millimetres. Tubes used more
recently are much less in diameter. These narrow tubes are very useful for
insertion into the substance of a growth.
The length of the tube is determined by the diameter and the smallest
space the radium can be packed into.
The object of the thick silver screen at the back shown in Fig. 232 is to
protect the skin surface not receiving treatment. This is used in situations,
350
RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
such as the axilla, where the skin on the inner side of the area comes in
contact with the applicator.
A tube may have an outer case (acting as
a screen) fitted to it with a screw cap. The
screw is provided in order that the applicator
may have a length of silver wire joined up to
it for applications in the oesophagus.
In some instances a pointed screw terminal
is added to the distal end to facilitate the
introduction of the tube into a growth. When
using this applicator for insertion into the
substance of a growth, it is only necessary to
use a local anaesthetic.
The radium in a metal tube is the most useful
form in which it is employed and it is capable of
being used for application :
(1) Externally.
(2) To the interior of the bpdy in such situa-
tions as the mouth, nose, throat, oesophagus,
rectum, vagina, etc.
(3) Into the substance of a tumour by making
incisions, and inserting the radium tubes into the
centre of the mass.
The special methods of preparation of these
be described in the section devoted to treatment of
Fig. 230. —The length of the
tube is determined by the dia-
meter and the smallest space
the radium can be packed into.
A, Outer tube.
B, Space containing radium.
radium tubes will
diseases suitable for radium therapy.
Filtration of Radium Rays
The effects produced by a radium appHcation depend upon the quantity
of radium used, its strength, and the duration of the exposure. The effect
is further influenced by the presence or absence of a filter.
These filters are most important, and a number should always be at
hand. For the flat appHcators it is necessary to have filters from t o of a
millimetre to 2 mm., according to the result we desire to obtain. Using
20 mgrms. of a radium salt of 500,000 activity on an appUcator 2 cm.
square, a marked reaction may be produced on the skin by one hour's ex-
posure. (A thin sheet of rubber or gutta-percha tissue should always be
used to protect the radium.) A half mm. of aluminium acting as a screen
will delay the appearance of the reaction ; therefore, to get a similar degree
of reaction the exposure would require to be longer. When the activity of
the radium is greater the effect will be proportionately increased.
The metallic tubes containing free radium require to be used with screens
of known thickness, which may be larger tubes of silver or platinum, of a
thickness of one to two miUimetres of platinum or two to four mm. of silver.
When these tubes are not available an efl&cient filter may be made by
FILTRATION OF RADIUM RAYS
351
rolling a portion of sheet lead around the platinum tube containing the
radium. Silver and lead have equal powers of obstructing the passage of
Fi(5. 231.— Flat
metal applica-
tor. Radium is
packed in area
represented by
dotted lines.
Fig. 232. — Showing method of arrang-
ing tubes with filters.
A thicli silver screen with grooves to
take two radium tubes. In front is a
groove for platinum filters. Ten of
these may be used ; each is ^ mm.
thick. The holder has a thick backing
of 1 cm. silver, to protect the adjacent
skin surface from the rays when in use.
Fig. 233. — Silver
screen 1 mm. thick
adapted to contain
two tubes side by
side and fitted
with screw ter-
minal.
the rays from the radium, platinum possessing twice the
absorption value of lead or silver.
The thickness of the filter to be
employed is estimated beforehand
according to the effect desired, the
quantity of the radium employed,
and the tissues to be treated.
Secondary Radiations from Tubes
containing Radium. — It is not sufl&-
cient simply to use a filter for the
absorption of the radium rays. It
must be borne in mind that the
filters also give off rays which are . ,. .^ ,.
known as secondary radiations ; ^•i^ ^^^
these are injurious to the tissues
with which they come in contact,
and must therefore be filtered if
damage to the tissues is to be pre-
vented. Rubber tubing of a thick-
ness of I to 4 mm. is sufficient for
this purpose.
Fig. 234. — Radium in a
fiat metal tube show-
ing, by dotted lines,
area of active service.
Two forms of terminal
ai'e shown : (1) Screw
top fitted to a length of
silver wire ; (2) screw
top perforated for silk
thread or fine silver wire.
Silk suture
Rubber
Radium
tube
\J
Fig. 235. — Radium
tube contained in
rubber tubing.
352 EADIATION THERAPEUTICS
The Influence of Air-space in Filtration of Radium Rays. — The distance
of the radium from the surface of the body also prevents'the injurious effects,
in other words, air space acts as a filter by preventing radiations of a
particular length from reaching the surface. In long exposures twenty or
thirty layers of hnt should be interposed between the radium tubes and the
surface of the body.
Radium Tubes in the Substance of a Tumour
Attention must be paid to the follo\\ing points :
(a) The tabe must be surrounded by the growth.
(b) When more than one tube is used, the tubes should be at equal
distances, so that an equal action be obtained throughout the growth.
(c) The radium tube inside its filter must be enclosed in rubber tubing
and closed at each end.
The tube containing the radium must not be subjected to great heat.
It must therefore not be sterilised by heat. It may, however, be placed in a
solution of carbolic acid for a short time before use. The outer filter may be
boiled, and rubber tubing should be sterihsed before use. It is important
that these measures should be carried out prior to the insertion of the radium
tube into the substance of a growth.
Treatment of Deep-seated Tumours by external
Applications
When treating deep-seated tumours it is often necessary to give several
exposures to the exterior of the growth, in such a manner that a fairly equal
dose is given all over the surface of the mass. If a large quantity of radium
is available this could be done by one application ; but the majority of
operators have only a very limited supply at their disposal, and in such cases
it is necessary to give several exposures to cover the surface. The following
method \\dll be found useful, a malignant enlargement of the thyroid requiring
treatment being taken as an illustration, and 200 mgrms. of radium sulphate
in three tubes being available.
The surface of the tumour is mapped out mth a skin pencil, each section
being numbered. A piece of lead 1 cm. thick is moulded to the surface
of the tumour, windows being cut out in this corresponding to the areas
already marked. The radium is arranged on the filter to be employed,,
say 3 mm. of lead, this cutting out practically all of the Beta rays.
The filter is fixed over the window above the area to be treated. The
tubes are attached to the surface of the filter by adhesive plaster.
The tubes are so arranged that the maximum of the radiations go through
the centre of the filter. The tubes are enclosed in rubber tubing, and thirty
layers of lint are placed under the thick lead which has been moulded to the
surface of the tumour. Each area receives a portion of radiation from the
DOSAGE IN RADIUM THERAPY 353
exposure of the adjoining one ;. -the maximum of each area is obtained with
the radium directly over its centre, but each periphery gets nearly a half
from the exposure of the adjoining area. Thus a certain degree of overlapping
must occur, but if the exposures are arranged as above, each area should
have a centre of maximum radiation, and the periphery of each receives
approximately a full dose from the two adjoining applications. In this way
it is possible to get the maximum of exposure all over the surface of a tumour
with a fair degree of certainty.
Using 200 mgrms. of radium, and dividing the tumour into, say 10 areas,
and giving twenty-four hours' exposure to each, it is possible to administer
a relatively large dose, amounting in all to 24 x 10 x 200=48,000 mgrm.-
hours. The exposure of the whole tumour would take ten days.
There are several cautions to be observed when treating with large
quantities of radium.
1. The effect of the earlier exposures should be carefully watched,
because if a marked reaction should come on rapidly the subsequent ex-
posures should be postponed.
2. Short of a severe reaction in serious cases the treatment should be
persisted in. The beneficial effect may be secured if an adequate dose is
given, with practically no skin reaction, but the appearance of a slight
reaction is an indication that the maximum skin dose has been given. An
interval of time should be allowed to elapse before repeating the exposure
over the same area. This should not, however, prevent the treatment from
being carried on over other areas in the proximity.
DOSAGE IN RADIUM THERAPY
The most difficult question in radium treatment is that of dosage.
There are many points which require to be considered.
The activity of salts of radium is evidenced by the photographic,
chemical, electrical, and physiological effect of its radiation. Thus, if one
salt is more active than another, it has a stronger effect upon the substance or
tissue with which it is brought in contact ; if, for example, a photographic
plate is used, the action will vary immensely with the strength and quantity
of radium used. Pure salts of radium, dried and prepared for several
months, have a constant radiation, by which they are always identified,
and the number of rays produced by a quantity of pure radium salt are
actually proportional to its weight. Generally speaking, for equal weight,
the salt which is the richest in radium will have the most intense radiation,
and its value can be expressed in salts of pure radium.
Unit of Radiation. — For the time being the measure which was intro-
duced early in the history of radium therapy has been maintained. Instead
of measuring the value in pure salts of radium, it is compared with the
standard of activity.
Standard of Activity. — In France and other countries metallic
23
354
EADIATION THEKAPEUTICS
uranium is taken as the standard. Equal weights of radioactive salts and
metallic uranium, or the corresponding quantity of uranium oxide spread
on the same surface, are compared. The radiation of uranium is taken as
unity, when the activity of the pure bromide of radium is equal to about
2,000,000 times that of an equal weight of uranium.
Relation between the Value of Radium and its Activity
As an example, a table is appended of a few values of pure salts of radium
and their corresponding activities :
Value of Pure
Bromide of Radium.
Activity.
Value of Pure
Bromide of Radium.
Activity.
Per cent.
0-0025
0-005
0-025
0-05
0-25
0-5
50
100
500
1,000
5,000
10,000
Per cent.
1
2-5
5
25
50
100
20,000
50,000
100,000
500,000
1,000,000
2,000,000
The percentage of pure radium salt in a particular quantity of a mixture
of salt and inert matter determines the activity of the particular preparation.
When several radium preparations are in use, it is well to test one tube, of say
50 mgrms., and having ascertained its percentage of activity, to regard it
as the standard by which the other preparations are estimated. The activity
of the radium is estimated by means of the electroscope, and it is customary
to base the calculations on the Gamma ray effect upon the gold leaf of the
electroscope. For this purpose it is necessary to absorb all the Beta rays
before the Gamma rays can be dealt with. This is easily done by inter-
posing a layer of lead 1 cm. thick between the electroscope and the tube of
radium. Placing the radium at a given distance, the rate of fall of the gold
leaf is watched and timed. Another and stronger tube is then placed on
exactly the same spot as the first tube. The reading of the scale indicating
the fall of the leaf is again taken, and it is a matter of calculation to estimate
the activity of the second tube of radium.
When it is necessary to estimate the activity of emanation, an emanation
electroscope must be employed. This is also useful when deahng Avith sub-
stances and fluids which have become radioactive, such as water, urine, etc.
Ag'e of the Salts. — Immediately they have been prepared, salts of
radium give out only a slight radiation, which consists entirely of the Alpha
rays, the radiation increasing gradually, until its maximum constant value
is attained at the end of one or two months. This is a point which should
always be kept in view when dealing with salts of radium which have been
freshly prepared. These preparations may be used, but the calculation of the
dosage must be carried out for each preparation. It is useless to compare these
preparations with matured ones, from the point of view of therapeutic effect.
RADIUM AND ITS ACTIVITY 355
Variation of Activity. — If salts of radium are enclosed in carefully-
sealed receptacles, they attain a radiation which always remains constant.
Various causes, however, may modify the constancy of radiation :
(1) Exposure of the salts to the atmosphere.
(2) Absorption of moisture.
(3) Dissolution.
(4) Increase of the temperature of the atmosphere.
In order, therefore, to maintain a constant radiation, these several
factors must be taken into account.
Radium enclosed in metal tubes must be carefully sealed in order to
obtain the maximum effect. Each tube should be carefully tested to detect
any emanation leak, which may lower the activity of the preparation, and in
practical therapeutics lead to serious errors in dosage and effect upon tissues.
Dosag-e of Emanation in Solution. — The solution most frequently
used is water, the emanation being mixed with it in a definite proportion.
In mixtures prepared in the laboratory, 1 milli-curie to a htre of water is a
usual strength. This preparation is used for drinking. In special cases
the strength may be greatly increased.
If the solution cannot be measured in electrostatic imits, the testing of
small quantities of emanation — as, for example, in mineral springs — results
in very small fractions. In order to obviate this, Professor Mache of Vienna
proposed to multiply this fraction by 1000.
Mache Unit. — This unit is so convenient that it is made use of at all
the well-known spas (where the activity of the water is very low), and by many
specialists of radium therapy upon the Continent, who all use the Mache
unit for the dosage of emanation.
Dosagce when using* Flat Applicators. — This will vary with the tissue
to be treated and the quantity of radium present in the applicator.
The physiological effect produced upon the tissue will become a practical
factor in the calculation of the dose. It is well to determine beforehand
the degree of actiAdty by means of the electroscope, and then to apply the
applicator for a given time to the surface of the skin in a healthy subject ;
or, for experimental purposes, an animal may be used. The effect may take
some time to appear, so the exposure must not be repeated until time has
been allowed for reaction to manifest itself. Having ascertained the re-
action time for healthy tissue, it is easy so to regulate the exposure in diseased
conditions as to produce the degree of action required. Thus, in simple
conditions such as cheloid, nsevi, etc., it is only necessary to produce a mild
degree of reaction, and keep it up by repeated exposures at stated intervals
to get a cure, while for rodent ulcer, epithelioma of the skin, etc., it is some-
times necessary to produce a degree of necrosis of the tumour mass before
a beneficial result can be looked for.
Practical experience in the use of these applicators is therefore a sine
qua non for every radium therapist.
Dosag-e when the Free Radium is contained in Metal Tubes. —
Practically all the effects produced by the fiat applicator may be obtained
356 RADIATION THEEAPEUTICS
when radium tubes are used. Each tube has a number of filters fitted to it,
ranging from | mm. to 3 mm. ; these filters may be of silver, lead, or platinum,
the latter being the best, because it has a greater density than the others,
and consequently occupies less space. This is very important when tight
strictures of the oesophagus or diseases of the bladder or urethra require
treatment.
The small tube in which the radium is sealed is generally -f-^ to y\ of a
millimetre thick, so if superficial areas require treatment, a short exposure
of a half to one hour, with the radium tube enclosed in a thin rubber one,
should sufiice to produce a mild degree of reaction. Should a deeper effect or
a surface effect free from reaction be desirable, then a thicker filter may be em-
ployed, and the exposure prolonged. In all these instances it is the Beta rays
(all but the softest) and all the Gamma rays which are used. In some chronic
conditions, or in cases of widespread disease, it is necessary to get deeper
effects, and the greater quantity of Beta rays are cut off, so that only the
Gamma rays are employed. In such cases thicker filters are necessary, 2 mm.
of platinum or 4 of lead or silver cutting off practically all the Beta rays.
When using the Gamma rays entirely, the exposure must be greatly
increased, because the percentage of Gamma rays given of! from a quantity
of radium is very small (about 3 per cent).
In order to get a physiological effect upon the tissues, long exposures
are required, and these will vary with the quantity of radium present and
its distance from the tissue requiring treatment. The Gamma ray effect
upon the skin is practically negligible when proper precautions are taken
within normal limits of exposure. Exposures, with large quantities of radium
in well-filtered doses, may be given up to twenty-four hours without damag-
ing the skin. In some instances, where there is ulceration of the surface
of a growth, the skin factor in exposure ceases to exist, and then much longer
exposure to the surface of the growth can be given, because this surface will
bear much longer radiation, and in many instances it is desirable to hasten
the ulcerative process. The expression of the radium dose in accurate terms,
is a matter of considerable difficulty.
We have already dealt with the two methods of expressing the dose in
the case of emanation, namely, the milli-curie and the Mache unit.
Unit of Milligram-Hours. — Dawson Turner has introduced an ex-
pression of dosage which is thoroughly practical for ordinary use, with certain
reservations. He takes the quantity of radium used, and multiplies it by
the number of hours representing the time factor of exposure. Thus, 24
hours multiplied by 200 mgrms. represents an exposure of 4800 mgrm.-
hours. This takes no account of the activity of the radium used, which may
vary from 500 to 2,000,000 activity, nor does it take into consideration the
distance of the applicator from the surface undergoing treatment.
It would be better to include the activity (a note being taken of it in
all exposures), the time of exposure and the quantity of radium, the thickness
of the filter and the distance from the periphery. Thus a record of all
exposures should include :
RADIUM IN GENERAL DISEASES
357
(1) Time, say, 24 Hours.
(2) Quantity of radium, 200 mgrms.
(3) Activity of radium, 2,000,000.
(4) Thickness of filter, 2 mm. platinum.
(5) Distance from periphery, 5 centimetres.
(6) KnoAvn physiological effect upon healthy skin.
RADIUM IN GENERAL DISEASES
While great claims are made by many authorities of standing as to the
efficacy of radium emanation in the treatment of many intractable diseases,
it should be pointed out that a great deal of thorough investigation is neces-
The apparatus consists of two vessels.
B and F. Insoluble sulphate of radium
is placed in the small receptacle C in
the vessel F.
In order to use the apparatus, the
stopper &j, with the vessel B, is raised.
The vessel F is then filled with the
water or other liquid which is required
to be rendered radioactive. The cork
6.2 is replaced, and after having removed
6j, the vessel B is filled with the same
liquid, and b^ is replaced.
The emanation, which is given off
slowly from the salts of radium, is
absorbed little by little by the liquid
in the vessel F, and as this is drawn
off by the tap R, it is replaced by a
corresponding quantity of liquid from
B, which runs through the tube Tg ^^^
emerges under the receptacle C by a
little hole provided for this purpose.
The air can enter B by the water tube
T-^, but it cannot come out.
Fig. 236. — Eadiogeue. (Siemens.)
sary before these claims can be recognised as of value in a number of these
diseases. The chief benefit obtained by patients after taking emanation
in solution appears to be a feeling of well-being, and a gradual improvement
in the general health.
The blood - pressure appears to be reduced, though, when careful
358 EADIATION THEEAPEUTICS
observations are made on the blood-pressure of patients taking radium
emanation, a permanent reduction in it is not easily detected. The
patients so treated are generally visitors to well-known health resorts,
and while residing there are under dietetic and hygienic conditions which
are not so faithfully carried out under other conditions. It is possible that
the wholesome regime of these resorts, early hours, and restrictions in food
and drink are contributing factors to the general improvement ; nevertheless
there are cases which have benefited from emanation treatment in their
homes, while conversely there are many others which do not seem to improve
at all.
While patients suffering from general diseases, such as gout, diabetes,
and arteriosclerosis, are perhaps best treated at a recognised spa, it is possible
to treat such cases in hospital or in their homes. Hospital treatment is the
better method, because then it is possible to have the patient under control,
and all contributing factors may be considered, and experimental investiga-
tions carried out. These observations should be carried out on a large scale,
and an opinion on the value of radium emanation in these diseases reserved
until it is possible to compare a large number of statistics.
The strength of the emanation employed must be known, and the daily
quantity given measured. Such observations can only be carried out in a
hospital or institution which has the necessary accommodation, and a fully
equipped laboratory, where physical data may be standardised, clinical
observations made, chemical and bacteriological investigations carried out,
and the whole correlated in order to give the information needed. It is
satisfactory to know that these conditions are now existent in several
institutions, and that a great deal of research work is going on, which when
published should go far towards establishing radium as a therapeutic agent
of known and proved value.
The administration of radium emanation solution of a strength of not
less than 1 milli-curie per litre to patients suffering from chronic arthritis,
from whatever cause it may be due, is often followed by marked improvement
in the condition of the patient. Cases treated comparatively early in the
course of the disease benefit more readily. The condition of the joints is
also of importance. The periarticular variety is the most likely to respond.
When there are marked cartilaginous and osseous changes present, little
permanent improvement need be looked for. When Hmitation of movement
is due to changes around the joint, and these are not at an advanced stage,
some improvement is almost certain to follow. Pain is lessened, the grating
in the joint on movement is not so marked, and the muscular and the general
tone improve.
RADIUM IN DISEASES OF THE EYE
Mackenzie Davidson has called attention to the marked effect of radium
in diseases of the eye, trachoma, conjunctivitis, and catarrhal folliculitis.
EADIUM IN GENERAL DISEASES
359
Short 'exposures are recommended, and the radium should not be screened
to any extent. The radium enclosed in a
glass tube, or very thin metal filter, is the
best form of application, and a few minutes'
exposure is all that is necessary. Each case
must, however, be treated on its merits,
and if short exposures do not produce the
effect wished for the time of exposure must
be increased.
Rodent ulcers in the neighbourhood of
the orbit require special treatment. When
situated on the eyelids, the eyeball must be
protected when a long exposure is contem-
plated. A sheet of lead, rubber, or lead
enclosed in gutta-percha tissue is moulded to
the surface of the eyeball, and placed under
the lid to be treated. The applicator is
strapped in position for the necessary time
Fig. 237. — Application of radium to
the eyelid.
R. Radium tube.
B. Growth on upper eyelid.
C. Lead rubber placed under eyelid
to protect the eyeball.
It will be found that com-
paratively long exposures may be given when these precautions are taken.
RADIUM IN DISEASES OF THE EAR, NOSE, AND
THROAT
In these regions, owing to the scarcity of the supply of radium, and the
consequent difficulty of obtaining sufficiently large quantities, its use has been
restricted to malignant disease. But it is probable that in the future a large
field of usefulness will be found in the treatment of simple inflammatory
lesions. In the region of the ear, nose, and throat it will be found extremely
useful as a therapeutic agent of great potency, and probably when radium
has found its level in the treatment of mahgnant disease, some of its thera-
peutic properties will be directed towards the cure of these simpler diseases.
Granulation tissue readily jdelds to radiation treatment. Haemorrhage
can be controlled, and when a suppurative condition exists, the discharge
may be greatly lessened, and eventually dried up. Chronic inflammatory
thickenings will slowly subside under properly estimated radiation dosage.
Tubes of emanation can be readily moulded to a suitable size for introduction
into the ear, nose, and throat.
Papillomata of the vocal chords have been successfully treated. Chronic
suppurative conditions of the ear with extensive formation of granulation
tissue will slowly subside, and a return to the normal follows.
A good deal has been written on the treatment of deafness by radium.
A considerable experience of the action of both X-rays and radium leads
one to state that the percentage of cases which show any deflnite improve-
ment is remarkably small. This is not surprising when we consider the
condition of the parts in the majority of the cases of chronic deafness. Now
and again a case which is suitable may show a good deal of improvement.
360 KADIATION THERAPEUTICS
but any permanent good result must not be expected. In the majority of
cases of chronic deafness the hope of improvement through the use of radium
should not be held out to the patient. The treatment of such cases can only
bring discredit upon the agent employed.
RADIUM IN THE TREATMENT OF EXOPHTHALMIC
GOITRE
It is to be expected that radium should exercise a beneficial influence
over this disease. The undoubted success of X-ray treatment led workers
to experiment with the radiations from radium. When X-rays alone are
used the hard filtered ray appears to be the most useful. Radium may be
combined with this either together or alternately. When a patient is too
ill to be moved daily to the X-ray room, radium may be applied while he is
resting quietly in bed. A prolonged exposure is necessary, extending into
several hours, and depending on the quantity used. Using 100 mgrms.
with 3 mm. of lead filter, twelve hours to each side of the enlarged thyroid
gland should suffice to produce marked improvement. The exposures may
be repeated in from three to four weeks. After one or two applications
a marked diminution of the pulse rate is obtained, this being followed by
an improvement in the general condition of the patient. Several exposures
at long intervals should be given after the symptoms have improved.
Radium may be used when all other remedies have failed. Dawson Turner
has recorded a number of cases treated by radium which are encouraging.
MALIGNANT DISEASE OF THE THYROID GLAND
Radium also plays an important part in the treatment of enlarged
thyroid ; malignant disease, especially sarcoma, may yield to radium ;
apparently inoperable cases may be rendered operable, while an improvement
in the condition of the patient is almost invariable. The gland diminishes
in size, distressing symptoms are relieved, and in some instances the growth
diminishes greatly in size. The technique in these serious cases is different
from that in cases of simple enlargement. Large quantities of radium must be
used, long exposures should be given, and the whole area of the growth and
the lymphatic distribution carefully treated. In one case successfully treated,
205 mgrms. of radium bromide filtered through 3 mm. of lead at a distance
of 3 inches from the sldn were left in position for seventy-two hours, spread
over three areas, taking in all the enlargement. The enlarged gland slowly
subsided. There was no superficial reaction at all. In three months
nothing could be felt of the tumour, except a slight thickening on the right
side of the gland. From a consideration of the results obtained in a large
number of cases of enlarged thyroid with constitutional disturbances, the
conclusion has been arrived at that radium offers a prospect of greater and
quicker benefit than when X-rays are used. It is, moreover, easier to apply,
and the dosage may be given at longer intervals.
RADIUM IN DISEASES OF THE SKIN
361
RADIUM IN THE TREATMENT OF DISEASES OF
THE SKIN
Many of the diseases of the integument respond to radium treatment
when other remedies have failed. When the lesion is superficial, it is best
to employ the flat applicators. When deeper effects are required, it is
necessary to use the Gamma ray with filters. The conditions which are
peculiarly responsive to radium are occasionally those which do not give
good results with any of the other agents
used. Vascular nsevi, hairy moles, warts,
and rodent ulcer respond well in most cases.
Chronic eczema, psoriasis, and other diseases
of a like nature readily respond to radium
treatment. In place of the flat applicators
prepared in varnish, a glass applicator of
the requisite shape may be used. This is
charged with emanation, and may be ap-
plied directly to the skin without a filter, or
simply wrapped in a piece of gauze or lint.
The advantage of this form of applicator
lies in the fact that it can readily be dis-
infected, and can be repeatedly recharged when required. These glass
applicators may be made in a variety of shapes to suit particular cases.
The exposure varies with the quantity of radium used, its degree of
activity, and the filters employed. Consequently the estimation of the
exposure is always a matter of difficulty.
When large areas have to be treated, it is necessary to continue the
exposure over the whole surface by moving the applicator after the adequate
exposure has been given. A certain degree of overlapping occurs, but if
Fig. 238.- — ^Circiilar applicator suitable
for the treatment of superficial skin
lesions. (Armbrecht, Nelson & Co.)
Fig. 239. — Applicator iii box. (Siemens.)
This form is particularly useful in the treatment of superficial skin lesions.
the applicator is kept at a distance from the skin by means of several layers
of lint, the danger of an overdose to a particular area is greatly diminished.
362 EADIATION THERAPEUTICS
Psoriasis. — Other methods, notably) X-rays filtered, give good results.
The technique is similar to that employed in chronic eczema. When the
radium is enclosed in platinum tubes, the same procedure is necessary, but
it must be remembered that in this case a hard ray is being employed, because
I to I mm. of platinum (the average thickness of the tubes used to hold the
radium) is known to cut off a large percentage of the Beta rays as well as the
Alpha rays. To obtain the same area of action as when the flat applicators
are used, two or more of the small tubes may be employed, longer exposures
being necessary. When using unscreened applicators the exposures will be
short, and given at frequent intervals on several successive days. Then an
interval of two or three weeks is allowed to elapse before treatment is
resumed. This disease is apt to recur at long intervals of time, and several
series of treatment may be required.
Eczema. — The use of radium in the treatment of these conditions must
necessarily be limited to cases which are circumscribed, e.g. chronic cases
which have resisted all other forms of treatment may receive the stimulus
necessary to start the healing process. Flat applicators or tubes may be
employed, the exposures varying with the filtration. A flat applicator con-
taining 5 mgrms. of radium, spread over a surface of 2 by 1 cm., will give a
marked reaction in from forty to sixty minutes. One application may lead
to a marked improvement, though several will be necessary in most cases.
Shorter exposures will frequently give real improvement, and these should
be repeated at intervals of several days, until a slight superficial reaction
appears. When this subsides the condition gradually improves. Treat-
ment should be repeated in a fortnight to three weeks' time, and the case
should be kept imder observation for several months, in order to check the
earliest appearance of a recurrence.
Nsevus. — Radium possesses a great advantage over other methods of
treatment in that its use is painless, and that there are no distracting noises
from active apparatus. In children this is important. Nsevi may be treated
in young infants, the applicator being strapped in position and left for the
required time. Further, applicators may be made to fit angles or may be
inserted into the cavities of the body or into the interior of an ulcerated cavity
or the substance of a growth.
In treating neevi it is necessary to give frequent exposures to the part.
After a time, usually a week or ten days, reaction of the surface appears.
This may be all that is required, the resulting changes from the inflammatory
processes induced in the tissues leading to a disappearance of the vascu-
larity. Should the apphcation not be sufiicient to induce these changes it
must be repeated. The results obtained cannot be surpassed by any other
remedy, and the process is quite painless, a most important point where
young children require to be treated. The resulting scars are soft and flexible,
and in time the skin takes on quite a normal appearance. The time required
for thorough treatment is sometimes a drawback, but if the treatment is
carefully carried out the result amply repays the trouble taken.
It is a good routine method to begin treatment in these cases with
RADIUM IN DISEASES OF THE SKIN 363
unscreened applicators, and give short exposures. Time should be allowed
between the exposures to determine the degree of reaction. It is most
important not to overdo the exposure, because if this occurs troublesome
telangiectasis will follow. If this happens it may be necessary to treat the
condition mth electrolysis, or better still, the point where the dilated vessels
appear may be treated mth a diathermy needle. Very good results will follow
these appUcations. In some cases it is better to treat these conditions at
once with electro-coagulation.
Nsevi may be classified clinically as follows :
1. Flat Superficial Ncevi. — These respond well to radium treatment.
In selecting cases, the deciding factor is the degree of vascularity. If the
parts blanch well when pressure is applied, the probabihty is that the response
to treatment will be good.
2. Capillary Ncevi. — These also respond well, but before beginning
treatment with radium other methods should be carefully considered, as
carbon dioxide snow, electrolysis, or diathermy are all very efficacious.
3. Port Wine Stains. — This variety is not at all easily treated. The stains
respond slowly, and require repeated treatment, and often in the end the result
is not good. These remarks apply, however, to any other line of treatment.
4. Cavernous NcBvi. — As a rule, these respond very well. Filtered rays
should be employed, and the exposure may be given at one sitting, or if
more convenient it may be divided into several of two hours' duration on
successive days. Eeaction on the surface is not desirable, and can be avoided
by adequate filtration.
Superficial Papillomata (Warts). — These may be successfully treated
in nearly every case if the dose is accurately estimated. They tend to
reappear if treatment is discontinued too soon. An exposure of one-half
to one hour with an unscreened apparatus will cause reaction and lead to a
gradual disappearance of the wart. The tendency is for recurrence, and the
radium exposures may be repeated when necessary.
Lupus Erythematosus. — An improvement in this condition may
follow radium treatment, but the exposures require to be continued for long
periods and at frequent intervals. X-rays and the mercury- vapour lamp
often give quite as good results.
Lupus Vulg-aris. — This is a condition where many methods of treatment
may require to be used. There are cases where radium appears to be the
best of all ; others respond to X-rays, and others again to the mercury-
vapour lamp. When the disease is situated in the neighbourhood of the nose,
radium is the most useful agent, because it can so conveniently be appHed
to the interior. The screened rays appear to act best, but in some cases an
emanation tube with a rubber tube over it gives excellent results when long
exposures are given.
Cheloid. — Extensive cheloid is a condition which slowly responds to
radium treatment. The exact line of treatment must be determined for
each individual case. Eadium of low-grade activity is used on flat applica-
tors without other filtration than that of the varnish and a thin layer of
364 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
gutta-percha tissue, the latter being employed mainly to protect the surface
of the plaque. The whole of the scar tissue should receive an equal amount
of radiation, and care should be taken that the edges of the cheloid and the
adjoining healthy tissue are also treated. Until the operator knows the
activity of the applicator, it is well to give a preliminary exposure over a
part of the cheloid for, say, an hour, and then to wait until reaction shows
itself. Having thus ascertained the necessary degree of reaction, the whole
of the scar tissue can be radiated, an equal exposure being given to every
part. A moderate degree of reaction is necessary, and treatment should
be suspended until this has subsided. The exposure should then be
repeated, the duration of time being increased or diminished according to
the results obtained from the preliminary exposure.
When the radium is enclosed in platinum tubes the procedure is the
same, but in this case it must be remembered that a harder ray is being
employed, because ^ to | mm. of platinum (the average thickness of the
tubes used to hold the radium) is known to cut off a large percentage of the
Beta rays as well as all the Alpha rays.
To obtain the same area of action as when using a flat applicator, two or
more of the small tubes may be enclosed in a larger applicator, thicker on
one side than on the other ; such an applicator is shown in Fig. 232. The
time of exposure must be proportionately lengthened according to the
thickness of the radium tubes, and the external filter employed.
With applicators having tubes of a thickness of | mm., the exposure may
safely run into four to six hours. With a filter of 1 mm. the time might
be extended to six or eight hours, and with a filter of 2 mm. or more the
exposures may be up to twenty hours.
In all these instances the employment of two or more layers of surgical
lint is recommended, this also serving the purpose of preventing damage
from secondary radiations produced in the filter.
Leucoplakia. — This condition responds readily to radium. In situa-
tions such as the mouth, tongue, etc., radium is probably the best therapeutic
agent which can be employed, largely on account of the ease with which it
can be applied to the leucoplakial patch. This condition is frequently a
forerunner or an accompaniment of cancer. When the latter disease has
established itself, it renders the prognosis more grave, though very early
cancer may be healed for a time at least.
Prolonged treatment is necessary, and the radium application has to
be well screened to avoid damage to the healthy tissues. When large areas
require to be treated it is advantageous to combine X-rays with the radium,
thus enabling the area to be more rapidly treated. Special portions may be
subjected to a longer radium exposure.
Pruritis. — In the treatment of this disease advantage is taken of the
well-known analgesic powers of radium. The condition is accompanied by
a degree of chronic infiltration of the skin, and the object of treatment is,
therefore, to restore the skin to a normal condition before a permanent benefit
is obtained. In chronic cases this is extremely difficult. A marked degree
RADIUM IN GYNAECOLOGICAL PRACTICE 365
of reaction is necessary, and this may lead to an aggravation of the symptoms
for a time. Patients are consequently discouraged, and it is difficult to
induce them to continue a treatment which appears to be doing more harm
than good. If treatment is persevered with, marked benefit will follow in
a large percentage of cases. Filtered rays and long exposures are necessary ;
1 mm. of silver or lead should be employed, and several layers of hnt inter-
posed between the tube and the skin. In other cases it may be necessary to
use filters of platinum up to 2 mm. Twelve to fifteen hours' exposure of
50 mgrms. of RaBrg may be given, and this dose repeated in three to four
weeks, care being taken not to overdo the exposures.
RADIUM IN GYNi^COLOGICAL PRACTICE
The diseases in which radium will be found most useful are :
(1) Chronic endocervicitis.
(2) Chronic endometritis.
(3) Leucoplakia vulvae.
(4) Cancer.
(5) Fibro-myomata.
A short description of the technique in each of these diseases is necessary,
with an approximate estimation of the results and degree of benefit received.
Chronic Inflammatory Conditions of the Cervix. — These may
be treated by two methods :
1. The introduction of a metal tube containing radium into the cervical
canal, with additional tubes arranged in the fornices, around the lips of the
cervix, when disease is situated here. The metal tube can be firmly fixed
to a sound, to facilitate its introduction.
2. An emanation tube can be made to suit the particular case requiring
treatment. It is charged with the emanation, so as to allow of full activity
at the time of application. It is possible to have the appKcator so made as
to contain emanation equal to 100 mgrms. of radium or more in a very small
cubic space, or if it is desirable to weaken the action, the applicator may
be made larger, and the gas allowed to difi:use itself over the larger space.
The size and shape of the applicator and the quantity of radium or
emanation to be used being thus arranged, the next matter is the exposure.
This is largely a matter of experience, and each case must be judged on its
own merits.
Chronic Endometritis. — When there has been considerable hgemor-
rhage which cannot be controlled by other methods, a radium tube may be
introduced into the body of the uterus. The rays will often check the
haemorrhage, and also the seropurulent discharge which accompanies the
condition. The exposures should be long, and filtration is necessary if it is
desired to influence changes in the deeper layers of the endometrium. The
treatment should be continued at intervals of three to four weeks, until the
condition has returned to a normal state.
366
EADIATION THEEAPEUTICS
Leucoplakia Vulvse. — This condition, which causes much discomfort
both mentally and physically, is frequently greatly relieved, and often occa-
sionally quite cured by thorough radiation treatment. In some cases X-rays
are found to be more useful than radium, while in others radium acts like a
charm. Sometimes it is well to apply a radium tube to those portions of
the affected area where the disease seems most active, and to treat the more
widely but less deeply affected sldn areas with X-rays.
By combining the agents it is often possible to get much
better results than when either is used separately. The
exposures should be frequent, once or twice a week for
several weeks. When frequent doses are given, filtration
is necessary, and it should be increased in proportion
to the frequency of the dosage. The radium should be
apphed in large quantities, filters of 1 to 2 mm. of
platinum enabhng exposures of up to twenty-four
hours to each area to be given. In the early stages of
treatment, however, it is better to give divided doses
with light filtration, and wait for a reaction on the skin.
If this reheves the irritation (it occasionally increases it)
it is best to wait till this reaction subsides, and then give
another dose, filtered this time, and then repeat, increas-
ing the filtration and duration of the exposure. When
all irritation has subsided, it is advisable to continue
treatment for several months, in order to carry on the
beneficial action of the rays.
Cancer of the Cervix Uteri. — Radium treatment
may also benefit this condition. Haemorrhage and dis-
charge are lessened, and great relief from pain is a
frequent result of treatment. Active treatment by
radium in cancer of the cervix has 5delded encouraging
results. When possible, several tubes should be used.
One is introduced into the cervical canal, and the others
placed around the cervix, these being packed in position
with tampons. When a preHminary partial excision has
been performed, the radium tubes are introduced while the
patient is under the anaesthetic. In all cases requiring
treatment the use of an anaesthetic allows of the placing
of the radium in correct position, and greatly favours
the prospect of improvement. Several cases of early
carcinoma so treated have done remarkably well. Con-
tinental writers who have been using radium and mesothorium, claim
that the operative treatment of cancer of the cervix is no longer
necessary. No doubt time and a larger experience will lead them to con-
siderably modify this opinion, but the results obtained by radium treatment
may compare very favourably with those obtained by operation. The
tendency to recurrence exists when either mode of treatment is followed.
Fig. 240. — Uterine
sound with radium
tube at extremity.
A suitable applicator
for introduction into
cavity of uterus.
(Suggested by Mr.
Lionel Provis. )
EADIUM IN GYNECOLOGICAL PRACTICE 367
Time alone will show in which group of cases the larger percentage of cures
occurs. Further, radium and mesothorium methods may improve in
technique, and so improve the results. Up to now the hard ray only has
been most largely employed. The softer Alpha and soft Beta rays have all
been excluded by filtration. It is possible that by using emanation in
properly shaped and suitably sized glass tubes, which will allow the softer
rays to get through, a more favourable action may be induced.
Exposures of Radium in treatment of Cancer of the Cervix. — This is always
a matter of difficulty, the duration depending upon the object to be attained.
In all cases a filter of at least 1 mm. thick is necessary. An exposure of six
hours will lead to considerable reaction. This should slowly subside, and
cicatricial changes set in. When 2 mm. of platinum are used the exposure
will be proportionately longer, twelve to fifteen hours being necessary. In
advauced cases, where there is a considerable amount of ulceration, and the
radium tube can be placed in position completely surrounded by growth,
much longer exposures may be made ; twenty-four hours or more will result
in the breaking down of the ulcerated surfaces and the replacement of the
tumour tissue by fibrous tissue. In early cases it is well to proceed with
caution, giving small doses at frequent intervals, and carefully watching for
reaction and improvement. When the latter sets in it should be continued
by judiciously administered doses until the whole of the growth has dis-
appeared. When such a fortunate result is obtained, it is still necessary to
continue treatment with thicker filters, in order to reach the outlying portions
of growth. In the experience of several workers an apparent cure of the local
condition has been followed in a short period of time by involvement of the
deep pelvic glands, and a rapid development of these has led to the death
of the patient.
While radium does not appear to exercise any specific influence over
these growths, it is probable that if the radiations could be apphed in suffi-
cient intensity the growth might be mitigated. It is possible that the doses
given for the local condition may have exercised a stimulating effect upon
the more distant portions of the growth. In aU exposures the ruling factor
is the quantity of radium used. The doses suggested above are taken as
for 100 mgrms. in | mm. platinum tubes, and at least 1 mm. of silver. When
the I mm. tube alone is used, the exposures are proportionately less.
Treatment of Fibromata. — The technique described in the treatment
of these conditions by X-rays shows the type of case likely to derive
benefit from the treatment. The same types can be successfully treated by
radium, and the technique will depend upon the quantity of radium used.
The exposures may be made in four directions :
(1) Through the anterior abdominal wall.
(2) From the perineal aspect.
(3) Tubes can be introduced into the interior of the uterus and vagina.
(4) From the back.
The two agents may be combined : X-ray exposure should be made in
the usual way, and a radium tube or tubes introduced into the vagina and
368 EADIATION THEEAPEUTICS
left there for the necessary time. Mesothorium can be used instead of
radium, or to supplement its action when the quantity of the latter available
is not sufficient.
RADIUM IN SUPERFICIAL EPITHELIOMA AND
RODENT ULCER
These are numerous, and occur in many situations in the body. Super-
ficial, mildly-malignant epitheliomata yield readily to radium treatment,
a few exposures of several hours' duration to a case of this kind ending in a
heahng of the surface. Such cases, however, yield quite as readily to X-ray
treatment. The vegetating cutaneous epithelioma comes under this heading.
Under this head it is well also to include the most common of all superficial
lesions — the rodent ulcer.
Early cases are readily influenced by treatment. They quickly heal,
but prophylactic doses should be given after the ulcer has healed. If the
condition is quite superficial the filtration need not be great. The Beta
rays appear to exercise a profound change in these cases. After healing has
taken place filtered doses should be used to reach the deeper parts. Even
after thorough prophylactic treatment recurrences are apt to follow at longer
or shorter intervals, but frequently respond to further treatment. All cases
treated should be kept under observation for a considerable time in order
that an early stage of the recurrence may be observed and promptly treated.
When the ulcer is large and involves bone and cartilage the prospect of
a cure is not so good. Most complete and powerful dosage may fail to check
the progress of the disease. These cases may even be stimulated by radium
treatment, and increase rapidly in size. In such cases it is better to combine
surgical measures, such as scraping or excision, with radium treatment.
Several cases so treated have healed and remained well. These occur in
many situations, but most commonly on the face, at the angle of the mouth,
and on the outer or inner margin of the orbit. Many of these heal readily,,
and remain healed ; others heal, only to break down after a more or less
lengthy interval. Recurrences may be treated as they occur.
There are several methods of treatment for this condition :
(1) Short exposure to radium, with practically no screening. A marked
reaction may be induced, which may end in ulceration if the exposure has
been unduly prolonged. When this subsides, the ulcer heals and a healthy
scar results.
(2) Long exposures with thick filters of 2 or more millimetres of lead.
The Gamma ray is almost exclusively employed in this manner.
(3) Combined X-ray and radium exposures.
It has been observed that a case which fails to respond to radium
may respond to X-rays of a hard type, and vice versa. This is contrary to
the opinion expressed by several authorities, who maintain that a case which
has failed to improve under radium treatment will fail to do so under X-rays.
PLATE LXIII. — EoDENT Ulcers Treated with Radium and X-Rats.
a, Rodent ulcer of upper lip, showing rapid improvement under combined X-rays and radium treatment.
h. Rodent ulcer of side of nose which rapidly healed after radium had been applied. The ulcer re-
appeared after about nine months, but again quickly healed after further treatment.
RADIUM IN RODENT ULCER 369
Some assert that a case which has not benefited from X-rays, and which has
had prolonged X-ray treatment, fails to show improvement when treated by
radium. Others say that radium invariably heals such cases.
In the experience of the writer, cases respond to X-rays and radium
according to the state of activity of the ulcer at the time of treatment. The
ulcer which has failed to improve with radium will sometimes clear up in a
remarkable manner when subjected to a long exposure of hard, well-filtered
X-rays.
The explanation of the conflicting opinions probably lies in the fact that
it is a particular type of hardness of radiation which is necessary for the
therapeutic effect, and when this type is available, it matters not whether it
is produced by X-rays, radium, or any other radioactive body. In many
of the cases treated which do not improve, or get rapidly worse, we have not
been using the correct ray, or, if we have done so, the exposure has been too
short to produce the effect which should result in healing. This is probably
the explanation of the conflicting results obtained by many workers.
Ulcers situated near the orbit, nasal cavities, or angle of the mouth
require modifications in the treatment. Near the orbit, care must be exercised
that the eyeball and conjunctiva are not injured. When it has become
involved by the growth, it is better to remove it and thoroughly scrape the
surrounding tissues. The following types of rodent ulcer have been treated
with more or less success :
Superficial epitheliomata of the side of the face, a thin mdespread
superficial growth without ulceration. This type readily responds. Some
of these cases are surrounded by nodules, which generally disappear slowly
but surely. The common situation is the malar area. The lateral aspect
of the nose is another area which is often affected, the ulcer tending to
spread into the orbit. For both these types the flat appHcators with very
light screen are advocated at the commencement of treatment ; later the
thicker filters should be employed. Ulcers which tend to extend downwards
into the tissues and spread locally are more difiicult to deal with. Such
ulcers are very apt to recur after treatment is stopped ; deep filtration
should be employed in these cases. When cartilage and bone are involved,
the cases do not yield so easily. Prophylactic treatment should be carried
out for some time after an apparent cure, in the hope that a recurrence may
be prevented.
In regard to the practical application of radium to this latter type of case,
it may be claimed that when the growth is not very mahgnant, radium should
be given a good trial ; the percentage of cures obtained compares favourably
with the percentage obtained in cases which are operated upon. The results
are better than those obtained by operation, in that the scar is soft and pfiant.
The convenience of application and the freedom from pain and discomfort
are also factors in favour of radium treatment. When time is of value and
aesthetic considerations of no great moment, the operative method gives
a speedier result. Surgical measures may be profitably combined with
radium treatment. Excision or scraping of the actual growth and after
24
370 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
treatment by radium mil often give a better result than when radium alone
is used.
RADIUM IN INFILTRATING EPITHELIOMA
These occur in the preauricular and other regions. They show peri-
pheral inflammatory changes with a thickened edge. They tend to heal
spontaneously in parts of the surface. The treatment in these cases must
be rigorous. Deep penetrating rays should be tried after superficial healing
has taken place, and a number of prophylactic doses should be given. An
obstinate variety of this class is found in or round the auricle, and frequently
inside the meatus. Radium tubes may be introduced into the auricle and
left there, marked inflammatory reaction being necessary before any improve-
ment can be expected.
Epithelioma are also met with inside the nose and on the temple. A
form very difficult to deal with successfully is the type met with at the junc-
tion of skin and mucous membrane. Because of the mixed character of the
cutaneous surfaces the growth presents two aspects for treatment, that
involving the skin on one side and the mucous membrane on the other.
The eyelid is occasionally the seat of these growths. Care must be
taken to protect the organ of sight. Screens of lead with lint underneath
are required, and great care must be taken to ensure correct apposition of
the radium to the ulcer. Epithelioma of the nasal mucous membrane is a
form commonly met with, and one in which it is extremely difficult to
secure healing which will be permanent.
A complete excision of the spreading edge and subsequent thorough
prophylactic treatment are measures which commend themselves to the
rational-minded radium therapist. A large percentage of these cases go
from bad to worse, in spite of the most vigorous radium treatment. They
may, however, heal up for a time, but only to break down again. It is only
proper, however, to point out that a number of these cases have been operated
on, and repeated recurrences developed. Operative measures to be success-
ful must be thorough.
Glandular enlargement when present must be very thoroughly treated.
Such enlarged glands yield very slowly to treatment when they are un-
doubtedly malignant. Some cases of undoubted carcinoma of the tonsil or
breast, with many enlarged glands, have been successfully treated. It must
be borne in mind that, when glands appear and rapidly enlarge in cases where
the primary growth is in a situation where a mixed infection is possible,
a part of the enlargement may be due to an inflammatory process super-
added to the malignant. Such cases rapidly yield to radium treatment.
After a growth has disappeared under radium, it is important to continue
the applications for a considerable time, at regular intervals, in the hope that
recurrence may be prevented. The area immediately surrounding the
growth should receive thorough irradiation, and also the area of lymphatic
drainage.
RADIUM IN CANCER 371
RADIUM IN SARCOMATA AND CARCINOMATA
These, on account of their greater extent, deeper infiltration, and more
rapid growth are classed among the actively malignant group. The growth
may begin in the same situations as the preceding, and are often at the
commencement indistinguishable from the less malignant. It is on this
account that the need for early operation as an alternative to radium therapy
must be well borne in mind. Such cases frequently fail to respond favour-
ably to radium, and a percentage take on a more rapid growth as a conse-
quence of the stimulating effect of the treatment. Treatment must be pushed
rapidly to the extreme limit, and if the response is not equally rapid and
successful then the question of operative measures must be at once considered.
Sarcomata. — The round-celled variety seems to be the type of growth
most readily influenced by radium. Large tumours may gradually diminish
in size, smaller growths disappear, while secondary glands also clear up.
The spindle-celled variety is not so readily dealt with, possibly because it is
a more active type of growth. When the mediastinum is involved, exposures
may be made over the sternum and ribs in the hope that the disease may be
checked. The insertion of tubes containing radium into the tumour mass
is the most practical method of treatment. Several tubes may be inserted
at points equidistant, in order that the radiations may be equally distributed
throughout the growth. The exposure depends upon the quantity of radium
used, the size and type of the growth, and the filtration employed. In a
large tumour, a tube containing 50 mgrms., with -5 mm. filter may be left
in situ for twenty-four hours.
When the growth is large, several tubes introduced at equal distances
from one another may be left for the same time. In any particular case
when, after the first exposure, no marked necrotic changes have resulted,
the treatment should be repeated, and, if necessary, the exposure may be
considerably prolonged until the desired result is obtained. When the
exposure has been accurately estimated, the tumour slowly subsides without
any necrosis. This is the ideal method of treatment, but it frequently
happens that the correct exposure has not been given, and either no change
is induced and the growth increases in size, or it becomes necrotic, and slough-
ing takes place. This latter change may in time be followed by a healing
of the ulcerated surfaces. An attempt should always be made to treat the
outlying edges of the growth and the surrounding healthy tissues. Pro-
phylactic treatment should be continued for several months after healing
has resulted.
Recurrent sarcoma may be treated by external applications of radium,
several cases so treated having cleared up and these still remain well. The
quantity of radium used should be as large as possible, 200 or 300 mgrms. in
platinum tubes, with 2 to 3 mm. filter of lead and about twelve layers of lint
between the radium and the skin surface. The area to be treated may be
divided into several portions, and an exposure of twenty-four hours given
to each.
372 RADIATION THERAPEUTICS
Cancer of the Breast, — This class of cases forms a large percentage
of those sent for radium treatment.
Secondary deposits may be met with in the glands of the axillary and
supraclavicular regions. These may be treated at the same time as the
primary growth. Secondary deposits in the cartilage of the ribs or sternum
may also require treatment. Prolonged exposures to large quantities of
well-filtered radium have in several instances led to a diminution in the size
of the growth.
The rapidly growing columnar- celled carcinomata may be treated with
a measure of success. Tubes containing radium should be buried in the
growth, and left for long periods. A diminution of the growth may be
looked for, but the prospect of a cure is extremely remote. Less rapidly
growing cases are more amenable to treatment. The atrophic scirrhus
cancer is the most favourable type for treatment. In some cases a necrotic
action can be induced, and the subsequent ulcer gradually heals. Glands
should be treated at the same time, and after healing has taken place, pro-
phylactic treatment should be carried out for a considerable time.
Cancer en Cuirasse. — This variety often responds well, for a time at
least. Enlarged glands, which may be inflammatory in character, are a
frequent seat of late involvement. This is probably the result of direct
spread by means of the lymphatic stream. An inflamed gland offers a suit-
able soil for the development of cancerous cells. Radium, by inducing
fibrosis, tends to seal up the new growth, and so prevent its spread.
Partial success in dealing with these conditions may lead to a prolonged
quiescent stage, which may resume active growth later. The object of the
prophylactic treatment is to prevent this late recurrence.
Recurrent Cancer. — Secondary growths involving cartilage and bone
appear after amputation of the breast. Several cases of this class have been
treated with marked success, with radium applied in large quantities for
long periods, care being taken to protect the skin. A fairly-marked skin
reaction may be obtained after long exposure to filtered radium, this slowly
subsiding and resulting in no permanent damage.
Recurrence after operation frequently requires treatment. Small
nodules readily respond, and often entirely disappear. Enlarged glands are
reduced in size. Radium applicators may be used directly over particular
glands or groups of glands with a fair measure of success. In a number
of cases, where there is a possibility of doing good, radium tubes may
be inserted into the recurrent mass.
Radium, in the treatment of diseases of the breast, should be strictly
confined to cases which for some reason are unsuitable for operation. Early
cases might be treated, were it possible to place complete reliance upon
radium as a curative agent. Cases have been treated, and have done well,
but in the present state of our knowledge it is impossible to give radium the
first place in the choice of a remedy. In all cases of early cancer the opera-
tive method is undoubtedly the best ; it is quicker, safer, and offers the best
prospect of a cure. It must, however, be stated that X-rays are, in selected
PLATE LXIV.— Eectjreent Caecinoma after Eemoval of Breast.
«, Recurrence in scar after operation for carcinoma of the breast, treated wholly by X-rays.
h, Recurrence in scar involving steinum and ribs after oj)eration for removal of carcinoma, treated with
radium, jjrolonged exposures with 200 nigrnis. of radium filtered through 3 mm. of lead.
KADIUM IN CANCER
373
cases, quite as useful as radium. In patients who refuse operation, or are
for other reasons not suitable for operation, radium is a useful remedy. In
inoperable cases radium may help to render the case operable, and failing
that it is undoubtedly useful as a palliative measure.
When a large tumour of the inoperable type has to be treated, it is
useful to combine X-rays with radium. The former can be used to irradiate
rapidly the tumour area and the lymphatics draining it, and after a time,
when the tumour has subsided, radium tubes may be introduced into the
substance of the growth and left in situ for two days, or longer if necessary.
The treatment results in considerable shrinkage in the size of the tumour,
and it is quite possible to render an inoperable case operable.
The classification of cases for radium treatment is similar to that given
under X-ray therapeutics.
RADIUM IN CANCER OF THE TONGUE AND MOUTH
This condition is frequently sent for radium treatment. Tubes may
be buried in the growth, and benefit is occasionally obtained, though in
Fig. 241. — Radium tube arranged for the treatment of the floor of the mouth. (Siemens.
JV shows applicator in protective material with handle. 0, radium tube. F, rubber filter.
Q, protective material. |